TAC I/NET

Seven

Operator Guide

I/NET® Seven System

Front Cover

TCON299–05/10
We at Schneider Electric have tried to make the information contained in this manual as
accurate and reliable as possible. Nevertheless, Schneider Electric disclaims any warranty of
any kind, whether express or implied, as to any matter whatsoever relating to this manual,
including without limitation the merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.
Information in this document is based on specifications determined at the time of publica-
tion. As we introduce design enhancements, we reserve the right to make changes in speci-
fications and models without obligation to notify the purchaser. In no event shall Schneider
Electric be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out
of purchase or use of this manual or the information contained herein.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondis-
closure agreement. The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms
of the agreement. It is against the law to copy Schneider Electric software onto magnetic
tape, disk, or any other medium for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal use.
Printed in the United States of America.
Document Number: TCON299–05/10

Copyright  2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

On October 1st, 2009, TAC became the Buildings business of its parent company Schneider
Electric. This document reflects the visual identity of Schneider Electric; however, there
remains references to TAC as a corporate brand in the body copy. As each document is
updated, the body copy will be changed to reflect appropriate corporate brand changes.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. iii

TCON299–05/10
Use of Third Party Software

Schneider Electric software is delivered for use on IBM and compatible PCs. While your PC
is capable of running other third-party software while running TAC I/NET Seven, trying to
do so may present general operational difficulties. This is particularly true if the third-party
software is memory-resident. When used as it is intended, the Schneider Electric software
is also memory-resident. The use of more than one memory-resident program at the same
time may impose unresolvable PC system parameter conflicts and may cause one or more
of the memory-resident programs to fail.
No computer system is immune to software viruses, and they can be extremely damaging
should they attack databases and/or operating programs. Such an attack on the TAC I/NET
system may be particularly damaging since its database output is directed toward control.
The only absolute safeguard against viral attack is to prevent any third-party software from
being installed on the same computer with the Schneider Electric software. An acceptable
safeguard is to allow only authorized operators to run third party software and to make sure
that all such software is original, direct from a reputable vendor, and that the software has
not been copied from some other machine: i.e., if the seal is broken, don’t use it.
Schneider Electric makes no claims or commitments regarding the use of any third-party
software, other than MS-DOS® and Windows® Server 2003/XP/Vista/7 in conjunction with
the PC programs supplied by Schneider Electric, and offers no support in accommodating
the use of same. Furthermore, Schneider Electric accepts no liability for system failures that
may result from the use of any third-party software with Schneider Electric software.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. v

TCON299–05/10
Contents

Chapter 1 TAC I/NET Seven Basics

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
File Names and Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Selecting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Toolbar Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Highlighting an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Grayed Out Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Text Fields and Spindials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Edit Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Buttons and Checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Message Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Drop-down Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Starting TAC I/NET Seven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Connecting to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Exiting TAC I/NET Seven. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
System Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Building an Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Creating a Controller Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Creating a UC, DPU, SCU, or MR Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. vii
TCON299–05/10
Forms and Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Controlling Window Layouts in TAC I/NET Seven . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Retrieving Obstructed Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Configuring User Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Configuring User Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Using the System View Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
The System View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
The Left-side Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
The Right-side Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Expanding and Collapsing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Using Drag and Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Displaying a Context-sensitive Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Print and Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Using Your Windows Login with TAC I/NET Seven . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Configuring I/NET Seven to Accept a User's Windows Logon . . . . . . . . 1-35
Logging In Using Your Windows Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Auto-launching TAC I/NET Seven at Startup . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Running I/O Server as a Windows Service . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Why Run I/O Server as a Windows Service? . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Configuring I/O Server to be a Windows Service . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Configuring I/O Server to Stop Being a Windows Service . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Manually Shutting Down IO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Stopping IO Server from Windows Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Stopping IO Server from the Windows System Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Stopping IO Server from the Windows Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Checking for the INetEqzMerge Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Manually Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service. . . . . . . . . . 1-51

viii © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Chapter 2 Setup and Network Configuration
TAC I/NET Seven Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Host Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Defining the Network Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Using System View to Configure Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Viewing Each Level of Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Displaying Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Refreshing the System View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Network Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Using NETCON to Configure Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Penetrating the Levels of Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Storing Network Configuration Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Network Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Adding a Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Adding a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Adding a Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Adding an MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Adding a Door Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Adding a Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Network Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
DCU Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Automatic DCU Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Special Day Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Special Day Broadcast Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Global Special Day Broadcast Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Broadcast Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Off Normal Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Disabled Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Database Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Chapter 3 Tap Configuration
Tap Configuration Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. ix

TCON299–05/10
 Tap Configuration . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Integrated Dial Function . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
78060 and 78061 Tap Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Site Tap Save / Restore . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Printer Tap . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Multiple Site Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Chapter 4 Controller Configuration

Controller Configuration/Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Configuring the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Controller Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Distribution Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Sunrise/Sunset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Daylight Savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Program Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Viewing Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Memory Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Database Last Changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Loading Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Firmware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Controller Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Editing the Database while Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Connecting Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Adding a .SAV File Offline . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Deleting a .SAV File Offline . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Copying a .SAV File Offline . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Station Save and Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Station Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Station Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Station Restore on a DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Station Restore on a DPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
The Memory Interface Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Software Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

x © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 Performing a Software Restore to Taps and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Performing a Software Restore to DPUs and SCUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Dynamic Data Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Defining and Entering Station Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Entering the Station Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Control Descriptions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
State Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Conversion Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Pop-up Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Engineering Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Chapter 5 Point Definition and Addressing
Adding Points to Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Modifying Points in Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Copying Points in Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Deleting Points from Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Sorting Points in Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Input/Output and Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tips for Point Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Chapter 6 System Messages
AMT Menus and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
AMT Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Alarm Colors and Archive Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Image Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Relay Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Audible Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Message/Alarm and Printer Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Managing Windows in AMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xi

TCON299–05/10
 Opening a New AMT Window . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Alarm Window . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Event Window . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Predefined Windows . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Closing an AMT window . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Arranging multiple windows . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Cascading Windows . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Tiled Windows . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Printing Messages . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Changing the Window Display . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Pausing the Message Update . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Column Width. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Window Options . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Alarm Windows. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Acknowledging an Alarm . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Purging Alarms . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Silence Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Dispatch Strings Library . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Event Windows . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Text Library . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Creating a Text Entry . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Modifying a Text Entry . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Copying a Text Entry . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Deleting a Text Entry . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Image Verification . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Activating Image Verification . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
De-activating Automatic Image Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Event Archive Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Performing Event Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

xii © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 Triggered Archives . . . .
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Automatic . . . . . .
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Confirmed . . . . .
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Manual Archives . . . . .
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Opening an Event Archive .
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
CCTV in AMT . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
CCTV Message Timestamps . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Opening the AMT Video Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Viewing the Selected Event’s Captured Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Viewing Live Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Searching Captured Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Chapter 7 Summaries
Controller Summary .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Controlling a Point . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Test Mode . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Manual Mode . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Point Acknowledge .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Release . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Reset Anti-passback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Zooming to a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Sorting the Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Off Normal Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Disabled Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Configuration Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Host Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Link Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Station Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
UC Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
MR Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
DPU Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Door Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xiii

TCON299–05/10
Page Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Chapter 8 System Pages

The Graphics Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Working with System Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Creating a New System Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Editing an Existing System Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Exiting the Graphics Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
TAC I/NET 4.x Graphic Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Working with Graphic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Deselecting Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Deleting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Positioning Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Copying Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Resizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Mouse Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
System Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Importing Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Printing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Address Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
View Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Graphics Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Page Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Window Backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Displaying Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Edit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

xiv © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Lock/Unlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Clear All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Select Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Library Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Rounded Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Pie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Free Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Arrange Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Bring to Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Send to Back. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Step Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Step Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xv
TCON299–05/10
 Alignment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Coordinates Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Pen and Fill Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Pen Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Pen Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Pen Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Fill Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Fill Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Text Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Text Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Back Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Center Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Left Align Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Right Align Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Auto Word Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Auto Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
I/NET Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Connecting to Multiple Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Digital Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Analog Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Door Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Adding Point Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Extension Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Adding DDC Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Adding DDC Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Page Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
Adding Page Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
Using Page Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Adding Multiple Site Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Adding a Graphic Dial Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Dialing from a Graphic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Disconnecting From a Dial Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Adding ASC Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
xvi © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
TCON299–05/10
 Adding Tool Markers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Adding CCTV Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Live System Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Viewing Live System Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Viewing another Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Setting a Default System Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Icons and Editor Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Replacing Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Chapter 9 Passwords
Host Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Adding a Host Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Station Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Tenant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Individual Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
DCU Password Preassignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Indirect User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Limited-access Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Example: A Medical Center with Three Access-controlled Labs . . . . . 9-17
Implementing and Using this Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Printing a Host Password Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Searching for a Host Operator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Deleting a Host Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Modifying a Host Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Copying a Host Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Printing a Host Passwords Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Assigning Controller Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
DCU Password Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
DCU Password Recover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xvii

TCON299–05/10
Chapter 10 Dynamic Control
Time Scheduling (TS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Adding a Point Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Adding an Independent or a Master Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Adding a Slave Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Modifying a Point Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Copying a Point Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Deleting a Point Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Adding a Host Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Modifying a Host Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Copying a Host Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Deleting a Host Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Special Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Adding Special Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Modifying Special Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Deleting Special Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Temperature Control (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Adding a Temperature Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Modifying a Temperature Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Copying a Temperature Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Deleting a Temperature Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Demand Control (DC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Adding a Demand Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Modifying a Demand Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Copying a Demand Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Deleting a Demand Control Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Auto Report Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Adding an Auto Report Generation Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

xviii © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Chapter 11 Calculations
Calculations (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Adding a Calculated Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Modifying a Calculated Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Copying a Calculated Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Deleting a Calculated Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Chapter 12 Trending
Trend Sampling (TR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Adding Trend Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Modifying Trend Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Copying Trend Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Deleting Trend Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Trend Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Multi-Point Trend Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Defining a Multi-Point Trend Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Adding a Plot Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Modifying a Plot Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Copying a Plot Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Deleting a Plot Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Trend Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Displaying a Multi-Point Trend Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Trend Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Deleting a Trend Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Chapter 13 Distributed Control
Consumption (CN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Adding a Consumption Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Modifying a Consumption Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Copying a Consumption Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Deleting a Consumption Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xix

TCON299–05/10
Runtime (RT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Adding a Runtime Point Extension . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Modifying a Runtime Point Extension . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Copying a Runtime Point Extension . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Deleting a Runtime Point Extension . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Alarm Inhibit (AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Adding an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Modifying an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Copying an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Deleting an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Event Definition (EV). . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Adding an Event Definition Point Extension . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Modifying an Event Definition Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Copying an Event Definition Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Deleting an Event Definition Point Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Event Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Adding an Event Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Modifying an Event Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Copying an Event Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Deleting an Event Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Event Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Adding an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Modifying an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Copying an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Deleting an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Configuring Event Printing on a Host Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
Chapter 14 Direct Digital Control
Accessing the DDC Module Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Two Position Module (2-Pos). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Proportional, Integral, Derivative Module (PID) . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

xx © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
P-only Mode of Operation
Floating Module (Float) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Reset Module (Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
HiLo Module (HiLo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Relay Module (Relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Manual Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Input/Output Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Automatic Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Helpful Hints for DDC Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24

Chapter 15 Lighting Control

Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Adding a Lighting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Circuit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Wink Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Modifying a Lighting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Deleting a Lighting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Copying a Lighting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Lighting Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Adding a Lighting Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Circuit Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Automatic Time Schedule (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Modifying a Lighting Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Deleting a Lighting Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Copying Lighting Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Chapter 16 Unitary Control
Configuring the Unitary Controller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Configuring the Unitary Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xxi

TCON299–05/10
Creating the UCI Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
The Parent Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
UC Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Activating the New UC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Unitary Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
VAV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Delays and Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
AHU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Delays and Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
HPMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Delays and Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
DDC Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
PID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Float (FLT) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
UC Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22

xxii © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Chapter 17 Access Control
Access Control Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Access Control Order of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Recycle Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Restoring Records from the Recycle Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Purging Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
DPU/MCU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Adding a Door Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Mode Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19
User-defined Door Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22
Sounder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-27
Modifying a Door Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29
Copying a Door Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29
Deleting a Door Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-30
Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-30
Personnel Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-31
Adding a Personnel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-32
Modifying a Personnel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36
Copying a Personnel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36
Copy All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-37
Deleting a Personnel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-37
Shift Rotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38
Adding a Shift Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38
Modifying a Shift Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-40
Copying a Shift Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-40
Deleting a Shift Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-41
Elevators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-41
Adding an Elevator Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-42
Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43
Key/Card Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-47

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xxiii

TCON299–05/10
 Adding a Key/Card Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-48
Modifying a Key/Card Translation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-49
Deleting a Key/Card Translation .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-49
Tenants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-50
Adding a New Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-51
Modifying Tenant Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-53
Copying Tenant Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-53
Deleting a Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-54
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-55
Adding an Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-57
Modifying an Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-62
Copying an Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-62
Deleting an Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-63
Individuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-63
Adding an Individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-65
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-78
Field Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-80
Allocate Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-81
Copying an Individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-84
Deleting an Individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-85
PIN Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-86
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-87
Individual Activity Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-92
Access Initiated Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-94
Add Access Initiated Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-96
Modifying Access Initiated Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-101
Copying Access Initiated Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-101
Deleting Access Initiated Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-101
User Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-102
SCU Tamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-103
SCU Tamper Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-104

xxiv © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 Editing Tamper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-104
Chapter 18 Intrusion Alarm System
Intrusion Alarm System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
System Sensor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Adding a System Status Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Adding a Common Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Delaying ARC Notification of EPS Fault Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Overriding a Point’s Not-ready Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
IAS Access Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Arming Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Intrusion Alarm System Dial Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
Overriding a Point's Not-ready Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20

Chapter 19 Override Billing

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Override Billing Extension Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Override Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Override Access Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Equipment Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Entering Override Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Distribution Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
End of Override Notice Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Equipment Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Adding Access Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Adding Equipment Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Chapter 20 7771 Industrial Controller Interface
Configuring the 7771 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Points and Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xxv

TCON299–05/10
Chapter 21 Micro Regulator Control
Configuring the Interface Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Creating the MR Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
MR Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Configuring the Micro Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
MR-Resident DDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Adding an MR-resident DDC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
Deleting an MR-resident Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
Modifying an MR-resident DDC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Copying an MR-resident DDC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Standalone ATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Hardware Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
MR (I/STAT) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Button Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
Inactivity Timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
LED Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
Chapter 22 Application Specific Controllers
Displaying ASC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Modifying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Modifying ASC Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Copying ASC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Saving and Restoring ASC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Updating the Interface Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
Updating the ASC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8

Chapter 23 I/SITE LCD Page

Defining the I/SITE LCD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Adding an LCD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Deleting an LCD Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Modifying an LCD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
xxvi © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
TCON299–05/10
 Copying an LCD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Chapter 24 SevenTrends
Sequence of Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Configuring the DCU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Defining Trends and Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Modifying Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7
Modifying Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7
Deleting Trends and Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8
Configuring the Host Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
Archiving SevenTrends Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
Performing Trend Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
Managing SevenTrends Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13
Dynamic Data Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-16
Index

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. xxvii

TCON299–05/10
xxviii © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

1
52
TAC I/NET Seven Basics

About This Manual

This Operator Guide provides the step-by-step requirements for
entering data and navigating through the TAC I/NET Seven
program. For detailed information about theory of operation and
programming the system refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven
Technical Reference Guide.
This operator guide follows a standard screen notation and style
indicating keystrokes, cursor movement, navigation, and data
entry specific to TAC I/NET Seven. TAC I/NET Seven software is
intended to be used primarily with a mouse. However, you may use
keyboard equivalents as indicated below.

File Names and Menu Commands

File names appear in this manual as they appear on the screen of
your computer. To further identify them as files, they appear as
uppercase, italicized letters with any file extensions included. For
instance, the configuration file used by your computer upon start
up is shown as CONFIG.SYS.
Menu selections are shown in bold with initial capitalization as in
Edit. A menu item with the arrow symbol () indicates another
menu level.

Keystrokes
Keystrokes are shown in bold surrounded by square brackets. For
example, the Y key is shown as [Y], and the Enter key is shown as
[Enter].

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-1

TCON299–05/10
About This Manual TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Standard Keys
Certain standard keys are used within the TAC I/NET Seven
program to perform certain system functions within editors,
message boxes, etc. These are the [Enter], [Esc], [Tab], and Up and
Down Arrow keys.
[Enter] Key
The [Enter] key is used to accept or activate a function, typically a
highlighted button.
[Esc] Key
The [Esc] key is used to cancel an action or editor. You may use the
[Esc] key to backup from successive levels of windows until you
return to the main TAC I/NET Seven window.
[Tab] Key
The [Tab] key is used to cycle through the available active buttons
or entry fields in an editor or screen.
Up/Down Arrows
The Up and Down Arrows can move the highlighted selection from
one item to another in the various list, drop-down, and combo
boxes found in the editors.

Selecting Items
Click the left mouse button once to select an icon under the
pointer, a menu selection on the menu bar, a button, a checkbox,
or list item in an editor or dialog box.
You can also use the keyboard to select menu items or buttons on
an editor or message box.
Menu Selection
Selecting a function from the menu bar can be done with the
mouse or with the keyboard. When you select a menu item, the
associated editor appears in a separate window, or a subordinate
menu level drops down. You may then select another menu item
from the subordinate menu.

1-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics About This Manual

When this manual provides a menu selection, the beginning and

end of the path is shown. For instance, if you are to select the Seven-
Trends definition function from the main menu, you would read
the following text:
Select Edit  Host Computer  SevenTrends  Definitions.
Using the Mouse
To select SevenTrends Definitions from the menu with a mouse,
place the arrow on Edit and click once using the left mouse button.
Select Host Computer, click once. Select SevenTrends and click
once (a menu item with the symbol  indicates another menu level
is available). Select Definitions and click once (see Figure 1-1). The
editor associated with the menu item appears.

Figure 1-1. Menu Selection

Using the Keyboard

You may select a menu item from the menu bar by pressing [Alt]
and then pressing the underlined letter of that item. For instance,
to select Edit from the main menu, press [Alt], and then press [E].
To select an item from a subordinate menu level using keystrokes,
simply type the initial letter of the item. If there are more than one
menu items in a level with the same initial letter, pressing the letter
again will select the next menu item with the same initial letter.
Press [Enter] to open that editor.
Either method provides the same results, and they may be used
interchangeably.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-3

TCON299–05/10
About This Manual TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Toolbar Selection
Many menus have a toolbar option, that allows you to display the
menu selections as a series of buttons at the top of the screen.
Clicking on the appropriate button produces the same effect as
selecting the item from the menu.
Each command available on the toolbar is represented by a button.
Each button has an icon (picture) on it, which relates to the corre-
sponding menu command.
To determine which command is represented by a particular
button, position the cursor over the button without clicking any
mouse buttons. After a few seconds, a tooltip appears, giving the
name of the command represented by the button.
When you are directed to select a menu option that has a corre-
sponding toolbar button, a picture of the button is displayed in the
left margin, as shown Figure 1-2.

1. Select Connect.

Figure 1-2. Toolbar button and Equivalent Menu Option

Displaying Toolbars
To display a toolbar, select View Toolbars from the main menu,
then select the desired toolbar from the menu. Active toolbars will
have a check next to the toolbar name in this menu.
The toolbar appears in the toolbar section (gray area) at the top of
the TAC I/NET Seven screen. Each toolbar will have a border
around it.
To hide a toolbar, select the active (checked) toolbar from the
View Toolbars menu.
Arranging Toolbars
The toolbar may be “docked” on any edge of the TAC I/NET Seven
screen, or even placed as a separate toolbox in the main section of
the TAC I/NET Seven screen. When you dock the toolbar on an

1-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics About This Manual

edge of the screen, the toolbar area (gray shading) will automati-
cally expand to allow room for all of the toolbars docked at that
edge.
To move the toolbar, place the cursor in the area between the
buttons and the border of the toolbar. Press and hold the mouse
button, and drag the toolbar to the desired location. A dotted
border shows the progress of the move. Release the mouse button
to place the toolbar.
✦ Drag the toolbar into the middle of the TAC I/NET Seven
screen to create a separate toolbar on the screen. This toolbar
may be minimized into the taskbar if desired.
✦ Drag the toolbar to any edge of the TAC I/NET Seven screen
to dock the toolbar on that edge.
✦ Drag the toolbar around the existing toolbar area to rearrange
the open toolbars as desired.
As you move the toolbar, the dotted border changes shape to show
the result of the move. For example, if you are moving the toolbar
from the top to the side, the shape will change to a vertical rectangle
to show the new orientation.
Depending on the location of the dotted border when you release
the mouse button, the toolbar may adjust its position.
✦ The toolbar will automatically move up/down and left/right
as necessary to sit squarely on the designated toolbar line.
✦ The direction of movement is determined by the location of
the horizontal and vertical center of the toolbar; it will move
in the direction that contains the majority of the toolbar.
✦ If you drag the toolbar on top of another toolbar, it will adjust
its position to be next to the other toolbar — you cannot stack
toolbars on top of one another. The direction of movement
will depend on the relative positions of the toolbar centers
(i.e., the toolbar whose center is to the left of the other
toolbar’s center will end up on the left).
Highlighting an Item
To highlight an item, place the arrow on the item and click the left
mouse button once. The text in any of the editable or selectable
fields, or on a menu under the arrow will be highlighted.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-5

TCON299–05/10
About This Manual TAC I/NET Seven Basics

If you want to use the keyboard after you have selected a list,
drop-down, or combo box, you can select the items in it by pressing
the up or down arrow on your keyboard. To select buttons in an
editor you may do so by pressing the [Tab] key. Each time you press
[Tab] the next button will be selected. A selected button has a
slightly heavier outline around it. To activate the button or item
from a list, press [Enter].
Entering Data
Entering data depends upon the type of data entry box. Edit fields
and combo boxes allow you to select the field and enter or replace
text with what you type. Refer to “Screen Display” below for a
description of the various data display and entry methods.

Screen Display
At the bottom of the main TAC I/NET Seven window is a status bar
that displays system information. This information includes the
connection path, the current operator initials and the host time
and date (see Figure 1-3).

Figure 1-3. Screen Display

The connection path displays, from left to right, the number of the
host, the initials of the signed-on operator in parentheses, and the
connected link. Any subsequent automatic or manual connections
to links, LANs, or controllers are also displayed by device name,
address, and assigned name on this line. Points are displayed by
point address and assigned name on this line.
At the bottom of every editor is a static text field that displays a
basic message prompting you to enter or select items pertaining to
the selected field. Figure 1-4 shows the Door Editor prompting you
to enter a value of 8 or 9 for the door address.

1-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics About This Manual

Figure 1-4. Door Editor Prompt

Grayed Out Selections

On occasion you will encounter menu selections or buttons that
are grayed out instead of being displayed in their normal colors.
This indicates that the selection is not valid for this particular situ-
ation. Sometimes, selecting an item in an editor will cause a grayed
out item to become valid. You may then select the item.
Screens
Context-sensitive, online help is available. Click the Help button,
usually located at the bottom, right corner of the window or dialog
box. This will access information specific to the editor or dialog
box.
Text Fields and Spindials
A static text field is a box containing text from the TAC I/NET
Seven system that you cannot directly edit (see Figure 1-5).

Figure 1-5. Static Text Field

The information displayed may also be associated with a spindial as

shown in Figure 1-6. In this case there is more than one item that
may be displayed. A static text field with a spindial allows you to
select an option or value. Place the pointer over the up or down
arrow and click once to display a different value or option. The item
displayed will be selected when you click OK.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-7

TCON299–05/10
About This Manual TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Figure 1-6. Static Text Field with Spindial

Edit Fields
Edit fields are boxes within a dialog or editor box that require you
to enter text. An example of this is shown in Figure 1-7, where the
Host Password editor contains an edit field allowing you to search
for a user name.

Figure 1-7. Edit Field

An edit field may also be associated with a spindial. In that case you
may either use the spindial to set the value, or type it in directly (see
Figure 1-8).

Figure 1-8. Edit Field with spindial

Buttons and Checkboxes

Buttons, radio buttons, and checkboxes let you select functions or
options in the editors and message boxes. Position your arrow
cursor over the button or checkbox and click once.
Buttons
Buttons generally perform either a system function or a program
function when clicked. An example of system buttons are the OK
and Cancel buttons (see Figure 1-9).

Figure 1-9. System Buttons

1-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics About This Manual

Program functions can either be confined to a single editor, or

repeated in several editors. Figure 1-10 shows the Add, Delete, and
Copy buttons. These buttons are repeated in several editors.

Figure 1-10. Program Buttons

Radio Buttons
A radio button is a button in a series. Only one of the buttons may
be chosen or activated at a time. When you place your pointer over
a deactivated radio button and click on it, the previous radio
button automatically deactivates and the new button is activates.
Figure 1-11 shows a typical series of radio buttons.

Figure 1-11. Radio Buttons

Checkboxes
A checkbox shows whether an item is active or not. When it is acti-
vated, a checkmark appears in the box (see Figure 1-12). More than

Figure 1-12. Checkbox

one checkbox can be active in a group, as in a message mask, shown

in Figure 1-13 .

Figure 1-13. Message Mask Checkbox

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-9

TCON299–05/10
About This Manual TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Message Boxes
The message box presents a message or a request for confirmation
of an action. The message could be a warning that a procedure or
connection could not be completed, a caution that completing the
action will change system values or data, or information about
what is happening. In all cases, in order for you to proceed, you
must select a button in the message box. The button will either be
a Yes or a No, or some variation. (see Figure 1-14).

Figure 1-14. Message Box

List Boxes
The list box contains a list of items you can select. List boxes can be
fixed-width (i.e., the column width is set) or adjustable-width (i.e.,
you can change the width of the columns). Both types of list boxes
will display a scroll bar on the right-hand side if the number of
items is greater than can be displayed in the list box.
Fixed Width
In a fixed-width list box, the data is presented in columns, with no
grid lines. The columns are static text fields for you to select an
option: you cannot change the data. Position the pointer on the up
or down arrows and click to move the list one line in that direction.
You can also drag the scroll bar, or click in the scroll bar area to
move the list. (see Figure 1-15).
Adjustable Width
In an adjustable-width box, the data is presented in a table, with
grid lines (see Figure 1-16). The first column is always a static text
field, that you cannot change. Subsequent columns may be editable
or static, depending on the displayed screen.

1-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics About This Manual

Figure 1-15. Fixed-width List Box

Figure 1-16. Adjustable-width List Box

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-11

TCON299–05/10
About This Manual TAC I/NET Seven Basics

To adjust the width of a column:

1. Place your cursor on the line at the RIGHT edge of the field
title for the column you wish to resize. the cursor will change
to show a double-headed arrow (see Figure 1-17).

Cursor

Figure 1-17. Resizing a Column

In the example above, the Field Name field width is being

adjusted. To adjust the width of the Value field, the cursor
would have to be at the right edge of that field.
2. Click and hold the mouse button.
3. Move the cursor to change the location of the right edge of the
selected column. A faint line follows the cursor movement,
displaying the column width that will result.
✧ If you move the cursor to the left, the column will get
narrower.
✧ If you move the cursor to the right, the column will get
wider.
4. Release the mouse button to change the column width.
Drop-down Boxes
Drop-down boxes can consist of either a list box or a combo box.
The combo box allows you to enter text as well as select from the
items listed in the box.
To display the contents of the box position the pointer on the down
arrow located on the right of the box and click. Choose an item
from the list by placing the pointer over it and clicking, or by typing
a new item into the box (see Figure 1-18).

1-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Starting TAC I/NET Seven

Figure 1-18. Drop-Down Box

Starting TAC I/NET Seven

Refer to TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for informa-
tion on installing and configuring TAC I/NET Seven. After you
have completed the initial configuration, use the following proce-
dure to launch TAC I/NET Seven.
1. Select the Windows Start menu.
2. Select Programs  I/NET. The resulting menu is shown in
Figure 1-19. You will see several options in the menu.

Figure 1-19. Starting TAC I/NET Seven

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-13

TCON299–05/10
Starting TAC I/NET Seven TAC I/NET Seven Basics

3. Select I/NET. As TAC I/NET Seven launches, a balloon-style

message at the task bar informs you that the I/O Server is
starting the SQL service.

Figure 1-20. Starting the SQL Service

4. The TAC I/NET Seven program then starts and the Log On
Dialog box appears. Log onto TAC I/NET Seven as follows:
a. If your Windows user account has already been added to
TAC I/NET Seven's passwords, you can activate () the
Current Windows User checkbox. In this case, you can
jump to Step d below. Refer to “Configuring I/NET Seven
to Accept a User's Windows Logon” on page 1-35 for
instructions on adding Windows user accounts to TAC
I/NET Seven’s passwords.

Figure 1-21. Log On Prompt

b. Type your Operator Name. This name can contain up to

30 characters. The following characters cannot be used
within the Operator Name: " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >
c. Enter your password in the Host password field and
click OK. This password can contain up to 127 charac-
ters. All keyboard characters are valid for use within this
password.

1-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Connecting to the System

The default system password is “DACS.” If the system has

just been installed and no other host passwords have
been assigned, this default password should still be avail-
able. After host passwords have been assigned to all
authorized users, you may wish to remove the default
password to prevent unauthorized users from gaining
access.
The system displays an asterisk for each character you
type.
d. Select OK to continue.

Note: You can configure TAC I/NET Seven to allow operators to logon
simply by swiping their key/card at a Weigand reader connected
directly to the host workstation’s RS232 port. Refer to “Peripherals”
in the TAC I/NET Seven Configuration chapter of TCON298, TAC
I/NET Seven Getting Started, for more information.

Caution: The database server should not be shut down while TAC I/NET
Seven is running. Shutting down the database server drops all
existing connections to the database, and can result in corrupted data
displays. (Only users with administrative privileges on the worksta-
tion can stop or start the database server.)

When you’re ready to log off, select System  Log Off from the
main menu. TAC I/NET Seven can also automatically log you off
the system. If the Operator Timeout setting is greater than zero and
the Operator Timeout Action is set to Signoff or Both, automatic
log off will occur if the system times out. Refer to “Host Configu-
ration” on page 2-2 for more information about these options.

Connecting to the System

To access any part of the TAC I/NET Seven system, you have to
connect through links and Taps to controllers. Depending on your
configuration and system level, you may see different options
presented in the Connect dialog box.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-15

TCON299–05/10
Connecting to the System TAC I/NET Seven Basics

1. After logging on, select Connect from the main menu. The
system displays the Connect summary (see Figure 1-22).

Figure 1-22. Connect Summary

When you first select Connect from the TAC I/NET Seven
main menu, the connection process displays a list of up to 100
Links. A Link address (0–99) and Link name is displayed for
each item in the list.
Each link can represent either a physical hardware device (i.e.,
a Tap or an NPR) or a distributed link (i.e., a collection of up
to 64 NPRs that share the same link address). Distributed
links can be recognized as such by their name. For each
distributed link. the list displays the generic name “DLA Link
#”, followed by the link number, (for example, “DLA Link
#28”). Refer to the System Configuration chapter in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a
complete description of “Link Support” within TAC I/NET
Seven.
2. Highlight a link in the list box and select OK to connect to the
link.

1-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Connecting to the System

3. To connect to the next level in the network, click Connect

again. If the link connects directly to a controller LAN, a
listing of available controllers, similar to that shown in
Figure 1-23, displays.

Figure 1-23. Connect — Controller Summary

4. Highlight a controller in the list box and select OK to connect

to the controller.

Note: Depending upon your network, you may have to connect to a Site,
before you can connect to a specific controller. Simply select the Site,
click OK and then click Connect again to display the list of available
controllers.

Disconnecting
When you exit TAC I/NET Seven you will automatically be discon-
nected from any controller. However, you may want to disconnect
from a controller without exiting the TAC I/NET Seven software.
To do so:
1. Select Disconnect from the menu, or click the Disconnect
tool on the toolbar.
2. You will have to disconnect from each level in the network.
For example, suppose you are connected to a controller on
link 10 and you want to connect to a controller on link 12.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-17

TCON299–05/10
Exiting TAC I/NET Seven TAC I/NET Seven Basics

You would disconnect once from the controller, and then

disconnect again from link 10. At that point you can connect
to link 12.

Exiting TAC I/NET Seven

You can end your TAC I/NET Seven session by selecting System 
Exit from the main menu, or by clicking on the button in the
upper right corner of the TAC I/NET Seven window. Refer to
“Starting TAC I/NET Seven” on page 1-13 for more information.

Note: If you do not log off the system is not secure from unauthorized use.

System Addresses
Each individual input and output point, controller, Tap, operator
station, and backup station has a unique number that identifies it
in the system. These identification numbers are called system
addresses. Each address is built using the address of the equipment
passed through to reach it.

Building an Address
An address in the TAC I/NET Seven system consists of a series of
numbers, each describing the route from the top of the LAN hier-
archy to the final device or input/output point (see Figure 1-24).

LL SS PP BB

Link 00–99 Bit Offset 00–09 (00–07 for UCs)

Station 00–63 Point 00–31

Figure 1-24. Addressing Structure

This addressing structure consists of four pairs of numbers:

1-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics System Addresses

✦ The link number (00–99) is the System Link address that the
operator connects through to connect to a specific controller
LAN.
✦ The station number (00–63) is the controller on that
controller LAN.
✦ Every controller provides 32 point address numbers (00–31),
each with ten bit offset numbers (00–09).
✦ SubLAN interfaces and their microcontrollers provide
addresses as follows:
✧ The UCI provides point addresses 00 through 31 for up
to 32 UCs on a subLAN. Each UC provides eight input
and eight output bit offset addresses (00–07).
✧ The DPI provides point addresses 00 through 31 for up
to 32 devices (DPUs or SCUs) on a subLAN. Each device
on the subLAN provides ten input and ten output bit
offset addresses (00–09).
✧ The MRI provides point addresses 00 through 31 for up
to 32 MRs on two subLANs. Each MR provides ten input
and ten output bit offset addresses (00–09).
✧ The MCI provides point addresses 00 through 31 for up
to 32 devices (MRs, DPUs, and SCUs) on two subLANs.
Each device on the subLAN provides ten input and ten
output bit offset addresses (00–09).
✧ The 7798 I/SITE LAN and 7798C provide point addresses
00 through 31 for up to 32 devices (MRs, DPUs, DIOs,
DIUs, and SCUs) on a subLAN. Each device on the
subLAN provides ten input and ten output bit offset
addresses (00–09).
Creating a Controller Address
To connect to a discrete input point on a 7740 with the system
address 07222804, perform the following steps:
1. Connect to link 07 which connects you to the controller LAN.
2. Select controller #22.
3. Select discrete input point 28.
4. Select bit offset 04.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-19

TCON299–05/10
Forms and Worksheets TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Creating a UC, DPU, SCU, or MR Address

Connecting to a UC, DPU, SCU, or MR is similar to the procedure
just described. To connect to a UC, DPU, SCU, or MR point with
the system address of 07230607, perform the following steps:
1. Select link Tap 07 which connects you to the controller LAN.
2. Select UCI, DPI, MRI, or I/SITE LAN 23 on that controller
LAN to connect to the interface unit.
3. Select UC, DPU, SCU, or MR 06 on that interface unit to
connect to the controller.
4. Select point 07 on that controller.
The type of point, input or output, depends on how you defined
the point. Refer to the chapter concerning input and output points
in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, or to the
specific user or installation guides accompanying the controllers in
your system.

Forms and Worksheets

There is no substitution for thorough planning and record keeping
in the development and maintenance of your TAC I/NET Seven
system. We recommend that you use the forms located in
TCON157, TAC I/NET Forms and Worksheets Getting Started, to
document your system configuration. These forms are referred to
frequently throughout this manual. Make extra copies of the forms
to use as worksheets when planning your database (be sure to keep
an original form for making copies). Once you fill out the forms,
creating the database becomes a simple data entry task. The care
and attention to detail taken as you prepare your database entry
forms translates directly to how easily you can bring your system
on-line.

1-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Backups

Backups

Note: The DbCreate utility allows you to create a backup of your TAC
I/NET Seven SQL database. However, it does not backup the entire
contents of your TAC I/NET Seven directory (i.e., graphic pages,
library symbols, DCU save files, etc.). Use the information in this
section to define a backup methodology appropriate for your system.
Refer to the TAC I/NET Forms and Worksheets Getting Started guide
for more information about the DbCreate utility.

Many things can happen to computerized data. A disk can fail, files
may be accidentally deleted or become corrupted, or you can lose a
machine due to theft, fire or flood. All TAC I/NET Seven users
should backup data and configuration files on a regular basis. You
should also consider testing your backup methods by staging a
mock recovery to make sure that everything works as you expected.
In order to define your backup methodology you must make deci-
sions on the value of your data, the backup media, the backup
storage location, the frequency of backups and the tools to use.
These issues apply, not only to TAC I/NET Seven data, but also to
any computerized data you maintain.
✦ Data value — You must determine what the value of your
TAC I/NET Seven data is to you. This will vary between
customers. If your TAC I/NET Seven system is managing a
high security facility the loss of the TAC I/NET Seven system
data may be much more serious than if you are managing a
small office building. To determine the value of your TAC
I/NET Seven data consider the worst case scenario—the loss
of the entire host machine. Would this merely be a minor
inconvenience or a major disaster?
✦ Media — There are many options in backup media. The most
basic is a simple floppy disk. You can also add a special
backup device (such as a Zip or Jaz drive) to your system.
These devices allow you to store a greater quantity of data
than a regular floppy and are relatively inexpensive. Other
options include saving backups on a network drive or using
an Internet backup service.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-21

TCON299–05/10
Backups TAC I/NET Seven Basics

✦ Storage — A recommended practice for valuable data is to

store the backup data in a different location. This protects the
backup data from disasters such as flood or fire. To minimize
the inconvenience of going offsite for data retrieval you can
keep a copy of your most recent backup locally and store the
previous backups in an alternative location.
✦ Tools — There are numerous tools to assist you in backing up
your files. Backups can be performed simply by copying files
to the chosen media. Also, utility programs that compress
your data may be used for backup purposes. Microsoft
includes a special backup program with Windows and NT
systems. Alternatively, many other vendors offer backup utili-
ties for sale. Many of the backup utilities can be configured to
perform the backup at regular intervals without your inter-
vention. Evaluate your options and then choose the tool that
is most appropriate for your needs.
✦ Frequency — The frequency with which you perform
backups should depend upon how often you expect the data
to change and how valuable that data is to you. Irreplaceable
data that changes regularly should be backed up on a daily
basis. At a minimum you should backup your data weekly.
You should also perform special backups prior to any system
configuration changes.
Table 1-1 lists the TAC I/NET Seven files that you should consider
for inclusion in your backup routine. Devise a backup method-
ology that is suitable for your environment and implement it for all
TAC I/NET Seven host PCs.

1-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Controlling Window Layouts in TAC I/NET Seven

Table 1-1. Recommended Files for Backup

Function File(s) to Backup

INET\INETIOSRV*.DAT
Host PC configuration
INET\HOSTMASKS*.DAT
TAC I/NET Seven database Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL\DATA\INETDB*.*
AMT Archives INET\ARCH\ARC_*.MDF
INET\DATA\*.PAG (I/NET 4.3 pages)
Graphic System Pages INET\DATA\*.GPG
INET\DATA\HOMEPAGE
INET\SYMBOLS\*.BOL (I/NET 4.3 Symbols)
Graphic Library Symbols INET\SYMBOLS\*.GLS
INET\SYMBOLS\*.BMP
DCU Save Files INET\SAV\*.SAV
Note: The default paths are shown for the data files. Depending on your system
configuration, the specific data path may be different.

Controlling Window Layouts in TAC I/NET Seven

TAC I/NET Seven allows you to assign window control functions to
each user's password. These functions control a user's ability to
close, move, or size windows. Refer to the description of “Host
Passwords” in the Host Functions chapter of the TAC I/NET Seven
Technical Reference Guide for more information.
As the administrator of a TAC I/NET Seven system, you can take
advantage of these window control functions in order to define
unique window layout schemes for particular TAC I/NET Seven
operators.
For example, you may have a TAC I/NET Seven operator who must
monitor AMT alarms and events. As the administrator of the TAC
I/NET Seven system, you can define the window layout for this user
as follows:
1. Log into TAC I/NET Seven using this user's logon and pass-
word.
2. Open the Host Password Assignment editor (see Figure 9-2
on page 9-3) and ensure that the window control functions
are enabled for this user.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-23

TCON299–05/10
Retrieving Obstructed Windows TAC I/NET Seven Basics

3. Close the Host Password Assignment editor and open the

appropriate windows for use by this operator. For this
example you would open an AMT alarm window and event
window.
4. Position the windows on the screen as necessary.
5. Return to the Host Password Assignment editor and de-select
the appropriate window control functions for this user. For
this example you may wish to de-select the following func-
tions:
✧ Allow AMT Alarm wnd. close
✧ Allow AMT Alarm wnd. move and size
✧ Allow AMT Event wnd. close
✧ Allow AMT Event wnd. move and size
6. Log out of TAC I/NET Seven.
Now when the user logs onto TAC I/NET Seven, AMT will open
with the alarm and event windows positioned accordingly. The
position of these windows will be fixed (i.e., the user will not be
able to close, move, or size these windows).
TAC I/NET Seven and AMT save window position information
during log-off and program shutdown. Therefore, if you do not
disable the user’s ability to close windows, any windows that are
closed when the user logs off or shuts down the system will not
automatically come up the next time the user logs on.

Retrieving Obstructed Windows

TAC I/NET Seven allows you to have multiple graphic pages open
at the same time. You can also have the System View window open
while graphic pages are being displayed. Occasionally, a window
may become obstructed by other open windows. In order to bring
an obstructed window to the foreground, you could use the stan-
dard Windows keyboard convention of [Ctrl]+[Tab] to cycle
through the open windows until the obstructed window activates.
However, TAC I/NET Seven provides an alternative method that
allows you to activate a window without cycling through all open

1-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons

windows. Using the Open Graphic Pages dialog box, you can view
a list of TAC I/NET Seven’s open windows and activate any window
directly.
1. Select Window  Windows from the main menu. The system
displays the Open Graphic Pages dialog box (see Figure 1-25).

Figure 1-25. Open Graphic Pages

2. Highlight an entry in the list of open windows.

3. Click the Select button to bring the selected window to the
foreground.
4. Select Close to close the dialog box.

Note: The Open Graphic Pages dialog always remains in front of any other
TAC I/NET Seven windows that are open, until you close the dialog
box.

Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons

TAC I/NET Seven now provides you with the ability to create
custom tools. These tools can be used to initiate event sequences
defined in your system’s controllers, or to launch external files and
applications on your host workstation.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-25

TCON299–05/10
Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons TAC I/NET Seven Basics

You can activate user-defined tools from TAC I/NET Seven’s main
menu, or from tool markers placed on graphic pages. The number
of tools you can create is limited only by the amount of resources
(i.e., memory and hard drive space) available on your workstation.

Configuring User Tools

Create custom tools using the following steps:
1. Select Tools  Define Tools from the main menu. The system
displays the User Tool Configuration editor (see Figure 1-26).

Figure 1-26. User Tool Configuration Editor

2. Create a new user tool by selecting Add. The system displays a

dialog box allowing you to define a name and choose a tool
type for the new tool (see Figure 1-27).

Figure 1-27. Creating a User Tool

a. Define a Name for the new user tool. Use up to 50 char-

acters.

1-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons

b. Choose the type of tool you wish to create. Two kinds of

tools are available:
✢ Event – Use this tool type to execute an event
sequence defined in a controller.
✢ Shortcut – Use this tool type to launch another
application, open a file, visit a web site, etc.
3. Select OK to accept these settings.
4. Use the steps below that are appropriate for the type of tool
you are creating:
Creating an Event Tool
If you chose the Event tool type in Step 2 above, TAC I/NET
Seven displays the Event Selection dialog (see Figure 1-28).
Use this dialog to specify one or more event sequences to be
executed by the user tool.

Figure 1-28. Event Selection Dialog Box

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-27

TCON299–05/10
Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons TAC I/NET Seven Basics

The Event Selection dialog is divided into three sections as

follows:
✧ Link Selection – This section provides a drop-down list
of all link devices defined in your system.
✧ Station Selection – This section provides a list of all
stations that communicate through the link device
selected in the Link Selection section.
✧ Event Selection – This section lists all event sequences
defined for the station selected in the Station Selection
section.
Select event sequences as follows:
a. Select a link in the Link Selection section.
b. Highlight a station in the Station Selection section.
c. Use the Event Selection section to assign event
sequences to the user tool as follows:
✢ Highlight an event sequence in the left-hand list and
use the right-arrow button (-->) to add the sequence
to the list on the right.
✢ If necessary, continue adding event sequences to the
list on the right. When the user tool is activated, it
will execute its event sequences in the order that they
appear in the right-hand list.
✢ Remove an event sequence from the user tool by
highlighting the sequence in the right-hand list and
clicking the left-arrow button (<--) to remove it.
d. Select OK to accept these settings and close the Event
Selection dialog. Proceed to Step 5.

Creating a Shortcut Tool

If you chose the Shortcut tool type in Step 2, TAC I/NET
Seven displays a file selection dialog (see Figure 1-29). Use
this dialog to choose the file or application to be launched by
the tool.

1-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons

Figure 1-29. File Selection Dialog Box

Specify the name of the file or application to assign to the user

tool and select Open. The file selection dialog box closes.
Proceed to the next step.
5. The newly created tool now appears in the list of tools
contained in the User Tool Configuration editor (see
Figure 1-26 on page 1-26).
Select OK to close this editor.
You can use the tool(s) that you just created by performing either
of the following tasks:
✦ Create Tool Markers – You can assign tools to tool markers
that you place on graphic pages. When you click on a tool
marker on a live graphic page, the tool activates. Refer to
“Adding Tool Markers” on page 8-71 for instructions.
✦ Create User Buttons – You can assign tools to user-defined
buttons that become available from TAC I/NET Seven’s main
menu. Instructions for performing this task are provided
below.

Configuring User Buttons

Create up to 16 user-defined buttons as follows:
1. Select Tools  Define Buttons from the main menu. The
system displays the User Button Configuration editor (see
Figure 1-30).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-29

TCON299–05/10
Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Figure 1-30. User Button Configuration Editor

2. Highlight one of the 16 entries from the scrollable list. You

can modify an existing button, or any blank button.
3. Select Modify. The system displays the User Tool Configura-
tion editor (see Figure 1-26).
4. Highlight the tool that you wish to assign to the user-defined
button. If you need to create a new tool, you can do so now
(refer to “Configuring User Tools” on page 1-26 for instruc-
tions).
5. Select OK to accept the highlighted tool and to close the User
Tool Configuration editor.
6. The name of the tool that you selected is now displayed in the
highlighted entry in the User Button Configuration editor.
Select OK to accept this setting.
The user-defined button that you just created is now available from
TAC I/NET Seven’s main menu. Select Tools from the main menu
to display the available user-defined buttons (see Figure 1-31 for an
example).
You can activate a tool by selecting its button in the Tools menu.
Any buttons that appear gray have not been configured and cannot
be selected.

1-30 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Using the System View Interface

Figure 1-31. Tools Menu

Using the System View Interface

This version of TAC I/NET Seven provides an alternate user inter-
face that you can use to setup your network configuration, and to
configure your access control system. Rather than using standard
menu commands, you can instead use a tree-based interface by
selecting View  System View from the main TAC I/NET Seven
menu.

See Also: “Using System View to Configure Your Network” on page 2-6

The System View Window

When you launch System View, it is displayed as a double-pane
window (see Figure 1-32). This window is non-modal, meaning
that you can open other windows and editors while the System
View window is open.
The Left-side Pane
The left-side pane contains a hierarchical tree that represents the
structure of your system. Along the bottom of the left-side pane is
an Access tab and a Netcon tab. By default, the Access tab is
active, causing the main area of the left-side pane to display a list of

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-31

TCON299–05/10
Using the System View Interface TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Figure 1-32. Initial System View Display

the tenants defined in your access control system. This list contains
an “All Tenants” entry as well as an entry for each tenant that you
have already defined (if any).
If you select the Netcon tab, the access control information in the
left-side pane is replaced with network configuration information.
The Right-side Pane
The right-side pane provides a Context tab and a System tab. By
default, the Context tab is active, allowing the pane to display
information about items you highlight in the left-side pane.
You can use the System tab to duplicate the functionality of the
left-side pane in the right-side pane. This is especially useful when
you wish to drag items from one pane and drop them into the other
pane (refer to “Using Drag and Drop” on page 1-33).

Expanding and Collapsing Items

You can expand an item by clicking its plus (+) symbol (see
Figure 1-33). This causes subordinate items to display, indented
beneath the expanded item. Subordinate items may also have a plus
symbol, indicating that they too can be expanded. After expanding
an item, the plus sign changes to a minus (–) sign. Click the minus
sign to collapse the expanded item.

1-32 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Using the System View Interface

Figure 1-33. Expanding Items in System View

Using Drag and Drop

One benefit to using the System View interface is that you can drag
and drop items from the right-hand pane to items in the left-hand
pane. For example, you could drag a Group from the right pane to
an individual in the left in order to assign that group to the indi-
vidual.

Displaying a Context-sensitive Popup Menu

By clicking with the right mouse button, you can display a popup
menu of available functions. This popup menu is context sensitive,
meaning that it can display functions that are only applicable to a
selected item, as well as functions that are common among all
items. When you right-click a blank area, the popup menu shows
functions that are applicable to the System View window.

Print and Print Preview

At any time you can print the entire contents of the left-side pane
by right-clicking anywhere in the pane and selecting Print from the
resulting context menu. Only the items that are currently displayed

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-33

TCON299–05/10
Using the System View Interface TAC I/NET Seven Basics

in the pane will be included in the printed output. Therefore, no

subordinate information for collapsed items will be included in the
printed output.
You can display a preview of the printed output by right-clicking
anywhere in the pane and selecting Print Preview from the
resulting context menu. Using the preview window, you can switch
between a one-page and two-page display, navigate from one page
to another, zoom in and out, and send the output to a printer.

1-34 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Using Your Windows Login with TAC I/NET Seven

Using Your Windows Login with TAC I/NET Seven

In addition to the traditional method of logging onto TAC I/NET
Seven (that is, entering an operator name and host password), you
can configure TAC I/NET Seven to automatically log you in based
on your Window's logon.

Configuring I/NET Seven to Accept a User's Windows Logon

Note: The following steps can only be performed by a TAC I/NET Seven
operator with password access rights.

To add a user's Windows account to TAC I/NET Seven

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Passwords from TAC I/NET
Seven's main menu to open the Host Password editor.
2. Select Add to open the Host Passwords Assignments editor.
3. In the Name field, use up to 30 characters to define the user's
Windows account name. Use the following syntax for this
field:
machine_name\user_name
—OR—
domain_name\user_name
The entry you make in the Name field must exactly match the
user's Windows account name. The following characters
cannot be used within the name: " / [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >. You
must also avoid using the @ symbol if you intend to use this
account as the source of indirect user settings (refer to “Indi-
rect User Settings” on page 9-13 for more information).
4. The Password and Confirmation fields become inactive and
are not used for this type of account. Skip these fields.
5. Continue filling in the other fields and assigning functions to
the account. If necessary, refer to the “Adding a Host Pass-
word” on page 9-2 for instructions.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-35

TCON299–05/10
Auto-launching TAC I/NET Seven at Startup TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Logging In Using Your Windows Account

If your Windows account has already been added to TAC I/NET
Seven, you can use it to log onto TAC I/NET Seven.
To log in using your Windows account
1. From the Log On dialog, activate () the Current Windows
User checkbox.

2. Select OK to log onto TAC I/NET Seven.

Auto-launching TAC I/NET Seven at Startup

By placing a TAC I/NET Seven shortcut in the Windows Startup
folder, you can configure your system to automatically launch TAC
I/NET Seven each time Windows starts. The instructions for this
type of configuration are described below.
To configure Windows to auto-launch TAC I/NET Seven
1. Open the Startup folder.
For example, open:
C:\Documents and Settings\your_username\Start Menu\Programs\Startup
To have TAC I/NET Seven automatically launch for all users
of this PC, open the “All users” Startup folder.
For example, open:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs\Startup
2. In the Startup folder, create a shortcut to TAC I/NET Seven as
follows:
a. Right-click a blank area in the Startup folder and select
New Shortcut from the resulting popup menu. This will
launch a wizard that will help you to create the new
shortcut.
b. Follow the wizard's onscreen instructions to create a
shortcut to TAC I/NET Seven's main program file
(INetW.exe).
For example:

1-36 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Auto-launching TAC I/NET Seven at Startup

C:\Program Files\INET Seven\INetW.exe

With a shortcut to TAC I/NET Seven now in the Startup
folder, TAC I/NET Seven will automatically launch each
time you start Windows.
Bypassing TAC I/NET Seven's Logon Dialog
You may wish for the auto-launched TAC I/NET Seven system to
automatically log you in without displaying the logon dialog. TAC
I/NET Seven accepts a command line switch that instructs it to
bypass the logon dialog and automatically logon the current
Windows user.
Use the following instructions to add a command line switch to the
TAC I/NET Seven shortcut that you created in the Startup folder.
1. Ensure that you have configured TAC I/NET Seven to use
Windows logons. Refer to “Configuring I/NET Seven to
Accept a User's Windows Logon” on page 1-35 for instruc-
tions.
2. Locate the TAC I/NET Seven shortcut that you created in the
Startup folder.
3. Right-click the shortcut and select Properties from the
resulting popup menu.
4. In the Target field, add a space and /winuser to the end of the
existing text.
For example:
"C:\Program Files\INET Seven\INetW.exe" /winuser
5. Click OK to close the shortcut's property window.
Now when TAC I/NET Seven auto-launches, it will automatically
logon the current user if their Windows user account has been
added to TAC I/NET Seven. If the current user's Windows account
has not been added to TAC I/NET Seven, the normal logon dialog
will open when TAC I/NET Seven launches.
Refer to “Configuring I/NET Seven to Accept a User's Windows
Logon” on page 1-35 for instructions on adding Windows user
accounts to TAC I/NET Seven.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-37

TCON299–05/10
Running I/O Server as a Windows Service TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Running I/O Server as a Windows Service

Note: You must have Windows system administrator rights in order to

perform the procedures described in this section.

A Windows “service” is an application that loads automatically at

Windows startup and runs as a constant background task. TAC
I/NET Seven’s I/O Server can be configured to run as a Windows
service.

Why Run I/O Server as a Windows Service?

By running I/O Server as a service on your local PC, you can help
ensure that client TAC I/NET Seven workstations will successfully
maintain communications with TAC I/NET Seven on this PC.
Running I/O Server as a service is especially useful for the following
applications:
✦ Using the PC as a TAC I/NET Seven database server for other
PCs configured as Remote Clients.
✦ Using the PC as a Filemaster for other PCs configured as
Equalized Clients.
Refer to Chapter 3 in TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started,
for more information about using file equalization and using a
client/server configuration.

Before You Begin

Before you configure I/O Server to run as a Windows service, you
should first set it to run continuously – even during periods when
no clients are connected.
To configure I/O Server to run continuously
1. Launch TAC I/NET Seven’s Configure program by clicking the
Windows Start button and then selecting Programs  INET 
INET Configuration.

1-38 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Running I/O Server as a Windows Service

2. Open the Configuration Profile editor to modify TAC I/NET

Seven’s active profile. If necessary, refer to TCON298, TAC
I/NET Seven Getting Started, for instructions on how to
modify a profile.
3. In the Configuration Profile editor, set the I/O Server with no
clients parameter to “Maintain”.

4. Click OK to close the Configuration Profile editor.

5. Click Close to close the Configure program.
6. Ensure that both TAC I/NET Seven and I/O Server are shut-
down.

Configuring I/O Server to be a Windows Service

To configure I/O Server to run as a service
1. Click the Windows Start button and then click Run....
2. In the Run dialog box, type cmd and click OK.

3. In the resulting command window, navigate to the I/NET

Seven directory as follows:
a. Type cd %PROGRAMFILES%\Inet Seven

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-39

TCON299–05/10
Running I/O Server as a Windows Service TAC I/NET Seven Basics

b. Press the Enter key

4. In the command window, unregister I/O Server as follows:

a. Type inetiosrv /unregserver
b. Press the Enter key
5. In the command window, set TAC I/NET Seven’s I/O Server
to run as a Windows service as follows:
a. Type inetiosrv /service
b. Press the Enter key

1-40 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Running I/O Server as a Windows Service

To start the I/O Server service

1. Click the Windows Start button, right-click My Computer
and select Manage from the resulting popup menu.
2. In the left-hand panel of the Computer Management window,
expand the “Services and Applications” section and highlight
Services.

3. In the right-hand panel, scroll down and locate the

INet7IoSrv service, right-click it, and select Properties from
the resulting popup menu.
4. In the Properties editor, perform the following tasks:
a. Verify that the Startup Type parameter is set to “Auto-
matic”.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-41

TCON299–05/10
Running I/O Server as a Windows Service TAC I/NET Seven Basics

b. Start the service by clicking the Start button.

c. Click OK to close the Properties editor.

5. Close the Computer Management window.
6. Close the command window.
7. Verify TAC I/NET Seven’s I/O Server is running by locating its
icon in the Windows system tray.
The actual icon used to represent IO Server will depend on
how your system is configured. Refer to Chapter 3 in
TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for more infor-
mation about IO Server icons.

8. Reboot the computer.

9. Upon returning to Windows, locate I/O Server’s icon in the
system tray to verify that it has started automatically.

1-42 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Running I/O Server as a Windows Service

Configuring I/O Server to Stop Being a Windows Service

If you decide that you no longer wish to run I/O Server as a
Windows service, you can reconfigure it to run as a normal appli-
cation. The procedures for this type of reconfiguration are
described below.
To configure I/O Server to stop running as a service
1. Click the Windows Start button and then click Run....
2. In the Run dialog box, type cmd and click OK.

3. In the resulting command window, navigate to the I/NET

Seven directory as follows:
a. Type cd %PROGRAMFILES%\Inet Seven
b. Press the Enter key

4. In the command window, unregister I/O Server as follows:

a. Type inetiosrv /unregserver
b. Press the Enter key

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-43

TCON299–05/10
Running I/O Server as a Windows Service TAC I/NET Seven Basics

5. In the command window, set TAC I/NET Seven’s I/O Server

to run as a normal Windows application as follows:
a. Type inetiosrv /regserver
b. Press the Enter key.
Verify that I/O Server is no longer a Windows service
1. Click the Windows Start button, right-click My Computer
and select Manage from the resulting popup menu.
2. In the left-hand panel of the Computer Management window,
expand the “Services and Applications” section and highlight
Services.

3. In the right-hand panel, scroll down and verify that

INet7IoSrv is no longer included in the list of services.
4. Close the Computer Management window.
5. Close the command window.
6. Reboot the computer.

1-44 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Manually Shutting Down IO Server

Manually Shutting Down IO Server

Depending on how IO Server is configured to run on your system,
it may not automatically shutdown when you exit TAC I/NET
Seven. For example, IO Server may be configured as a service that
runs for as long as Windows is running.
If IO Server is not configured to automatically showdown, there are
three ways of shutting it down manually:
✦ Stop the INet7IoSrv service from Windows Services.
✦ Stop the I/NET IO Server application from the Windows
system tray.
✦ Stop the INet7IoSrv.exe process from the Windows Task
Manager.
Each of these methods for manually shutting down IO Server are
described in the sections below.

Stopping IO Server from Windows Services

If IO Server is running as a Windows service on your PC, use the
procedures described below to shutdown IO Server.
To stop the I/O Server service
1. Click the Windows Start button, right-click My Computer
and select Manage from the resulting popup menu.
2. In the left-hand panel of the Computer Management window,
expand the “Services and Applications” section and highlight
Services.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-45

TCON299–05/10
Manually Shutting Down IO Server TAC I/NET Seven Basics

3. In the right-hand panel, scroll down and locate the

INet7IoSrv service, right-click it, and select Properties from
the resulting popup menu.
4. In the Properties editor, perform the following tasks:
a. Stop the service by clicking the Stop button.

b. Click OK to close the Properties editor.

1-46 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Manually Shutting Down IO Server

Stopping IO Server from the Windows System Tray

If IO Server is not running as a Windows service on your PC, you
can manually shut it down from the Windows system tray using the
procedures described below.
To shutdown I/O Server from the Windows system tray
1. Locate the IO Server icon in the Windows system tray.
The actual icon used to represent IO Server will depend on
how your system is configured. Refer to Chapter 3 in
TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for more infor-
mation about IO Server icons.

2. Right-click the IO Server icon and select Exit from the

resulting popup menu. If the exit command is greyed out, it is
because you are still logged into IO Server. In this case, select
Logout first and then select Exit.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-47

TCON299–05/10
Manually Shutting Down IO Server TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Stopping IO Server from the Windows Task Manager

You can manually shutdown IO Server from the Windows Task
Manager using the procedures described below.
To shutdown I/O Server from the Windows system tray
1. Right-click the clock in the Windows system tray and select
Task Manager from the resulting menu.

2. In the Windows Task Manager, locate and highlight the

INetIoSrv.exe process.

3. Click End Process to shutdown IO Server.

1-48 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service

Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service

TAC I/NET Seven includes an executable file named INetEqzMerge
that is used to support file equalization. This executable file must
run as a Windows service on each equalized client workstation that
is using either of the following SQL servers as the server for TAC
I/NET Seven’s database:
✦ SQL Server 2005 Express
✦ SQL Server 2008 Express

Note: MSDE 2000, SQL Server 2005 Standard/Enterprise, and SQL Server
2008 Standard do not require INetEqzMerge. These SQL servers
already provide the necessary services for file equalization.

During the process of installing TAC I/NET Seven on your PC, the
Install program will attempt to automatically register
INetEqzMerge as a Windows service. However, depending on your
PC’s security settings, the Install program may not have the
authority to register a service. In this case, INetEqzMerge will not be
a registered service and file equalization will not be available.
If you you are preparing to implement file equalization on a TAC
I/NET Seven workstation that uses SQL Server 2005/2008 Express,
proceed with the steps described in this section.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-49

TCON299–05/10
Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service TAC I/NET Seven Basics

Checking for the INetEqzMerge Service

To see if INetEqzMerge is registered as a Windows Service
1. Click the Windows Start button, right-click My Computer
and select Manage from the resulting popup menu.
2. In the left-hand panel of the Computer Management window,
expand the “Services and Applications” section and highlight
Services.

3. In the right-hand panel, scroll down and see if INetEqzMerge

is included in the list of services.
4. If INetEqzMerge is included in the list, verify that its Startup
Type is defined as Automatic. If necessary, you can double-click
on the service to open its properties and set it to automatic.
5. Close the Computer Management window.
If INetEqzMerge was not included in the list, proceed with the next
set of steps to manually register it as a Windows service.

1-50 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
TAC I/NET Seven Basics Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service

Manually Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service

To register INetEqzMerge as a Windows service
1. Click the Windows Start button and then click Run....
2. In the Run dialog box, type cmd and click OK.

3. In the resulting command window, navigate to the I/NET

Seven directory as follows:
a. Type cd %PROGRAMFILES%\Inet Seven
b. Press the Enter key

4. In the command window, unregister INetEqzMerge as follows:

a. Type INetEqzMerge /unregserver
b. Press the Enter key

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1-51

TCON299–05/10
Registering INetEqzMerge as a Windows Service TAC I/NET Seven Basics

5. In the command window, set INetEqzMerge to run as a

Windows service as follows:
a. Type INetEqzMerge /service
b. Press the Enter key
6. Close the command window.
7. Reboot the computer.
8. Verify that INetEqzMerge has been successfully registered as a
Windows service by repeating the steps in “Checking for the
INetEqzMerge Service” on page 1-50.

1-52 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

2
42
Setup and Network Configuration

There are four steps to configuring your TAC I/NET Seven system.
1. Network Design—Advance planning of your TAC I/NET
Seven system is essential to the configuration process.
2. TAC I/NET Seven Communication Configuration—An
overall configuration of your communication parameters.
This step includes designating serial port usage, baud rate,
printer parameters, and default file directories.
3. Host Configuration—Specifies user-interface parameters for
a specific host workstation.
4. Network Configuration—Identifies the devices connected to
your TAC I/NET Seven network.

TAC I/NET Seven Configuration

TAC I/NET Seven uses two supplementary programs to handle
system configuration and communication functions. Configure is
responsible for defining communication parameters and certain
system parameters. Some of the parameters established in
Configure are used directly by TAC I/NET Seven and others are
used by the I/O Server program. I/O Server handles all communi-
cation between your workstation and other hosts or NetPlus
Routers (NPRs).
Within Configure, you can set up serial port, and TCP/IP commu-
nication parameters, select a printer port, and alter TAC I/NET
Seven’s default directory structure. You can also use Configure to set
up NetPlus Routers and define host masks for message routing
requirements between other hosts and NetPlus Routers. If neces-
sary, you can create multiple configuration profiles and customize
your TAC I/NET Seven environment simply by switching profiles.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-1

TCON299–05/10
Host Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

You should review the System Configuration chapter in TCON300,

TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, prior to establishing
your configuration parameters. This chapter provides information
essential to establishing an efficient TAC I/NET Seven network.
After you have planned the network configuration, you will use
Configure to set up certain functions in I/O Server and TAC I/NET
Seven. The Configure program is fully documented in TCON298,
TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, and is not duplicated here. Refer
to the TAC I/NET Seven Configuration chapter for assistance.
After you complete the network design and TAC I/NET Seven
configuration, you can proceed with the Host Configuration.

Host Configuration
The Host Configuration Editor lets you define certain interface
parameters. The changes you make here go into effect as soon as
you click the OK button.

Figure 2-1. Host Configuration Editor

2-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Host Configuration

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Configuration from the main

menu. The system displays the Host Configuration Editor
(see Figure 2-1).
2. Define the Main Window Title for TAC I/NET Seven. Type
the desired text string. This text will appear in the title bar of
the main TAC I/NET Seven window after you accept the
changes to this editor.
3. Set the SevenTrends masks. All message masks are assigned to
one of four distribution groups. In order for a SevenTrends to
be accepted, it must match at least one checkbox active in the
assigned distribution group. Each distribution group may
contain up to eight masks.
Data sent to SevenTrends tables will be accepted by this oper-
ator station only if their group number and mask matches
one of these masks. Refer to the chapter on message routing in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for
more information.
a. Set each of eight mask positions to the desired state,
either active () or inactive ().
b. Repeat for each distribution group you want active.
4. Select a screen refresh interval in seconds (1–60) using the
Refresh Interval (sec) spindial.

Note: Page refresh will be suspended during host tasks such as software
downloads, station saves, and station restores.

5. Set the SysView Refresh Interval parameter to a value from

0 to 60 minutes. A setting of zero prevents System View from
ever performing an automatic system-wide refresh. A setting
of 1 to 60 minutes causes System View to perform automatic
system-wide refreshes at the specified interval. Refer to
“Refreshing the System View Window” on page 2-9 for more
information.
6. Choose an operator timeout action from the Operator
timeout action drop-down list. There are four options:
Signoff, Default page, Both, and None.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-3

TCON299–05/10
Host Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

✧ Signoff – determines that the system will automatically

sign the current operator off when the operator time-out
expires.
If the Graphic Editor is open when signoff occurs, the
open page is saved as BackupX.gpg, where X is the next
incremental number assigned to each new backup page.
For example, if Backup01.gpg already exists, the next file
is named Backup02.gpg.
The Alarms, Messages and Transactions program is
closed automatically as well.
If any editor was open, the system will back out to the
main menu level without saving any changes or additions
in progress.
✧ Default page – displays the default system page (defined
in the next step) when the operator timeout expires.
✧ Both – enables both the signoff and default page func-
tions.
✧ None – disables both.
7. Select the number of minutes (0–255) before the Operator
Timeout Action is enabled using the Operator timeout (min)
spindial. This controls the number of minutes of keyboard or
mouse inactivity before the system initiates the operator
timeout action. If you specify zero, then operator timeout will
not occur.
8. Select an DCU Password Timeout value (0 to 240 minutes).
After a user has connected to a password-protected controller,
this parameter determines how many minutes of keyboard or
mouse inactivity can elapse before the system requires the
operator to re-enter the controller's password.
9. If desired, you can activate () the Do not notify on oper-
ator time-out option in order to prevent the the system from
displaying a timeout message each time an operator timeout
occurs.
10. The default system page displays automatically each time TAC
I/NET Seven is started. Enter a system page filename in the
Default system page edit box.

2-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

Alternatively, you can click File Open to display the browser

in Figure 2-2. Select the system page file and click Open. You

Figure 2-2. Default System Page File Selection Editor

will return to the Host Configuration Editor and the filename

will display in the Default system page edit box.
11. Activate () or deactivate () the Size/Move option. If this
option is deactivated (), TAC I/NET Seven windows cannot
be resized or moved until an operator logs into I/NET.
12. Activate () or deactivate () the Close option. If this
option is deactivated (), TAC I/NET Seven windows cannot
be closed until an operator logs into I/NET.
13. Click OK to save the changes to the host configuration and
close this editor.

Defining the Network Configuration

Note: The network configuration is equalized among all equalized clients if

you enable File Equalization. Refer to Chapter 3, TAC I/NET Seven
Configuration in TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for
more information about File Equalization.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-5

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Before you begin operation you need to define the devices included
in your system and save the configuration. To do this you will pene-
trate each device level (i.e., Link, Site, Station (DCU) and UC,
DPU, SCU, or MR) and save each configuration level.
If links or DCUs exist and are communicating successfully, they
appear automatically in the network configuration interface. In
this case, all you have to do is save the configuration at each level.
If there is no link or eligible DCU, you cannot penetrate to the next
lower level.

Note: Functions that are network oriented (i.e., Automatic DCU Synchro-
nization, Automatic DCU Save, Printing, Access Control) require the
network configuration to be saved, or else they will not work.
Before assigning doors in Access Control you must first penetrate the
system and save each level configuration. Refer to the chapter
concerning Access Control in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical
Reference Guide, for more information.

Using System View to Configure Your Network

TAC I/NET Seven retains the traditional NETCON functionality
while offering an alternative tree-based network configuration
interface. This new interface is named System View. Rather than
displaying devices in successive summary screens, System View
allows you to view your network as a tree. Within this tree, you can
expand and collapse items in order to show or hide the next level in
the hierarchy.
Refer to “Using the System View Interface” on page 1-31 for a basic
overview of System View.
Viewing Each Level of Your Network
When you first open System View and select the Netcon tab at the
bottom of the left-side panel, your system’s hosts and NPRS are
displayed in the left panel’s tree view. This is the top-most level of
your network.
When you expand an item by clicking its plus (+) symbol, the next
level of your network that is associated with the expanded item is
displayed. For example, when you expand a host item, any links

2-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

that exist at that host are displayed indented beneath it. You can
then expand any of these links to view devices at the next level of
the network. You can continue to expand items and penetrate
through the network until you reach the lowest level. Figure 2-3
shows an example of items expanded to show each level of the
network.

Figure 2-3. Expanding Items to View Each Network Level

Parent and Child Items

Any item that can be expanded to show subordinate items can also
be referred to as a parent item. Any item that is subordinate to
another item can be referred to as a child item. For example, in
Figure 2-3, DLA Link #97 is the parent item of the NPR-03 child
item. But NPR-03 is not just a child item, it is also the parent item
of the 7793-Doors-1, DCU 7728-xxxxxxx, and 7798-Center1 child
items.
Displaying Popup Menus
Within System View, you can display popup menus of common
functions by clicking with the right mouse button. The contents of
these popup menus will vary depending on where you click within
the System View interface. Figure 2-4 shows a typical popup menu
available within System View.
Divided Popup Menus
A popup menu may have a horizontal line that divides the menu
into an upper and lower section (see Figure 2-5). In this case, the
upper section contains items that are common to the pane in which
you clicked. For example, if you right-click anywhere in the left-
side pane, the first two items in the popup menu are Print and Print

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-7

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Figure 2-4. Right-clicking a Host in System View

Preview (refer to “Print and Print Preview” on page 1-33 for more
information about these functions). The lower section contains
functions that are applicable to the highlighted item (refer to the
following section titled “Typical Popup Menu Functions” for more
information).

Figure 2-5. Divided Popup Menu

Typical Popup Menu Functions

The following functions are typically available when you right-click
on a network item in System View:
✦ Save Item
Use this function to save a record of the selected item. This
function is available when no record of the selected item
already exists in your database. If the selected item is a child of
a parent item (i.e., the selected item is a level beneath another
item), then the parent item must have already been saved;
otherwise, this option does not appear in the popup menu.
✦ Save SubTree
This function is available if your host workstation is able to
establish communications with the selected device; otherwise,
this function does not appear in the popup menu. Use this
function to save a record of the selected item, as well as the
records of its subordinate items that are currently communi-

2-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

cating. By using this function, you can avoid the process of

manually penetrating each level of your network in order to
save device records to your database.
✦ Add Child Item
This function allows you to add an item to the next level
beneath the currently selected item. For example, if you right-
click on a DLA link, the Add Child Item function allows you
to add a new Site device (i.e., a Tap or an NPR).
✦ Modify Item
This function is available if your host workstation is able to
establish communications with the selected device; otherwise,
this function does not appear in the popup menu. This func-
tion opens the editor appropriate for the selected item,
allowing you to make changes to the item’s parameters. For
example, if you right-click on a 7793 MCI, the Modify Item
function opens the Station Parameters editor.
✦ Delete Item
This function removes the record of the selected item from
your database. If your host workstation is still able to commu-
nicate with the deleted item, the item remains visible in the
tree and its status indicator changes to show that it has not
been saved. If your host workstation cannot establish commu-
nications with the deleted item, the item is removed from the
tree.
Refreshing the System View Window
When you first open the System View interface and select the
Netcon tab, TAC I/NET Seven automatically polls your entire
system to determine what devices are connected and communi-
cating. The results of this poll are then compared to the records
stored in your database to determine the status of each device (refer
to “Network Status Indicators” on page 2-11 for more informa-
tion). Finally, System View builds the hierarchical tree that repre-
sents your network.
Beyond the initial building of the network tree, the information in
the System View interface remains static until any of the following
events occur:
✦ User presses the F5 function key.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-9

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

You can refresh the System View window at any time by

pressing the F5 function key. This is a system-wide refresh
that updates all information in the System View window.
✦ User highlights or expands an item.
When you highlight or expand an item in the System View
interface, TAC I/NET Seven automatically re-polls the item
and all of its subordinate items.
✦ The SysView Refresh Interval elapses.
The SysView Refresh Interval parameter in the Host
Configuration editor allows you to specify how often System
View automatically updates its system-wide information. You
can set this parameter to a value from 0 to 60 minutes. A
setting of zero prevents System View from ever performing an
automatic system-wide refresh. A setting of 1 to 60 minutes
causes System View to perform automatic system-wide
refreshes at the specified interval.
An interval does not begin until an active system-wide refresh
is completed. For example, a setting of 5 minutes causes
System View to perform a refresh 5 minutes following the
completion of any previous system-wide refresh.
You can continue using System View during an active refresh. The
mouse cursor will show both an arrow and an hourglass, indicating
that the system is refreshing while remaining available for use.

2-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

Network Status Indicators

Each item displayed in the network tree is capable of displaying its
current status. Table 2-1 lists the status indicators and describes
their meaning.

Table 2-1. Network Status Indicators

Status Indicator Example Description

Online and
Blank Status icons are clear at each level of the tree.
Saved

When an item is offline and not saved, it

reports a red “X” status. If the item is the
Offline and “X” parent of any other items, then all child items
Saved (red) associated with it report the red “X” status. The
red “X” status continues to be reported at all
items that are at lower levels in the branch.

When an item displays a red “X” status, its

parent (if online and saved) will report the
Child Item “!” yellow “!” status. If the parent is a child of a
Offline and (yellow) higher-level parent item, then this higher-level
Saved parent will also report a yellow “!” status. The
yellow “!” status continues to be reported at
each higher level parent item in the branch.

When an item is online and not saved, it

Item Online
“+” reports a red “+” status. If the item is the parent
and Not
(red) of any other items, you must save it before you
Saved
can save any of its child items.

When an item displays a red “+” status, its

parent (if online and saved) will report the
Child Online yellow “+” status. If the parent is a child of
“+”
and Not higher-level parent item, then this higher-level
(yellow)
Saved parent will also report a yellow “+” status. The
yellow “+” status continues to be reported at
each higher level parent item in the branch.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-11

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Using NETCON to Configure Your Network

The traditional TAC I/NET Seven system allows you to configure
your network through a series of summary screens and editors.
Starting with the Link Summary, you save the devices communi-
cating at that level, then penetrate down to the next subordinate
summary. With each new summary screen, you continue to save
devices and penetrate to the next level until all communicating
devices have been saved. This series of network configuration
summary screens, and their associated editors, are collectively
referred to as “NETCON”.
Penetrating the Levels of Your Network
To penetrate from one level of your network to the next, highlight
an item in a summary and select Penetrate. This option is only
available when the item that you select links to another level of your
network.
Storing Network Configuration Records
Save items appearing in any of the network configuration summa-
ries using the following procedures:
1. To save only one item, highlight the item and select Save.
2. To save all items select Save All.
Network Summaries
As described earlier, NETCON is a collection of summary screens
and editors that enable you to configure your network. There is one
summary screen for each level of your network. These summaries
are described below.

Note: An asterisk (*) appearing next to an item in a summary indicates

that the data saved in TAC I/NET Seven's database does not match
the information currently being received from the device. In this case,
you can update TAC I/NET Seven's database by deleting the item's
record (an item currently communicating with TAC I/NET Seven
will not disappear from the summary when you press the Delete
button) and then re-save it by pressing the Save button. Any devices
residing beneath this device will also have to be re-saved.

2-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

Link Summary
The Link Summary is the first dialog displayed when you select
Edit  Host Computer  Network Configuration from the main
TAC I/NET Seven menu. The Link Summary shows the Link Taps,
DLA links, and non-DLA NetPlus Routers available or defined in
your configuration.
From the Link Summary you can add, delete, or modify links. This
is the first level that you can save and penetrate to other levels
through a selected link.
The summary includes columns for the Link number, Link Type
and Name. The Dn column indicates if the device can be
programmed by downloading a file from the host workstation. The
Host column displays the number of the host through which the
connection is made. If a Telephone number is assigned to this
device, it is displayed in the next column.
The R/H column displays the number of the first restore host (i.e.,
Restore Host 1) assigned to the link device. This column will
display a “D” (disabled) if you have not enabled Automatic DPU
Restore on the link. An “L” will be displayed if you have set Restore
Host 1 to “0”, designating this workstation (i.e., your “local” host)
as the first restore host.
The Cnf column contains the status of the link. A plus sign (+)
indicates the device is communicating, but is not saved in this
configuration file. A minus sign (–) indicates the device has been
saved, but is not now communicating. If this field is blank, the
device has been saved in this configuration and is communicating.
As an enhancement to the normal operation of Link Summary, the
Type and Name fields have the added capability of indicating that
a link is being shared among one or more DLA-enabled NPRs. As
shown by the highlighted link in Figure 2-6 below, the Link Type is
“Distributed Link” and the Link Name is “DLA Link #nn,” indi-
cating that the link is being shared.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Network Configuration from
the main menu. The system displays the Link Summary
window (see Figure 2-6).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-13

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Figure 2-6. Link Summary

2. Use the following functions to configure your system:

✢ Add, delete, or modify
✢ Save a single link.
✢ Save all links.
Procedures for each of these functions are described
below.
3. To penetrate to the next level of a link, highlight the link and
then select Penetrate. The Site Summary or Station Summary
screen appears.
4. When you are finished, select Close.
Site Summary
The Site Summary is available after you select a Tap and penetrate
the link. The Site Summary contains a list of all connected 7803 and
7806 Taps. The Cnf column can contain a “D” to indicate a 7806x
Dial Tap. TAC I/NET Seven will not check the status of a Dial Tap
unless you penetrate it.

2-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

1. From the Link Summary, highlight a 7801 Host/Link, 7802

Host/Link, 7804 Dial Host/Link, or 7805 Dial Link and then
select Penetrate. The Site Summary displays as shown in
Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7. Site Summary

2. The following functions are available from this screen:

✧ Add, delete, modify, and penetrate
✧ Save a single site.
✧ Save all sites.

Note: You must manually enter remote site dial Taps including baud rate
and telephone number.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-15

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Station Summary
The Station Summary is available after penetrating through a link
or site Tap summary. The Station Summary contains a list of all
connected controllers.
1. Highlight a Tap in the Site or Link Summary.
2. Select Penetrate. The Station Summary displays as shown in
Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8. Station Summary

3. Use the following functions to configure your system:

✧ Add, delete, modify, and penetrate
✧ Save a single station.
✧ Save all stations.
Procedures for using these function are described below.
4. When you are finished, select Close.

2-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

MCU Summary

Note: An asterisk (*) appearing next to a device's address indicates that the
device is configured as a two-station device, but the MCU Configura-
tion setting for the device's second address is set incorrectly. Correct
this issue by changing the device's setting in the MCU Configuration
editor, or by configuring the device to operate in a single-address
mode.

The MCU Summary is available after penetrating a UCI, DPI, MRI,

or MCI, or I/SITE LAN. The MCU Summary contains a list of all
connected UCs, DPUs, DIUs, DIOs, SCUs, MRs, ASMRs, and
OP5s.
1. Highlight a station in the Station Summary.
2. Select Penetrate. The MCU Summary displays as shown in
Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9. MCU Summary

3. Use the following functions to configure your system:

✧ Add, delete, and modify.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-17

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

✧ Save a single station.

✧ Save all stations.
Procedures for using each of these functions are described
below.
4. When you are finished, select Close.

Adding a Link
Use the following steps to add a Link to the network configuration:
1. Depending on the interface you are using, perform one of the
following actions:
✧ Using System View, right-click any blank area in the left-
side pane and select Add Link from the resulting popup
menu.
✧ Using NETCON, select Add from the Link Summary
screen.
The system displays the Link Address dialog box (see
Figure 2-10).

Figure 2-10. Link Address

2. Enter the Link number (system address) for this link (0 – 99)
and then select OK. The system displays the Link Parameters
window (see Figure 2-11).
3. Choose the Type of Tap link from the drop-down list. The
Tap types are discussed in the chapter on host functions in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide.
4. Enter the name you want to describe the link in the Name edit
field. You may use up to 16 characters.

2-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

Figure 2-11. Add/Modify a Link – Link Parameters

5. Choose a Downloadable setting. Choose Yes if this link Tap

can be downloaded from the Software Restore editor.
The Downloadable parameter is automatically set to Yes and
is greyed-out if you set the Type to “2000 NetPlus Router.” It
is automatically set to No and is greyed-out if you set the
Type to “Xenta 527” (refer to the document entitled Engi-
neering TAC Xenta Server on www.tac.com for information
concerning the Xenta 527).
6. If necessary, change the Host Number for this link. This
parameter is not available when the link Type is defined as
“2000 NetPlus Router” or “Xenta 527.”
7. Enter the Phone Number if the link address you selected is a
dial Tap. Use up to 31 characters. This is the number remote
Taps use to reach this dial Tap located at the host PC. The
number you enter here must match the number you enter in
the Remote Site Dial Tap editor (refer to “78060 and 78061
Tap Configuration” on page 3-5).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-19

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Note: If you want messages to be received during a PC-initiated call, such

as point controls, alarms, etc., the telephone number must be defined
for a 7804 and 7805 tap in this editor. This phone number must
match the telephone number entered in the Site Tap Configuration
editor for the remote 7806 tap.
The two numbers do not have to match exactly since the phone
numbers are stripped of all non-numeric characters, and the shorter
of the two numbers is compared by the system from right to left. For
example:
7804 Network Definition Telephone Number = 2435594
7806 Site Tap Configuration Telephone Number = T9,18172435594
The 7804 telephone number (2435594) is the shorter, and is
compared, from right to left, with the stripped version of the 7806
telephone number (918172435594). The first seven digits, counting
from the right, match.
Additionally, the system link number (0–99), which is defined for
each phone number in the 7806 Site Tap Configuration editor, must
match the system link defined in the Configure program for the
respective dial tap that will be called.

Note: If you are using multi-link dial, the phone number for every system
link must be populated. Under most circumstances, each host soft-
ware link would use the same phone number. Refer to the chapter on
system configuration in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical
Reference Guide for a description of multi-link dial configuration.

8. An Automatic DPU Restore feature can be configured for this

link if both of the following conditions are true:
• The Enable access control option has been activated
() in the I/NET Configuration Editor.
• The workstation is not being used as a Remote Client in a
client/server network configuration. Refer to the descrip-
tion of Client/Server Architecture in TCON300, TAC
I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more informa-
tion.

2-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

Configure the Automatic DPU Restore feature for this link as

follows:
a. If necessary, activate () the Restore from Local Host
option. This option's setting is not equalized. Activate
this option on each host you want capable of performing
automatic DPU restores for this link.
This option will be activated and grey-out if your local
host is already assigned as a restore host in any of the four
Restore Host fields described in the next step.

Caution: Before assigning restore hosts to a link in the following step, ensure
that you have enabled File Equalization. Otherwise, the restore host
could download out-of-date information to the link's DPUs.

b. Specify up to four restore hosts (Restore Host 1-4) for

this link. The restore hosts you define for links are equal-
ized among all hosts.
For each Restore Host field, enter a host number (1 to
250). TAC I/NET Seven automatically activates and greys
out the Restore from Local Host option on each restore
host you define here.

Note: Do not use a workstation that is configured as a Remote Client as a

restore host. Each restore host must maintain its own database. Refer
to the description of Client/Server Architecture in TCON300, TAC
I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

You can leave any field at its default value of 0 to desig-

nate any host as a restore host. When you use a setting of
0, be sure to also activate () the Restore from Local
Host option on any hosts that should have the ability to
perform Automatic DPU restores on this link.
For more information about restore hosts, refer to the
description of the “Automatic DPU Restore” feature in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide.
9. Select OK to save the configuration.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-21

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Adding a Site
The Site Configuration editor allows you to configure the site
number, Tap type, the device name, download capability, and the
baud rate and telephone number if it is a 7806 Tap.

Note: You must save the link configuration through which you accessed the
site configuration before TAC I/NET Seven will let you save a site
configuration.

Use the following steps to add a site to the network configuration:

1. Depending on the interface you are using, perform one of the
following actions:
✧ Using System View, right-click any link in the left-side
pane and select Add Child Item from the resulting popup
menu.
✧ Using NETCON, select Add from the Site Summary
screen
The system displays the window shown in Figure 2-12:

Figure 2-12. Site Address Editor

2. Enter the Site address (0–63).

2-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

3. Select OK. TAC I/NET Seven displays the Site Parameters

window (see Figure 2-13).

Figure 2-13. Site Parameters Editor

4. Choose the Type from the drop-down list. The 7803 direct-
connect Tap and the 7806 dial Tap are the available site Tap
options.
5. Enter the name you want to describe the site in the Name edit
field.
6. Choose a Downloadable setting for this Tap. Choose Yes if
this site Tap can be downloaded from the software restore
editor.
7. Choose the Baud Rate (300–19200) from the drop-down list.
8. Enter the Phone Number of this Tap. Use up to 31 characters.
This is the number local Taps use to reach this remote dial
Tap.
9. Select OK to save this configuration.

Adding a Station
When you add a station to your network, you can configure the
station address, controller type, the device name, download capa-
bility, and the number of stations if it is a multi-station controller.
Use the following steps to add a station to the network configura-
tion:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-23

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

1. Depending on the interface you are using, perform one of the

following actions:
✧ Using System View, right-click an NPR, LAN Tap, or Site
Tap in the left-side pane and select Add Child Item from
the resulting popup menu.
✧ Using NETCON, select Add from the Station Summary
screen.
The system displays the dialog shown in Figure 2-14:

Figure 2-14. Station Configuration – Address

Note: Keep in mind that you can have only 64 controllers maximum per
link Tap. This means that, although you can assign up to 64 control-
lers to one LAN (site) Tap, you cannot have the same controller
address assigned to two different site Taps. If you have all 64 control-
lers on one site Tap, you can have only one site Tap communicating
with the link Tap. Or, if you have 64 site Taps communicating with
the link Tap, you can have only one controller per site Tap. One easy
way to check if you have a conflict is to run a configuration summary.
This summary lists the site number and controller number side by
side. For example, if you have controller #35 on site #1 and site #2,
this is a conflict. Change your system configuration accordingly.

2. Enter the Station address (0–63).

3. Select OK. TAC I/NET Seven displays the Station Parameters
window (see Figure 2-15).
4. Choose the controller Type from the drop-down list.
5. Enter the name you want to describe the controller in the
Name edit field.

2-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

Figure 2-15. Station Configuration – Station Parameters

6. Choose a Downloadable setting for the station. Choose Yes

if this station can be downloaded from the software restore
editor.
7. Enter the Number of Stations (1–2) on this controller.
8. Select OK to save this configuration.

Adding an MCU
Use the following steps to add an MCU to the network configura-
tion:
1. Depending on the interface you are using, perform one of the
following actions:
✧ Using System View, right-click any SLI (i.e., any 7760
UCI, 7791 DPI, 7792 MRI, 7793 MCI, or 7798 I/SITE
LAN) in the left-side pane and select Add Child Item
from the resulting popup menu.
✧ Using NETCON, select Add from the MCU Summary
screen.
The system displays the window shown in Figure 2-16:
2. Enter the UCI, DPI, MRI, or MCI, or I/SITE LAN Station
address (0–63).
3. Enter the MCU number.
4. Select OK. TAC I/NET Seven displays the MCU Parameters
window (see Figure 2-17).
5. Choose the MCU Type from the drop-down list.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-25

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Figure 2-16. MCU Configuration – Address

Figure 2-17. MCU Parameters

6. If you set the MCU Type to “DPU,” “DIO,” or “DIU,” in the

previous step, perform the following actions:
a. Choose a Device Type from the drop down list.
b. If the Device Type is “DPU7920”, choose an option for
the Downloadable setting (either Yes or No). Only the
SCU1200, SCU1280, SCU1284, and the DPU7920 with a
DPU48K add-on board can be downloaded. Selecting a
Device Type of SCU1200, SCU1280, SCU1284, or OP5
forces the Downloadable setting to Yes.
When you set this parameter to Yes, the DPU or SCU
gets included in the list of downloadable devices that
appears in the DPU Software Restore editor (refer to
“Performing a Software Restore to DPUs and SCUs” on
page 4-17 for more information).

2-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

c. If the Device Type is SCU1200, SCU1280, or SCU1284,

set the Number of points to either 1 or 2. Choose 1 if the
SCU is configured to operate in the “single-address”
mode (DIP switch S1-6 = OFF). Choose 2 if the SCU is
configured to operate in the “double-address” mode
(DIP switch S1-6 = ON).
In order to control more than two doors, the SCU1284 must
be configured to operate in the double-address mode.
d. Enter the Revision number. If the device is loaded with
software revision 3.00 or later and is successfully commu-
nicating with your host workstation, this value will be
filled in automatically.
7. Select OK to save this configuration.

Adding a Door Point

If you added a DPU, SCU1284, or OP5 to your network, then you
can add door points. Use the following steps to add a door point to
the network configuration:
1. Depending on the interface you are using, perform one of the
following actions:
✧ Using System View, right-click any DPU7910, DPU7920,
SCU1284, or OP5 in the left-side pane and select Add
Child Item from the resulting popup menu.
✧ Using NETCON, perform the following two steps:
✢ Highlight a DPU7910, DPU7920, SCU1284, or OP5
in the MCU Summary and select Penetrate. The
system displays the Door Summary, shown in
Figure 2-18.
✢ Click Add.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-27

TCON299–05/10
Defining the Network Configuration Setup and Network Configuration

Figure 2-18. Door Summary

TAC I/NET Seven displays the Door Address window (see

Figure 2-19).

Figure 2-19. Door Address Editor

2. Enter the bit offset of the Door (8 or 9) and select OK to save

the address. This field will be read-only (i.e., forced to bit
offset 8) for an OP5.
TAC I/NET Seven displays the Door Parameters dialog (see
Figure 2-20).

Figure 2-20. Door Parameters Editor

2-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Defining the Network Configuration

3. Enter the Name of the door and select OK to save the door
name and return to the Door Summary.
4. Click Close to save this configuration.

Adding a Floor
If you added a door to your network, then you can add floors. Use
the following steps to add a floor to the network configuration:
1. Depending on the interface you are using, perform one of the
following actions:
✧ Using System View, right-click a door in the left-side
pane and select Add Child Item from the resulting popup
menu.
✧ Using NETCON, perform the following two steps:
✢ Highlight a door in the Door Summary and select
Penetrate. The system displays the Floor Summary.
✢ Click Add.
The system displays the Floor Editor (see Figure 2-21).

Figure 2-21. Floor Editor

2. Enter the floor Index number (from 1 to 79).

3. Enter the floor enable DO Point address using the LLSSPPBB
format (i.e., link, station, point, and bit offset). For example, a
DO point on link 03, station 02, point 36, and bit offset 00
would be: 03023600 DO.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-29

TCON299–05/10
Network Functions Setup and Network Configuration

4. Select OK to accept your changes. The system will then

display the Floor Parameters Editor (see Figure 2-22).

Figure 2-22. Floor Parameters Editor

5. Type a Point Name for the floor enable point. This name may
be up to 16 characters long.
6. Type a Floor Name for the floor enable point. This name may
be up to 16 characters long.
7. Select OK to accept your changes.

Network Functions

Note: Network functions are not equalized when File Equalization is

enabled. Refer to Chapter 3, TAC I/NET Seven Configuration in
TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for more information
about File Equalization.
Network Functions are not available on a workstation configured as a
Remote Client in a client/server network. Refer to Chapter 3, TAC
I/NET Seven Configuration in TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting
Started, for more information about using a client/server configura-
tion.

Network functions are a grouping of functions that let you manip-

ulate controllers remotely. These functions are:
✦ Synchronize the date/time of your controllers.
✦ Select automatic DCU save for some or all of your controllers.
✦ Select broadcast days for special day schedules.

2-30 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Network Functions

✦ Display off normal points.

✦ Display disabled points.
✦ Print Database

DCU Synchronization
This function lets you periodically synchronize the hardware clocks
in your controllers with the host PC clock. While the clocks
provided are quite accurate, they do drift slightly over long periods
of time. This function lets you automatically re-establish synchro-
nization at a specified frequency, without any further action on
your part. Synchronization will occur at 3:15 a.m. (03:15) on the
appropriate days.
You can also use this editor to synchronize daylight savings time
settings in your controllers.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Network Functions from the
main menu. The system displays the screen shown in
Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23. Network Functions Screen

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-31

TCON299–05/10
Network Functions Setup and Network Configuration

2. Select the link of the controller(s) you wish to synchronize

from the drop-down list. The system now displays the
controllers on the link you selected.
3. Above the list are six push-buttons. Select Sync.
4. Select those controllers you wish to mark for DCU synchroni-
zation by either clicking on individual controllers in the list or
by selecting Set All. Controllers that are marked for synchro-
nization will show the frequency of synchronization (Day,
Week, Month) in the Sync column of the list. Each click on a
controller in the list will toggle the Sync function between the
next selection starting from Day.
5. Select the frequency (None, Day, Week, or Month) of
synchronization by choosing the radio button.
6. If you wish to synchronize daylight savings time settings in
your controllers, perform the following steps:
a. Click the Setup button. This causes the Daylight Savings
Sync editor to open.

Figure 2-24. Daylight Savings Synchronization

b. Click Enable. The Begin date and End date parameters

become active.
c. Enter the Begin date. Enter the month (1-12), week (1-
5), and day (1-7) daylight savings time begins (Standard
Time ends). On that date at 2:00 a.m. (02:00), the DCU
clock moves ahead one hour.

2-32 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Network Functions

Use the following guidelines for setting the date:

January is month 1, February is month 2, and so on,

Month
ending with December as month 12.

Enter a 1 if the daylight savings start falls during the

Week 1
first seven days of the month (1-7).

Enter a 2 if the daylight savings start falls during the

Week 2
second seven days of the month (8-14).

Enter a 3 if the daylight savings start falls during the

Week 3
third seven days of the month (15-21).

Enter a 4 if the daylight savings start falls during the

Week 4
fourth seven days of the month (22-28).

Enter a 5 if the daylight savings start falls after the

Week 5
28th day of the month.

Sunday is day 1, Monday is day 2, and so on, ending

Day
with Saturday as day 7.

d. Enter the End date. Follow the procedure described

above to enter the month, week, and day the DCU clock
moves back one hour and return to Standard Time. This
process occurs at 2:00 a.m. (02:00) on the specified day.
e. Select OK to save these settings and to close this editor.
7. Select OK when finished.

Automatic DCU Save

If you activate this option for a particular controller, the system
performs an automatic save of controller programming each 24-
hour period at 3:15 a.m. (03:15) provided a change has been made
to the programming.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Network Functions from the
main menu. The system displays the screen shown in
Figure 2-23.
2. Select the link of the controller(s) you wish to automatically
save from the drop-down list. The system now displays the
controllers on the link you selected.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-33

TCON299–05/10
Network Functions Setup and Network Configuration

3. Above the list are six push-buttons. Select the Save push-
button.
4. Select those controllers you wish to mark for Automatic DCU
Save by either clicking on individual controllers in the list or
by selecting All Yes. Controllers that are marked for Auto-
matic DCU Save will show a “Y” in the Save column of the
list. Each click on a controller in the list will toggle the Save
function between “–” and “Y”.

Special Day Broadcast

Use this option to distribute a previously-defined special day
schedule to selected controllers as needed. Special day
start/stop/cycle schedules are defined using the Time Scheduling
point extension editor and are assigned to a particular Special Day
(S1–S7). These TAC I/NET Seven features are discussed in detail in
the chapter dealing with host functions in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Network Functions from the
main menu. The system displays the screen shown in
Figure 2-23.
2. From the drop-down list, select the link of the controller(s) to
which you want to distribute the special day schedule. The
system now displays the controllers on the link you selected.
3. Above the list are six push-buttons. Click the Spec push-
button.
4. Select the type of Special Days to broadcast by choosing one
of the following radio buttons:
✧ None — Remove current special day broadcast setting.
✧ Special Day — Broadcast a single special day schedule
definition to all controllers marked with “S”.
✧ Global — Broadcast a list of special day schedule defini-
tions to all controllers marked with “G”.

2-34 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Network Functions

5. Select those controllers you wish to mark for special day

broadcast by either clicking on individual controllers in the
list or by selecting Set All. Controllers that are marked for
special day broadcast will show the type (“-” for None, “S” for
Special Day, or “G” for Global) in the Spec column of the list.
Subsequent clicks on controllers in the list will cycle the
Special Days setting to the next option.
6. Select Setup to define special day schedules and broadcast
date/time. Depending on the type of Special Days chosen in
Step 4, one of the following editors will open:
Special Day — The Special Day Broadcast Setup editor opens.
Refer to “Special Day Broadcast Setup” below for instructions
on using this editor.
Global — The Global Special Days editor opens. Refer to
“Global Special Day Broadcast Setup” on page 2-36 for
instructions on using this editor.
Special Day Broadcast Setup
1. Enter the special day schedule starting date in the Date edit
box. You may enter the date as 4 5, 4/5, or 04 05 as long as a
space or “/” divides the month from the day.

Figure 2-25. Special Day Broadcast Editor

2. Enter the Duration of the special day schedule (0–127 days). If

you enter a “1,” the system executes the changed schedule only
on the date entered in the date field.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-35

TCON299–05/10
Network Functions Setup and Network Configuration

3. Activate the special day schedule (S1–S7) checkboxes for

broadcast.
Broadcast Time
1. Enter the date for the special day schedule to be broadcast to
the controller in the Date edit box.
2. Enter the time for the broadcast in the Time edit box in 24-
hour format.
3. Select OK when finished.
If you return to this editor before the special day schedule has
expired, the date and time you enter here continue to appear in this
field.

Note: If a communication failure occurs and the system is unable to broad-

cast the special day schedule to all selected controllers, it defines and
displays the extent of this failure as a message event and sends the
error message “Special day lost” along with the Link and Station
address of the failed transaction. Always check the messages after
you issue a special day broadcast to make sure the broadcast was
successful.

Global Special Day Broadcast Setup

This editor summarizes all currently defined execution dates for
special day schedules. Up to 32 execution dates can be defined.
The following options are available:
✦ Add – Use this option to create a new execution date. When
you select this option, the system displays the Special Days
editor.
✦ Delete – Use this option to delete an existing execution date.
Delete an execution date by selecting it in the summary and
pressing Delete.
✦ Modify – Use this option to modify an existing execution
date. When you highlight an entry in the summary and select
this option, the system displays the Special Days editor.

2-36 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Network Functions

Figure 2-26. Global Special Days Broadcast Editor

Broadcast Time
You may select to delay the broadcast of the special day schedule
execution dates. Enter the date and time for the scheduled broad-
cast. This does NOT have to be the same day as the date you want
the special day schedule(s) to go into effect.
1. Enter the date for the broadcast to occur in the Date edit box.
2. Enter the time for the broadcast in the Time edit box in 24-
hour format.
3. Select OK when finished.
If you return to this editor before the special day schedule has
expired, the date and time you enter here continue to appear in this
field.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-37

TCON299–05/10
Network Functions Setup and Network Configuration

Broadcast Review
If you are not sure which Special Day schedule you selected to be
broadcast, connect to the controller in question and inspect the
Special Day editor. Refer to Chapter 10, Dynamic Control, for
details on the Special Day and Time Scheduling editors.

Off Normal Points

Off normal is another term used to describe points that are in an
alarm state. Use this option to select controllers containing the
points you want to inspect for off normal status when you select the
Off normal Points option from the Summary options menu. Refer
to Chapter 7, Summaries, for more information on the Summary
option.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Network Functions from the
main menu. The system displays the screen shown in
Figure 2-23.
2. From the drop-down list, select the link of the controller(s)
you wish to interrogate for off normal point status. The
system now displays the controllers on the link you selected.
3. Above the list are six push-buttons. Select the Nrml push-
button.
4. Choose those controllers you wish to mark for interrogation
by either clicking on individual controllers in the list or by
selecting All Yes. Controllers that are marked for interroga-
tion will show a “Y” in the Nrml column of the list. Each click
on a controller in the list will toggle the Nrml function
between “–” and “Y”.

Disabled Points
Disabled is another term used to describe points that are in test or
manual mode. Use this option to select controllers containing the
points you want to inspect for disabled status when you select the
Disabled Points option from the Summary options menu. Refer to
Chapter 7, Summaries, for more information on the Summary
option.

2-38 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Network Functions

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Network Functions from the

main menu. The system displays the screen shown in
Figure 2-23.
2. Choose the link of the controller(s) you wish to interrogate
for test/manual point status from the drop-down list. The
system now displays the controllers on the link you selected.
3. Above the list are six push-buttons. Select the Dsbl push-
button.
4. Choose those controllers you wish to mark for interrogation
by either clicking on individual controllers in the list or by
selecting All Yes. Controllers that are marked for interroga-
tion will show a “Y” in the Dsbl column of the list. Each click
on a controller in the list will toggle the Dsbl function
between “–” and “Y”.
5. Select OK when finished.

Database Print
Use this option to print a copy of any or all controller database
point or extension entries. This lets you get a printout of exactly
what points and point extensions you have added to the controllers
on your system.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Network Functions from the
main menu. The system displays the screen shown in
Figure 2-23.
2. Choose the link of the controller(s) you wish to print from
the drop-down list. The system now displays the controllers
on the link you selected.
3. Above the list are six push-buttons. Select the Print push-
button.
4. Choose the controllers you wish to mark for printing by
either clicking on individual controllers in the list or by
selecting All Yes. Controllers that are marked for printing
will show a “Y” in the Print column of the list. Each click on a
controller in the list will toggle the Print function between “–”
and “Y”.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-39

TCON299–05/10
Network Functions Setup and Network Configuration

5. Select the Setup push-button at the bottom of the window.

The window shown in Figure 2-27 appears.

Figure 2-27. Database Print Parameter Selection

6. If you want the database report to print to the screen activate

the Print to screen checkbox.
7. Select the database items that you want to print by clicking on
the Select checkbox.
8. To select multiple links follow Steps 2 through 6 for each link
and controller, selecting Close from the Database Print
window to return to Network Functions, until you have
selected each controller.

Note: The TAC I/NET Seven system lets you select more than one link at a
time but this results in a very lengthy printing session. If you do not
want to tie up the printer for an extended period of time select only
one link at a time.

2-40 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Setup and Network Configuration Network Functions

If N/A appears in the print column this means that the station exists
for this controller, but no save file exists in the save file directory.

9. When you have selected the appropriate parameters, select

Print to start the printing.
10. When you have selected the appropriate parameters, select
Close to return to the Network Functions window.
Since database prints may be very long, make sure no manual
control commands from the PC are needed during the time
required for printing.
11. Select Close to return to the Network Functions window.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 2-41

TCON299–05/10
Network Functions Setup and Network Configuration

2-42 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

3
10
Tap Configuration

Tap Configuration Editors

Use the Tap editors to set parameters for each Tap during initial
system configuration, and when you add a new Tap. Specify the Tap
address, the LAN or host name, the baud rate, and other informa-
tion relating to how you want to use the Tap in your system.
Before configuring your Taps, make sure each Tap address is set
properly with the switches found on the Tap. Refer to TCON101,
Model 7800 Series Tap and Repeater Installation Guide, for informa-
tion on Tap switch settings.
To edit a Tap, you must connect through the system to the level at
which the Tap resides. The Host Tap connects directly to your
workstation and can be edited at any time. To edit a Link Tap, you
must connect to a link. To edit a Site Tap, you must connect to a
site. As you penetrate the system, the address of each connected Tap
appears in the status bar at the bottom of the TAC I/NET Seven
window.

Tap Configuration
When you update parameters in a Tap, the changes take effect when
you disconnect from the Tap. If the changes are to a shared Dial
Tap, the changes take effect when the last connected host discon-
nects from the Tap.
Use the following steps to configure a Tap. Refer to TCON300, TAC
I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a description of Tap
configuration parameters.
1. Connect to the desired Tap.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 3-1

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Editors Tap Configuration

2. Select Edit  Tap  Host Tap (or Link Tap, or Site Tap) from
the main menu. The system displays the appropriate Tap
Configuration editor (see Figure 3-1 for an example of the
Host Tap Configuration editor).

Figure 3-1. Host Tap Configuration Editor

The Link Tap and Site Tap configuration editors are similar to
the Host Tap Configuration editor. This procedure describes
the differences.
3. Assign a Tap name to the Host, Link, or Site Tap (up to 16
characters).
4. The LAN addr (0 to 63) identifies the Tap address on the
controller LAN. When a 7801 Tap is connected to a Host
LAN, the LAN address is set by DIP switches on the Tap and
this field does not appear.
5. Depending on the type of Tap, do one of the following:
✧ On Host and Site Taps, use the spindial to choose a LAN
speed.
✧ On Link Taps, use the spindial to choose a Speed.
✧ On Dial Taps, choose a Speaker setting from the drop-
down list (Off, Auto, or On).
6. The Firmware Status parameters show the current Revision
number and Revision date. These fields are display only and
cannot be edited.

3-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Tap Configuration Editors

7. Select the Distribution group number (1–4) to match the

distribution group of the host PCs to which you want the Tap
to send messages.
8. Set the Message mask to match the mask(s) of the host PCs
to which you want the Tap to send messages.
9. Set the Message priority to None, Routine, Priority, or Crit-
ical.

Note: When utilizing dual Tap functions (Site Tap and LAN Tap) in a
7716, 7718, 7728, 7756, 7780, 7791, 7792, 7793 (configured as -03 or
-06), or 7798, the values entered under “Control Parameters” in one
Tap editor are used by all Tap editors emulated within the same
DCU. Only one set of “Control Parameters” have been provided in
each DCU.

10. The % Full field is for AD/AA LAN Taps only. It specifies the
number of messages that will be stored in the LAN/Site Tap’s
RAM, as a percent of the total available memory, before the
Tap calls the host PC. This is a deferred dialing parameter for
“Priority” alarms.
A setting of “–” causes the Tap to immediately initiate a call
whenever it receives a Priority message, regardless of the
message buffer usage (i.e., the same functionality as the
receipt of a Critical message). When using this setting, the Tap
will ignore the Dial Later setting described in the next step.
11. The Dial later fields are for AD/AA LAN Taps only. These
fields specify the time interval that must transpire following a
“priority” alarm before the LAN/Site Tap calls the host PC.
These are deferred dialing parameters for “Priority” alarms.
The Dial Later settings become the initial value of an elapsed-
time counter. This counter begins counting down as soon as
the Tap receives a priority message. When the time period has
elapsed, the Tap initiates a call to the corresponding host to
upload all messages in its buffer. This call may also be initi-
ated before the time has elapsed if the % Full criteria is met
(see Step 10 above). When message uploading is complete, the
Tap hangs up. If the Tap then receives another Priority
message, this process repeats itself.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 3-3

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Editors Tap Configuration

Integrated Dial Function

This function provides communication between a workstation and
one or more LANs. The workstation can dial the LAN, but the LAN
cannot dial the workstation. You must use a Hayes or Hayes-
compatible modem and a 78010 Tap at each LAN you want to call.
You must have a second Hayes or Hayes-compatible modem,
installed under Windows and connected to the workstation.
Define the phone numbers for the PC using the Phone Numbers
editor. This editor is only be available if your Link type, defined in
Configure, is Integrated Dial or Integrated NPR Dial.
You must configure the modems attached at the call initiating end
(modem connected to the host PC) and the call receiving end
(78010 Tap on the controller LAN) so they communicate with each
other. Refer to the “Communication” chapter in TCON300, TAC
I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for the necessary modem
switch settings.
Define the address, name, and telephone number of up to 64
remote sites per host.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Phone numbers from the
main menu. The system displays the Phone Number editor
(see Figure 3-2).
This editor allows you to add, delete, modify, or copy phone
numbers. This editor also lists the remote sites you can access
from this host. If you have not added any sites, the fields are
blank.
2. Select Add. The system displays the Phone Numbers - Add
editor (see Figure 3-3).
3. Enter an Index number. This number controls the order in
which the phone numbers are displayed in the editor.
4. Enter a Name for the remote site (up to 16 characters).
5. Specify the Phone number (up to 31 characters). Start the
number with a “T” for tone dialing. No “T” indicates pulse
dialing. Use a comma to indicate a two-second pause.

3-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Tap Configuration Editors

Figure 3-2. Phone Numbers Editor

Figure 3-3. Phone Numbers - Add Editor

78060 and 78061 Tap Configuration

These Taps provide two-way communication between one or more
controller LANs and a PC using a 7804x Tap, or between the
controller LANs and a host LAN using a 7805x Tap.
1. Ensure you are connected to a site (i.e., a controller LAN)
through a 78040/1 or 78050/1 Tap, or through an Ethernet
connection.
2. Depending on your connection to the site and your worksta-
tion's configuration, use one of the following methods to
access the Site Tap Configuration editor:
✧ Select Edit  Tap  LAN from the main menu.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 3-5

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Editors Tap Configuration

✧ Select Edit  Tap  Remote Site Tap Configuration

from the main menu. Then choose a device from the Dial
Tap Selection editor.
✧ Select Edit  Remote Site Tap Configuration from the
main menu. Then choose a device from the Dial Tap
Selection editor.

Figure 3-4. 78060/1 Tap Configuration Editor

The first part of the screen is similar to the configuration

screens for other Tap types. Complete the Tap Details and
Distribution Parameters just as you would for any other Tap.
3. The Group Details panel allows you to establish group param-
eters. In the Telephone Number Details you will link each
phone number to one of these groups. This capability links
specific phone numbers with specific alarm message types.
You may define up to eight groups.

3-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Tap Configuration Editors

Assign a system address (0–99) to the Link for each group you
wish to define. The system link address must be the same as
that defined in the Configure program for a 7804x or 7805x
Tap, if you want to receive on-line messages.
4. Set the Dial mask positions for each group you wish to
define.
5. You may specify up to eight phone numbers in the Telephone
Number Details. Each phone number may use up to 31 char-
acters (this includes any commas or “T” characters in the
number). To add a new number, select Add.
6. The Telephone Number Details editor appears. Select the
Group to which you want to link this phone number.
You may link all eight available phone numbers to one group,
or you may have one phone number per group, or any combi-
nation in between. You may not, however, have more than
eight groups or eight phone numbers.
7. Select the Type of connection to be made. Available options
include a variety of baud rates (the highest currently available
is 9600) and a Beeper type.
8. Use the Timeout field to define the number of seconds (30 or
60) the Tap waits when calling out before hanging up if a
connection is not made.
9. Enter the Telephone number for the connection.
The number must match the telephone number of the 7804x
or 7805x Tap entered in the Network Configuration editor.
Site Tap Save / Restore
The Site Tap Save and Site Tap Restore functions allow you to save
the Tap configuration to a file and restore the configuration at a
later time, much like the Station Save and Restore functions at the
controller level.

Note: You must be connected to the Site Tap to perform these functions.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 3-7

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Editors Tap Configuration

To save the file, click the Site Tap Save button on the Taps toolbar.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the request. Click Yes to save
the file.
To restore the configuration, click the Site Tap Restore button on
the Taps toolbar. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the request.
Click Yes to perform the restore.

Printer Tap
The Printer Tap allows messages to be printed directly from a
controller LAN or host LAN without the use of a host PC. Use the
following procedure to configure a Printer Tap. You must be
connected to the Printer Tap.
1. Select Edit  Tap  Printer from the main menu. The system
displays the Printer Tap Configuration editor.
2. Enter the Tap name (up to 16 characters).
3. The Firmware Status panel shows the current revision
number and date the revision occurred. These fields are
display only, you cannot edit them.
4. Using the spindial, choose a Baud rate.
5. Choose a CTS handshake.
6. Using the spindial choose the number of Data bits.
7. Using the spindial choose the number of Stop bits.
8. Choose a Parity from the drop-down list.
9. Set the Group masks as required to determine the masking
filter for all messages, alarms, or transactions to be printed.
10. Click OK to save the settings and exit this procedure.

3-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Tap Configuration Multiple Site Dial

Multiple Site Dial

The multiple site dial feature of TAC I/NET Seven allows you to
connect to multiple dial sites at one time from a graphic system
page. Each site must have been previously defined and saved in the
Network Configuration editor. You may make these connections by
double-clicking graphic dial icons on graphic pages.
For more information about this function, refer to “Adding
Multiple Site Dial” on page 8-68.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 3-9

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

4
28
Controller Configuration

Controller Configuration/Status
The Controller Configuration/Status editor lets you display and
edit various parameters associated with each selected controller.

Configuring the Controller

Use the following procedures to configure the controller. Refer to
the Controller Functions chapter in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven
Technical Reference Guide, for additional information.
1. Select Connect or click the Connect tool on the Connect
toolbar. The system displays a list of available links or control-
lers, depending on your configuration. Select a link and click
OK.

Note: Links that are not currently available, are displayed with an asterisk
to the left of the link name.

If you selected a link from the list, you are now connected to
that link. If you selected a controller, then you are now
connected to that controller and you may skip step 2 (go to
step 3).
2. Select Connect again. The system displays a list of available
controllers. Select one and click OK. You are now connected
to a controller.
3. Select Edit  Controller  Configuration from the main
menu or click the Configuration tool on the Controller
toolbar. The system displays the DCU Configuration editor
(see Figure 4-1).
4. Configure the following parameters:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-1

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration/Status Controller Configuration

Figure 4-1. DCU Configuration editor

✧ Controller Details
✧ Distribution Parameters
✧ Sunrise/Sunset
✧ Daylight Savings
✧ Program Extensions
Procedures for configuring these parameters are described
below.
5. Use the following parameters for informational purposes
only:
✧ Memory Status
✧ Database Last Changed
✧ Loading Details

4-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Controller Configuration/Status

✧ Firmware Status
✧ Controller Memory
These parameters are described below, following these proce-
dures.
6. Select OK to accept your changes and to leave the DCU
Configuration editor.
Controller Details
Use the following steps to configure controller details:
1. Enter a Name for the controller. Use up to 16 characters. The
default name for each device is the controller type (i.e. DCU
7716). If the device is downloadable and has not been down-
loaded with firmware, the text “boot” appears next to the type
(i.e. DCU 7716 Boot).
2. Enter a Date. This field shows the current date according to
the controller. This date matches the date on the PC if you
perform a station restore. If you wish to change the date, enter
it in mm/dd/yy (month/day/year) format.
3. Select Download Date. The date is immediately downloaded
to the controller.
4. Enter the Time. This field shows the current time according to
the controller. The time is entered in 24-hour (military)
format. AM hours are entered as the regular time. PM hours
are entered as the time plus 12 hours.
For example, 3 p.m. is entered as 15:00:00 (3 + 12 = 15). If
you leave the minutes or seconds field blank, the system
defaults to zero minutes, zero seconds.
If you perform a station restore the time is taken from the PC.
This is important to remember if your PC is located in a
different time zone than the controller. If this is the case you
will always want to use this editor to set the correct time after
a station restore.
5. Select Download Time. The time is immediately downloaded
to the controller.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-3

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration/Status Controller Configuration

Distribution Parameters
Use the following steps to configure distribution parameters:
1. Choose a Distribution Group. All message masks are assigned
to one of four distribution groups. The distribution group
extends the number of possible masks in a system to 32.
When a message is sent from a DCU to a host, it must match a
message mask in the assigned distribution group. Each distri-
bution group may contain up to eight masks.

Note: Dial Taps are only capable of generating AD/AA messages with
masks from distribution Group 1.

2. Define a Message Mask. This option lets you determine

which PC stations receive messages from this controller.
There are eight available mask positions. The only require-
ment is that at least one mask position and the distribution
group selected for this controller must match a masking posi-
tion and distribution group selected in the host configuration
editor. If any of the eight mask positions assigned to the
controller match any of the eight mask positions entered for
the host, and the masks are in the same group, the host will
receive the message.
The default for each of the eight positions is deactivated ().
Before you activate masking positions here, you should know
your system configuration in order to create the appropriate
matching masking patterns. Activate () the appropriate
masking positions.
3. Choose a Message Priority from the drop-down list. There
are three priority levels: Routine, Priority, and Critical. A
selection of None indicates no priority. This only prevents
controller messages (such as power failure, sign-on, sign-off,
etc.) from being sent to the host. All point-related messages
may still be received at the host.

4-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Controller Configuration/Status

The level you assign here refers to messages originating from

this controller. Routine messages are for direct connect
systems. A direct connect host will receive any message with a
priority of Routine, Priority, or Critical. Only Priority and
Critical messages are applicable to dial Taps.
The message priorities behave as follows when used with an
AD/AA LAN Tap:
✧ Routine – Ignore the message.
✧ Priority – Report the message after the dial Tap’s Percent
Full limit is reached or the Time Interval has transpired.
✧ Critical – Report the message immediately.
4. If the controller is loaded with firmware dated 08/21/06 or
later, you can implement reliable messaging by specifying a
Reliable Tap. Refer to Reliable Messaging in TCON300, TAC
I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information
about this TAC I/NET Seven feature.
Sunrise/Sunset
cSunrise and sunset are automatically calculated from the informa-
tion you enter here as well as the information in the next section
titled Daylight Savings. Use the following steps to enter the longi-
tude, latitude, and time zone of the controller.
1. Enter Longitude in degrees, minutes, and direction (west or
east).
2. Enter Latitude in degrees, minutes, and direction (north or
south). This feature does not work above latitudes of 68
degrees north or below 68 degrees south.
3. Enter a Time zone between 1 and 24. Time zones begin at
Greenwich, England (Greenwich Mean Time - zone 1) and
increase from east to west. Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a time zone world map.
Enter zero here to disable this function. Enter a decimal
number for regions in half-time zones. TAC I/NET Seven
rounds the number to the nearest half.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-5

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration/Status Controller Configuration

Longitude, latitude, and time zone information can be found in a

variety of public places. Try newspapers, atlases, almanacs, and
libraries.
Daylight Savings
Use the following steps to enter daylight savings data.
1. Enter the Begin date. Enter the month (1-12), week (1-5),
and day (1-7) daylight savings time begins (Standard Time
ends). On that date at 2:00 a.m. (02:00), the DCU clock
moves ahead one hour.
Use the following guidelines for setting the date:

January is month 1, February is month 2, and so on,

Month
ending with December as month 12.

Enter a 1 if the daylight savings start falls during the first

Week 1
seven days of the month (1-7).

Enter a 2 if the daylight savings start falls during the

Week 2
second seven days of the month (8-14).

Enter a 3 if the daylight savings start falls during the third

Week 3
seven days of the month (15-21).

Enter a 4 if the daylight savings start falls during the fourth

Week 4
seven days of the month (22-28).

Enter a 5 if the daylight savings start falls after the 28th day
Week 5
of the month.

Sunday is day 1, Monday is day 2, and so on, ending with

Day
Saturday as day 7.

2. Enter the End date. Follow the procedure described above to

enter the month, week, and day the DCU clock moves back
one hour and return to Standard Time. This process occurs at
2:00 a.m. (02:00) on the specified day.
Program Extensions
Use the following steps to define program extensions.
1. Activate () or deactivate () the Time scheduling exten-
sion.

4-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Controller Configuration/Status

When activated, all the time scheduling program extensions

in this controller are stopped. Once activated, the controller
looks back as far as midnight to determine the proper point
state and during the next minute issues the proper command.
When time scheduling is deactivated and the controller has
time scheduling programs defined, the individual loads
remain in their state that existed when the program was
turned off.
2. Activate () Temperature Control to turn the temperature
control program extensions in this controller On. Deactivate
() to turn the temperature control program extensions Off.
3. Activate () or deactivate () the Demand control exten-
sion.
If you select the deactivated state, the demand program stops.
All loads that were currently shed by the demand program are
restored after honoring their minimum OFF (minimum trip
or close) time as defined for the individual point. Even if
turned off, the Demand program will continue to gather
KWH data and predict KW demand values.
4. Activate () or deactivate () the All Lights On/Off exten-
sion (available on the 7780 controller only).
This performs the same function as codes 8 and 9 on the
hand-held console. Activating () All Lights On enables
input address 0000 to be used to energize all associated RR7
relays. Activating All Lights Off enables input point address
0001 to be used to deenergize all associated RR7 relays. This
function does not permanently override lighting circuit
control commands. Even after an All Lights On/Off
command has been issued, the lighting zone can still issue
controls to the lighting circuit.

Note: When using “All Lights On/Off ”, input 0000DI and 0001DI should
not be used for any other input point. If you do, lighting control will
not be as expected.

5. If the controller is an ICI (I/NET Communications Interface),

select the ICI controller type from the drop-down box.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-7

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration/Status Controller Configuration

Viewing Controller Status

In addition to configuring the controller, use the DCU Configura-
tion editor to view controller status. The following controller infor-
mation is available from the DCU Configuration editor.
Memory Status
These fields are informational only. You cannot make changes. The
Total Bytes Available field shows the total memory space available
in the controller for your modifications and additions. The Bytes
remaining field shows the unused memory space. Not all unused
memory is available for use.
Database Last Changed
These fields are informational only. You cannot make changes. The
Save file field shows the date of the most recent Station Save. The
Controller field shows the date of the most recent changes.
Changes that have not been saved are displayed with an asterisk.

Loading Details
Note: This field contains information that is usually of interest only to
high-level users. This information can also be obtained using the
hand-held console.

These fields are display only. You cannot make changes. The first
field shows the controller Processor % loading (0-100%). This is
simply an indication of how busy the controller is. If this number
is 100, control actions which are supposed to occur are lost or
delayed. The second field, LAN % loading, shows the percentage of
controller LAN communication attributable to this controller.

Firmware Status
These fields are informational only. You cannot make changes.
These fields list the revision number and date of the firmware
installed in the controller.

4-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Editing the Database while Offline

Controller Memory
Note: This field contains information that is usually of interest only to
high-level users. This information can also be obtained using the
hand-held console.

Address lets you specify a memory address (up to four characters)

and Contents displays the location value (0000-FFFF) within the
controller. You cannot control the value, you can only display it.

Editing the Database while Offline

TAC I/NET Seven allows you to add controllers, and copy or edit
controller databases when you are not actually connected to the
controllers. This will allow DCU parameters, Host Access Control
parameters, Host parameters and Graphics pages to be created,
added and/or modified without a physical connection.
Before attempting to perform offline edits of your database, you
should ensure that the latest version of the .SAV file is present on
the client from which you will be performing the edits. To down-
load the .SAV file, perform a Station Save. For more information on
Station Saves, refer to “Station Save and Restore” on page 4-12.
To perform edits while in offline mode, select System  Work
Offline.

Note: If you elect to work offline after a connection has been made, your
connection will be terminated automatically and you must reconnect
before you can resume working in online mode.

Connecting Offline
When Connect is selected, and you are working in offline mode,
the Connect Offline dialog will be presented. This will allow you to
select the .SAV file you wish to edit from among a list of those avail-
able. This dialog will display the Link address, station address,
controller type, station name, number of stations, save date and
filename. Additionally, you may Add, Delete, and/or Copy your
files.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-9

TCON299–05/10
Editing the Database while Offline Controller Configuration

Figure 4-2. Connect Offline Dialog

Once you have highlighted the file you wish to edit and pressed OK,
select Edit from the main menu and choose either Host Computer
or Controller. You may then select the editor you wish to modify
using the sub-menus presented in the same way you would when
operating in Online mode.
Once you have finished modifying your .SAV files, perform a
Station Restore to have the changes applied globally. For more
information on Station Restores, please see “Station Save and
Restore” on page 4-12.
Adding a .SAV File Offline
To add a .SAV file to the system directory while working in offline
mode, select Add from the Connect Offline dialog. You must
provide a Link number, Station number, controller type, and enter
the number of stations before the file can be created.

1. Either manually enter or use the spin dials to select the Link
number. The Link number must be between 00 and 99.
2. Either manually enter or use the spin dials to select the Station
number. The Station number must be between 00 and 63.

4-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Editing the Database while Offline

Figure 4-3. Offline Add Dialog

3. Using the drop-down list box, select the appropriate DCU

type from the list of those available.
4. Either manually enter or use the spin dials to select the
number of stations you wish to assign for your DCU type.
The maximum number of stations available is dependant on
the type of DCU you have selected. Refer to the table below
for more information.

Table 4-1. DCU Type Stations Available

Max
Offset DCU Type
Stations
0 7700 DCU 1
1 7750 ORB 2
2 7730 DCU 8
3 7760 UCI 1
4 7720 DCU 2
5 7770 ICI 1
6 7810 Tap 1
7 7716 PCU 1
8 7780 LCU 1
9 7718 PCU 1
10 7792 MRI 2
11 7791 DPI 1
12 7797 ICI 8
13 7728 PCU 1
14 7793 MCI 2

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-11

TCON299–05/10
Station Save and Restore Controller Configuration

Table 4-1. DCU Type Stations Available

Max
Offset DCU Type
Stations

15 7798 MCI 1
16 7756 PCU 1

Deleting a .SAV File Offline

To delete a .SAV file while working offline, select Delete from the
Connect Offline dialog. You will be prompted to confirm your
choice before the file is deleted.
Copying a .SAV File Offline
To copy a .SAV file while working offline, select Copy from the
Connect Offline dialog. This allows you to duplicate an existing
.SAV file with a new Link and/or Station number. If a file with the
same Link and Station number exists, you will be prompted to
replace the existing file.

Figure 4-4. Offline Copy Dialog

Station Save and Restore

This facility lets you save/restore controller database modifications
to/from the host PC. Automatic controller save is also available
(refer to Chapter 2, Setup and Network Configuration). Station
restore is used to restore a database to the controller from a previ-
ously saved version. This may be necessary if the database has been

4-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Station Save and Restore

corrupted following power outages that outlast the controller

battery's ability to retain memory or for large scale recurrent
seasonal changes to the controller that may be necessary at your
facility.

Station Save
Once modifications have been made to a controller database, save
the modifications to the Host PC’s hard disk or a diskette using the
following procedure:
1. Connect to the controller that has been modified.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Station Save, or click the Station
Save tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays the
following prompt:
Are you sure you want to save station XXX?
3. The default is Yes. Select Yes to perform the save.
The default Save directory is defined in TAC I/NET Seven’s Config-
uration program. The length of time the system needs to perform
the save is determined by a number of factors. If you are
performing the save through a modem, the save time increases. The
baud rate affects the save time: slower baud rate = longer save time.
Other factors also affect save time: LAN speed, number of points in
the controller, number of time schedules, number of calculations,
etc. The more points and point extensions associated with the
controller, the longer the save time. The save file is named
DCULLSS.SAV where LL is the link address and SS is the station
address of the controller associated with the save file.

Station Restore
Use this option to cold start and restore a database file to a specified
controller. This is useful if the controller database has been lost,
corrupted, or if you need to install a new controller. This avoids the
time-consuming job of reentering the entire program. Taps, of
course, do not require a database. After the station restore, the last
saved version of the programming can be restored to the controller
(refer to “Software Restore” on page 4-15).
Perform a station restore using the following procedure:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-13

TCON299–05/10
Station Save and Restore Controller Configuration

1. Connect to the controller to be restored.

2. Select Edit  Controller  Station Restore, or click the
Station Restore tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays the following prompt:
Are you sure you want to restore station XXX?
3. The default is Yes. Select Yes to perform the restore.
The restore procedure uses the Save directory specified in the
Configure program. The same factors that increase the duration of
a station save will have the same effect on a station restore.
Station Restore on a DPI
When you perform a station restore on a DPI, this cold starts the
DPI and then downloads the save file for the controller. This
includes points, Access Initiated Control, and Elevator Data.
Station Restore on a DPU
When you perform a station restore on a DPU or SCU1284, this
cold starts the device and then downloads all access control data
from the host, including Individual Data, Tenants, and Translation
table information. In addition, all points and extensions associated
with the DPU/SCU including Door extension, Personnel sched-
ules, and elevator extensions are downloaded from the DPI (not
the host).

The Memory Interface Processor Module

If the controller has a Memory Interface Processor (MIP) card
installed, you must download the controller’s software using the
Software Restore function (refer to “Software Restore” on page
4-15). Some controller types, including the 7716, 7718, 7780,
7791,7792,7793, 7728, 7797, and all models of SCUs are built on
downloadable platforms that enable them to receive a downloaded
software file without a MIP. Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven
Technical Reference Guide, for additional information concerning
the MIP module.

Note: If you install a MIP card, LAN address 63 is no longer valid for the
7803 LAN tap and the 78061 dial tap.

4-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Software Restore

Software Restore
The Software Restore download capability is similar to the Station
Restore option described above. While a station restore is used to
restore just the controller database, the software restore can be used
to restore the controller programming (firmware) and, if necessary,
the controller database.
Controller database information is stored in .SAV files that are
automatically created when you perform a controller save. If a .SAV
file does not exist for a particular controller, then you can’t perform
a database download.

Performing a Software Restore to Taps and Controllers

Software for Taps and controllers is stored in binary files added to
your system during the installation or upgrade process.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Software Restore, or click
the Software Restore tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the Software Restore screen (see Figure 4-5).

Figure 4-5. Software Restore Screen

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-15

TCON299–05/10
Software Restore Controller Configuration

This screen displays all the Taps and controllers that you
previously defined as downloadable in the Network Defini-
tion portion of the Network Configuration editor. Refer to
Chapter 2, Setup and Network Configuration, in this manual
for more information.
2. Use the Software and Database check boxes to control which
stations receive a download. If you check Software, the
selected station will receive a software download. If you check
Database, the selected station will receive a database down-
load.
You can use the SW Yes and DB Yes buttons to activate the
Software and Database check boxes, respectively, for all
stations. Use the All No button to deselect Software and
Database for all stations.
3. If necessary, define the drive and path to the directory that
contains the software to be restored in the Software Direc-
tory field. By default, TAC I/NET Seven restores software
from the Data directory defined in the Configure program.
4. If necessary, use the DPU/SCU button to select subLAN
devices to receive software and/or database downloads. Refer
to “Performing a Software Restore to DPUs and SCUs” on
page 4-17 for instructions on how to restore software in a
subLAN device.
5. When you have selected the necessary stations, select Down-
load to begin the software restore process.

The system begins downloading binary files to stations that

have a Y in the Software column. Database .SAV files are
downloaded to stations that have a Y in the Database
column.
6. Select Close to leave the Software Restore screen. If the soft-
ware restore is still running, it will continue until completed.
For each device selected, the system downloads any selected
controller/tap software first, and then the controller database. The
download of both types of information is completed before the
system moves on to the next device in the list. If a download was
successful, the check box in the Software or Database column

4-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Software Restore

clears, meaning you have just completed the download and there is
nothing more to download. If you try to download a controller
database and the check box does not clear for that controller, this
means a save file does not exist (the system could not find a data-
base to download) or a communications failure has occurred.
Default save files exist in the Save directory for the 7728, 7780 and
7791 controllers. These save files are downloaded to the appro-
priate controller if no save file exists with the correct link and
station address for the target controller. These save files contain the
necessary basics for initial programming.

Performing a Software Restore to DPUs and SCUs

TAC I/NET Seven displays the DPU Software Restore editor (see
Figure 4-6) when you select DPU/SCU from the Software Restore
editor described above.

Figure 4-6. DPU Software Restore Editor

This editor operates similarly to the Software Restore editor. The

only devices that are listed in this editor are DPU7920s that have a
DPU48K add-on board installed, all models of SCUs, and OP5

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-17

TCON299–05/10
Software Restore Controller Configuration

arming terminals. These devices must be saved in NETCON as

downloadable before they will appear in the DPU Software Restore
editor. Refer to “Adding an MCU” on page 2-25 for more informa-
tion.
All three versions of the SCU (i.e., the SCU1200, SCU1280, and
SCU1284) can be configured in NETCON as downloadable
devices. Defining an SCU as downloadable allows it to be included
in the DPU Software Restore editor. SCU1200 and SCU1280
controllers that you configure as downloadable, though not func-
tioning as door processing units, will also be included in the DPU
Software Restore editor’s list of downloadable devices.
Use the following procedures to perform a software restore to
DPUs and SCUs.
1. Use the Software and Database check boxes to control which
devices receive a download. The Database check boxes are
not provided for SCU1200 and SCU1280 controllers since
these devices do not store access control databases.
If you check Software, the selected device will receive a soft-
ware download. If you check Database, the selected device
will receive a database download.
You can use the SW Yes and DB Yes buttons to activate the
Software and Database check boxes, respectively, for all
devices. Use the All No button to deselect Software and Data-
base for all devices.

2. When you have selected the necessary DPUs, SCUs, and

OP5s, select Download to begin the software restore process.
3. The system begins downloading binary files to devices that
have a Y in the Software column. Database .SAV files are
downloaded to devices that have a Y in the Database column.
4. Select Close to leave the DPU Software Restore editor. If the
software restore is still running, it will continue until
completed.

4-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Dynamic Data Upload

Dynamic Data Upload

This option lets you upload the latest midnight SevenTrends data
for demand, override billing, consumption, and runtime statistics
to the appropriate SevenTrends tables in the host.
Select Edit  Controller  Dynamic Data Upload, or click the
Dynamic Data Upload tool on the Controller toolbar. The
following message appears:
Dynamic data upload request has been initiated
This option executes within 60 seconds of starting the upload.

Note: Each time you exercise this option a copy of the midnight data is
placed in the SevenTrends tables. This can cause duplicate data in
SevenTrends reports. Make sure the data has not been automatically
uploaded before exercising this option.

Defining and Entering Station Parameters

This section describes how to create, enter, and implement a
working database in a controller. Station parameter data is entered
into the controller using the following editors:
✦ Control Descriptions editor
✦ State Descriptions editor
✦ Conversion Coefficients editor
✦ Engineering Units editor
✦ Look-up Tables editor (7716, 7718, 7728, and 7756 controllers
only)
There is no substitute for thorough planning and record keeping in
the development and maintenance of your TAC I/NET Seven
system controller database. Once the database is entered into the
controller, any additions, deletions, or modifications can be saved
using the Station Save function. However, we recommend that you
always keep written notes of these modifications.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-19

TCON299–05/10
Defining and Entering Station Parameters Controller Configuration

As with other data entry processes we recommend you use the

forms located in TCON157, TAC I/NET Seven Forms and Work-
sheets. There are four main station parameter forms corresponding
to the first four station parameter categories described above.
These forms are referred to frequently throughout the remainder of
this chapter. We suggest you make extra copies of the forms (be sure
to keep one copy for an original) to use as work sheets when plan-
ning your database. The last station parameters editor, Lookup
Tables, is used only with the 7716, 7718, and 7728 controllers.

Entering the Station Parameters

Once you have designed the database for your facility using the
forms discussed above, you are ready to use the editors to enter the
station parameters and create the database. Refer to the Controller
Functions chapter in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Refer-
ence Guide, for a description of parameters used in the editors.
Make sure you are connected to the desired controller. If not, make
the necessary connections. Follow your worksheet and make the
appropriate entries using the procedures described below.
Control Descriptions and Commands
Use the Control Descriptions form as you go through this section.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Station Parameters  Control
Descriptions, or click the Control Descriptions tool on the
Station Parameters toolbar. The system displays the editor
shown in Figure 4-7.
2. Enter a control Description. Use up to four alphanumeric
characters. The first control description should always be the
start command of the pair, followed by the stop command.
3. Enter a time Delay from 0 to 127 seconds. This delay is
honored between multiple automatic control actions that use
the same control entry, when they are issued at the same time.

Note: You should not use Control Command Delays on VAV-UC, AHU-
UC, or HPMP-UC parent points, as well as the UC Pushbutton
Override Indicator point.

4-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Defining and Entering Station Parameters

Figure 4-7. Control Descriptions and Commands

4. Activate the appropriate control Command. (0 = de-ener-

gized output, 1 = energized output)
5. Repeat the steps above to define up to eight pairs of
commands.
6. Select OK to leave the editor.

Note: You must enter a set of three state descriptions in your 7791 DPI or
7793 MCI. These are SECR, UNLK, and LOCK. They describe a
three-state door point.

State Descriptions
Using the State Descriptions form as a worksheet, enter up to
sixteen pairs of descriptors. These are associated with various
discrete input and output points to describe the current state of the
device being controlled or monitored.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Station Parameters  State
Descriptions, or click the State Descriptions tool on the
Station Parameters toolbar. The system displays the editor
shown in Figure 4-8.
2. Enter a state Description. Use up to four alphanumeric char-
acters.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-21

TCON299–05/10
Defining and Entering Station Parameters Controller Configuration

Figure 4-8. State Descriptions

The first descriptor of the pair should describe the “trip” or

the de-energized (0) condition of a discrete output point or
the “open” (0) condition of a status point. The second
descriptor of the pair should describe the “close” or energized
(1) condition of a discrete output point or the “closed” (1)
condition of a status point.
3. Use the steps above to define up to 16 pairs of descriptions.
4. When you are finished, select OK to save the descriptions and
leave the editor.

Note: You must enter a set of three state descriptions in your 7791 DPI or
7793 MCI. These are SECR, UNLK, and LOCK. They describe a
three-state door point and require Command to be set to 0.

It is important to make these descriptors as definitive as possible

since they appear on the graphic system pages along with the asso-
ciated point icons. They also appear in a controller or Page
summary display (refer to Chapter 8, System Pages) and are stored
and/or printed when an alarm or state change occurs.

4-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Defining and Entering Station Parameters

Conversion Coefficients
Conversion coefficients are the mathematical constants the
controller uses to convert analog inputs or outputs from the digital
value used by the microprocessor to analog display values. They are
also used to convert digital commands from the microprocessor
into analog outputs which are then used by field interface devices.
You may enter up to 16 sets of conversion coefficients in each
controller.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Station Parameters  Conversion
Coefficients, or click the Conversion Coefficients tool on the
Station Parameters toolbar. The system displays the Conver-
sion Coefficients editor (see Figure 4-9).

Figure 4-9. Conversion Coefficients Editor

2. Select the desired coefficient fields and enter the M Value and
B Value conversion coefficients. If necessary, use the pop-up
calculator to calculate the conversion coefficients. Refer to
“Pop-up Calculator” below.
3. When you have finished entering conversion coefficients,
select OK to save your changes and exit the editor.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-23

TCON299–05/10
Defining and Entering Station Parameters Controller Configuration

Pop-up Calculator
You have the option of using a pop-up calculator to help you calcu-
late conversion coefficients.
1. From the Conversion Coefficients editor, select Calculate.
The system displays the Conversion Coefficients Calculator
(see Figure 4-10).

Figure 4-10. Pop-up Calculator

2. Choose a Coefficient Index. This determines which line in

the Conversion Coefficients editor will receive the resulting M
and B values of this calculation.
3. Choose the desired type of Conversion Equation — either
Linear or Flow.
4. Enter an Equipment counts low value. This can be a number
from 0 to 65,535. Typically, this number is zero.
5. Enter an Equipment counts high value. This can be a
number from 0 to 65,535. For analog inputs, use the following
values:
✧ For a 16-bit A/D converter (used on the lower I/O board
of the 7756 PCU), enter 65,535.
✧ For a 12-bit A/D converter (used in all other controllers
except MCUs), enter 4095.
✧ For an 8-bit A/D converter (used in MRs and UCs), enter
255.

4-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Defining and Entering Station Parameters

Analog outputs use 8-bit D/A converters with a low count of

zero and a high count of 255.
6. Enter an Engineering units low value. This parameter repre-
sents the lowest value (measured in engineering units —
degrees, volts, amperes, etc.) for the sensor when the device is
at its low count value.
Example:
A Lini-Temp sensor which operates between –40F (2.33
volts) and +230F (3.83 volts), reads –459.4F at zero volts (0
counts) and +440.6F at 5 volts (4095 counts). This example
assumes an AI input of 0 to 5 VDC.
7. Enter an Engineering units high value. This parameter
represents the highest value (measured in engineering units)
for the sensor when the device is at its high count value.
8. Select OK to calculate the M and B values and exit the pop-up
calculator. The system displays the window shown in
Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11. Pop-up Calculator Results

9. To accept the resulting values, select OK. The resulting values

are automatically entered in the Conversion Coefficients
editor.

Engineering Units
This feature lets you define the units of measure for analog
input/output points and accumulator points. These descriptions
only appear in point-related alarms or messages stored in the
system message queue or printed on the system printer.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-25

TCON299–05/10
Defining and Entering Station Parameters Controller Configuration

1. Select Edit  Controller  Station Parameters  Engi-

neering Units, or click the Engineering Units tool on the
Station Parameters toolbar. The system displays the Engi-
neering Units editor (see Figure 4-12).

Figure 4-12. Engineering Units Editor

2. Enter up to 16 engineering units. Each engineering unit may

be up to 4 characters.
3. Select OK to save your changes and exit the editor.

Lookup Tables
The 7718, 7716, 7756, and 7728 controllers let you define up to 32
lookup tables, each consisting of up to 31 entries. These lookup
tables may be used for several purposes. You may use the lookup
tables to create engineering units, or to create sensor limits that
focus on a specific span of interest. The primary use of user-defined
lookup tables is to provide simple translation and monitoring of
non-linear signal sources.
1. Calculate lookup table entries using the worksheet in
TCON157, TAC I/NET Seven Forms and Worksheets, and the
procedures in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Refer-
ence Guide.

4-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Controller Configuration Defining and Entering Station Parameters

2. Ensure you are connected to a 7716, 7718, 7756, or 7728

controller.
3. Select Edit  Controller  Station Parameters  Lookup
Tables, or click the Lookup Tables tool on the Station Param-
eters toolbar. The system displays the Lookup Table editor
(see Figure 4-13).

Figure 4-13. Lookup Table Definitions

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 4-27

TCON299–05/10
Defining and Entering Station Parameters Controller Configuration

4. Highlight the desired point from the list and select Add. The
system displays the Lookup Table Definition editor (see
Figure 4-14).

Figure 4-14. Lookup Tables editor

5. Enter a Counts value. Only integers may be entered in the

lookup table. You may place count values in any order, the
editor will sort the entries numerically in order.
6. Enter the Adj. Count value. Adjusted counts may be an
increasing or decreasing slope.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 as necessary for up to 31 lookup table
entries.
8. When you are finished building the lookup table, select OK.
9. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 as necessary for each point.
10. Select Close to exit the Lookup Table editor.

4-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

5
6
Point Definition and Addressing

Adding Points to Your Controller

The following steps describe how to access the Resident I/O Points
editor and add points to your controller. Also, refer to the Input
and Output Points chapter in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Tech-
nical Reference Guide, for additional information.
1. Connect to the controller where you want to add points.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points, or click the
Resident I/O Points tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the Resident I/O Point editor (see Figure 5-1).

Figure 5-1. Resident I/O Points Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 5-1

TCON299–05/10
Adding Points to Your Controller Point Definition and Addressing

This screen displays all the points currently defined in this

controller. The display lists the point address, type, class, and
name. If point extensions have been added to the point, a Y is
displayed in the column under that extension. No points are
listed if you have not yet added any points to this controller.
3. Select Add. The system displays the New Resident Point
editor (see Figure 5-2).

Figure 5-2. New Resident Point Editor

4. Define the point address. Since you are already connected to

the link and station, you only need to enter the last four digits
of the point address (point and bit offset).
5. Choose a point type from the drop-down list.
6. Select OK. The system automatically displays the appropriate
edit screen for the point type you select.
7. Enter the parameters for the point. Refer to the appropriate
chapters in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference
Guide, for more information about each parameter.

Note: We recommend that you complete the forms in TCON 157, Forms
and Worksheets, to plan and document your TAC I/NET Seven
system. If you do, you can use the information on your form as a
guide for the point parameters.

8. When you finish, select OK to return to the Resident I/O

Points editor. The new point is added to the list. The points
are ordered by their address; not by the order in which they
are added to the controller.

5-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Point Definition and Addressing Modifying Points in Your Controller

Modifying Points in Your Controller

The following steps describe how to modify existing points.
1. Connect to the controller containing the points you want to
modify.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points, or click the
Resident I/O Points tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the Resident I/O Points editor (see
Figure 5-1).
3. Select the desired point and click Modify. The system displays
the editor associated with the point.
4. Modify the point as necessary. Select OK when you finish to
return to the Resident I/O Points screen.
You can continue to add, delete, copy, or modify points, or
you can select Close to leave the Resident I/O Points editor.

Copying Points in Your Controller

The following steps describe how to copy an existing point. This
function is extremely useful when you are adding a number of
points with similar parameters. In this case you simply add the first
point and then copy it as many times as necessary, making the
necessary parameter changes to each copied point rather than reen-
tering identical information for a number of points.
1. Make sure you are connected to the controller where want to
copy a point.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points or click the
Resident I/O Point tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays the Resident I/O Points editor (see Figure 5-1).
3. Highlight the desired source point and select Copy. The
system displays the Copy editor (see Figure 5-3).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 5-3

TCON299–05/10
Deleting Points from Your Controller Point Definition and Addressing

Figure 5-3. Copy Resident Point Editor

4. Define the new target point address to which you will be

copying the existing point. Since you are already connected to
the link and station, you need only enter the last four digits of
the point address (point and bit offset).
5. Select OK. The system automatically displays the appropriate
edit screen for the point type. Refer to the appropriate chap-
ters in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference
Guide, for more information about each parameter.
6. Modify the parameters as necessary and select OK to return to
the Resident I/O Point editor.
7. You can continue to add, delete, copy, or modify points at this
time, or select Close to exit the Resident I/O Point editor.

Deleting Points from Your Controller

The following steps describe how to delete a point from your
controller.
1. Make sure you are connected to the controller containing the
point you want to delete.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points, or click the
Resident I/O Point tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays the Resident I/O Point editor (see Figure 5-1).
3. Select the desired point and click Delete. The system displays
a Delete confirmation dialog box.

5-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Point Definition and Addressing Sorting Points in Your Controller

4. Select Yes to delete the point or select No to cancel the Delete

function.
5. You can continue to add, delete, copy, or modify points, or
select Close to leave the Resident I/O Points editor.

Sorting Points in Your Controller

The Resident I/O Point editor allows you to sort the point list by
either the point address or the point name. Selecting Sort causes
the system to display the dialog box shown in Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4. Point Sort

1. Chose the sort order you desire, either Point number or

Point name.
2. Click OK. The Resident I/O point editor will display the avail-
able points in the chosen sort order.

Input/Output and Addressing

Each controller has a certain number of available inputs and
outputs. Inputs and outputs are further broken down into discrete,
PWM, analog, and pulse categories.
Each point is assigned an eight-digit point address composed of
link, station, point, and bit offset number. The first pair of digits
designates the link, the second pair of digits designates the station,
the third pair designates the point, and the last pair designates the
bit offset. Refer to the chapter dealing with input and output points
in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide. Also,
refer to Chapter 1, TAC I/NET Seven Basics, in this manual.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 5-5

TCON299–05/10
Input/Output and Addressing Point Definition and Addressing

Tips for Point Addresses

✦ Assign software points to any bit offset address. You may also
assign a software point to a hardware address if it is not
needed for a hardware point.
✦ At any given address there may be one input and one output
point.

5-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

6
58
System Messages

System messages provide information on events occurring in the

system. System messages include normal messages, alarms, and
transactions. For example, a message can be generated when an
operator logs on, when a point changes state, or when an alarm
occurs. Transactions are messages that are generated by the
key/card readers.
TAC I/NET Seven’s system messages are controlled by the AMT
application (Alarms, Messages and Transactions). AMT is a sepa-
rate application that allows you to monitor messages, alarms, and
transactions that occur within your TAC I/NET Seven system. The
AMT application may start and stop automatically every time you
launch and exit TAC I/NET Seven, depending on the setting in the
Host Configuration editor (see “Host Configuration” in Chapter 2,
Setup and Network Configuration).

Note: When you use the Windows Control Panel to change your system's
regional date and time format, the changes are immediately viewable
within AMT. However, AMT printed output will not reflect date and
time format changes until after the host workstation has been
rebooted.

AMT provides two types of windows: alarm and event. Predefined

filters allow you to view Messages, Routine Alarms, Priority
Alarms, Critical Alarms, and access control Transactions, just as in
previous versions of TAC I/NET. You may choose to display all, a
few, or none of these windows, and to customize the display of
each. You may also minimize AMT to the task bar and open it only
when you need to view system messages.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-1

TCON299–05/10
 System Messages

Caution: The database server should not be shut down while TAC I/NET
Seven is running. Shutting down the database server drops all
existing connections to the database, and can result in corrupted data
displays. (Only users with administrative privileges on the worksta-
tion can stop or start the database server.)

Operator access to AMT windows and certain functions is depen-

dent upon the privileges granted in the host passwords editor.
(Refer to “Host Passwords” in Chapter 9, Passwords.) If an operator
does not have access to view a specific window, the window does
not display, and functions specific to the window are grayed out.
Message priority assignments control when messages and alarms
are relayed to host workstations. Although they are controlled
separately, both messages and alarms can fall into one of three cate-
gories: Routine, Priority, and Critical. None (–) indicates no
priority. The following tables detail how each priority level is
handled by the three different types of Taps: Integrated Dial, Auto
Dial/Auto Answer, and Direct Connect.

Table 6-1. Integrated Dial Taps

Priority Tap Action

Routine Message is ignored.
Message is passed when a connection is
Priority
established by the host.
Message is passed when a connection is
Critical
established by the host.

Table 6-2. Auto Dial /Auto Answer Taps (AD/AA)

Priority Tap Action

Routine Message is ignored.

Message is passed when the dial parameters are
Priority
met or critical message triggers an auto dial.
Triggers an auto dial connection and message is
Critical passed immediately. Priority messages will also
be passed.

6-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages AMT Menus and Toolbar

Table 6-3. Direct Connect Tap

Priority Tap Action

Routine Message is passed immediately.
Priority Message is passed immediately.
Critical Message is passed immediately.

AMT Menus and Toolbar

AMT has its own set of menus and a toolbar that cannot be
accessed from within TAC I/NET Seven. All menu commands or
toolbar choices presented in this chapter are located on the AMT
menu (or toolbar).
As in TAC I/NET Seven, many of the commands available on the
menus are also available on the toolbar. You may choose to display
the toolbar by selecting View  Toolbar, from the AMT menu. Like
TAC I/NET Seven toolbars, the AMT toolbar can be docked or
floating. For assistance with manipulating toolbars refer to
“Arranging Toolbars” in Chapter 1, TAC I/NET Seven Basics.
Also like TAC I/NET Seven, you may choose to remove the status
bar located at the bottom of the main AMT window. Select View.
A checkmark next to the Status Bar option indicates that the status
bar is displayed. Click Status Bar to remove the checkmark. If you
wish to display the status bar, select View  Status Bar again.
Some AMT menu items are context-dependent. That is, the func-
tions of certain menu items will vary, depending upon whether you
selected an alarm, a message, or a transaction. Other menu items,
and their corresponding toolbar buttons, that are not applicable to
the selected item will be grayed out. Also, if an individual operator
does not have access to a specific function, the menu option, and
any toolbar button, will be grayed out.
AMT saves the configuration settings for each user. When you log
into AMT, the settings will be the same as the last time you logged
out. The following settings are saved:
✦ Configuration settings (see “AMT Configuration” on page
6-4):

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-3

TCON299–05/10
AMT Configuration System Messages

✧ Alarm and archive color settings

✧ Toolbar and status bar settings
✧ Alarm topmost setting
✦ Settings for open windows:
✧ Size and placement
✧ Window options, including window name and filter
selection (see “Window Options” on page 6-18)
✧ Auto-image verification window settings, including door
filter and field selection, for open event windows (see
“Image Verification” on page 6-42)

Note: Static image verification window settings are not saved. Any open
static image verification windows will be discarded upon logoff, and
will not reappear upon subsequent login.

AMT Configuration

Note: This configuration is not the same as the I/NET Configure program.
Changes made on this screen take place immediately when you select
OK to exit the screen. It is not necessary to exit the program for the
changes to go into effect.

The AMT Configuration Editor, shown in Figure 6-1, allows you to

set your AMT preferences. You can control the alarm and archive
colors, establish audible alarms and select .WAV sound files to play
for the various alarm types, and define message masks.
To access the editor, select Edit  Configuration.
The Configuration editor is divided into six panels. The options in
each panel are described below.

Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous panel allows you to choose the manner in
which the alarm notification window displays when a new alarm is
received and to view the maximum number of online events
(x1000) at any given time.

6-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages AMT Configuration

Figure 6-1. AMT Configuration Editor

If desired, check the box for Display site address 0 as blank. This
option will leave the site address field in AMT windows blank if the
site address is zero (0).
You may check the box for Alarm topmost in order to have the
alarm notification window always brought to the top for imme-
diate attention and convenience when a new alarm arrives. If you
uncheck the box and have minimized the alarm notification
window, the window will remain minimized in the system tray and
will flash when a new alarm arrives.
The Max Online Events field shows the upper limit for events
stored online, in thousands (an entry of 100 indicates 100,000
online events). Once this number is reached, old events are
replaced by new ones, on a “first-in, first-out” basis, and can no
longer be viewed on the AMT screen.

Note: Archived events are not lost: they are still available for viewing and
reporting purposes through a third-party software tool that supports
SQL.

See Also: “Archives” on page 6-47

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-5

TCON299–05/10
AMT Configuration System Messages

Section on Archives in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical

Reference Guide
Section on AMT Archives in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven
Technical Reference Guide

Alarm Colors and Archive Colors

The Alarm Colors and Archive Colors panels allow you to set the
text and background colors of alarm statuses and archives. Use the
following steps to change the colors Alarm Colors:
1. Select the alarm type: Routine, Priority or Critical, using the
drop down menu.
2. Click on the colored button under either Foreground or
Background, depending on which you wish to change for the
various alarm types, respectively.
The Color palette displays, as shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2. Color Palette

3. Select your color and click OK. The color you chose displays
in the color panel.
To change the colors for Archive Colors, use the following steps:

6-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages AMT Configuration

1. Click on the colored button under either Foreground or

Background, depending on which you wish to change. The
Color palette displays (see Figure 6-2).
2. Select your color and click OK. The color you chose displays
in the color panel.

Image Window
This panel allows you to set a timer for the image verification
window. Use the Image timer to set the length of time that the
image verification window stays open after being automatically
opened because of a transaction at a monitored door.
You can set a time of up to 60 minutes. A setting of zero causes the
image verification window to stay open until it is manually closed
by the operator.

Note: When you change the image timer setting, the previous setting
remains in effect until a transaction causes a new image to display, or
until you restart TAC I/NET Seven; whichever comes first.

Relay Tap
This section contains two options, Priority and Critical. When you
enable () an option in this section, it's corresponding relay in the
7801R tap will activate if an alarm of the correct priority passes
through, unless it is one of the following:

✦ Return to normal ✦ Sign on Host

✦ Door normal ✦ Sign off Host
✦ Action message ✦ Sing on DCU
✦ Dispatch message ✦ Sign off DCU
✦ LAN reconfigure ✦ Host restored
✦ Station restored ✦ LAN tap restored
✦ MCU restored

Note: It is important not to check these boxes unless there is an actual 7801
or 7801R tap connected. Otherwise, enabling these options will result
in messages/alarms not being displayed in AMT.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-7

TCON299–05/10
AMT Configuration System Messages

Audible Alarms
The Audible Alarms panel allows you to configure AMT to
produce an audible alarm for routine, priority, and critical alarms.
You may choose one of the following options:
✦ None—No audible alarm.
✦ Once—The alarm sounds once.
✦ Constant—The alarm sounds until it is acknowledged.
✦ Timed —The alarm sounds for the time specified in the
Audible duration field.
The default setting for each alarm type is Once. To change this
setting, perform the following steps:
1. Click the down-arrow on the appropriate drop-down box.
2. Select one of the other three options, None, Timed, or
Constant.
3. If you select Timed, enter the number of seconds the alarm
should sound in the Audible duration (sec) field. This setting
will affect all alarms that are set to Timed.
A default .WAV sound file is supplied for each alarm priority.
However, you may elect to assign a .WAV sound file of your own
choosing to be played when an alarm of the appropriate priority is
received. Please note that only .WAV sound files may be used for
audible alarms.
To change the default .WAV sound file to one of your own choosing,
perform either of the following:
✦ Enter the directory path to where your .WAV sound files are
located. Example: C:\Sounds\Claxon.wav.
✦ Browse to the location where your .WAV sound files are
located using the browse (...) buttons at the end of each field.

Note: If an alarm sound is already playing and a new alarm arrives, the
sound which is already playing will only be stopped if the new alarm
is of greater priority.

6-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages AMT Configuration

Message/Alarm and Printer Masks

Note: AMT mask settings are ignored on a workstation set as a Remote
Client in a client/server configuration. Only the AMT mask settings
on the server will control what messages are received in AMT on the
client. You can, however, use unique filter settings at the remote client
to control what AMT messages are displayed.
Refer to Chapter 3, TAC I/NET Seven Configuration in TCON298,
TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for more information about using
a client/server configuration.

TAC I/NET Seven uses a filter system to determine where messages,

alarms, and data from input/output points, controllers, and Taps
are sent. These filters are known as masks.
A mask is an eight-position parameter with each position being
either active () or inactive (). The message mask is assigned to
one of four distribution groups. Distribution groups allow large
systems considerable flexibility in assigning hosts to receive
messages. The combination of distribution groups and masking
positions allows for up to 32 different masks. Refer to the chapter
dealing with system messages in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven
Technical Reference Guide, for a complete discussion of message
masking.

Note: The far left masking position in distribution group 1 must be acti-
vated in the printer and message masking configurations defined in
the host configuration editor for system messages to be received at the
host or the printer.

Set your masks for the host workstation by activating and deacti-
vating the masking positions, as desired, for the following parame-
ters.
✦ Message/Alarm — This parameter controls which messages
are received at this host workstation. If there is not a matching
group and mask position, the workstation ignores the
message.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-9

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

✦ Printer — If you want to have messages and alarms automati-

cally printed, set the Printer masks, as well. This option will
route the matching messages and alarms directly to the
printer attached to the host workstation.
✦ Force Dispatch — Select which mask positions will require a
dispatch message on alarms. Any alarms with at least one
matching mask position can be acknowledged, but must have
a dispatch message before they can be cleared from the alarm
window. The settings of these masks will be common among
all equalized client workstations.
✦ Acknowledge Return-to-Normal — Select which mask posi-
tions will require a separate acknowledgment for a return-to-
normal message. Alarms which have returned to normal will
still remain in the alarm window, even after the original alarm
is acknowledged, until the return to normal message is also
acknowledged. The settings of these masks will be common
among all equalized client workstations.

Note: Although the Force Dispatch and Acknowledge Return-to-Normal

mask settings are equalized, they are not globalized. This means that
host workstations not using file equalization can have unique settings
for these masks.
Therefore, even though your equalized host workstation may force
you to dispatch a message when acknowledging an alarm, an oper-
ator on a non-equalized workstation may be able to acknowledge the
same alarm without dispatching a message.

Managing Windows in AMT

There are two basic window types in AMT, alarm windows and
event windows. For each window type, there are some predefined
windows that filter the message display for a specific type of
message.
The AMT display can contain several windows at one time, each
window showing different information. There are three ways to
control which messages are displayed in each window:

6-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

✦ Window Options allow you to select the way messages are

displayed in the window. Refer to “Window Options” on page
6-18.
✦ Filters allow you to set parameters to determine which
messages are displayed in the window. Refer to “Filters” on
page 6-21.
✦ Predefined windows are either event or alarm windows with
preselected window options and filters. Once the window is
open, you may use the window options and/or filtering to
change the display. Refer to “Predefined Windows” on page
6-12.

Opening a New AMT Window

The messages in a window are listed chronologically, with more
recent events listed first. Scroll down to see additional messages.
Alarm Window
Alarm windows display system alarms for points outside their
defined “normal” boundaries. To open an alarm window:
1. Select System  New  Alarm Window.
2. Complete the Window Options editor to set the viewing
options for the window. Refer to “Window Options” on page
6-18.

Note: Each alarm is also either a message or a transaction, but may not
appear in the corresponding window due to filtering.

Event Window
Event windows display system messages (network activity) and
transactions (access control and door activity).
1. Select System  New  Event Window.
2. Complete the Window Options editor to set the viewing
options for the window. Refer to “Window Options” on page
6-18.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-11

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

Predefined Windows
There are five predefined window types, corresponding to the static
windows displayed in previous versions of TAC I/NET. Each
predefined window shows all fields in the default order, and uses
one of the system filters (see “Filters” on page 6-21).
When opening a pre-defined window type, the Window Options
editor does not appear. You may manually open the Window
Options editor to change the window settings.

Note: Below, toolbar icons are shown for each type of pre-defined window.
As an alternative to using menus, you can simply click on an icon in
the toolbar to quickly open a pre-defined window. If the icon you click
is for a window type that is already open, the existing window will be
brought to the top and will become active.

Routine Alarms
This window shows only alarms with a priority level of “Routine”
in the editor generating the alarm. Select System  New  Routine
Alarms Window.
Priority Alarms
This window shows only alarms with a priority level of “Priority”
in the editor generating the alarm. Select System  New  Priority
Alarms Window.
Critical Alarms
This window shows only alarms with a priority level of “Critical” in
the editor generating the alarm. Select System  New  Critical
Alarms Window.
Messages
This window shows all system message traffic, including alarms.
Transactions are not included. Select System  New  Messages
Window.

6-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

Transactions
This window shows only access-control related messages, including
alarms. Other system messages are not included. Select System 
New  Transactions Window.

Note: Each window can have only one filter. If you change the selected filter
for a predefined window, it is no longer using the predefined filter.
Refer to “Filters” on page 6-21 for more information.

Closing an AMT window

To close any window in AMT, click the button marked X in the
upper right hand corner of the window.

Arranging multiple windows

Note: AMT allows you to open an unlimited number of separate
windows. The system remembers the window arrangement for
each user: the next time you log in, the open windows and their
arrangement will be the same as when you logged out. The active
window is indicated by the blue bar at the top (your bar color may
be different, depending on your Windows configuration). To
select a new active window, which is also displayed on top, click
the desired window’s title bar or press Ctrl + Tab until the desired
window is on top. Clicking on a preconfigured window button will
open a new window, instead of moving an existing window to the
top. Take care that you do not have too many windows open, as this
will adversely affect system performance.

You can perform standard window functions. You can click the
Minimize button (located on the top right corner of each window)
to minimize any window. You can resize the window or drag it to a
new location. For example, suppose you do not want to display
Messages or Transactions, you can minimize those windows and,
perhaps, enlarge the Critical Alarms window. The resulting AMT
appearance might be as shown in Figure 6-3.
To quickly view all of the open windows at once, you may specify
whether the windows are displayed tiled or cascaded.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-13

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

Figure 6-3. Customized AMT Window Display

6-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

Cascading Windows
Cascading windows arranges the open windows in an overlapping
pattern, without changing the size or shape of the windows.
Because of this, some windows may extend beyond the boundaries
of the AMT window. Figure 6-4 shows cascading windows. When
you select this option, the active window is always placed on top.

Figure 6-4. AMT - Cascaded Windows

To specify this style, select Windows  Cascade from the AMT

menu.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-15

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

Tiled Windows
The tiled display shrinks each window so that all open windows fit
into the AMT window. The size of the windows will depend on the
number of windows you have open, and the size of the AMT
window display. The tiled display is shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5. AMT - Tiled Windows

To specify the tiled display, select Windows  Tile. The active

window is indicated by the blue (the actual color may vary
depending upon your color settings) title bar. In Figure 6-5, the
active window is Messages.

Printing Messages
To print messages, select Actions  Print, or click the Print tool
from the menu. Click OK in the Print Dialog box to send the list to
the printer.

6-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

The default is to print the entire contents of the window. You may
use the options in the print dialog window to specify a range of
pages.
To determine which page(s) you wish to print, move the mouse
cursor to the Date/Time field in the active window. Do not click in
the field, but just place the mouse cursor over it. After a slight delay,
a popup window will indicate which page that transaction is on.

Note: The page number feature does not work on alarms that contain a
dispatch message: the popup window shows the dispatch text instead.
To see which page an alarm is on, check the page number for the
event above or below it.

The actual number of pages printed depends on the number and

size of columns displayed in the window. Enough sheets will print
for each “page” to show all columns. For example, if you have an
active event window that includes all of the possible columns,
printing requires three sheets per page in landscape mode
(default). For each page you select to print, three actual pages will
be printed.

Changing the Window Display

There are several ways in which you can change the window display
in TAC I/NET Seven.
✦ The display can be temporarily paused, and resumed at will.
Refer to “Pausing the Message Update” on page 6-18.
✦ The Window Options editor allows you determine which data
fields are included in each window, and arrange the fields in
the desired order. Refer to “Window Options” on page 6-18.
✦ Advanced filtering allows you to fine-tune window displays to
only the messages of interest. Filters are saved on the system,
and are available to all users with filter privileges. Refer to
“Filters” on page 6-21.
These options are common to all AMT windows. In addition, there
are some specialized commands that are specific to the window
type. Refer to the section on the appropriate window type for a
discussion of the special commands.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-17

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

See Also: “Alarm Windows” on page 6-30

“Event Windows” on page 6-37
Pausing the Message Update
One menu option that is common to all AMT windows is the Pause
function. If messages or alarms are coming in too fast, you can
pause the update to the window display. Click in the window you
wish to pause and select Actions  Pause, or click the Pause tool.
If a window is paused, it is noted in the window’s titlebar.
When you are ready to receive new messages, select Actions 
Resume or click the Resume tool. Any messages that arrived while
the window was paused immediately appear, and new messages
appear as they arrive.
Column Width
The information displayed in each window is divided into
columns. You may adjust the width of the columns by dragging the
column dividers to the left or right. If you wish to return the
columns to their default width, select Actions  Reset Column, or
click the Reset Column tool.
Window Options
The Window Options editor allows you to customize each window
in AMT. This editor appears automatically when you open a new
window (except for predefined windows). You may also open the
editor to change the parameters of an active window.
This editor allows you to configure each window as follows:
✦ Choose which columns are displayed in the window.
✦ Select the order in which columns are arranged.
✦ Select how messages are sorted (alarm windows only).
✦ Select the filter for the messages. (Refer to “Filters” on page
6-21 for a complete discussion of filtering.)

6-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

Use the following procedures to set the window options:

1. Do one of the following to open the Window Options editor
(see Figure 6-6):
✧ Open a new alarm window by selecting System  New 
Alarm Window, or click on the appropriate toolbar
button.
✧ Open a new event window by selecting System  New 
Event Window, or click on the appropriate toolbar
button.
✧ With the desired window set as the active window, select
Edit  Window Options, or click on the appropriate
toolbar button.
✧ Right-click in the desired window and select Window
Options from the context menu that appears.

Figure 6-6. Window Options Editor

2. Choose which columns to display or hide as follows:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-19

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

a. To display a column, highlight the column name in the

De-selected list and select Add. This moves the column
name into the Selected list.
b. To hide a column, highlight the column name in the
Selected list and select Remove. This moves the column
name into the De-selected list.
c. Alternatively, you can quickly hide or display all columns
by selecting Remove All or Add All.
3. Arrange columns by selecting the name in the Selected list
and using the Up and Down options to adjust their position.
AMT window columns are displayed in the same order as
listed, with the top column being the first column in the
window.
4. (Alarm window only) If desired, select how the messages will
be sorted, as follows:
a. Select a parameter from the Sort By drop-down. Only
parameters in the Selected list are available.
b. Select the sort order, either Ascending or Descending.
If you do not select a sort order, messages are sorted by
date/time in descending order (newest message on top).
5. If desired, select a filter for the messages. Refer to “Filters” on
page 6-21 for information on creating filters.

Note: Only one filter may be applied to an AMT window. If the active
window is already using a filter, including one of the predefined
filters, selecting a filter here will change the window to use only the
selected filter.

6. If you wish to enter a customized window name, perform the

following:
a. Disable () the Use default window name check box.
b. Enter the desired Window name, up to 30 characters.
The selected name will be added to the filter name and
sort column (if applicable) in the window’s title bar.

6-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

7. Click OK to close the Window Options editor and view the

window with the selected options, or Cancel to close the
window without saving the changes.

Note: If you were opening a new window and select Cancel, the window
will not be created.

Filters

Note: Archiving and filtering both use a great deal of system resources.
While archiving, particularly when there are a large number of
online AMT records, it may appear as though your AMT filters are
not operating properly. Filter operation will return to normal when
the archive function is complete.

You may use message filters to select criteria for the types of
messages that display in a window. If you do not apply a filter, all
messages display.
When a filter is applied to a window, the filter name is shown in the
window’s title bar. For example, in Figure 6-7, the Messages
window is using the filter named “Host Restore.”

Figure 6-7. Example Filtered Window

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-21

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

Your ability to create and edit filters is controlled by the options set
for your password in the Host Passwords editor. Refer to “Host
Passwords” in Chapter 9, Passwords.

Note: Only one filter may be applied to an AMT window. If the active
window is already using a filter including one of the predefined
filters, selecting a new filter will change the window to use only the
selected filter.

Creating a Filter Definition

TAC I/NET Seven includes predefined filters, corresponding to the
predefined window selections. Depending on the privileges associ-
ated with your password, you may define new filter criteria.
To create a filter definition:
1. Select Edit  Filters, or click the Filter tool. The system
displays the Filters summary screen (see Figure 6-8) with a
listing of defined filters.

Figure 6-8. Filter Summary Dialog

Note: If there are no open windows, all defined filters are listed. Filters
created in this manner are available for all window types.

2. Click the Add button. The system displays the Filter Name
dialog (see Figure 6-9).

6-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

Figure 6-9. Filter Name Dialog

3. Enter the name for the new filter and click OK. The system
displays the Filter editor for the appropriate window type,
either Event Filter or Alarm Filter.
Both Filter editors include the General Filter Options and
Filter Date Range sections. The Event Info section and Trans-
action Filtering option are available on the Event Filter editor
only. Figure 6-10 shows the Event Filter editor.

Figure 6-10. Event Filter Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-23

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

4. Complete the General Filter Options section. The settings and

ranges determine which messages will be displayed in the
window view; any parameter outside the selected range(s) will
not be included.
a. Set the Point address range Start and End parameters
to limit the resulting message list to specific addresses.
Messages originating from addresses outside of this range
will be excluded.
b. Enter the desired Device name. The default is [All] for all
devices. You may enter up to 16 characters, including the
following wildcard characters:
% The % character is like the * character in windows
find-files. Searching for a device name of
“%device%” would return any device name
containing the string “device”.
_ The underscore character allows any single char-
acter. For example, searching for a device name of
“device_” would return “device1”, “device2”,
“devices” etc.
[ ] The left and right closed brackets allow a single char-
acter to be within a specified range (for example:
[a-c]) or within a set of characters (for example,
[abcd]). Searching for a device name of “device[a-f]”
would return “devicea” through to “devicef ” but not
“deviceg”.
[^] This is the negation of the previous wildcard. It spec-
ifies that a single character should not be within a set
of characters (for example, [^a-c] or [^abcd]).
c. Priority – The alarm level for events defined as alarms:
Routine, Priority, or Critical.
d. Select the Priority for the system message. Only messages
with the selected priority (set in the DCU editor) will be
included in the window view.
e. Select the starting and ending Site numbers.

6-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

f. Use the Camera All or Select button if you wish to

include CCTV camera messages in the resulting AMT
window.
The Select button in only available when the All option
is not enabled. If you click the Select button, an editor
will open allowing you to select and de-select specific
cameras (see Figure 6-11). Unselected cameras will be
excluded from the resulting AMT window unless you
enable the filter's Camera All option.
After making your selections, click OK to close the editor.

Figure 6-11. Selecting Cameras

Note: If you enable () the Camera All option, messages associated with
any camera will be included in the resulting AMT window, regardless
of any camera selections you make using the Select button.

5. If you wish to filter the messages by the date and/or time they
were generated, complete the Filter Date Range section.
a. Activate () the Enable Date Filtering check box. This
field must be activated in order to set the parameters in
this section.
b. If desired, activate () the Enable Time Range Filtering
check box.
c. Enter the desired Start and End dates. You will see all
messages that occurred between these two dates.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-25

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

d. If you activated the time range filtering check box, enter

the desired Start and End times to limit the resulting
message list to specific times. Messages occurring before
the start time or after the end time will be excluded.
6. (Alarm Filter editor only) The following steps do not apply to
alarm filters. Proceed to Step 9.
7. (Event Filter editor only) In the Event Info section, activate
([X]) all message types (events) you wish to include in the
message filter and deactivate ([ ]) any that you do not wish to
include. You can use the Messages Only, Trans Only, All
Yes and All No buttons to speed the selection process.

Note: Refer to the System Messages chapter in TCON300, TAC I/NET

Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a description of each message
type.

8. (Event Filter editor only) If you wish to filter transactions by

individual parameters, click the Tran Filtering button to open
the Transaction Filter editor (see Figure 6-12). This button is
enabled only if at least one transaction is selected in the Event
Info section.

Figure 6-12. Transaction Filter Editor

6-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

a. If desired, enter the filter parameters for Last Name,

First Name, and Group Name. These are alphanumeric
fields that allow you to determine search criteria for data
within each field. You may enter up to 50 characters,
including the following wildcard characters:
% The % character is like the * character in windows
find-files. Searching for a name of “%john%” would
return any name containing the string “john” (e.g,
“johnson”).
_ The underscore character allows any single char-
acter. For example, searching for a name of “mar_”
would return “mark”, “mars”, “mary” etc.
[ ] The left and right closed brackets allow a single char-
acter to be within a specified range (for example:
[a-c]) or within a set of characters (for example,
[abcd]). Searching for a name of “name[a-f]” would
return “namea” through to “namef ” but not
“nameg”.
[^] This is the negation of the previous wildcard. It spec-
ifies that a single character should not be within a set
of characters (for example, [^a-c] or [^abcd]).
b. If desired. enter a starting and ending range for Tenant
number associated with the individual.
c. If desired, enter a start and end range for the Key/Card
number assigned to the individual.

Note: Tenant 0 and Key/Card 0 are used for specific transactions, such as
Bad Card Read. Excluding them from the filter range will eliminate
these transactions.

d. If desired, enter a start and end range for the anti-pass-

back Zone associated with the door.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-27

TCON299–05/10
Managing Windows in AMT System Messages

e. Select the individual record type(s) you wish to view in

the window by activating () one or more of the
options:
✢ Permanent
✢ Temporary
✢ Disabled
f. Select OK to confirm the transaction filter parameters
and return to the Event Filter editor, or Cancel to return
to the filter editor without saving the transaction filter
changes.
9. When you finish defining the filter, select OK. The system
returns you to the Filter summary dialog (see Figure 6-8 on
page 6-22).
Modifying a Filter
Existing filters can be modified. When you modify a filter, all open
windows using that filter will update to reflect the new filter param-
eters.

Note: You cannot modify the predefined filters: Messages, Transactions,

Routine Alarms, Priority Alarms, and Critical alarms.

To modify a filter:
1. Select Edit  Filters, or click the Filter tool. The system
displays the Filters summary screen (see Figure 6-8 on page
6-22) with a listing of defined filters.
2. Select the filter you wish to modify and click the Modify
button. The system displays the Filter editor for the appro-
priate window type.
3. Change the desired parameters. Refer to the instructions in
“Creating a Filter Definition” on page 6-22.
4. When finished, select OK to save the changes and return to
the Filters summary dialog, or Cancel to exit without saving
the changes.
Filter changes take effect immediately. All open windows using the
filter will be updated to use the new parameters.

6-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Managing Windows in AMT

Copying a Filter
Copying a filter allows you to use the parameters already defined
for one filter as the starting point for defining another filter.
For example, if you wish to refine a filter but don’t wish to affect
open windows already using that filter, you can copy the filter and
then enter just the changes.
To copy a filter:
1. Select Edit  Filters, or click the Filter tool. The system
displays the Filters summary screen (see Figure 6-8) with a
listing of defined filters.
2. Select the filter you wish to use as the basis for the new filter
and click the Copy button. The system displays the Filter
Name dialog (see Figure 6-9 on page 6-23).
3. Enter the name for the new filter and click OK. The system
displays the Filter editor for the appropriate window type.
The settings for all parameters are the current settings for the
filter you selected in Step 2.
4. Change the desired parameters. Refer to the instructions in
“Creating a Filter Definition” on page 6-22.
5. When finished, select OK to save the changes and return to
the Filters summary dialog, or Cancel to exit without saving
the changes.
If you select Cancel, the new filter is not saved and will not
appear on the Filters summary dialog
Deleting a Filter
You can delete a filter that you no longer wish to use, such as a
special filter created to monitor a specific circumstance. When you
delete a filter, it is no longer available for selection. Any open
windows using the filter will change to an unfiltered event or alarm
window, depending on the window type.

Note: You cannot delete the predefined filters: Messages, Transactions,

Routine Alarms, Priority Alarms, and Critical alarms.

To delete a filter:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-29

TCON299–05/10
Alarm Windows System Messages

1. Select Edit  Filters, or click the Filter tool. The system

displays the Filters summary screen (see Figure 6-8 on page
6-22) with a listing of defined filters.
2. Select the filter you wish to delete and click the Delete button.
A confirmation screen will appear.
3. Select Yes to delete the filter, or No to cancel the request. You
will return to the Filters summary dialog.
Applying a Filter
There are two ways to apply a filter to a window:
✦ Select the desired filter from the drop-down box in the
Window Options editor. Refer to “Window Options” on page
6-18.
✦ Select a filter from the Filters summary dialog.
To apply a filter from the Filters summary dialog, follow the proce-
dure below:
1. Select Edit  Filters, or click the Filter tool. The system
displays the Filters summary screen (see Figure 6-8 on page
6-22) with a listing of defined filters.
2. Select the desired filter definition from the list and click the
Select button to apply the filter to the active window. The
filter is applied immediately.

Note: If the active window is an alarm window, any Event Info or Transac-
tion filtering will be ignored.

3. Click the Close button to close the Filters summary dialog

and return to the AMT window display.

Alarm Windows
A sample Alarm Window is shown in Figure 6-13.
The header for each window contains the following information:
✦ Filter name for this window

6-30 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Alarm Windows

Figure 6-13. Sample Alarm Window

✦ Number of alarms for this filter

✦ Number of unacknowledged alarms for this filter
The AMT window header shows the total number of alarms, and
the total number of unacknowledged alarms. If AMT is minimized,
you can move your cursor over the AMT task bar item to check the
number of alarms without maximizing AMT.
The alarm windows may contain the following columns, in the
order designated in the Window Options editor (see “Window
Options” on page 6-18):
✦ Date/Time — date (mm/dd/yy) and time (hh:ss) of the
message.
✦ Count — number of times an entry has cycled in and out of
alarm.
✦ Address — system address of the point or the station of the
host, or controller, that generated the alarm.
✦ Link Name — name of the link containing the device that
generated the alarm. If the alarm is generated by a host or
link, this field will be blank and the host or link name will be
in the “Device Name” field (see below). The value of this field
is determined by the name given to the link during network
configuration.
✦ Station Name — name of the station containing the device
that generated the alarm. If the alarm is generated by a host,
link, or station, this field will be blank and the host, link, or
station name will be in the “Device Name” field (see below).
The value of this field is determined by the name given to the
station during network configuration.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-31

TCON299–05/10
Alarm Windows System Messages

✦ Device Name — name of the device that generated the alarm.

✧ If the device generating the alarm is an MCU, this field
will be blank, as the “Link Name” and “Station Name”
fields identify the device.
✧ If the device generating the alarm is a door, this field will
contain the door name. If the door name is not available,
the point name is displayed.
✧ If the device generating the alarm is a door, this field will
contain the door name. If the door name is not available,
the point name is displayed.
✦ Site — The Host LAN or Dial site.
✦ Event Type — the event that triggered the alarm.
✦ First Name — the first name of the individual associated with
an alarm. This field is blank when the alarm is not associated
with an individual (for example, a Door Forced alarm cannot
be tied to an individual and will therefore have no First Name
value).
✦ Last Name — the last name of the individual associated with
an alarm. This field is blank when the alarm is not associated
with an individual (for example, a Door Forced alarm cannot
be tied to an individual and will therefore have no Last Name
value).
✦ Tenant — the name of the tenant associated with an access
control alarm. This field is blank when the alarm is not associ-
ated with access control.
✦ Individual — the number assigned to the individual associ-
ated with an alarm. This field is blank when the alarm is not
associated with an individual (for example, a Door Forced
alarm cannot be tied to an individual and will therefore have
no Individual value).
✦ Value — the value of the point that generated the alarm. This
field is left blank for alarms that are not associated with a
point.
✦ Priority — the alarm level for this event: Routine, Priority, or
Critical.
✦ Ack Status — indicates if the alarm has been acknowledged.

6-32 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Alarm Windows

✦ Action Message—displays the action message if an event

action message was attached to this point.
✦ Dispatch Message—displays the dispatch message if a
dispatch message was attached to the alarm.
✦ Camera — displays the number assigned to the CCTV camera
that generated the alarm. This field is blank when the alarm is
not associated with a CCTV camera. Refer to TCON301, TAC
I/NET Seven Database Connectivity and Reporting, for more
information about integrating CCTV with TAC I/NET Seven.
✦ Unique Field — displays the value of a user-defined field for
the individual associated with the alarm. Use the Access
Control Options editor to designate one of the 16 user-
defined fields as a unique user field. Refer to the description
of the Unique user field parameter on page 17-92 for more
information.
Depending upon your window size, you may have to scroll to the
right to view the entire row. You can also adjust the width of each
column by dragging the column dividers to the left or right.
The alarm windows display all points that are in alarm or have been
in alarm, but have not been acknowledged. The appearance of the
alarm text is dependent upon its current status. The following table
shows the default color scheme. You may change these colors in the
AMT Configuration editor (see “Alarm Colors and Archive Colors”
on page 6-6).
Red - flashing The point is in alarm and has not been acknowledged.
Red - steady The point is in alarm and has been acknowledged.
The point was in alarm and returned to normal without
Green
being acknowledged.
Blue The point is normal.

If you have minimized an alarm window and a point goes into

alarm, the title bar of the minimized window will flash to indicate
that it has received an alarm. To view the alarm message, open the
window by double-clicking the title bar or clicking the Windows
Maximize button.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-33

TCON299–05/10
Alarm Windows System Messages

Note: If you have minimized AMT, the task bar button flashes to indicate
an alarm. You can also enable the Alarm Topmost function or the
audible indicator. Refer to “AMT Configuration” on page 6-4.

Acknowledging an Alarm
To acknowledge an alarm, select Actions  Acknowledge or click
the Acknowledge tool on the toolbar (shown in the left margin).
Alternatively, you can right-click on the alarm message and select
Acknowledge from the resulting context menu. The point will
change from red to blue (if the default colors have not been
changed). If the point has already returned to normal, acknowl-
edging the alarm also purges the alarm message. When an acknowl-
edgment is performed on a point, the system generates an
acknowledge message.

Purging Alarms
You can delete alarms after they have been acknowledged. To purge
an individual alarm, select the alarm message, and click the Purge
tool or select Actions  Purge.
Purging an alarm only removes it from the alarm windows. A copy
of the alarm is retained in the online events file. The alarm will
continue to appear in event windows, and will be archived when
appropriate.

Silence Alarm
The Silence Alarm functions allows you to halt the audible indi-
cator of an alarm without acknowledging the alarm. Select Actions
 Silence Alarm or click the Silence Alarm tool.

Dispatch
The Dispatch option allows you to attach a message to an alarm
and acknowledge the alarm at the same time. The dispatch message
is sent to the message queue, and the dispatch text is placed in the
Dispatch message column. To attach a dispatch message

6-34 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Alarm Windows

1. Highlight the alarm and click the Dispatch tool, or select

Actions  Dispatch. Alternatively, you can right-click on the
alarm message and select Dispatch from the resulting context
menu. The Dispatch Message Editor displays, as shown in
Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14. Dispatch Message Editor

2. Enter the dispatch text in the edit field using either of the
following methods:
✧ Type a text string of up to 64 characters.
— OR —
✧ Select the ... button to select text from a list of pre-
defined dispatch strings. Refer to “Dispatch Strings
Library” on page 6-35 for more information about
storing dispatch strings.
3. Click OK to accept the dispatch string. The dispatch text
displays in the Dispatch Message column of the appropriate
alarm window and is also sent to the messages window.
Dispatch messages in the messages window are indicated by
an icon at the beginning of the message row.

Dispatch Strings Library

TAC I/NET Seven displays the Dispatch Strings Library editor (see
Figure 6-15) when you select Edit  Dispatch Strings from the
AMT main menu. Use this editor to build a database of stored
dispatch strings. The strings you store here become available from
the Dispatch Message Editor (see Figure 6-14).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-35

TCON299–05/10
Alarm Windows System Messages

Figure 6-15. Dispatch Strings Library

The following options are available within the Dispatch Strings

Library editor:
✦ Add — Use this option to add a new dispatch string. The
system displays the Dispatch Strings Editor (see Figure 6-16).
Use this window to enter a new dispatch string.

Figure 6-16. Dispatch String Editor

6-36 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Event Windows

✦ Delete — Use this option to remove a previously-defined

dispatch string from the library. When you highlight a
dispatch string and select this option, the system immediately
deletes the stored string (i.e., there is no confirmation
message).
✦ Modify — Use this option to modify a previously-defined
dispatch string. When you highlight a dispatch string and
select Modify, the system displays the Dispatch Strings Editor.
You can then modify the string as necessary. Select OK to
replace the selected string with the new dispatch string.
✦ Copy — Use this option to create a new dispatch string by
copying from a previously defined dispatch string. When you
highlight a dispatch string and select Copy, the system
displays the Dispatch Strings Editor. You can then modify the
string as necessary. Select OK to add the new dispatch string
to the library.

Home Page
If a point has been assigned to a system page, selecting the Home
page option displays the page. For instructions on designating a
home page refer to “Points” in Chapter 8, System Pages. To view the
home page, highlight an alarm message and select Actions  Home
Page or click the Home page tool.

Event Windows
Event windows contain a summary record of all system traffic,
including messages (system events), transactions (access control
events) and alarms. Figure 6-17 illustrates a sample event window.
Event windows may contain the following columns, in the order
designated in the Window Options editor (see “Window Options”
on page 6-18):
✦ Date—date (mm/dd/yy) of the message.
✦ Time—time (hh:ss) of the message.
✦ Address—system address of the point or the station of the
host, or controller, that generated the alarm.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-37

TCON299–05/10
Event Windows System Messages

Figure 6-17. Event Window

✦ Site—The Host LAN or Dial site.

✦ Link Name—name of the link containing the device that
generated the message. If the message is generated by a host or
link, this field will be blank and the host or link name will be
in the “Device Name” field (see below). The value of this field
is determined by the name given to the link during network
configuration.
✦ Station Name —name of the station containing the device
that generated the message. If the message is generated by a
host, link, or station, this field will be blank and the host, link,
or station name will be in the “Device Name” field (see
below). The value of this field is determined by the name
given to the station during network configuration.
✦ Device Name—name of the device that generated the alarm.
✦ Event Type—the event responsible for the message. An expla-
nation of the potential event types is located in the System
Messages chapter of TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical
Reference Guide.
✦ Value—the value of the point.
✦ Message—The event or dispatch message text.
✦ Last name—individual’s last name.
✦ First name—individual’s first name.
✦ Individual—Individual’s key/card number.
✦ Tenant — tenant name.
✦ Group name — group name.
✦ Zone — access control zone.

6-38 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Event Windows

✦ Camera — displays the number assigned to the CCTV camera

that generated the alarm. This field is blank when the alarm is
not associated with a CCTV camera. Refer to TCON301, TAC
I/NET Seven Database Connectivity and Reporting, for more
information about integrating CCTV with TAC I/NET Seven.
Messages are listed in chronological order with the most recent
being displayed first.

Text Library
This feature allows you to specify a text message to send across a
serial (COM) port when a point goes into alarm. This can be used
to send commands to third-party hardware that can accept ASCII
text instructions, such as CCTV and paging or intercom systems.
The serial port and transmission rate are set in the I/NET Config-
uration active profile. Refer to the section on I/NET Configuration
in TCON157, TAC I/NET Forms and Worksheets Getting Started.
Creating a Text Entry
To create a text library entry:
1. Select Edit  Text Library from the AMT main menu. The
system displays the Text Library screen, as shown in
Figure 6-18.
2. Select Add. The Text Editor appears, as shown in Figure 6-19.
3. Enter the Point Address, in LLSSPPBB PT format. This must
be unique; only one text command is allowed per point
address.
4. Enter the desired Text, up to 127 characters. You may use the
following characters:
✧ Letters (a–z, A–Z)
✧ Numbers (0–9)
✧ ASCII special character codes, in the format \nnn, where
nnn is the ASCII decimal notation for the desired char-
acter. This is considered a single text character.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-39

TCON299–05/10
Event Windows System Messages

Figure 6-18. Text Library Screen

Figure 6-19. Text Editor

6-40 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Event Windows

✧ Limited escape sequences, as follows:

✢ \a (alert bell)
✢ \b (backspace)
✢ \f (form feed)
✢ \n (new line)
✢ \r (carriage return)
✢ \t (horizontal tab)
✢ \v (vertical tab)
✢ \’ (single quote)
✢ \” (double quote)
✢ \\ (backslash)
✢ \? (literal question mark)
Each escape sequence counts as a single text character.
5. Select OK to save the text string, or Cancel to return to the
Text Library without saving the changes.
Modifying a Text Entry
To modify an existing text entry:
1. Select Edit  Text Library from the AMT main menu. The
system displays the Text Library screen, as shown in
Figure 6-18 on page 6-40.
2. Select the entry you wish to change and select Modify. The
Text Editor appears, as shown in Figure 6-19 on page 6-40.
3. Edit the text entry. The point address cannot be changed.
4. Select OK to save the changes, or Cancel to return to the Text
Library screen without saving the changes.
Copying a Text Entry
To copy an existing text entry to a new entry:
1. Select Edit  Text Library from the AMT main menu. The
system displays the Text Library screen, as shown in
Figure 6-18 on page 6-40.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-41

TCON299–05/10
Event Windows System Messages

2. Select the entry you wish to use and select Copy. The Text
Editor appears, as shown in Figure 6-19 on page 6-40. The
fields will already contain the previous entry’s point address
and text entry.
3. Edit the point address. Duplicate addresses are not allowed;
you must change the point address to save the new entry.
4. If desired, edit the text entry.
5. Select OK to save the changes, or Cancel to return to the Text
Library screen without saving the changes.
Deleting a Text Entry
To delete an entry from the text library:
1. Select Edit  Text Library from the AMT main menu. The
system displays the Text Library screen, as shown in
Figure 6-18 on page 6-40.
2. Click to select the entry you wish to delete.
3. Select Delete. You will be asked to confirm the deletion. Select
Yes to delete the entry, or No to cancel the request.

Image Verification
This feature allows you to display an individual’s saved image for a
transaction (access control event). In order to use this feature, you
must have included individual images (pictures) in the Individual
Parameters editor. There are two options to this feature:
✦ Automatic: the system can be set to create an image verifica-
tion window for an AMT event window. This window will
automatically display the image associated with the individual
from the most recent transaction, updating at the screen
refresh rate (every two seconds). At every refresh, the window
shows the image associated with the most recent transaction
event.

Note: If more than one transaction occurs during the refresh interval, the
earlier events will not have an image displayed in the automatic
image verification window.

6-42 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Event Windows

✦ On demand: the operator can open a static image window, to

view the image associated with a particular transaction in an
event window, or a transaction alarm in an alarm window.
The image verification window is set to “always on top.” The
window can be resized and moved on the AMT screen.
Activating Image Verification
The procedures to set up image verification are as follows:
1. Add user images to the individual record in the Individual
Parameters editor. Refer to “Adding an Individual” in
Chapter 17, Access Control.
2. Select the desired fields for image verification windows:
a. Select Edit  Image Verification from the AMT main
menu. The system displays the Image Verification
Configuration editor (see Figure 6-20).

Figure 6-20. Image Verification Configuration Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-43

TCON299–05/10
Event Windows System Messages

b. Select up to seven user fields to display in the image veri-

fication window by clicking the selected field and
selecting <- Add, or by double-clicking the field name.
Use the Remove -> key to de-select a field.
c. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the
fields in the Selected list into the desired order. Fields will
be displayed in the image verification window in the
same order as they are shown in this editor.
d. Select OK to accept the field selections, or Cancel to close
the window without saving the changes.

Note: Changing the image verification configuration will cause any auto-
matic image verification windows to update, but will not affect any
open static image verification windows.

3. (Automatic image verification only) Select the doors for the

image verification window:
a. Select Actions  Door Selection from the AMT menu.
The system displays the Image Verification Door Filter
(see Figure 6-21).
b. Select ([X]) the doors you wish to include in the auto-
matic image verification window. You may use the Select
All and Select None buttons to speed your selection
process.

Note: You must select at least one door to use automatic image verification.
Only transactions from the selected door(s) will generate an auto-
matic image. If you activate automatic image verification the
window will appear, whether any doors are selected or not.

c. When finished, select OK to accept the door filter selec-

tions, or Cancel to close the editor without saving the
changes.

Note: Changing the door selection will cause any automatic image verifica-
tion windows to update, but will not affect any static image verifica-
tion windows.

6-44 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Event Windows

Figure 6-21. Image Verification Door Filter Editor

4. (Automatic image verification only) Complete the following to

activate automatic image verification:
a. Open an event window, or select an existing event
window. The event window must be the active window.
b. Select Actions  Image Verification from the AMT main
menu, or select the toolbar icon. The automatic image
verification window will appear (see Figure 6-22).
5. (On-demand image verification only) Right-click on the
desired transaction or transaction alarm and select Image
from the pop-up context menu. The static image verification
window will appear (see Figure 6-23).
The static window will have the properties set in Step 2. If you
change the selected fields in the Image Verification Configura-
tion editor, the changes will affect any open automatic image
verification windows, but will not affect any open static image
verification windows.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-45

TCON299–05/10
Event Windows System Messages

Figure 6-22. Automatic Image Verification Window

Figure 6-23. Static Image Verification Window

De-activating Automatic Image Verification

If the automatic image verification window is open, you can close it
by clicking the X in the upper right-hand corner. However, this
action does not de-activate the automatic image verification func-
tion. Therefore, the occurrence of an applicable event will cause the
image verification window to re-open.
In order to de-activate automatic image verification, ensure that the
image verification window is open and select Action  Image Verifi-
cation from the AMT main menu or select the toolbar icon. This will
cause the automatic image verification function to toggle off and the
image verification window will close.

Note: If you attempt to de-activate automatic image verification while the

image verification window is closed, the window will open and the
automatic image verification function will remain enabled. In this

6-46 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Archives

case, you must again select Action Image Verification from the AMT
main menu or select the toolbar icon to de-activate the function and
close the image verification window.

Archives

Note: Archiving and filtering both use a great deal of system resources.
While archiving, particularly when there are a large number of
online AMT records, it may appear as though your AMT filters are
not operating properly. Filter operation will return to normal when
the archive function is complete.

The archive function allows you to save AMT events or on-line

trend data to a separate database. This allows you to store the
archived data indefinitely. Refer to the section on Archives in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more
information.

Note: Each archive file consumes a minimum amount of disk space due to
the identifying parameters that must be saved. Frequent archive
activity resulting in small archive files can therefore consume a large
amount of disk space. To conserve disk space, archive parameters
resulting in fewer, larger archive files are recommended.

Event Archive Configuration

I/O Server must be running to enter or edit the archive configura-
tion.
The Event Archive Configuration editor is displayed by default
when you right-click the I/O Server icon in the Windows System
Tray and select Archive Configuration from the resulting pop-up
menu.
If you wish to configure SevenTrends archiving, select the Trend
Archive Configuration option to display the SevenTrends Archive
Configuration editor. In this case, refer to “Archiving SevenTrends
Data” on page 24-9 for more information.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-47

TCON299–05/10
Archives System Messages

Figure 6-24. Event Archive Configuration

Using the Event Archive Configuration editor, you can configure

TAC I/NET Seven to save on-line event data to an archive file.
Archives can occur automatically based on triggers, or you can
manually initiate an archive. Archived data may be used in reports,
but cannot be viewed online through TAC I/NET Seven.
The archive database is stored in the location specified as the
Archive Directory in the I/NET Configuration Editor. Each archive
is stored in a separate file. The file naming convention is as follows:
ARC_YYMMDDX.mdf (TAC I/NET Seven 2.12 or earlier)
—OR—
ARC_YYMMDDX.ARC (TAC I/NET Seven 2.13 or later)
where:
✦ ARC_ = indicates an event archive
✦ YY = last two digits of the year
✦ MM = two-digit month (01–12; 01 = January, 12 = December)
✦ DD = day of month (01–31)

6-48 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Archives

✦ X = sequential letter used to differentiate multiple archives

created on the same day. The first archive of the day will not
have a letter (for example: ARC_061025.mdf). The second
archive will have the letter A appended (for example:
ARC_061025A.mdf), the third will have the letter B, and so
on.
✦ .mdf (TAC I/NET Seven 2.12 or earlier) = indicates a file in
Microsoft standard database format.
—OR—
✦ .ARC (TAC I/NET Seven 2.13 or later) = indicates a file in
SQL database format.
Performing Event Archiving
1. You must activate () the Enable event archiving option in
order for any type of event archiving (i.e., manual or trig-
gered) to occur. If you do not activate this option, only the
Maximum Online Events parameter will be active.
2. Activate () the Verify archive contents option to have TAC
I/NET Seven verify the integrity of the archived data after it
has been written.
3. Use the Archive device field to specify a directory to accept
the archive database file when the archive completes.
4. Set the following Online Event Storage parameters:
✧ Minimum Online Events – This setting specifies the
minimum number of event records not to archive. There
must be at least this many unarchived event records
before an archive (automatic or manual) can occur.
✧ Archive Threshold – This setting specifies the number
of unarchived event records at which the system will start
requesting to archive with the option for the operator to
defer.
✧ Override Threshold – This setting specifies the number
of unarchived event records at which the system will start
an archive without giving the operator the option to
defer.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-49

TCON299–05/10
Archives System Messages

✧ Maximum Online Events – This setting specifies the

total number of unarchived events that can be online
before the oldest record will get overwritten with a new
incoming record.
5. Set the following Distribution Parameters to specify how
messages generated by archive activity will be distributed.
✧ Distribution Group – This will determine which set of 8
masks will be used for comparison at the Tap or host
level.
✧ Distribution Mask – Set each of eight masking positions
to the desired state, either activated () or deactivated
().
✧ Message Priority – This setting controls when messages
will be sent.
6. Set the following Trigger parameters:
✧ Threshold Trigger – This setting specifies what to do
when the Archive Threshold count is reached. The
following options are available:
✢ Disabled – Disable archive threshold trigger.
✢ Confirm – Ask operator to confirm (allow) archive.
✢ Automatic – Start archive without confirmation.

Note: The Scheduled Trigger (described below) honors the Minimum

Online Events parameter; therefore, if the scheduled trigger occurs
before the number of unarchived records has reached the Minimum
Online Events setting, no archive will occur.

✧ Scheduled Trigger – This setting specifies what to do

when the schedule time is reached. The following options
are available:
✢ Disabled – Disable the schedule trigger.
✢ Confirm – Ask the operator to confirm (allow) the
archive.
✢ Automatic – Start archive without confirmation.

6-50 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Archives

Note: The next three items are available only if the Scheduled Trigger
setting is not “Disabled.”

✧ Time of day – This setting specifies the time of day to

begin a scheduled archive.
✧ Elapse time – Select this option to schedule archives
based on an elapsed time since the last archive. Use the
fields that accompany this option to specify an elapse
time.
✧ Day of week – Select this option to schedule archives for
a specific day of the week. Use the drop-down list to
choose a day.

Note: Due to system activity, the archive may not occur at the exact time
specified.

7. Click one of the following buttons to archive events:

✧ OK – Click this button to save the settings and exit the
editor. If you have activated () the Enable event
archiving option, TAC I/NET Seven will use the settings
in this editor to automatically initiate event archives.
✧ Archive Now – This button is only available when the
Enable event archiving option is selected. Click this
button to manually initiate an event archive. If you click
this button before the number of unarchived records has
reached the Minimum Online Events setting, you will
receive an error message informing you that no archive
can occur.

Triggered Archives
A triggered archive is one that is initiated by the system based on
entries in the archive configuration. The system initiates archives
either by the passage of time (Scheduled Trigger) or by reaching
a particular number of online events (Threshold Trigger).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-51

TCON299–05/10
Archives System Messages

Automatic
When the archive trigger is set to Automatic, the archive activity is
not visible to the user. The only way you will be able to tell events
are archived is that their appearance in the AMT windows will
change to the colors set for archived events (see “Alarm Colors and
Archive Colors” on page 6-6).
Confirmed
If an archive trigger is set to Confirm, then the system will display
the Confirm Archive editor (see Figure 6-25) when the trigger
point is reached.

Figure 6-25. Confirm Archive

Approving the Archive

1. If desired, use the spin dial to change the Thousands of
records to archive. The default number is based on the
Archive Configuration entries. You may decrease this number
to archive fewer records, but you may not increase the
number of records to archive.
2. Activate () or deactivate () the archive verification by
clicking on the Verify archive contents check box. The
default is the setting from the archive configuration.
3. Press the Start button to begin the archive.

6-52 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages Archives

Postponing the Archive

To postpone the archive, click Cancel on the Confirm Archive
editor.
Until the records are archived, the Confirm Archive editor will
reappear every 24 hours, or when another trigger point is reached.
In addition, a reminder screen will appear whenever a new oper-
ator logs on (see Figure 6-26).

Figure 6-26. Archive Reminder Screen

Manual Archives
You can create an archive any time the current number of online
events exceeds the Minimum Online Events setting in the Archive
Configuration editor by at least 1,000 (records are archived in
blocks of 1,000).

Note: Manual archives can result in small archive files, making it difficult
to run reports on archived events. Refer to the section on Archives in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide.

I/O Server must be running to create an archive.

1. Right-click on the I/O Server icon and select Archive Config
from the context menu. The system displays the Event Archive
Configuration editor as shown in Figure 6-24 on page 6-48.
2. Click the Archive Now button. The system displays the
Confirm Archive editor (see Figure 6-25 on page 6-52).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-53

TCON299–05/10
Archives System Messages

3. If desired, use the spin dial to change the Thousands of

records to archive. The default number is the maximum
records available for archiving. You may decrease this number
to archive fewer records, but you may not increase the
number of records to archive.
4. Activate () or deactivate () the archive verification by
clicking on the Verify archive contents check box. The
default is the setting from the archive configuration.
5. Click Archive Now to begin the archive, or Cancel to return
to the Event Archive Configuration editor without archiving.
6. Click OK to close the Archive Configuration editor.

Opening an Event Archive

Event archive files may be opened in an AMT event window for
viewing. Only one archive may be opened in each window. To open
an archive file in an AMT window:
1. Select System  Open Archive from the AMT menu. The
Archives Summary appears (see Figure 6-27).

Figure 6-27. Archive Summary

6-54 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages CCTV in AMT

Use Archive Summary to open archived TAC I/NET Seven

AMT data or TAC I/NET 2000 AMT data that you have
imported into the TAC I/NET Seven system.
2. Highlight the desired archive and select OK. The Window
Options editor opens (see Figure 6-6 on page 6-19).
Use this editor to customize the AMT window that will show
the archive that you are currently opening. Refer to “Window
Options” on page 6-18 for more information.
The archive window will show the name of the archive file in the
title bar, along with the window and filter names (if applicable). All
of the entries in this window will display the colors specified for
archived records in the AMT Options editor (see “Alarm Colors
and Archive Colors” on page 6-6).
Since the records in the archive file will not change, this window is
not updated by the system. Therefore there is no need to pause this
window display, although the Pause function is not disabled (refer
to “Pausing the Message Update” on page 6-18).

CCTV in AMT
CCTV features are available only after you have integrated a Pelco
CCTV system with TAC I/NET Seven. For instructions on how to
integrate digital CCTV with TAC I/NET Seven, refer to TCON301,
TAC I/NET Seven Database Connectivity and Reporting.
Using AMT’s CCTV features, you can review recorded video and
view live video from AMT. You can also perform searches for
specific video clips.

CCTV Message Timestamps

When TAC I/NET Seven receives a timestamped message from the
CCTV system, it records the message with the date and time of the
CCTV server's date and time adjusted for the TAC I/NET Seven
PC's regional settings. “DVR Srv Offline” and “DVR Srv Online”
messages are not timestamped by the CCTV system and are always
recorded with the host PC's time and date.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-55

TCON299–05/10
CCTV in AMT System Messages

Opening the AMT Video Window

The AMT Video window is AMT’s main interface to live and
captured CCTV system video. You can access the AMT Video
window as follows:
1. Right-click on any event that has a video clip (i.e., any event
that contains a icon) and select Video from the resulting
pop-up menu.

Figure 6-28. Right-clicking an Event

Alternatively, you can click on any event that has a video clip
and then click the show video icon in the AMT toolbar.
The AMT Video window opens (see Figure 6-29).
2. Use the AMT Video window to view the captured video. The
video clip plays automatically when you first open the AMT
Video window.
The AMT Video window has two video display areas. The left
display area shows captured video. The right display area shows live
video.

Viewing the Selected Event’s Captured Video

Within the AMT Video Window, you can replay an event’s
captured video by pressing the Play ( ) button. You can also use
the other buttons to manually move forward and backward within
the video clip.

Viewing Live Video

Use the drop-down list next to the slider to select the source camera
for the live video display. The selected camera will also be used as
criteria for the search function described below.

6-56 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Messages CCTV in AMT

Figure 6-29. AMT Video

Searching Captured Video

Search for video by performing the following steps:
1. Use the following fields to specify date and time criteria:
✧ Begin (date and time) – Use these fields to specify the
start of the time span you wish to search.
✧ End (date and time) – Use these fields to specify the end
of the time span you wish to search.
2. Use the Camera drop-down list to select the source camera
for the search function.
3. When you are satisfied with the criteria settings, press the
video control button to start the search function.
4. When the search function is complete, the Playback portion
of the editor will begin playing the resulting video.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 6-57

TCON299–05/10
CCTV in AMT System Messages

6-58 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

7
18
Summaries

Summaries give you a quick glance at the devices communicating

at a particular level in your system. Summaries are available for
Controllers, Off Normal points, Disabled points, Configuration,
Doors, and Pages. The summaries are accessed through Summary
on the main menu or using the tools on the Summary toolbar.

Caution: The database server should not be shut down while TAC I/NET
Seven is running. Shutting down the database server drops all
existing connections to the database, and can result in corrupted data
displays. (Only users with administrative privileges on the worksta-
tion can stop or start the database server.)

Controller Summary
This summary lists all of the points in the controller to which you
are currently connected. The columns in the list box show the
following information:
✦ Address – the system address and point type of the point. This
is also the default name assigned to a point by TAC I/NET
Seven.
✦ Class – the point class of the point (internal, external, indi-
rect).
✦ Name – the point name assigned by TAC I/NET Seven, or by a
user.
Follow the steps below to display a Controller Summary:
1. Connect to the desired controller.
2. Select Summary  Controller, or click the Controller tool on
the Summary toolbar. The system displays the Controller
Summary screen (see Figure 7-1).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-1

TCON299–05/10
Controller Summary Summaries

Figure 7-1. Controller Summary

In line with each point is the status or value of the point as well as
a “–” or “Y” in the Value, Alm, Inh, Tst, Man, Old, and Ack
columns. These indicators stay in line with the points if you move
the position of the list box. Table 7-1 lists and describes each
column in the point line.

Table 7-1. Controller Summary Values and Indicators

Column Description
This column shows the current state or value of the point. This is updated at the
Value
refresh interval you supplied in the Host Configuration editor.
Alarm (Alm) This column indicates whether the point is in alarm or not.
The Inh column indicates whether or not a point is inhibited by an alarm inhibit-
Inhibit enable extension associated with this point. This is applicable only for AI, GI, DM,
(Inh) and DA points. A Y in this column indicates that this point is inhibited and will not
report an alarm if the point goes into alarm.
The Tst column indicates whether or not the point is in test mode. The Test mode
Test Mode
lets you set the value of output or input points to a desired value or state. Refer to
(Tst)
“Test Mode” on page 7-4 for more information.
The Man column indicates whether or not the point is in the manual mode. This lets
Manual Mode
you selectively freeze the operation of a point in its current position. This function is
(Man)
available for output points only. Refer to “Manual Mode” on page 7-4.

7-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Controller Summary

Table 7-1. Controller Summary Values and Indicators (Continued)

Column Description
The Old column indicates whether or not the point value is invalid or no longer
Old
communicating.
The Ack column indicates whether the point has an unacknowledged alarm
condition. You may acknowledge an alarm from this summary by highlighting the
Acknowledge
point and then selecting Alarm Ack.The Y in the Ack column will disappear. If the
(Ack)
point is still in an alarm state, it continues to display in red indicating its continued
alarm status.

From the Controller Summary you can control a point or zoom

from a selected point to that point’s editor. You may also sort the
summary list by either point number or name.

Controlling a Point
Use the following procedures to control a point.
1. Select the point in the Controller Summary list.
2. Select Control. The system displays the Point Control screen
(see Figure 7-2).

Figure 7-2. Point Control Screen

This screen provides the following options for controlling a

point:
✧ Test Mode On/Off
✧ Manual Mode On/Off
✧ Point Acknowledge
✧ Release
✧ APB Reset

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-3

TCON299–05/10
Controller Summary Summaries

3. Choose the desired control option. Procedures for using each

option are described below.
4. When you are finished, select Close to return to the Control
Summary screen.
Test Mode
Use the Test mode to isolate one or more points from external
hardware. This allows you to verify controller operation for
selected points without affecting or using the external hardware.
This also allows you to manually enter states/values for points.
Refer to the chapter dealing with controller functions in TCON300,
TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information
about the Test mode.
1. From the Point Control screen, select Test On. The system
displays TEST in the point status bar while the point is in Test
mode.
2. If necessary, set a state or value for the point and select Down-
load. The state/value displayed in the point status bar changes
to the new setting.

Note: While using the Test mode, the controller continues to update the
database for the selected point. Your states or values for the point can
be overridden by the controller. To prevent the controller from over-
riding your states or values, also place the point in Manual mode.

3. When you are finished using Test, exit the mode by selecting
Test Off. The TEST indication is removed from the point
status bar.
4. Select Close to leave the Point Control screen and return to
the Controller Summary screen.
Manual Mode
Use the Manual mode to freeze an output point at its current
state/value and, if desired, manually control the point. Unlike the
Test mode, the point is not isolated from connected hardware while
in Manual mode. States or values that you download to the point

7-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Controller Summary

are sent to the connected hardware. An exception to this is when

both the Manual mode and Test mode are selected at the same time.
Refer to the note in the Test mode description above.
1. From the Point Control screen, select Manual. The system
displays MAN in the point status bar while the point is in
Manual mode.
2. If necessary, set a state or value for the point and select Down-
load. The state/value displayed in the point status bar changes
to the new setting.

Note: If external hardware is connected to the selected point, the state or

value you enter is also sent to the connected hardware.

3. When you are finished using Manual, exit the mode by

selecting Automatic. The MAN indication is removed from
the point status bar.
4. Select Close to leave the Point Control screen and return to
the Controller Summary screen.
Point Acknowledge
If ACK is displayed in the point status bar (or in the status line for
the point in the Controller Summary screen), then the point has
gone into alarm and has not yet been acknowledged. You can
acknowledge the alarm from the Point Control screen by selecting
Acknowledge. This option is also available on the Controller
Summary screen.
Release
Use the release option to unlock a door for the programmed strike
duration. From the Point Control screen, select Release. This
option is only available for door points.
Reset Anti-passback
1. If the selected point is a door, the APB Reset button can be
used to manually reset the anti-passback function for an indi-
vidual. From the Point Control screen, select APB Reset to
open the Manual APB Reset screen (see Figure 7-3).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-5

TCON299–05/10
Controller Summary Summaries

Figure 7-3. Manual APB Reset Screen – Point Control

2. Select a Tenant from the drop-down list to display the indi-

viduals assigned to this door. You may select all tenants for a
list of all individuals assigned to the door.
3. Select the individual you wish to reset, or select All from the
individuals list to reset all individuals for the selected tenant.
4. Click the OK button to reset the selected individual and
return to the Point Control screen, or Cancel to close the
screen without resetting.

Zooming to a Point
The Controller Summary screen allows you to “zoom” to the Resi-
dent I/O Point editor for the selected point. Selecting Zoom is the
same as selecting Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points from the
main menu, and then selecting the desired point from the point
list. Refer to Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing, for more
information about the Resident I/O Points editor and its uses.

Sorting the Points

The Controller Summary screen allows you to sort the summary
list by either the point address or the point name.

7-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Off Normal Summary

1. Select Sort to display the dialog box shown in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4. Point Sort Type

2. Chose the sort order you desire, either Point Number or

Point Name.
3. Click OK. The controller summary list will display the avail-
able points in the chosen sort order.

Off Normal Summary

This summary displays all points in an alarm or in a questionable
state (old).

Note: Before a point will display in this summary, you must select the
controller containing these points in the Network functions editor
(refer to Chapter 2, Setup and Network Configuration).

1. Select Summary  Off Normal Point, or click the Off Normal

tool on the Summary toolbar. The system displays a dialog
box informing you that the summary is being prepared.
2. All off normal points display in a dialog box shown in
Figure 7-5.
3. You may acknowledge a point in alarm by highlighting the
point in the list, and then selecting Acknowledge.
4. You may move to the system page that contains the point in
alarm by highlighting the point and then selecting Page Ack.
5. Select Close when you are finished.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-7

TCON299–05/10
Disabled Summary Summaries

Figure 7-5. Off Normal Points Summary

Disabled Summary
The disabled summary displays all points that are in test or manual
mode.

Note: Before a point will display in this summary, you must select the
controller containing these points in the Network Functions editor
(refer to Chapter 2, Setup and Network Configuration).

1. Select Summary  Disabled Point, or click the Disabled

Point tool on the Summary toolbar. The system displays a
dialog box notifying you that the summary is being prepared.
2. All disabled points display in the Disabled points summary
shown in Figure 7-6.
3. Select Close when you are finished.

7-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Configuration Summaries

Figure 7-6. Disabled Points Summary

Configuration Summaries
Select Configuration from the list of summary options. You must
be connected at the level of the configuration you wish to display.

Host Summary
To display the available Host Taps connected to your system press
Host. If your system is configured with an Ethernet LAN, the host
summary displays all operator and backup stations connected to
the Ethernet LAN.
If your host is on a host or controller LAN, the host summary
displays the Host Tap’s name and revision level.
The potential columns in the list show the following information:
✦ Address – the system address for that Tap or host.
✦ Host PC name - the assigned host name.
✦ Type – the type of device.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-9

TCON299–05/10
Configuration Summaries Summaries

Figure 7-7. System Configuration – Host Summary

✦ Revision – the revision number and date of the firmware in

the device.
1. Select Host to display connected Host Taps.
2. Highlight the desired link and then select Link or Station to
display available devices connected to that host Tap.
3. Select Close to return to the main menu.

Link Summary
This option displays all link Taps available through the connected
operator station. If you connect to a remote operator station
through the Ethernet LAN, this summary displays the available
links at the remote station. The screen display is similar to the Host
Summary screen in Figure 7-7.
The columns in the list show the following information:
✦ Address – the system address for that Tap.
✦ Type – the type of device.
✦ Link tap name – the assigned name of the device.
✦ Revision – the revision number and date of the firmware in
the device.
1. Select the Link to display connected links.

7-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Configuration Summaries

2. Highlight the desired link and then select Station to display

available stations connected to that link Tap.
3. Select Close to return to the main menu.

Station Summary
This option displays the controllers available through the
connected link Tap. Separate controller LANs on a link with
multiple LAN Taps are also identified. Only LAN Taps and their
phone numbers are listed on a dial link Tap. If you request a station
summary after you connect to a controller LAN through a dial link
Tap, this displays all the stations on that controller LAN (see
Figure 7-8).

Figure 7-8. System Configuration – Station Summary

The columns in the list show the following information:

✦ Address – the system address for that Tap or host.
✦ Site – the address of the site Tap (if applicable).
✦ Type – the type of device.
✦ Station name – the assigned name of the device.
✦ Stations – the number of stations on this device.
✦ Revision – the revision number and date of the firmware in
the device.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-11

TCON299–05/10
Configuration Summaries Summaries

1. From a selected host or link, select Station to display the

connected stations.
2. Select Close to return to the main menu.

UC Summary
This option displays all the unitary controllers connected to the
7760 controller (UCI) to which you are connected. This screen
indicates whether a connected MR is communicating.
The columns in the list show the following information:
✦ Address – the system address for that Tap or host.
✦ Site – the address of the connecting site Tap (if applicable).
✦ Type – the type of device.
✦ Status – the communication status of the device.
1. From a selected host or link, select Station to display the
connected stations.
2. Select Close to return to the main menu.

MR Summary
This option displays all the micro regulator controllers connected
to the SLI controllers on the associated controller LAN. This screen
indicates whether a connected MR is communicating.
The columns in the list show the following information:
✦ Address – the system address for that Tap or host.
✦ Site – the address of the connecting site Tap (if applicable).
✦ Type – the type of device.
✦ Status – the communication status of the device.
1. From a selected host or link, select MR to display the
connected stations.
2. Select Close to return to the main menu.

7-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Door Summary

DPU Summary
This option displays all the DPUs (DPU7910s, DPU7920s, and
SCU1284s), DIOs (DIO7940s and SCU1280s), and DIUs
(DIU7930s and SCU1200s) connected to the SLI controllers on the
associated LAN. This screen indicates whether a connected device
is communicating.
The columns in the list show the following information:
✦ Address – the system address for that Tap or host.
✦ Site – the address of the connecting site Tap (if applicable).
✦ Type – the type of device.
✦ Status – the communication status of the device.
✦ Rev/Date – The revision number and date of the device’s
firmware.
1. From a selected host or link, select DPU to display the
connected devices.
2. Select Close to return to the main menu.

Door Summary
This summary lists all of the door points defined for the selected
tenant. The columns in the list box show the following informa-
tion:
✦ Select – doors marked with “[X]” are selected and doors
marked with “[ ]” are not selected. You may toggle selection
of doors and apply the Secure, Unlock, Lock, Manual Off, and
Release functions to all selected doors.
✦ Address – this is the system address of the door point. This is
also the default name assigned to the point by TAC I/NET
Seven.
✦ Name – this is the point name assigned by TAC I/NET Seven
or by a user.
✦ Man – this column displays an “M” for each door point that is
in Manual mode.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-13

TCON299–05/10
Door Summary Summaries

✦ Value – this column shows the current state of the door point
(Secure/Locked/Unlocked).
Follow the steps below to display a Door Summary:
1. Select Summary  Door from the main menu. The system
displays a list of Tenants (see Figure 7-9).

Figure 7-9. Tenants List

2. Choose the desired tenant and select the Summary button.

The system displays the Door Summary (see Figure 7-10).
This screen lists all doors assigned to the selected tenant.
3. Use Secure, Unlock, Lock, Manual Off, and Release to
control all selected door points. Click on the individual point
to select ([X]) or deselect ([ ]) them. Use the mouse to toggle
door point selection.

Note: Any time a door’s mode is changed, the door point is automatically
placed in the “Manual” mode. Remember to return the door points
to the Automatic mode when you are finished controlling them. (This
does not apply to the Release operation.)

4. Select APB Reset to manually reset the anti-passback func-

tion for an individual.

7-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Door Summary

Figure 7-10. Door Summary

a. Click the APB Reset button. The Manual APB Reset

screen appears (see Figure 7-11).
b. The Tenant that you selected when opening the door
summary is already selected. The lower window lists the
individuals assigned to the door from the selected tenant.

Note: You cannot change the tenant selection on this screen. To change the
tenant, close the Manual APB Reset screen and the Door Summary,
and select a different tenant for the Door Summary. If you wish to be
able to select tenants during APB reset, use the APB reset function
from the Point Control screen of the Controller Summary (see
“Controlling a Point” on page 7-3).

c. Select the individual you wish to reset, or select All from

the individuals list to reset all individuals for the selected
tenant.
d. Click the OK button to reset the selected individual and
return to the Door Summary, or Cancel to close the
screen without resetting.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-15

TCON299–05/10
Page Summary Summaries

Figure 7-11. Manual APB Reset Screen – Door Summary

5. Select Close to return to the Tenant Selection window and

then select Close again to return to the main menu.

Page Summary
This summary lists all of the points appearing on a system page.
The columns in the list box show the following information:

Note: The point Class and Name are not displayed while the system is
connected via a dial connection from a graphic page dial icon. The
system has no way of knowing the point name or type. The point
Class and Name will be displayed during direct connect.

✦ Address – includes the link (0-99), station (0-63), point (0-

31), bit offset (0-9), and point type associated with each entry.
✦ Class – shows the Class assigned to a point (i.e. Ext, Int or
Indirect).

7-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Summaries Page Summary

✦ Name – 16 character name defined in the Resident I/O Points

Editor. (See note above.)
✦ Value – current state or value of the associated point. This text
is defined in the station parameters editor. The display is
updated according to the refresh interval defined in the Host
Configuration Editor.
✦ Alm – indicates that a point is in alarm.
✦ Ack – a "Y" appearing in this column indicates that the associ-
ated point is in alarm or at one time was in alarm, and that
the point has not been acknowledged by an operator.
✦ Inh – alarm Inhibit indicator. If a "Y" is present, the associated
point is inhibited from generating/reporting any alarm condi-
tion. This function requires an Alarm Inhibit extension on the
point.
✦ Tst – test indicator for input and output points. For input
points, this will ignore all input stimulus on the external
hardware and allow normal processing of the commanded
test value. For output points, this will allow normal
processing of all manual and automatic functions but will not
energize/control any hardware outputs.
✦ Man – manual indicator for output points only. This will
disable all automatic functions from controlling the external
hardware (i.e., ATS, DDC, Demand, etc.).
✦ Old – old data indicator for input and output points. If the
system has determined that the point’s value is not valid, a "Y"
will be placed in this column for the associated point.
Follow the steps below to display a Page Summary:
1. You must already be displaying a system page before you
initiate a Page Summary. If a system page is not displayed,
select System  Live Graphic Pages, or click the Live
Graphic Page tool on the System toolbar, and select a system
page.
2. Select Summary  Page, or click the Page tool on the
Summary toolbar. The system displays the Page Summary
screen (see Figure 7-12) This screen lists all points appearing
in the system page.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 7-17

TCON299–05/10
Page Summary Summaries

Figure 7-12. Page Summary

The following functions are available from the Page Summary:

✦ Control – this function takes you to the point control dialog
where the selected point can be controlled.
✦ Clipboard – this function copies the entire summary to the
Windows Clipboard.
✦ Zoom – this function takes you to the appropriate editor for
the specific point type.
✦ Acknowledge – use this function to acknowledge a point in
alarm.
✦ Page Ack – this function acknowledges all displayed points
that are in alarm. This function only affects the points
currently displayed. The point list can display 18 points at a
time. If necessary, scroll up or down to display more points
and then select Page Ack again.

7-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

8
78
System Pages

System pages are graphical representations of your system. They

can include graphic images, as well as the current state and value of
your system components.

Caution: The database server should not be shut down while TAC I/NET
Seven is running. Shutting down the database server drops all
existing connections to the database, and can result in corrupted data
displays. (Only users with administrative privileges on the worksta-
tion can stop or start the database server.)

You can construct as many pages as you need to represent your

system. Each page can represent a portion of the system. For
example, if you are controlling multiple buildings you may want
separate pages for each building. Or, you may want one single page
to represent a specific, vital function.
The components you place on each page are up to you. Figure 8-1
and Figure 8-2 are examples of the type of system pages you can
construct.
Figure 8-1 shows a system page depicting an office layout. Notice
that there are indicators for the door status and temperature. In
addition, there are two icons that connect to other system pages.
Figure 8-2 shows a simple representation of a mixed air handler.
As both examples illustrate, system pages may contain separate,
dynamic data fields called points. Each point represents an
internal, external, or remotely connected system component. You
may use any one point as often as you require it.
System pages are constructed in TAC I/NET Seven’s Graphics
Editor. The Graphics Editor provides a full range of graphic tools
and easy access to TAC I/NET Seven points. You can save frequently
used graphics as TAC I/NET Seven symbols (.gls) and you can

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-1

TCON299–05/10
 System Pages

Figure 8-1. Sample system page

Figure 8-2. Second sample system page

import bitmap (.bmp) files created in other graphic programs.

After constructing your system page within the Graphics Editor,
you can display the page in “live” mode within TAC I/NET Seven.
System pages can contain the following objects:

8-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

✦ Text
✦ Graphics objects created with the TAC I/NET Seven Graphics
Editor
✦ Imported graphics objects in bitmap (.bmp) files
✦ Library Symbols from the TAC I/NET Seven Symbol Library
✦ Page reference icons to jump to alternate system pages
✦ Points (dynamic data fields)
✦ Other icons (modules, lines, doors, etc.)
This chapter provides the information you need to create system
pages and also includes instructions for displaying live pages. The
system pages are an important part of the system and you will use
them frequently as you learn the system and customize it to meet
your individual needs.

The Graphics Editor

The TAC I/NET Seven Graphics Editor provides the tools you need
to create and modify system pages. The Graphics Editor has its own
set of menus and toolbars. Many of the menu commands are also
available as a toolbar button. Where this is the case, the toolbar icon
is displayed in the left margin and the equivalent menu command
is on the right, in bold print.

Working with System Pages

This section explains how to access the Graphics Editor, open and
close system pages, and set the default system page.
Creating a New System Page
Edit  Host Computer  Graphics Editor
1. Access the Graphics Editor, from TAC I/NET Seven, using the
menu command, or by clicking on the New tool located on
the System toolbar. You are automatically presented with a
new, blank system page.
You may also use the New tool to create a new system page
from within the Graphics Editor.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-3

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Editing an Existing System Page

You can easily edit existing system pages. To open an existing
system page from the Graphics Editor, perform the following steps:
File  Open
1. From within the Graphics Editor, select the Open tool, using
either the Open button on the System toolbar or the menu
command above. The Open dialog box displays.

Note: You must be in the Graphics Editor to use the Open menu command.
If you are in TAC I/NET Seven, use the Open toolbar button.

2. Scroll through the browser to locate the file. Select the file and
click Open to begin editing the system page.

Note: Refer to “TAC I/NET 4.x Graphic Pages” on page 5, for information
on using graphic pages created with a previous version of TAC I/NET,

If you select the Open tool button from the TAC I/NET Seven
menu, you are automatically presented with the Graphics Editor
menus.
Exiting the Graphics Editor
After you have finished editing your system page, you will need to
return to the main TAC I/NET Seven system.
Saving and Exiting
The Close option in the Graphics Editor File menu allows you to
close the Graphics Editor and return to the main TAC I/NET Seven
menus.
1. Select File  Close.
2. If you are editing a named, existing file and have made no
changes, the editing session will be ended immediately.
3. If you made changes to a previously saved file, a dialog box
prompts you to save the changes. From this dialog box, you
have two options:
✧ Select Yes to overwrite the existing file.

8-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

✧ Select No to end the session, leaving the existing file

unchanged.
4. If you are editing an new file, a dialog box prompts you to
save the file. From this dialog box, you have two options:
✧ Select No to end the editing session, losing all graphics
created during the session.
✧ Select Yes to display the Save As dialog box.
5. If you selected Yes in Step 4, specify a directory and filename
for the save operation. Once the file is selected or entered,
select OK .
TAC I/NET 4.x Graphic Pages
TAC I/NET Seven saves graphic pages and library symbols in
different formats than previous versions of TAC I/NET. Graphic
pages from earlier versions of TAC I/NET have a .pag file extension
and library symbols have a .bol extension. TAC I/NET Seven pages
will have a .gpg extension and library symbols will have a .gls exten-
sion. However, TAC I/NET Seven has the capability to open and
automatically convert both .pag and .bol graphic files.

Note: Refer to TCON157, TAC I/NET Forms and Worksheets Getting

Started, for a complete discussion on converting system pages.

Opening *.PAG Files

Use the following procedure to open TAC I/NET 4.x graphic pages:
File  Open
1. From within the Graphics Editor, select the Open tool, using
either the Open button on the System toolbar or the menu
command. The Open dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 8-3.
2. Select the correct directory.
3. Click the down-arrow and select I/NET 4.XX Graphic Page
Files (*.pag) in the Files of type field. Only files with a *.pag
extension will display in the browser.
4. Select the file and click Open to display the graphic page.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-5

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Figure 8-3. Open Dialog Box

When you save the file, TAC I/NET Seven automatically saves it in
the new format with a .gpg extension.
Loading a *.BOL file
You can use library symbols created with TAC I/NET 4.x by
following the procedure below.
File  Load Library Symbol
1. Use the menu command shown above to access the Open
dialog box.
2. Select the correct directory.
3. Click the down-arrow and select I/NET 4.XX Library Symbol
Files (*.bol) in the Files of type field. Only files with a *.bol
extension will display in the browser.
4. Highlight the file and a preview appears in the bottom of the
dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-4.
5. Select the file and click Open to load the symbol.

8-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Figure 8-4. Open a Library Symbol dialog box.

6. You can insert the symbol just as you would one with a .gls
extension by using the Graphic Insert tool on the Drawing
toolbar.

Working with Graphic Objects

This section details the fundamental skills necessary to draw, insert,
copy, import, position, resize, and reposition graphic objects,
icons, points, and text.
Selecting Objects
If you wish to modify or reposition an object you will first need to
select it.

Tools  Select
1. To use the Select pointer ( ), click the Select button on the
Drawing tools toolbar or select the menu command. (Refer to
“Select Tool” on page 8-36.)

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-7

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

2. Position the Select tool on the object to be selected, and click

the left mouse button to display the object handles, as shown
in Figure 8-5. Object handles indicate that the object is
currently selected.

Figure 8-5. Selecting a Graphics Object

3. To select multiple objects, position the Select tool near the

object to be selected. Click the left mouse button, and drag
the mouse to enclose the desired objects within the selection
box (a dashed line), as shown in Figure 8-6 on page 8-8.
Release the mouse button to display the object handles.

Figure 8-6. Selecting Multiple Graphics Objects

An alternative way to select multiple objects is to press the

Shift key while clicking on each object.

Deselecting Objects
To deselect a selected object(s), either select another object or posi-
tion the pointer on a background area and click the left mouse
button.
Deleting Objects
Objects on the Graphics Editor screen can be deleted by
performing the following steps:
1. Select the object(s).

8-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

2. Select Edit  Clear or press the Delete key.

Positioning Objects
Objects can be positioned by performing the following steps:
1. Select the object.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the
object to its new position.
3. When the object is in the new location, release the mouse
button.
You can gain additional precision by using the arrow keys to posi-
tion an object.
1. Select the object.
2. Move the object up, down, left, or right, 1 pixel at a time by
pressing the appropriate arrow key. Move the object one grid
setting at a time, by pressing the Control key simultaneously
with the arrow key. Refer to page 8-30 for information on
setting the grid width.
Copying Objects
Perform the following steps to copy an object.
1. Hold down the Control key, click and hold the left mouse
button, and drag a copy of the object to a new position, as
shown in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7. Copying a Graphic Object

2. When the copy is in the desired position, release the mouse

button and Control key.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-9

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

3. The Graphics Editor also supports Windows’ Cut [Ctrl + X],

Copy [Ctrl + C], Paste [Ctrl + V] and Paste Special functions.
You can access these functions on the Edit menu.
Resizing Objects
An object on the Graphics Editor screen can be resized by
performing the following steps:
1. Select the object.
2. Position the Select tool on one of the object handles.

Figure 8-8. Selecting a Graphics Object Handle

3. To enlarge the object, click and hold the left mouse button
while dragging away from the object in a diagonal direction,
as shown in Figure 8-9. To reduce the object, drag toward the
center of the object.
4. When the object is the desired size, release the mouse button.

Figure 8-9. Resizing a Graphics Object

5. You can also resize object by used the Scale tool. Refer to page
8-34 for more information on this tool.
Mouse Shortcuts
Mouse shortcuts can be used when editing graphic pages to stream-
line the process. These shortcuts work in exactly the same way as
selecting the corresponding command from the TAC I/NET Seven
Graphic Page editor menus and toolbars.

8-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Table 8-1. Graphics Editor Mouse Shortcuts

Selection Action Result

click select object
arc tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
arc tool right click cancel tool
arc tool Shift+click and drag draw shape with height = width
bezier curve tool click start object or add point
bezier curve tool click and drag draw segment
bezier curve tool double-click finish object
chord tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
chord tool right click cancel tool
chord tool Shift+click and drag draw shape with height = width
circle tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
circle tool right click cancel tool
circle tool Shift+click and drag draw shape with height = width
ellipse tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
ellipse tool right click cancel tool
ellipse tool Shift+click and drag draw shape with height = width
fill tool click set background color
fill tool right click deselect tool
free pen tool click and drag draw (while mouse button is pressed)
header double-click maximize page
library symbol click add currently selected symbol to selected location
line tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
line tool right click cancel tool
line tool Shift+click and drag draw straight line (horizontal or vertical)
menu bar double-click toggle between graphics menu and I/NET menu
object arrow (cursor) key move object one pixel
object click and drag select all objects within the defined rectangle
object Ctrl+arrow (cursor) move object (grid setting = number of pixels moved)
object Ctrl+click clone object
object drag move object
object drag (on handle) resize object
object right click view special menu for object
object right double-click edit object properties
object Shift+arrow (cursor) resize object

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-11

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Table 8-1. Graphics Editor Mouse Shortcuts (Continued)

Selection Action Result

object Shift+click select multiple objects
object Shift+double-click de-select object (used with multiple selections)
object Tab change selection to next object
object + fill tool click fill selected object with current brush pattern/color
object + fill tool right click outline selected object with current pen pattern/color
object + polygon tool double-click toggle fill mode on selected object
pie slice tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
pie slice tool right click cancel tool
pie slice tool Shift+click and drag draw shape with height = width
point double-click open Resident I/0 Points editor
point right-click display the graphics editor pop-up menu
point right double-click display the Drawing Styles window
point (on live page) double-click display the Point Control dialog
point (on live page) right-click display a pop-up menu of commands
polygon tool click start object or add point
polygon tool click and drag draw segment
polygon tool double-click finish object
polyline tool click start object or add point
polyline tool click and drag draw segment
polyline tool double-click finish object
rectangle tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
rectangle tool right click cancel tool
rectangle tool Shift+click and drag draw shape with height = width
rounded rectangle tool click and drag draw shape (size depends on start and end points)
rounded rectangle tool right click cancel tool
rounded rectangle tool Shift+click and drag draw shape with height = width
splitter bars click split screen at location of click (vertical & horizontal)
splitter bars double-click remove split screen
text box double-click edit text
text tool click and drag define text box (size depends on start & end points)
toolbar double-click toggle dock/undock
toolbar drag dock/undock
toolbar dock right click toggle show toolbars

8-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Table 8-1. Graphics Editor Mouse Shortcuts (Continued)

Selection Action Result

zoom tool click return to normal (1:1) magnification
zoom tool click and drag zoom to rectangle of the selected area

System Tools
Some of the functions discussed below are available on the TAC
I/NET Seven System Toolbar. The remainder are on the Graphic
Editor’s File menu. Refer to Chapter 1, TAC I/NET Seven Basics for
information on the System Tools.
When a toolbar button is available it is shown in the left margin and
the equivalent menu command is to the right in bold print.
File Management
File management includes creating new files, opening existing files,
and saving files. Refer to “Working with System Pages” on page 8-3
for additional information on file management.

File  New
This command opens a new, blank system page.

File  Open
This command opens an existing system page. The Open dialog
box allows you to browse through folders to locate the file you
need.
File  Close
This command closes the open system page. You will be prompted
to save any changes you have made to the page. If that page is the
only open page, Close also exits the Graphics Editor and returns to
TAC I/NET Seven.

File  Save
This command saves the system page. If you are saving the file for
the first time, the Save As dialog box displays.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-13

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

File  Save as...

This command permits you to specify a new filename. The Save As
dialog box automatically displays if you are saving a file for the first
time. Otherwise, you must select the Save As command. This
command is particularly useful for making copies of existing
system pages.
Library Symbols
Library symbols provide you with the capability to save graphic
objects outside of a system page. This feature is very handy for
complicated graphics or graphic components that you will use on
other system pages.

File  Save As Library Symbol

1. Select the object you want to save.
2. Select File  Save Library Symbol.
3. Locate the folder you want the file to be located in, enter a
filename, and select Save. The file extension .gls indicates to
TAC I/NET Seven that the file is a library symbol and is auto-
matically added to the filename.

File  Load Library Symbol

This command works exactly like Load Bitmap, (described below)
except it loads TAC I/NET Seven library symbol files (.gls) instead
of bitmaps. As with bitmap files, once the graphic is loaded you are
automatically presented with the Symbol tool and can insert the
graphic multiple times. You can load one of the standard library
symbols supplied with TAC I/NET Seven or one that you have
created.
TAC I/NET Seven supplies many library symbols. The installation
program typically places the symbol files in a directory named
Symbols. You may also load library symbols created in previous
versions of TAC I/NET. Refer to “TAC I/NET 4.x Graphic Pages” on
page 5 for more information.
To import an existing library symbol, perform the following steps:
1. Select File  Load Library Symbol to display the Open dialog
box as shown in Figure 8-10.

8-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Figure 8-10. Select A Library Symbol Dialog Box

2. Select the filename of the desired library symbol file in the

edit field and a preview appears in the preview box.
3. Select Open to close the dialog box. The Graphic Insert tool is
automatically selected.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-15

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

4. Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to insert
the Library Symbol in the Graphics Editor screen as shown in
the example in Figure 8-11.

Figure 8-11. Loading A Library Symbol

Importing Graphics
The Graphics Editor provides two different functions to import
bitmap(.bmp) graphics. You can insert a bitmap anywhere on the
page or you can specify the bitmap be used as the system page back-
ground.
To insert a bitmap anywhere on the page use the Load Bitmap
command.

File  Load Bitmap

This command calls the Load Bitmap dialog box shown in
Figure 8-12.
1. Select File  Load Bitmap.
2. Select the bitmap file and click Open.
3. Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to insert
the object.

8-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Figure 8-12. Load A Bitmap Dialog Box

Once you select the bitmap file, the Symbol tool (located on the
Drawing tools toolbar) is automatically used to insert the graphic.
Follow the steps below to select a bitmap graphic to use for a system
page background.

File  Set Background

1. Select the bitmap (.bmp) file from the Select a Bitmap dialog
box and click Open.
2. A dialog box appears asking if you want the bitmap stretched
to fit the screen. Select Yes to resize it, or No to keep the orig-
inal size.
3. To remove the background from the page, select File 
Remove Background.

Printing Functions
To access the printer setup functions:
1. Select File  Printer Setup.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-17

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

2. From the print Setup dialog box, you can select a printer and
specify the paper size, paper source, and print orientation.
To preview a printed page:
1. Select File  Print Preview.
2. Print Preview will show you the page as it will be printed. You
may use the Zoom button to enlarge the preview. Select Close
to return to the Graphics Editor or Print to print the page.
To print a system page:
1. Select File  Print from the Graphics Editor menu.
2. The Print dialog box allows you to print to a file, select a print
range and specify a number of copies. Click OK to print the
page.
Address Conversion
Occasionally, you may wish to change the address defined for one
or more icons or markers on a graphic page. For example, you may
have changed the station number assigned to a controller which, in
turn, requires you to modify graphic icon addresses to reflect the
controller’s new station number.
Perform the following steps to modify graphic item addresses:
1. Select File  Address Conversions to display the editor, as
shown in Figure 8-13.
2. Choose the appropriate icon type from Options section. Your
choices are points, modules, lines, door icon, or ASC marker.
The option you select determines which items are included in
the scrolling list.
3. In the Items Defined on Page scroll list, click the items you
need to change. An X appears in the first field of the list to
indicate that entry is selected. Remove an entry from the
selected list by clicking on it again. Use the All Yes and All No
buttons to speed the selection process.
4. Select the Target Address options that you need to change by
clicking in the appropriate checkbox. You do not have to
select any parts of the address that do not require modifica-
tion.

8-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Figure 8-13. Address Conversion Editor

For example, if only the station number has changed, select

only the Station option. In this case, the remaining options
retain their previous values.
5. Select Replace to convert the address of the selected items.
6. Select Close to exit from the Address Conversion editor.
Summary
You can view information about the current system page with File
 Summary Information. The resulting Document Properties box
has two tabs. The first tab, Summary, (shown on the left side of
Figure 8-14) provides you with a convenient location for

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-19

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

comments and other information about the system page. Much of

the information contained in the Summary page will be displayed
when you select a file with the File  Open command.

Figure 8-14. Summary Information

The second tab, Statistics is shown in the right side of Figure 8-14.
Along with system data, Statistics provides a count of all the objects
on the page, broken out by the number of points, the number of
drawn objects and other objects.

View Tools
The Graphics Editor allows you display a background grid, estab-
lish default window colors, and arrange and view toolbars. The
View Menu contains most of the tools you need to customize your
workspace.
Graphics Properties
TAC I/NET Seven displays the Graphics Properties dialog when
you select View  Graphics Properties from the graphics editor
menu (see Figure 8-15). Use this dialog to set default operational
properties for your graphic pages.

8-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Figure 8-15. Graphics Properties

Text Colors
Use the following options to set the default colors applied to the
value of points placed on your graphics page.
✦ Text Pen – Use this option to choose a default foreground
color for point text. When you select this option, the system
displays the Color dialog. You can choose a standard system
color, or you can define a custom color. This setting will be
ignored if you have activated () the Use Object Pen option
described below.
✦ Use Object Pen – When activated (), this option causes the
default color for point values to be the color defined within
the point's font properties. Otherwise, point values are
displayed in the color you choose using the Text Pen option
described above.
The Use object pen setting does not affect the color of text
objects or markers. It also has no affect on points that have
already been placed on the graphic page.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-21

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Live Colors
Use the following options to set the colors applied to the point
icons on your graphics page based on the point's alarm status.
✦ Alarm – Use this option to choose a color for the icon of point
that is in alarm.
✦ Return Normal – Use this option to choose a color for the
icon of point that went into alarm and then returned to
normal without being acknowledged.
✦ Acknowledge – Use this option to choose a color for the icon
of point that is in alarm but has been acknowledged.
Alternate Graphics Path
When TAC I/NET Seven can't find a file referenced by a page
marker or by a graphics symbol on your graphics page, it can search
alternate paths for the missing file. Use the following options to
define alternate paths.
✦ Pages – Use this option to specify one or more alternate
paths for files referenced by page markers.
✦ Symbols – Use this option to specify one or more alternate
paths for graphic symbols referenced by your graphic page.
This includes files placed using the Graphics Insert function
or graphic symbols used to display the 0 and 1 states of
discrete points.
You can define multiple paths by separating each path with a semi-
colon (;). In the following example, the system will search
“C:\GRAPHICS” and “D:\PAGES” if a graphic page file cannot
be found at its original location.
Example: c:\graphics;d:\pages
Attributes
Use the following options to adjust how graphic pages are
displayed.
✦ Open pages maximized – Activate () this option to cause
graphic pages to open maximized.

8-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Depending on the setting of the Override window function

option (described below), this option may be overridden by
the window layout settings assigned to a user's host password.
Refer to “Controlling Window Layouts in TAC I/NET Seven”
on page 1-23 for more information.
✦ Override window function – Activate () this option to
allow the Open pages maximized option (described above)
to override the window layout settings assigned to a user's
host password (i.e., graphic pages will always open maxi-
mized, regardless of the user's stored window layout informa-
tion).
Page Properties
TAC I/NET Seven displays this dialog when you select View  Page
Properties from the graphics editor menu (see Figure 8-16). You
can also display this dialog by select Defaults... from the Fill, Pen,
and Text menus.

Figure 8-16. Page Properties

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-23

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

This dialog provides the following tabbed panels:

✦ Attributes
✦ Default Fill
✦ Default Pen
✦ Default Text
Each panel is described below.
Attributes
The Attributes panel (see Figure 8-16) provides the following
options:
✦ Page Size – Use the spindials in this section to specify the
Width and Height of the graphic page. These values represent
pixels.
✦ Grid – Use these parameters to configure and display a grid
that can be used to help you create and position graphic
objects.
✧ Show – Activate () this option to display the grid.
✧ Color – Use this option to set the grid color. The system
displays the Color dialog, allowing you to choose a stan-
dard color, or define a custom color.
✧ Width – Use this spindial to set the horizontal spacing for
the grid. This value represents pixels.
✧ Height – Use this spindial to set the vertical spacing for
the grid. This value represents pixels.
✦ Backdrop – Use the Backdrop properties to select and
configure a background bitmap image for your page.
✧ Show – Activate () the Show option to display the
backdrop.
✧ Stretch to fit – Activate () the Stretch to fit option to
force an image to occupy the entire window. If you resize
the window to a height or width that is larger than the
image, the image will automatically stretch to fit. If you
make the window smaller than the actual image size, than
some areas of the image will be cropped out of view (i.e.,
the image will not be reduced smaller than original image
size).

8-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

✧ Select – Use the Select button to browse for an image to

be used as a backdrop. The path to the backdrop image
will be displayed in the text field next to the Select
button. You can also manually type a path in this field.
This feature can be especially useful if you wish to define
a relative path (e.g., ..\images\lobby.bmp) rather than an
absolute path (e.g., c:\bldg01\images\lobby.bmp).
✦ Window Fill – Use the Window Fill properties to define and
apply a fill to the background of your page.
✧ Show – Activate () the Show option to display the fill.
✧ Pattern – Choose a Pattern from the drop-down list.
Refer to Fill Patterns for a description of the available
patterns.
✧ Colors – Select Foreground to set the foreground color
of the fill. When you select this option, the system
displays the Color dialog. You can choose a standard
system color, or you can define a custom color.
Select Background to set the background color of the
fill. When you select this option, the system displays the
Color dialog. You can choose a standard system color, or
you can define a custom color.

Note: You can also use the Set Window Fill and Clear Window Fill
options in the View menu to control the background fill.

Default Fill
This panel provides Fill Attribute options and a Preview. Use this
panel for the following options:

Note: The Preview allows you to immediately view your settings before you
accept them. If it appears that the Preview is not showing your
changes, ensure that the foreground and background colors are not
set to the same color.

✦ Pattern – Use this option to choose a fill pattern for your

graphics. This option provides the same functions as the Fill
menu item. Use Preview to view your selection.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-25

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

✦ Foreground – Use this option to choose a foreground color

for the fill pattern. The system displays the Color dialog,
allowing you to choose a standard color, or define a custom
color.
✦ Background – Use this option to choose a background color
for the fill pattern. The system displays the Color dialog,
allowing you to choose a standard color, or define a custom
color.
✦ Transparent – Use this option to make the background of the
fill transparent, allowing graphics behind the object to show
through.
Default Pen
This panel provides Pen Attributes options and a Preview. Use this
panel for the following options:
✦ Pattern – Use this option to choose a pen pattern for your
graphics. This option provides the same functions as the Pen
menu item. Use Preview to view your selection.
✦ Color – Use this option to set the pen color. The system
displays the Color dialog, allowing you to choose a standard
color, or define a custom color.
✦ Line Weight – Use this option to set the line thickness (pixels)
of the pen.
Default Text
This panel provides text options and a Preview. Use this panel for
the following the options:
✦ Font – This option allows you to choose the default font for
text. When you select this option, the system displays the Font
dialog, allowing you to choose a font, font style, and size.
✦ Colors – This section provides functions that allow you to
control the colors and transparency used for text.
✧ Foreground – Use this option to choose a foreground
color for text. The system displays the Color dialog,
allowing you to choose a standard color, or define a
custom color.

8-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

✧ Background – Use this option to choose a background

color for text. The system displays the Color dialog,
allowing you to choose a standard color, or define a
custom color.
✧ Transparent – Use this option to make the background
of text transparent, allowing graphics behind the text to
show through.
✦ Alignment – Use this option to control the horizontal and
vertical alignment of text. Use Preview to view your selec-
tions.
✦ Attributes – This section provides functions that allow you to
control miscellaneous text box attributes.

Note: The Word wrap function described below is only functional when you
set the text alignment to “Top.”

✧ Word wrap – When you activate () this option, text

will wrap as necessary to fit within the confines of the
text box. If you deactivate () this option, the text will be
cropped if it is wider or taller than the text box.
✧ Fit label – When you activate () this option, the text
box will be automatically sized to allow all of its text to fit
within the text box. If you deactivate () this option, text
will be cropped if it does not fit within the confines of the
text box.
✧ Use & to underline text – When you activate () this
option, you can type an ampersand (&) before a char-
acter to make the character be underlined. The amper-
sand will not be visible within the text. If you deactivate
() this option, ampersands will be shown and under-
lining will not be possible.
✧ Box Text – Activate () this option to make the text box
borders visible. If you deactivate () this option, text box
borders will be invisible.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-27

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

✧ Box Text as 3d box – Activate () this option to give

text boxes a 3d appearance. When you activate this
feature, the following additional options become avail-
able:
✢ 3d Top – Use this option to choose the top and left
side color for 3d text boxes. The system displays the
Color dialog, allowing you to choose a standard
color, or define a custom color.
✢ 3d Bottom – Use this option to choose the bottom
and right side color for 3d text boxes. The system
displays the Color dialog, allowing you to choose a
standard color, or define a custom color.
Zooming
View  Zoom
Zoom enlarges a selected area for detailed viewing.
1. Select the Zoom tool, located on the Drawing Tools toolbar.
2. Drag an object selection box around the area you want to be
enlarged. The area is enlarged.
3. To return to the normal view, select View  Actual Size, or
right-click on the page and select Actual Size from the
context menu, or click the area a second time.
Window Backgrounds
The Graphics Editor allows you to set the color and fill pattern of a
page, insert a bitmap graphic on the background, and display a
grid.
If you have a bitmap graphic placed on the page background (refer
to “Importing Graphics” on page 8-16) the graphic is placed on top
of the window fill. The grid is displayed behind a graphic, but is
placed on top of any color or fill patterns.

8-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

View  Set Window Fill

View  Clear Window Fill
Window Fill changes the page background to the color and fill
settings specified in the Fill menu. If you later change the fill
settings, the window background is not affected unless you select
Set Window Fill again.
To set the page background:
1. Select the color and fill options using the Fill menu or Pen
and Fill toolbar. Refer to “Fill Color” on page 8-47 for instruc-
tions.
2. Select View  Set Window Fill. Click Yes in the confirmation
dialog box.
a. Alternatively, you can select the Fill tool on the Drawing
Tools toolbar. Click on the page background and then
click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
b. Click the Selection tool to continue work on the page.
To clear a page background:
1. Select View  Clear Window Fill.
2. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

View  Show Grid

Show Grid displays a grid on the current editing window to make
it easier to align objects and create an accurately scaled system page.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-29

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

View  Set Grid

The Set Grid command calls a dialog box, shown in Figure 8-17,
that allows you to specify the grid scale. The scale is in pixels with
the width followed by height.

Figure 8-17. Grid scale

1. In the edit field, type the desired width, followed by a comma

( , ) , and then the height. If you enter only one number, the
height and width will be proportional.
2. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Note: You must use the Show Grid option to view the grid.

View  Redraw
Frequently, when working with graphic objects, remnants of
deleted or moved objects appear to remain on the screen. The
Redraw command redraws the window, eliminating any video
trash from the display.
Toolbars
Many of the functions and tools available through the Graphics
Editor’s menus are also available on a toolbar. You may choose
which toolbars you wish to have displayed and you may choose
their location on your workspace.
Table 8-2 lists the available toolbars and their function.
Displaying Toolbars
To conserve display space, you may want to display only the tool-
bars that contain functions you use frequently. To choose the tool-
bars to display:

8-30 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Table 8-2. Graphics Editor Toolbars

Toolbar Function
Specify the drawing order of selected
Arrange Toolbar
objects
Coordinates Toolbar Display the position of the mouse pointer
Drawing Toolbar Graphic object drawing tools
Edit Toolbar Graphic object editing tools
I/NET Item Toolbar Access to points and other I/NET icons.
Alignment Toolbar Object alignment tools.
Pen and Fill Toolbar Pen and fill attribute tools
System Toolbar File administration tools
Text Toolbar Text appearance tools

1. Select View  Toolbars. The menu shown Figure 8-18

displays.
2. Select the toolbar you wish to display. A checkmark to the left

Figure 8-18. Available toolbars

of the toolbar option indicates that the toolbar is currently

displayed.
3. To remove the toolbar from the display, click the toolbar. Use
the Show all and Hide all to speed the toolbar selection
process.
You can position the toolbars anywhere on your workspace. They
may be docked or free-floating. Refer to “Toolbar Selection” on
page 1-4 for additional information.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-31

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

You may also specify whether to display the Status Bar, located at
the bottom of the workspace. Choose View  Status Bar to change
the current status.

Edit Tools
The Edit tools provide you with the capability to easily manipulate
objects.

Figure 8-19. Edit toolbar

Included with the cut, copy, and paste functions are tools that
rotate, flip, and alter the size of selected objects. All of the tools on
the toolbar can also be found on the Edit menu.
Undo
Edit  Undo
Reverses the last action.
1. Select Undo from the menu, or click the Undo tool, or type
[Ctrl + Z], immediately after performing the action to be
undone.
Cut
Edit  Cut graphic
Cuts the selected object and places it on the clipboard.
1. Select the object to be cut.
2. Click the Cut tool or select it from the menu, or press [Ctrl +
X]. The object is removed from the page and placed on the
clipboard.
Copy
Edit  Copy graphic
Places a copy of the selected object onto the clipboard.

8-32 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

1. Select the object to be copied.

2. Click the Copy tool or select it from the men, or press [Ctrl +
C]. A copy of the object is placed on the clipboard. The object
remains on the page.
Paste
Edit  Paste graphic
Places the contents of the clipboard onto the page. Before you use
the Paste function you must use either Cut or Copy to place an
object onto the clipboard.
1. Click the Paste tool or select it from the menu, or press [Ctrl +
V].

2. The clipboard contents are placed onto the page. Drag the
object(s) to the location you prefer.
Clear
Edit  Clear
Deletes the selected object(s).
1. Select the object.
2. Click the Clear tool or select it from the menu. The object is
removed from the page.
Lock/Unlock
Edit  Lock/Unlock
The lock setting prevents an object from being moved or modified.
Set to Unlock if you need to edit the object later.
1. Select the object.
2. Click the Lock tool or select it from the menu.
3. To remove the lock setting, select the object and click the Lock
tool again, or select Lock/Unlock from the menu.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-33

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Scale
Edit  Scale
Scale can reduce or enlarge objects. The parameters are set as a
percent of the x- and y-axes (i.e., width followed by height).
1. Select the object to be resized.
2. Click the Scale tool or select it from the menu. The Scale
dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 8-20.

Figure 8-20. The Scale dialog box

3. Enter the percent to scale. Numbers less than 100 reduce the
object; numbers greater than 100 enlarge the object.

Note: If you enter a different number for the width than for the height, you
will alter the proportion of the object as well as the size.

Rotate
The Rotate tools offer three different degrees of rotation. They all
rotate in a counterclockwise direction.

Edit  Rotate 90

Edit  Rotate 180

Edit  Rotate 270

1. Select the object.
2. Click the Rotate tool, or select it from the menu, that offers
the degree of rotation you desire.

8-34 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Flip
This tool flips objects over a fixed horizontal or vertical axis.

Edit  Flip Vertically

Edit  Flip Horizontally

1. Select the object.
2. Click either the vertical or the horizontal Flip tool, or select it
from the menu.
Select All
Edit  Select All
This function selects all objects on the page. It is not available on
the toolbar. Alternatively, you can press [Ctrl + A].
Clear All
Edit  Clear All
This function deletes all objects on the page.

Drawing Tools
The Graphics Editor contains a comprehensive selection of
drawing tools. You will find these tools on the Tools menu or the
Drawing Tools toolbar.

Figure 8-21. Drawing Tools

Many of these tools will remain active until you select either the
Selection tool, another tool, or double-click in the workspace.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-35

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Select Tool
Tool  Select
Choose the Select tool to return the pointer to normal selection
mode.
Zoom
View  Zoom
1. Select the Zoom tool.
2. Drag an object selection box around the area to be enlarged.
3. To return to the normal view, select View  Actual Size or
click the Zoom tool again.
Library Symbol
Tools  Library Symbol
The Library Symbol tool function inserts the loaded symbol or
bitmap. Refer to “Library Symbols” on page 8-14 for information
on loading a library symbol or bitmap.
1. Select Tools  Library Symbol or click the Graphic Insert
tool to insert a previously loaded Library Symbol or bitmap
graphic.
2. Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to insert
the graphic in the page.
Entering Text
Tools  Text
The Text tool function uses the current settings for text font and
color. To define these settings, refer to “Font” on page 8-48 and
“Text Color” on page 8-49.
1. Click the Text tool or select it from the menu.
2. Position the pointer and click the left mouse button. The
pointer changes from an arrow ( ) to the text insertion
symbol ( ). Drag the text box out to the desired size. Click in
the text box and type the text.

8-36 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Fill
Tools  Fill
This tool fills selected objects with the current fill color and fill
pattern.
1. Select Fill  Solid.
To choose a fill color select Fill  Color. Click on the color you
prefer in the Color Palette and click OK. The current color
selection displays on the Pen and Brush toolbar.
2. To choose a fill pattern, select Fill and click the desired
pattern. For additional information on fill patterns refer to
“Pen and Fill Tools” on page 8-45. The current pattern
displays on the Pen and Brush toolbar.
3. Click the Fill tool or select it from the menu.
4. Click on the object you want to fill.
To set the window background, click on a blank area of the
window.
Line
Tools  Line
1. Click the Line tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the
mouse. When the drawn line reaches the desired length,
release the mouse button. You may draw additional lines until
you double-click or select another tool.
Square
Tools  Square
1. Click the Square tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the
mouse. When the drawn square reaches the desired size,
release the mouse button.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-37

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Rectangle
Tools  Rectangle
1. Click the Rectangle tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the
mouse. When the drawn rectangle reaches the desired size,
release the mouse button.
Rounded Rectangle
Tools  Rounded Rect
1. Click the Rounded Rectangle tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the
mouse. When the drawn rectangle reaches the desired size,
release the mouse button.
Circle
Tools  Circle
1. Click the Circle tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the
mouse. When the drawn circle reaches the desired size, release
the mouse button.
Ellipse
Tools  Ellipse
1. Click the Ellipse tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the
mouse. When the drawn ellipse reaches the desired size,
release the mouse button.
Polygon
Tools  Polygon
1. Click the Polygon tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click to insert the starting point and drag the mouse to draw
the first side of the polygon.

8-38 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

3. Click to insert an anchor point. Drag the mouse to draw the

second side of the polygon. Click to insert the next anchor
point.
4. Repeat Step 3 to draw the remaining sides of the polygon.
5. To complete the polygon, double-click to insert the final
anchor point.
Polylines
Tools  Polyline
1. Click the Polyline tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click to insert the starting point. Drag the mouse to draw the
first line segment.
3. Click to insert the second anchor point and drag the mouse to
draw the third segment. click to insert the next anchor point.
4. Repeat Steps 3 to draw the remaining segments.
5. Double-click to insert the end point.
Curves
Tools  Curves
This tool draws curved lines. You will need to set four points: the
start point, two axis points, and the ending point.
1. Click the Curve tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click the left mouse button to set the starting point for the
curve.
3. Reposition the pointer and click the left mouse button to set
the first axis point for the curve. Repeat this step to set the
second axis point.
4. Reposition the pointer and double-click the left mouse button
to insert the curve and end the curve drawing sequence.

Note: By trial and error, you can gain experience in determining where to
position the starting, axis, and ending points to create curves.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-39

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Chord
Tools  Chord
A chord is a line segment connecting two points on a curved line.
1. Click the Chord tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and drag the mouse to form a circle or ellipse. The point
at which you release the mouse button will be the first anchor
point.
3. Position the pointer and click to insert the second anchor
point. You can reposition the anchor points, if necessary.
Pie
Tools  Pie Slice
1. Click the Pie tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and drag the mouse to form a circle or ellipse. The point
at which you release the mouse button anchors the first
segment of the pie shape.
3. Move the pointer around the circle and click to anchor the
second line segment. You can reposition either segment, if
necessary.
Arc
Tools  Arc
1. Click the Arc tool or select it from the menu.
2. Click and drag the mouse to form a circle or ellipse. The point
at which you release the mouse button anchors the first point
on the arc.
3. Position the pointer where you want the ending point of the
arc to be located and click to insert it. If necessary, you can
reposition both of the anchor points.
Free Pen
Tools  Free Pen
This tool allows you to draw freehand objects.

8-40 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

1. Click the Free Pen tool or select it from the menu.

2. Click to anchor the first point. The pointer changes to a pen
icon. Press and hold the mouse button, drag the pointer to
draw and release the mouse button to anchor the end point.

Arrange Toolbar
If the boundaries of one object overlap another object, one object
is designated as “on top” of the other. This visual layering is called
the z-order. (The term z-order refers to the z-axis found in three
dimensional charts.)
The Arrange tools provide the ability to change the z-order or, in
other words, the order in which objects are drawn on the screen.
You will find the Arrange tools on the Arrange toolbar or the
Arrange menu.

Figure 8-22. The Arrange Tools toolbar

Bring to Front
Arrange  Bring to Front
This function moves the selected object to the top layer.
1. Select the object you wish to move.
2. Click the Bring to Front tool or select it from the menu, or
press the Home key.
The object is placed on the top layer and remains selected.
Send to Back
Arrange  Send to Back
This function moves the selected object to the bottom layer.
1. Select the object you wish to move.
2. Click the Send to Back tool or select it from the menu, or
press the End key.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-41

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

The object is placed on the bottom layer and remains selected.

Step Forward
Arrange  Step Forward
This function moves the selected object up one layer.
1. Select the object you wish to move.
2. Click the Step Forward tool or select it from the menu, or
press the Page Up key.
The object is moved up to the next layer and remains selected.
Step Back
Arrange  Step Back
This function moves the selected object down one layer.
1. Select the object you wish to move.
2. Click the Step Backward tool or select it from the menu, or
press the Page Down key.
The object is moved down one layer and remains selected.
Group
Arrange  Group
This function places all the selected objects into one group, which
may be treated as a single object.
1. Draw a selection box around the objects you wish to group.
2. Click the Group tool, or select it from the menu.
Each individual object’s selection handles disappear and
selections handles for the group object appear. The objects
will remain grouped until you ungroup them.

Note: For consistent results, perform all resizing, scaling, and flipping func-
tions before grouping objects.

Ungroup
Arrange  Ungroup
This function breaks up the objects in a group.

8-42 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

1. Select the grouped object.

2. Click the Ungroup tool, or select it from the menu.
The selection handles for each individual object appear.

Alignment Tools
Alignment tools enable you to precisely place objects on the page.
The alignment functions are on the Arrange menu and the Align-
ment toolbar is pictured in Figure 8-23. Alignment functions use
the first item selected as a baseline.

Figure 8-23. Alignment toolbar

Arrange  Align  To Grid

This function aligns the objects to the grid. To change the grid
spacing, refer to “Window Backgrounds” on page 8-28.
1. Select the object(s) to be aligned. You can select all objects by
choosing Edit  Select All.
2. Click the Align to Grid tool or select it from the menu.
The Graphics Editor adjusts each object to be aligned with a
grid line.

Arrange  Align  Left

This function aligns selected objects along the left boundary.
1. Select the objects to be aligned by drawing a selection box
around them.
2. Click the Left Align tool or select it from the menu.
The Graphics Editor will adjust each object so that they align
along the left.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-43

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Arrange  Align  Center

This function aligns selected objects along the vertical center.
1. Select the objects to be aligned by drawing a selection box
around them.
2. Click the Center Align tool or select it from the menu.
The Graphics Editor will adjust each object so that they align
through the center.

Arrange  Align  Right

This function aligns selected objects along the right boundary.
1. Select the objects to be aligned by drawing a selection box
around them.
2. Click the Right Align tool or select it from the menu.
The Graphics Editor will adjust each object so that they align
along the right.

Arrange  Align  Top

This function aligns selected objects along the top boundary.
1. Select the objects to be aligned by drawing a selection box
around them.
2. Click the Top Align tool or select it from the menu.
The Graphics Editor will adjust each object so that they align
along the top.

Arrange  Align  Middle

This function aligns selected objects along the horizontal middle.
1. Select the objects to be aligned by drawing a selection box
around them.
2. Click the Middle Align tool or select it from the menu.
The Graphics Editor will adjust each object so that they align
along the middle.

8-44 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Arrange  Align  Bottom

This function aligns selected objects along the bottom boundary.
1. Select the objects to be aligned by drawing a selection box
around them.
2. Click the Bottom Align tool or select it from the menu.
The Graphics Editor will adjust each object so that they align
along the bottom.

Coordinates Tools
The Coordinates toolbar displays the X and Y coordinates of the
mouse pointer. This information helps you align and size objects.
The following parameters are displayed:

Figure 8-24. Coordinates toolbar

✦ Coords
Shows the current position of the mouse pointer. The X and Y
coordinates are updated as you move the pointer .
✦ Delta
This is coordinate is active when you draw an object. It
displays the current position of the pointer in relation to the
starting point of the object.

Pen and Fill Tools

The functions of both the Pen menu and the Fill menu are
combined on the Pen and Fill toolbar. The pen attributes affect the
lines you use to draw objects, whereas the fill attributes affect the
color and pattern inside the objects.
Once set, both the pen and the fill attributes remain valid until you
change them again. Follow the steps below to change the settings.
To change any of the attributes for a specific object, select the object
and then change the attribute.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-45

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Figure 8-25. Pen and Fill toolbar

The first box on the Pen and Fill toolbar graphically displays the
current pen and fill settings.

Pen Color
Pen  Color
This allows you to set the line color.
1. Click the Pen Color tool or select it from the menu. The Color
palette displays.
2. Click on the desired color sample. A selector box displays
around it.
3. Click OK. The line color should be displayed in the pen and
fill settings box, located at the far left of the toolbar.
Pen Width
Pen  Width
This allows you to set the line width, in pixels.
1. Click the Pen Width tool or select it from the menu. The Pen
width dialog box displays.
2. Enter a number between 1 and 150 in the Pen Width field.
Click OK. The line width is displayed in the pen and fill
settings box.

Pen Styles
The Graphics Editor offers a variety of line styles.

8-46 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Pen  Solid
Dash
Dot
Dashdot
Dashdotdot
Invisible
1. Select the Pen Style tool by clicking on the appropriate toolbar
or selecting it from the Pen menu. The default Pen style is
now set.
Fill Color
Fill  Color
This tool presents the Color palette so that you may choose the fill
color.
1. Click the Fill Color tool or select it from the menu. The Color
palette displays.
2. Click the desired color sample. A selection box displays
around your choice.
3. Click OK. The default Fill color is now set.
Fill Options
Fill  Solid

Fill  Invisible
These options refer to the opacity of the fill. Solid displays the
selected fill. If you select Invisible, the fill does not display. The
default is Invisible.

Fill  Fill option

The Graphics Editor offers a variety of fill options, ranging from
various degrees of density, to several patterns. Figure 8-26 shows
the available options.
To set a default fill pattern:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-47

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Figure 8-26. Fill options

1. Select the Fill option by clicking the appropriate toolbar

button or select it from the menu.
To fill only a selected object:
1. Select the object to be filled.
2. Select the Fill option.

Text Tools
The Text tools control the current settings for text font and color.
Before inserting text labels and identifiers in a system page using
the Graphics Editor, you should first define the text font, point size,
and color. All of the functions found on the Text toolbar, shown in
Figure 8-27, are also available on the Text menu.

Figure 8-27. Text Toolbar

For information on inserting a textbox refer to “Entering Text” on

page 8-36.
Font
Text  Font
Sets the text font.

8-48 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

1. Click the Font tool or select it from the menu. The Font dialog
box displays, as shown in Figure 8-28.

Figure 8-28. Font selection dialog box

2. Scroll through the font list to locate the font and click on the
font name. A font sample appears in the Sample field.
3. Click on a font style and click on the desired point size.
4. Click OK to close the Font dialog box.
Text Color
Text  Color
This tool displays the Color palette so that you can set the text color.
1. Select the Text Color tool. The Color palette displays.
2. Click the desired color sample. A selection box displays
around your choice.
3. Click OK to close the box.
Back Color
Text  Back Color

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-49

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

This tool allows you to set the background color of the text. The
example in Figure 8-29 shows a light gray text on a dark gray back-
color.

Figure 8-29. Text with a backcolor

Center Text
Text  Center Text
Select the Center text tool to center text within the textbox.
Left Align Text
Text  Left Align Text
Select the Left Align text tool to align the text to the left of the
textbox.

Right Align Text

Text  Right Align Text
Select the Right Align text tool to align the text to the right of the
textbox.
Auto Word Wrap
Text  Auto Word Wrap
Select the Word Wrap tool to automatically wrap the text within the
text box.
Auto Fit
Text  AutoFit
Select the Fit Label tool to automatically resize the textbox to the
amount of text.

I/NET Tools
The I/NET toolbar provides an easy and convenient way to provide
access to I/NET items on system pages.

8-50 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Figure 8-30. I/NET Tools Toolbar

You can add markers for points, doors, DDC modules and lines, as
well as page markers, dial markers, and ASC markers.

Points
Points are the link between your graphics and the physical world.
Once you create a graphic image, you will usually associate one or
more points with that image.
A point can be a hardware or a software point. A hardware point
corresponds to an actual piece of equipment such as a temperature
sensor or fire alarm contact. A software point is an internal or indi-
rect point. It may correspond to a calculation, for example. Each
point is referenced by a specific address which includes the link,
station, point, and bit numbers as well as the point type.
To add points to a system page within the Graphics Editor, you
must be connected to the controller containing the points you want
to add. You can connect to up to four DCUs simultaneously, while
adding points in a Graphics Editor session.
The Graphics Editor provides you with the option of inserting an
icon to represent each point. You may use the icons included with
TAC I/NET Seven or replace them with your own. Refer to
“Replacing Icons” on page 8-76.
Connecting to Multiple Controllers
The Point Selection dialog (see Figure 8-31) provides four list
boxes that you can use to select points. The first list box (in the
upper-left corner) displays points from the currently connected
controller (if any). The other three list boxes can display points
from other controllers within your system.

Note: The Point Selection dialog provides a “Site” indication directly above
a point list when you are connected to a controller through a distrib-
uted link (see Figure 8-31 for an example). Refer to the System

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-51

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Configuration chapter in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical

Reference Guide for more information about Distributed Link Archi-
tecture (DLA) Support in TAC I/NET Seven.

To add controller connections, perform the following steps:

I/NET  Points
1. Select the Point tool and click in the system page to display the
Point Selection dialog box as shown in Figure 8-31. If you are
already connected to a controller, the top left list box, displays
the available points.

Note: Site Number indicates a

connection through a distributed
link.

Figure 8-31. Sample Point Selection Screen

2. To connect to a second controller, activate one of the radio

buttons (located at the top right corner of each pane) for the
List 1, List 2, or List 3 windows.
3. Select the Station button to display the Connect dialog box
(see Figure 8-32).

8-52 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Figure 8-32. Selecting Multiple Controllers

4. Select a controller, and click OK to connect to the controller.

The points associated with that controller now display in the
selected pane.
5. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to add up to two more connections, as
needed.
6. Follow the instructions for inserting either discrete points or
analog points. The procedure for inserting both digital points
and analog points is basically the same. However, because
digital points differ from analog points in their options, the
instructions are presented separately.
Digital Points
The following procedure applies to discrete. Instructions for
inserting analog points are located on page 8-57.

I/NET  Points
1. Select the Point Tool and click on the page to insert the point.
The Point Selection dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 8-31.
2. Position the selection highlight and select a discrete point.
3. To specify the point format, select the Option button to
display the Drawing Styles dialog box similar to the example
in Figure 8-33.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-53

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

4. Click a radio button in the Digital Point Style section to

select a format. In Figure 8-33, we selected Icon plus value.
The format is displayed in the Style Preview section.

Figure 8-33. Sample Digital Point Drawing Styles Dialog Box

5. If you select “Icon plus value” or “Value only”, choose a text

Justification setting (Left, Middle, or Right). You can press
Font Select to choose a font setting as well.

Note: Each point can have its own unique font settings. The font settings
you choose for a point become the default settings for future points of
the same type.
If you use the font Select button to set the point's font color, the color
setting will be used only if the Use object pen option has been acti-
vated () in the Graphics Properties dialog. Otherwise, the point's
font color setting will be ignored and the graphic page's default text
color will be used.

6. If you select “Graphic symbols”, refer to “Discrete Graphics”

on page 8-55 for instructions.
7. Click OK. The Graphics Editor automatically inserts the icon
for the type of point selected.
8. Click OK in the Point Selection dialog box to display the page
with the point inserted.

8-54 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Discrete Graphics
Discrete points exist in one of up to eight possible states. In many
cases only two states are used: On or Off, High or Low, Open or
Clsd, and so on. A fan is a discrete point that is either On or Off. A
two position valve is another discrete point that is either Open or
Clsd. An example of an eight-state discrete point would be a sensor
in an Intrusion Alarm System (IAS) that uses resistor supervision
to monitor multiple contacts. This discrete device may be capable
of being in a NRdy, Norm, Tamp, TmpS, Falt, Alrm, Inhb, or Islt
state.
As with a digital point, a discrete point can be represented on a
graphic page as an icon, a value, or an icon plus value. You can also
insert graphic objects to indicate discrete states. You can insert
either bitmap (.bmp) or TAC I/NET Seven library symbol (.gls)
files.
Suppose, for example, you need to know if a door is open or closed.
You can insert a graphic of an open door to represent State 0 (open
door), and second graphic of a closed door to represent State 1
(closed door).
I/NET  Points
1. Click the Point tool, or select it from the menu, and click on
the page to display the Point Selection screen.
2. Select a point and click the Option button to display the
Drawing Styles dialog box.
3. In the Drawing Styles dialog box (sample shown in
Figure 8-34), select Graphic Symbols.

Note: When Graphic Symbols is selected, the State 0 Select and State 1
Select buttons are enabled.

4. Use the Style Preview area to choose a graphic for each of up

to eight discrete states. The first two states (i.e., the 0 and 1
state) of the point are shown in the preview area initially. You
must define a graphic for at least these first two states. Using
the slider bar, you can view all states with two states being
shown at a time.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-55

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Figure 8-34. Defining Graphic Symbols Digital Point Style

Click the Select button beneath a state to locate and select the
necessary graphic. After you define a graphic for the state, the
Select button changes to Delete on the last state defined
(except for state 0 and 1 since these states are required). This
allows you to delete a state’s graphic, beginning with the last
state defined.
5. Activate or deactivate the Home Page option. Activating this
option defines the current page as the home page for this
point.
6. If the defined point goes into alarm, the number of this
system page number appears on the Alarm Summary screen
with the alarm message. You can define one home page for
each point. The active home page for any point is always the
last one entered by the operator.

Note: The Automatic Page Display feature is not currently implemented.

7. Activate or deactivate the Automatic Page Display option.

This option causes the system page to automatically display if
this point goes into alarm. System pages are displayed behind
open editors and summary windows. Because system pages
can be hidden by other windows, you may also wish to
configure an audible alarm for the point.

8-56 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

8. Click the State 0 Select button to display the Open dialog

box.
9. Select the directory and filename of the graphics file (.bmp or
.gls) and click Open.
10. Click the State 1 Select button and follow the same procedure
to select the file for State 1.
11. Click OK from the Digital Point Drawing Styles screen and
click OK on the Point Selection screen.
At any point in time, only the graphic image applicable to the
current state is visible. In other words, if the point is in the 0 state,
the image that represents that state displays. And, if the point is in
the 1 state, then the image you selected to represent state 1 will
display.
Analog Points
Analog points have continually changing values. A temperature
sensor is an example of an analog point. Analog points can be
represented on a system page as an icon, value, an icon and a value,
or as a vertical or horizontal bar chart. Refer to Chapter 5, Point
Definition and Addressing for additional information.
You can insert analog point icons and values by performing the
following steps:
I/NET  Points
1. Select the Point Tool and click on the page to insert the point.
The Point Selection dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 8-31.
2. Select an analog point. Analog points are distinguished by
having an AI or AO point identifier.
3. To specify the point format, select the Option button to
display the Analog Point Drawing Styles dialog box.
4. Click a radio button in the Analog Point Style section to
select a format. The format is displayed in the Style Preview
section.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-57

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Figure 8-35. Analog Point Drawing Styles

5. If you select “Icon plus value” or “Value only”, you can select a
Font and choose a Text Justification setting (Left, Middle, or
Right). In the Style Options section of the Analog Point
Drawing Styles dialog box, enter the desired decimal display
format.

Note: Each point can have its own unique font settings. The font settings
you choose for a point become the default settings for future points of
the same type.
If you use the font Select button to set the point's font color, the color
setting will be used only if the Use object pen option has been acti-
vated () in the Graphics Properties dialog. Otherwise, the point's
font color setting will be ignored and the graphic page's default text
color will be used.

6. If you select Horizontal or Vertical Bar, the graphic display

will reflect the point’s changing value. You can specify the
minimum (Bar min value) and maximum values (Bar max
value) as well as the Bar length and Bar width, and colors.

7. You may also select Page Options as explained in the Discrete

Points procedures. Click OK.

8-58 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

8. Click OK in the Point Selection dialog box to display the page

with the point

Door Points
The Door tool allows you to add a door icon to your graphic page.
When you display the page in live mode you can control the door,
display its state (secure, unlock, lock), and access the door editor
without having to leave the graphic page.
You can insert Door point icons and values by performing the
following steps:

I/NET  Doors
1. Click the Door tool, or select it from the menu, and click in
the page to insert it. The Door Points dialog box, shown in the
example in Figure 8-36, displays.

Figure 8-36. Door Points Dialog Box

2. Select a Door point and then click the Option button to select
the display format. The Drawing Styles dialog box is similar to
the ones previously described for discrete and analog points.
3. You can also select the Extension button to add extensions, as
described in “Adding Point Extensions” on page 8-60.
4. Click OK button(s) to close any opened dialog boxes and to
insert the door point in the system page.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-59

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Adding Point Extensions

Each point type has certain extensions that can be associated with
it. Attaching an extension icon to the point icon allows you to edit
the point when the page is displayed or edited. Each extension icon
accesses the appropriate point extension editor.
You can attach and display an extension to any point, but you must
also add the extension to the point for it to be functional. To add
the extension prior to entering the Graphics Editor, use the Edit 
Controller  Point Extensions menu. Alternatively, you can add
the extension from within the Graphics Editor as detailed in the
procedure below.
Each type of extension is represented by a specific icon. You can add
an extension icon to any point icon already on your system page by
performing the following steps:
I/NET  Points
1. Select the Point tool to display the Point Selection Dialog box.
2. Position the pointer and select a point.
3. Click Extension to display the Extensions dialog box.

Figure 8-37. Extensions Dialog Box

8-60 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

The extensions listed vary depending upon the type of point

selected. Refer to “Extension Editors” on page 8-61 for a list of
the editors available to each point type. The Extensions
Dialog box shown in Figure 8-37 lists the extensions available
for a DO point.
4. Activate the extension you want by clicking its Attach
checkbox. If you also want the extension icon to display on
the system page with the point, click the Display checkbox.
You must attach an extension before you select it to be
displayed.
5. Click OK in the Extensions dialog box and then click OK in
the Point Selection dialog box to display the system page.
6. If you have not also added the extension to the point, you may
do so now. Select the point and click the right mouse button
to display the context menu.
7. The extension you attached should be listed at the end. Select
it and then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
8. The appropriate extension editor displays. Refer to the docu-
mentation for each editor if you need additional information.
Extension Editors
Each of the editors referenced by an extension icon is also available
on TAC I/NET Seven’s Edit  Controller menu. A list of point types
and their available extension editors is provided below:
DI (Discrete Input) Points:
✦ Calc - Calculated Point editor
✦ Event - Event Definition editor
✦ Runtime - Runtime editor
✦ Trend - Trend Sampling editor
GI, AI (Analog Input), DA (Discrete Alarm), and DM (Discrete Monitor)
Points:
✦ Calc - Calculated Point editor
✦ Event - Event Definition editor
✦ Alarm Inhibit - Alarm Inhibit editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-61

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

✦ Trend - Trend Sampling editor

GO, AO (Analog Output) Points:
✦ Calc - Calculated Point editor
✦ Event - Event Definition editor
✦ Trend - Trend Sampling editor
✦ UC - Unitary Controller editor (7760 AO point only)
DC (Discrete Control) and DO (Discrete Output) Points:
✦ Calc - Calculated Point editor
✦ Event - Event Definition editor
✦ Runtime - Runtime editor
✦ ATS - Time Scheduling editor
✦ ATC - Temperature Control editor
✦ Trend - Trend Sampling editor
✦ UC - Unitary Controller editor (7760 DO points only)
✦ Override - Override Billing editor (7750 only)
✦ LC - Lighting Control editor (7780 only)
✦ Elev_Ctrl (7791/7793/7798 DO points at address LLSSPP08
and 09 only)
PI (Pulse Input) Points:
✦ Calc - Calculated Point editor
✦ Consumption - Consumption editor
✦ Demand - Demand Control editor (all controllers except 7750
and 7770)
✦ Trend - Trend Sampling editor

Adding DDC Modules

Direct Digital Control (DDC) module icons allow you to go
directly to a specific DDC module editor. For more information on
DDC and MR-resident DDC modules, refer to Chapter 14, Direct
Digital Control and Chapter 21, Micro Regulator Control. You can
insert DDC module icons by performing the following steps:
I/NET  DDC Modules

8-62 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

1. Click the Module tool, or select it from the menu, and click in
the page to display the DDC Module Selection screen, as
shown in Figure 8-38.

Figure 8-38. DDC Module Selection Screen

2. Enter the first two digits (i.e., the link portion) of the eight-
digit DCU address into the Link field and the next two digits
(i.e, the station portion) into the Station field. This associates
the DCU address with the module.
3. DCU types 7792 MRI, 7793 MCI, and 7798 I/SITE LAN
require the MR number. If the MR is on channel A of the
MRI/MCI, the MR number is between 0 and 31. If it is on
channel B of the MRI/MCI, the MR number is between 32
and 63. Enter the number in the MR Number field.
4. Choose a module number from the Module Number spindial.
5. Select a Controller from the drop-down list.
6. Choose a Module Type from the drop-down list. The module
types available are dependent upon the Controller selection.
The possible DDC modules are listed in the table below:
2_Pos Two-position module

PID Proportional/Integral/Derivative module

Float Floating module

Reset Reset module

HiLo module (all DCU types except the 7792 MRI, 7793
HiLo
MCI, and 7798 I/SITE LAN)
Calc Calculation module (7792 MRI and 7793 MCI only)

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-63

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

The following relay module types are available:

Standard module
Relay Delay before make module
Delay before break module
Interval timer module

7. If you selected “Relay” in step 6, choose a Relay Type from

the drop-down list.
8. Click OK to insert the DDC module into the system page.

Note: If you have not already added the DDC module to the controller, you
must do so before automatic control can be achieved. Access the DDC
Editor from within the Graphics Editor by double-clicking on the
DDC module icon. Alternatively, you can access the same editor from
the TAC I/NET Seven menu (Edit  Controller  Direct Digital
Control).

Adding DDC Lines

Once you have added several DDC module icons to your system
page you can link them with DDC line representations by
performing the following steps:
I/NET  DDC Lines
1. Click the DDC Line tool, or select it from the menu, to display
the Line Options dialog box shown in Figure 8-39.

Figure 8-39. Sample DDC Line Options Dialog Box

8-64 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

2. For all DCU types except 7792 MRI, 7793 MCI, and 7798
I/SITE LAN, perform the following steps:
a. Enter the first two digits (i.e., the link portion) of the
eight-digit DCU address into the Link field and the next
two digits (i.e, the station portion) into the Station field.
b. Select a Controller from the drop-down list.
c. Enter the line number (between one and 64) in the Line
field. Proceed to Step 4.
3. DCU types 7792 MRI, 7793 MCI, and 7798 I/SITE LAN only,
perform the following steps:
a. Enter a four-digit number corresponding to the link (LL)
and station (SS) of the MRI or MCI, by clicking on the
Link and Station spindials.
b. Select a Controller from the drop-down list.
c. Enter the MR number in the MR Number field. The
number is between 0 and 63, depending on whether the
MR is on channel A of the MRI/MCI (0–31) or channel B
of the MRI/MCI (32–63).
d. Enter the line number (between one and 32) in the Line
field. (This is usually also the number of the module
providing output to the line.)
4. Select an Icon Style (e.g., Value only, Icon only, or Icon plus
value). The Style Preview section displays a sample of your
choice.
5. If you elect to display a value (e.g., Value only or Icon plus
value), enter a value in the Display Details section for the
Integral and Fractional digits.
6. Click OK to accept the entries and insert the DDC Line icon
on the system page.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-65

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Page Markers
The Page marker allows you to jump to another system page by
clicking on the page icon. Page markers use an absolute reference to
the filename. If you move the file to another directory, the page
marker will no longer be able to locate the referenced file.
Adding Page Markers
You will find the Page tool on the I/NET toolbar or you can use the
TAC I/NET Seven menu.
I/NET  Page Marker
1. Select the Page tool and click on the page to insert it. The
Graphic Page Marker dialog box, shown in Figure 8-40,
displays.

Figure 8-40. Graphic Page Marker dialog box

2. To include the icon with the Page marker label, click Icon and
label. If you do not want the icon to display, click Label. The
Style preview box illustrates the difference between the two
choices.
3. Double-click in the Label edit field and type the name of the
page marker. You could, for example, label the page marker,
“Computer Lab,” to indicate that this icon jumps to the
Computer Lab system page.
4. You may change the marker’s font, foreground color, and
background color.

8-66 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

5. Click Destination page Select to select the system page that

the icon will access. Select the desired file in the Open dialog
box and click Open.
6. The File Details and Subject fields displays the name of the file
you selected and a description, if one is available. Click OK to
close the dialog box and insert the page marker.

Note: You may want to repeat this procedure to insert a page marker on the
destination system page to establish a jump back to the origination
system page.

Using Page Markers

To view a second system page from another system page using a
page marker:
1. Select System  Live Graphic Pages from the main TAC
I/NET Seven menu as shown below in Figure 8-41. In the
Open dialog box, select the page that contains the page
marker. Click Open.

Figure 8-41. Viewing System Pages

2. Double-click on the page marker to jump to the designated

destination page.
3. The destination system page will be opened. If it is already
open, it will be placed on top of your current window.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-67

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Adding Multiple Site Dial

The multiple site dial feature allows you to connect to more than
one site at a time from the same page. You can place multiple dial
icons on the page for multiple site dialing. Each graphic dial icon
supports dialing to one site.
Adding a Graphic Dial Icon
Add Graphic Dial icons using the following steps:
I/NET Tools  Dial Markers
1. Select the Dial Marker tool to display the Dial Marker dialog
box shown in Figure 8-42.

Figure 8-42. Dial Marker Editor

2. Select a Display Option (Label Only or Icon and Label).

3. The dial icon Label contains the name of the Tap entered in
the network configuration file. If you change the name of the
Tap you must delete this icon and add it again to rename it.
4. Select Font to change the text font. Select Foreground to
change the text color and select Background to change the
background color.
5. Select a Site to be called when using this dial marker from the
Site Details drop-down list.
6. Select OK to accept the entries and display the system page
with the Dial Marker icon.

8-68 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

Dialing from a Graphic Page

Dial from a Dial Marker icon using the following steps:
1. Select System  Live Graphic Page, or click the Graphic
page tool on the system toolbar, and select a graphic page.
2. Double-click on the Graphic Dial Icon representing the link
you want to establish. The Dial-Up Connection window
appears.
3. Click the Dial push-button to start dialing. A dialog box
appears showing the status of the dial attempt. When the dial
connection is made, or you click on the Cancel push-button,
the dialog goes away.
4. Close the Dial-Up Connection window by clicking on the
Close push-button.

Note: If you had already established this connection and the opened the
graphic dial icon, the Dial push-button would be replaced by a
Hang-up push-button.

When one or more connections are made, the Host Dial icon (see
Figure 8-43) displays over all existing windows and applications.

Figure 8-43. Host Dial Icon

Double-clicking with the right mouse button on the Host Dial icon
displays the Dial Connections Status window. You can view the
current status of all connections or hang up a connection from
your host through this window.
Disconnecting From a Dial Site
To end a dial connection through the Dial Connections Status
window, use the following procedure.
1. Select a Site name from the drop-down list.
2. Select a connection source from the Site in use by list box.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-69

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

3. Click the Hang up push-button.

When all your host sources connecting to a site have been discon-
nected, the site name will disappear from the Site drop-down list.
If there are no site names displayed in the Site drop-down list, then
the Host Dial icon will disappear when you leave the Dial Connec-
tions Status window.

Caution: All dial connections are ended when you end the TAC I/NET Seven
session.

Adding ASC Markers

ASC markers allow you to go directly to the ASC Parameters editor
for the specific ASC referenced by the marker. For more informa-
tion on ASCs, refer to Chapter 22, Application Specific Controllers.
You can insert ASC markers by performing the following steps:
I/NET  ASC Marker
1. Select the ASC Marker tool and click in the page to display
the ASC Marker dialog box shown in Figure 8-44.

Figure 8-44. ASC Marker Editor

2. Select a Display Option (e.g. Label Only, Icon and Label).

3. Double-click the Label field and enter a name for the ASC
marker.

8-70 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages The Graphics Editor

4. Click Font Select to change the text font. Click Foreground

color Select to set the text color. Click Background color
Select to set the label background color.

5. Enter the MRI, MCI or I/SITE LAN’s Link number in the

Link field and the station number in the Station field. You
may click in these fields and type the number in or you can
use the spindial arrows to select from the provided list.
6. Enter the ASC’s address in the ASC Number field. It must be
between 0 and 31.
7. Choose an ASC Type from the drop-down list. The marker
icon displayed depends on this setting. Figure 8-45 shows the
possible icons.

Figure 8-45. ASC Marker Icons

8. Click OK to accept the entries and insert the ASC marker on

the system page.

Adding Tool Markers

Tool markers allow you to activate the user-defined tool referenced
by the marker. For more information on user-defined tools, refer to
“Creating User-defined Tools and Buttons” on page 1-25.
You can insert tool markers by performing the following steps:
I/NET  Tool Marker
1. Select the Tool Marker tool and click in the page to display
the Tool Marker dialog box (see Figure 8-46).
2. Select a Display Option (e.g. Label Only, Icon and Label,
Graphic symbols).
3. Double-click the Label field and enter a name for the tool
marker.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-71

TCON299–05/10
The Graphics Editor System Pages

Figure 8-46. Tool Marker Editor

4. Click Font Select to change the text font. Click Foreground

color Select to set the text color. Click Background color
Select to set the label background color.

5. Click the Tool Name Select button to select a tool. The

system displays the User Tool Configuration editor (see
Figure 8-47).

Figure 8-47. User Tool Configuration Editor

6. Highlight the tool you wish to assign to the tool marker. If

necessary, you can create a new tool (refer to “Configuring
User Tools” on page 1-26 for instructions).

8-72 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages Live System Pages

7. Select OK to accept the highlighted tool and close the User

Tool Configuration editor. The selected tool name is now
displayed in the Tool Name field of the Tool Marker editor.
8. If you set the Display Options to “Graphic symbols” in step 2,
click the Graphic symbol Select button to choose a graphic.
A dialog box opens, allowing you to browse your system.
Highlight the graphic name and click Open to accept the
selection. The dialog box closes and a thumbnail view of the
selected graphic is displayed in the Tool Marker editor.
9. Select OK. The Tool Marker editor closes and the tool marker
appears on the graphic page.

Adding CCTV Markers

As part of TAC I/NET Seven’s integration with Pelco CCTV, you
now have the ability to create CCTV markers on TAC I/NET Seven
graphic pages. By clicking on a graphic page’s CCTV markers, a
user can monitor live video.
This feature requires that you first integrate an Integral digital
CCTV system with TAC I/NET Seven. For instructions on how to
integrate and use digital CCTV within TAC I/NET Seven, including
information about CCTV markers, refer to TCON301, TAC I/NET
Seven Database Connectivity and Reporting.

Live System Pages

System pages can graphically display information about the oper-
ating environment of a system, a portion of a system, an individual
process, or a piece of equipment. In live mode, pages allow you to
monitor the status of the system, as well as edit points and exten-
sions.

Viewing Live System Pages

The Graphics Editor allowed you to create your system page, but
the system page is not connected to your physical system. To view
actual, “live” data, it is necessary to display your system page in
TAC I/NET Seven.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-73

TCON299–05/10
Live System Pages System Pages

After you save your system page, close the Graphics Editor. To view
a live system page, follow the procedure below.

System  Live Graphics Pages

1. After you select the Graphic Pages command, the Open dialog
box appears. Browse to locate the correct file.

Note: When you save a system page in the Graphics Editor, TAC I/NET
Seven automatically gives the file a .gpg extension.

2. Select the file by double-clicking on it or place the selection

highlight on it and click Open.
The system page you selected appears on the display. You can resize
and position it anywhere on your display, just like any other
window.
You may also simultaneously display additional system pages.
Dynamic data fields (point values, line values, etc.) within each
displayed system page are continually updated by TAC I/NET
Seven at the scan rate specified in the Host Configuration editor.
Viewing another Page
Page markers (see “Adding Page Markers” on page 8-66) allow you
to move quickly from one page to the next. While viewing a live
system page, select the page marker icon to display a second system
page.
If you did not include page markers, select System  Live
Graphics Pages and double-click on the filename, to display a
second page.
Setting a Default System Page
You can specify a default system page to be automatically displayed
in live mode, when the TAC I/NET Seven system is brought up. To
define the default system page, perform the following steps:
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Configuration from the Main
menu to display the Host Configuration editor.

8-74 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages Live System Pages

2. Enter the filename of your default page in the Default System

Page text entry field. Alternatively, you can select File Open
and select the correct file in the Open dialog box.
3. Click OK to close the Host Configuration Editor.

Icons and Editor Access

The TAC I/NET Seven system uses icons to provide easier access to
monitoring data and system changes.With the exception of Page
marker icons, the primary function of the icons is to provide direct
access to the editors that control a point.
The Graphic Dial icon allows you to connect to up to eight dial Taps
simultaneously. You may connect or hang up connections from
these icons. The ASC, Point, Point Extension, DDC Module, and
Door icons allow you to call the pertinent editor. This capability
allows you to view and modify editor parameters without closing
the system page.
While displaying a live system page, you can access data for a
specific point, and any editors associated with that point, by
performing the following steps:
1. Select the point.
2. Click the right mouse button to display the context menu
similar to the example in Figure 8-48.

Figure 8-48. Context Menu for a DO point

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-75

TCON299–05/10
Live System Pages System Pages

The contents of the menu will vary depending upon the type of
object you selected. Generally, the context menu provides access to
the editors or other functions that are applicable to that specific
point type.
The example in Figure 8-48 shows the context menu for a DO
point.
You can control the point inside the system page by double-clicking
on it. This will bring up the Point Control dialog box. Refer to
Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing for additional informa-
tion on this function.
Replacing Icons
The default icons and markers used by TAC I/NET Seven graphic
pages are stored in a dynamic-link library created during the instal-
lation process. You may, however, create custom bitmap images to
be in place of the default icons and markers. You must assign each
custom bitmaps a specific name and place them in the DATA direc-
tory. If it finds an image with the correct name, TAC I/NET Seven
uses it in place of the default image.

8-76 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
System Pages Live System Pages

Following are the default icons and markers. The filenames

required for custom bitmap images are presented to the right of
each icon.

Figure 8-49. TAC I/NET Seven Icons and Markers

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 8-77

TCON299–05/10
Live System Pages System Pages

8-78 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

9
30
Passwords

TAC I/NET Seven has two password editors, one for system-level
security and one for controller-level security. Access the host pass-
word editor through the host portion of the Edit menu. Use the
host password editor to assign individual user passwords and
specify which editors and tenants each operator can access. This
editor also allows you preassign established controller passwords to
operators, enabling them to auto-connect to individual controllers
without the need to manually enter a controller password.
The Controller level of security is provided through the controller
password editor, accessed through the controller section of the Edit
menu. This editor allows you to assign access levels and passwords
to individual controllers in the TAC I/NET Seven system. This
added degree of security prevents unauthorized personnel from
modifying your system. Operators must have the correct authori-
zation level and enter the correct password before connecting to the
controller.
While not required, the recommended order of operations for
establishing passwords is as follows:
✦ Establish controller passwords, at the controller level, if
needed.
✦ Enable the auto-connect function by setting the controller
passwords at the host level.
✦ Set individual operator passwords and provide auto-connect
access, if desired, to the controllers, at the host level.

Note: Whenever you add a new host to a LAN with existing TAC I/NET
Seven hosts, the system prompts you to update the host passwords
from the filemaster. In this case, the default password of “DACS” may
not be functional at the new host. This prevents someone at the new
host from overwriting all previously defined passwords. To use the
new host, you must already be familiar with the existing passwords.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-1

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

Host Passwords
Once you add a password for an operator, the operator can use the
password to access any system host. The passwords are shared
across TAC I/NET Seven on the commercial LAN. You can also
delete, copy, or modify existing passwords. The copy feature saves
you time at those sites where many operators are authorized at the
same level for the same functions. You may also set operator pass-
words for protected controllers. When you access the Host
Computer  Passwords function from the Edit menu, you may
add, delete, modify, or copy the host level password information.

Adding a Host Password

Use the following steps to add a new operator password and autho-
rization assignment.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Passwords, or click the Pass-
words tool on the Host toolbar. The system displays the Host
Password editor (see Figure 9-1).

Figure 9-1. Host Password Editor

9-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

2. Select Add. The system displays the Password Assignment

screen (see Figure 9-2).

Figure 9-2. Host Password Assignment Editor

3. In the Name field, use up to 30 characters to define either of

the following types of entries:
✧ TAC I/NET Seven operator name – At logon, this is the
name that a user will enter in the Operator Name field of
the Log On dialog. The user will also have to enter a valid
Host Password in order to log onto TAC I/NET Seven.
✧ Windows user account name – By adding a user's
Windows account to TAC I/NET Seven, the user can log
onto TAC I/NET Seven without entering an operator
name and password. Refer to “Using Your Windows
Login with TAC I/NET Seven” on page 1-35 for more
information.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-3

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

The entry you make in the Name field must be unique. The
following characters cannot be used within the name: " / [ ] :
; | = , + * ? < > . You must also avoid using the @ symbol if you
intend to use this account as the source of indirect user
settings (refer to “Indirect User Settings” on page 9-13 for
more information).
4. If you defined a TAC I/NET Seven operator name (rather than
a Windows user account) in the previous step, type the user’s
password (up to 127 characters) in the Password field and in
the Confirmation field. These fields must match before the
system will accept your changes. The system displays an
asterisk (*) for each character you type.
5. Type the operator Initials (up to four characters).
6. If necessary, enter an Alternate ID of up to 30 characters for
this operator. This ID can be used for either of the following
purposes:
✧ To appear in custom reports.
✧ To have this user inherit permissions and/or window
settings from another user account. Refer to “Indirect
User Settings” on page 9-13 for more information.
7. Activate () or deactivate () the Enable Password Re-use
option. This option is deactivated by default. When you
attempt to enter a new password, it will be checked against
your password history and will be disallowed if it has been
used before.
8. Activate () or deactivate () the Enable Password Expiry
option. Activate this option to force the operator to change
their password. When you activate this option, the following
related parameters become available:
✧ Expiry Interval (days) – Specifies the number of days
after the start date that the password will expire.
✧ Expiry Start Date – Specifies the start date.
For example, if you set the start date to January 1 and the
interval to 15 days, then the operator can continue to use their
current password until at least January 16. However, begin-

9-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

ning with their first logon after January 16, and repeating
every 15 days thereafter, the user will be required to change
their password.
9. If necessary, type the number of the Card/I-Disc issued to the
operator. This feature allows an operator to log onto the TAC
I/NET Seven system by swiping their card or I/DISC at a
reader attached to the host workstation’s RS232 port. Refer to
“Peripherals” in the TAC I/NET Seven Configuration chapter
of TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for more
information.
Function Selection

Note: When changing a host password's function assignments, the changes

do not take affect until the next time the associated operator logs into
TAC I/NET Seven.

Functions are detailed in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical

Reference Guide. Use the following procedure to assign functions
and editors to a password.
1. Decide which functions you want this operator to access.
2. Mark functions by clicking on individual functions in the list
or use All Yes and All No to speed the selection process. Only
those functions/editors selected with “[X]” are enabled for the
operator.
Station Selection
DCU password preassignment allows individual users to connect
to specified controllers without entering a controller password. The
Station editor allows you to choose which controllers the individual
can access and the level of the access. This option is only available
if you have saved the Link Summary under Network Configura-
tion.
Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide for
a discussion of DCU password preassignment. Also refer to “DCU
Password Preassignment” on page 9-11, for a description on setting
up the controller passwords.
Preassign controller password levels using the following steps:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-5

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

1. Select Station from the Host Passwords assignment editor.

The system displays the Host Passwords - Station screen (see
Figure 9-3). The actual screen is configuration-dependent.

Figure 9-3. Host Passwords - Station Editor

2. Choose the communication link from the drop-down list.

The editor will list the controllers through that link.
If the link is a link Tap or dial Tap, more than one controller
LAN may be listed, indicating that this Tap can connect to
multiple Taps. In this case, select the LAN to which you want
to auto-connect. The link with all of its associated controllers
appears on your screen.
3. Choose a controller from the list.
4. Use the Auto Connect Status portion of the screen to choose a
password level for the selected controller(s).
5. Repeat these steps as necessary to assign the appropriate
controller password levels to the Host password.

9-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

6. Select OK to accept your changes and leave this editor.

Note: The controller passwords entered for the individual host password
must match the passwords and associated level entered in the DCU
password editor. Refer to “DCU Password Preassignment” on page
9-11.

Tenant Selection
Use this option to assign full or limited tenant access to the user of
the host password. When assigning limited tenant access, you will
be able to specify which of a tenant’s groups the user will be allowed
to access (refer to “Limited-access Users” on page 9-15 for more
information).
1. To assign tenant access, select Tenant from the Host Password
assignment editor. The system displays the Tenant Selection
screen (see Figure 9-4).

Figure 9-4. Tenant Selection Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-7

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

2. By default, this editor lists only the tenants that have already
been added to the system. If you wish to show all possible
tenants, uncheck () the Only show defined tenants
checkbox.
If you intend to limit which tenants (if any) the user will be
allowed to add, uncheck the checkbox to show all possible
tenants.
3. Select tenants by clicking on the checkbox in the Full or
Limited column for any tenants in the list. The following
guidelines apply:
✧ For tenants marked with  in the Full column, the oper-
ator will have unrestricted access.
✧ For any undefined tenants marked with  in the Full
column, the operator will have the ability to add the
tenant to the system.
✧ For tenants marked with  in the Limited column, the
operator will have access that is restricted to specific
groups (refer the next step and also to “Limited-access
Users” on page 9-15 for more information).
✧ Tenants marked with  in both columns will not be
displayed for the operator when they use TAC I/NET
Seven.
You can also use the All Full button to give the operator full
access rights to all tenants, or the All No button to deselect all
tenants.
4. When you click a checkbox in the Limited column, TAC
I/NET Seven displays the Host Passwords - Group editor (see
Figure 9-5). Using this editor, you can specify to which of the

9-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

selected tenant's groups the user will be allowed to gain

limited-access.

Figure 9-5. Tenant Selection Editor

a. Toggle the selection of groups by clicking on selection

boxes for individual groups in the list. The following
guidelines apply:
✢ The operator will have full access to parameters and
TAC I/NET Seven features associated with any groups
marked with  in the Select column and  in the
Read Only column.
✢ The operator will have read-only access to parameters
and TAC I/NET Seven features associated with any
groups marked with  in the Select column and 
in the Read Only column.
✢ The operator will have no access to parameters and
TAC I/NET Seven features associated with any groups
marked with  in both the Select and Read Only
columns.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-9

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

✢ You can use the All Yes button to select all groups or
the All No button to deselect all groups.
b. When you have finished selecting the necessary groups,
select OK to save your choices. The Host Passwords -
Group editor will close.
5. When you have finished selecting the necessary tenants, select
OK to save your choices. The Tenant Selection editor will
close.
Individual Selection
This option allows you to specify which individual fields will be
visible to the operator. This feature can be used to provide multiple
levels of security in an access control environment by specifying
each field that the operator will be able to view and edit. You must
have at least one individual defined for this option to be available.
Only the fields and buttons selected will be available to an operator
using this password.
1. To assign individual access, select Individuals from the Host
Password assignment editor. The system displays the Indi-
vidual Field Selection screen (see Figure 9-6).
2. Choose one or more Tenants from the list, or use All Yes or
All No to speed the selection process.
a. Select one or more of the individual editor fields for
display. An operator using this password will not be able
to view or edit any field not selected. The fields available
for selection are:
✢ the 16 user-defined fields
✢ the individual’s card number
✢ the individual’s PIN
✢ beginning and ending dates and times for temporary
records
b. If you wish the user to be able to view the doors assigned
to this individual, select the Doors Button for display. If
this item is not selected, an operator using this password
will not be able to view or edit the doors assigned to the
individual.

9-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

Figure 9-6. Individual Field Selection Editor

c. If you wish the user to be able to edit the individual

records, select the OK Button for display. If this item is
not selected, an operator using this password can view
the selected fields, but cannot edit them.
DCU Password Preassignment
You may restrict controller access by assigning each controller a
password. If you combine this with preassigned password levels,
operators will not have to type the controller password each time
they connect to the controller.

Note: Whenever you change a controller password, you must update the
preassigned controller passwords. Otherwise, an “Invalid password”
error message appears when you try to connect to a password-
protected controller.

You can assign each controller up to four passwords, one password

for each access level. The functions available to each operator
depend upon the access level of the password they use to connect to

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-11

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

the controller. Refer to the controller functions chapter in

TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more
information.

Caution: Only Level 4 lets you add or modify passwords. At least one user must
have a level 4 password.

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Passwords, or click the Pass-

words tool on the Host toolbar. The system displays the Host
Password editor (see Figure 9-1).
2. Select DCU. This displays the DCU Password editor (see
Figure 9-7).

Figure 9-7. DCU Password Editor

3. Select the link that leads to the controller to which you want
to preassign a password. The screen lists all the controllers on
the link you selected.
4. Highlight the desired controller from the list.

9-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

5. Enter a password for one or more password levels, as neces-

sary. Use up to four characters for each password. This pass-
word must match the passwords assigned at the controller
level.
You can assign more than one password level to a controller
for each host password. You can use the same password for
each level if you want, but this is not necessary. If two pass-
words are identical, but have different access levels, the higher
access level is granted to the operator.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as necessary.
7. Select OK when you finish preassigning passwords levels. This
returns you to the Host Password editor.

Indirect User Settings

When adding or modifying a user account in TAC I/NET Seven,
you can configure the account to inherit settings from another user
account. This requires that you type a properly formatted string in
the Alternate ID field of the account that will inherit the user
settings.
The following settings can be inherited from another user account:
✦ User permissions (refer to “Function Selection” on page 9-5
for more information)
✦ Window settings (refer to “Controlling Window Layouts in
TAC I/NET Seven” on page 1-23 for more information)
Syntax
The string you type in the Alternate ID field to inherit indirect user
settings is not case sensitive. Use the following syntax for the Alter-
nate ID field string:
@U|Wusername{host}
where:
@U = inherit user permissions from another user account.

@W = inherit window settings from another user account.

username = the name defined in the Name field of the user

who's settings you wish to inherit.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-13

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

host = use this variable to retrieve the host number assigned

to the TAC I/NET Seven workstation that is being logged into.
Examples
In the following examples, users are configured to inherit indirect
settings from user accounts with the following names:
✦ Guards – Defines typical user permissions for guards.
✦ GuardPC1 – Defines the window settings for the guard PC
defined as TAC I/NET Seven host number 1.
✦ GuardPC2 – Defines the window settings for the guard PC
defined as TAC I/NET Seven host number 2.
✦ GuardPC3 – Defines the window settings for the guard PC
defined as TAC I/NET Seven host number 3.
Example 1: Assign user settings to a guard
Alternate ID:
@UGuards
Explanation:
The user will inherit the user permissions defined in the
account named “Guards.”
Example 2: Assign window settings to a guard
Alternate ID:
@WGuardPC{host}
Explanation:
When the guard logs into a TAC I/NET Seven workstation,
I/NET's windows will automatically position to the window
settings defined for that workstation, as follows:
✧ At the guard PC defined as host number 1, the windows
settings stored in the GuardPC1 account will be used.
✧ At the guard PC defined as host number 2, the windows
settings stored in the GuardPC2 account will be used.
✧ At the guard PC defined as host number 3, the windows
settings stored in the GuardPC3 account will be used.

9-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

Example 3: Assign user settings and window settings to a guard

Alternate ID:
@UGuards@WGuardPC{host}
Explanation:
When the guard logs into a TAC I/NET Seven workstation, he
will inherit the user permissions defined in the account
named “Guards.” TAC I/NET Seven's windows will automati-
cally position to the window settings defined for that worksta-
tion, as described in Example 2.

Limited-access Users
When adding or modifying a user in TAC I/NET Seven's Host Pass-
words editor, you can use the tenant selection process (as described
beginning on page 9-7) to limit the user’s access based on specific
tenants and groups. When defining which of a tenant’s groups will
be accessible to the user, you can choose no access, full access, or
read-only access.
After logging into TAC I/NET Seven, the limited-access user will be
unable to use some TAC I/NET Seven features associated with
groups that have been limited by the user’s host password.
The restrictions placed on a limited-access user are described
below.
Tenants
When a limited-access user selects Access  Tenants from TAC
I/NET Seven's main menu, the following restriction will apply:
✦ Cannot Add a new tenant.
✦ Cannot Delete, Modify, or Copy any tenants for which limited
access has been assigned.
Individuals
When a limited-access user selects Access  Individuals from TAC
I/NET Seven's main menu, the following restrictions will apply:
✦ Can only see individuals associated with allowed groups.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-15

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

✦ Cannot Add or Delete individuals. The limited-access user

can only Modify existing individuals.
Individual Doors
When a limited-access user is modifying an individual and selects
the Doors button, the following restrictions will apply:
✦ Can only see doors associated with allowed groups.
✦ Can assign the individual direct schedules to allowed doors.
Individual Groups
When a limited-access user is modifying an individual, selects the
Doors button, and then selects the Groups button, the following
restrictions will apply:
✦ Can only add and remove allowed groups to and from the
individual, respectively.
✦ Can only change the priority of allowed groups.
✦ Cannot remove an allowed group if doing so would cause the
limited-access user to lose access to the individual.
Groups
When a limited-access user selects Access  Groups from TAC
I/NET Seven's main menu, the following restrictions will apply:
✦ Can only see individuals associated with allowed groups.
✦ Can only see doors associated with allowed groups.
✦ Cannot Delete groups for which the user has read-only access.
✦ Cannot Modify groups for which the user has read-only
access.
✦ Can Add groups. The user will automatically receive full
access to the groups he adds. By default, no other users will
have access to groups added by this user (only a person with
password privileges can assign these groups to other users).
Group Doors
When a limited-access user is modifying a group and selects the
Doors button, the following restrictions will apply:
✦ Can only see doors associated with allowed groups.
✦ Can assign the group direct schedules to allowed doors.

9-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

✦ Can assign allowed groups to the group.

Example: A Medical Center with Three Access-controlled Labs
In a medical center their are three labs. Each lab has its own
manager. The building manager for the medical center will give
general lab access to lab personnel but will not specify which labs
an individual can access. The lab managers must determine which
individuals will be allowed to access specific labs. In this example,
lab managers are given limited-access so that each manager can
assign lab doors to individuals.

Lab Personnel Lab 1 Doors Lab 2 Doors Lab 3 Doors

GROUPS:

BM Mgr1 Mgr2 Mgr3

I/NET (Building Manager) (Lab 1 Manager) (Lab 2 Manager) (Lab 3 Manager)
OPERATORS: Full Access Limited Access Limited Access Limited Access
(Read-only) (Read-only) (Read-only)

Lab 1 Lab 2 Lab 3

Figure 9-8. Lab Managers Assign Doors to Individuals

Although the limited-access managers will be prevented from

modifying their assigned groups, they will have the ability to create
new groups if necessary. When a limited-access user creates a new
group, by default he automatically receives full-access to the group.
All other limited-access users receive no access to the new group
and will have no knowledge of its existance. The building manager
will receive full-access to the new group because he is not a limited-

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-17

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

access user. If necessary, the building manager can give other

limited-access users full access or read-only access to the new
group.
TAC I/NET Seven Operators and Host Passwords
The host password accounts for TAC I/NET Seven operators in this
example are described below. Any groups mentioned in the
description of TAC I/NET Seven operators are explained in the next
section.
✦ BM – The building manager.
This operator has full access to all tenants. The building
manager will create and modify individuals in the access
control system and will assign the “Lab Personnel” group to
appropriate individuals.
The building manager will also manage TAC I/NET Seven
host password accounts and will give each lab manager read-
only access for specific groups as described below.
✦ Mgr1 – The manager of Lab 1.
The building manager will assign this operator read-only
access for the “Lab Personnel”group and “Lab 1 Doors”
group. This allows the operator to see the individuals and
doors provided by these groups, but prevents the operator
from modifying the groups.
The “Lab 2 Doors” and “Lab 3 Doors” groups will not be
assigned to this operator. This prevents the operator from
seeing doors that do not belong to Lab 1.
✦ Mgr2 – The manager of Lab 2.
The building manager will assign this operator read-only
access for the “Lab Personnel”group and “Lab 2 Doors”
group. This allows the operator to see the individuals and
doors provided by these groups, but prevents the operator
from modifying the groups.
The “Lab 1 Doors” and “Lab 3 Doors” groups will not be
assigned to this operator. This prevents the operator from
seeing doors that do not belong to Lab 2.

9-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

✦ Mgr3 – The manager of Lab 3.

The building manager will assign this operator read-only
access for the “Lab Personnel”group and “Lab 3 Doors”
group. This allows the operator to see the individuals and
doors provided by these groups, but prevents the operator
from modifying the groups.
The “Lab 1 Doors” and “Lab 2 Doors” groups will not be
assigned to this operator. This prevents the operator from
seeing doors that do not belong to Lab 3.
Besides being prevented from modifying the groups mentioned
above, the limited-access lab managers will also be unable to
remove the “Lab Personnel” group from individuals.
Groups
The building manager (BM) will create groups and assign opera-
tors limited-access as described below:
✦ Lab Personnel – This group will have no door assignments.
The purpose of this group is simply to allow lab managers to
see a pool of individuals and to decide which of these individ-
uals (if any) will be allowed to access a particular lab.
In the access control system, the building manager will assign
this group to any individual that is authorized to access a lab.
The building manager will configure the host password
account for each lab manager to provide read-only access to
this group. This will allow each lab manager to see the indi-
viduals that have been assigned the Lab Personnel group, but
will prevent the managers from modifying this group or
removing this group from an individual.
✦ Lab 1 Doors – This group will have door assignments appro-
priate for lab 1. The purpose of this group is to allow the lab
manager (Mgr1) to see this lab’s doors. Using doors from this
group and individuals from the Lab Personnel group, the lab
manager can assign doors to individuals.
The building manager will configure the lab manager’s host
password for read-only access to this group. This allows the
manager to see the group’s doors and to assign these doors to
individuals, but prevents the lab manager from modifying the
group.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-19

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

✦ Lab 2 Doors – This group will have door assignments appro-

priate for lab 2. The purpose of this group is to allow the lab
manager (Mgr2) to see this lab’s doors. Using doors from this
group and individuals from the Lab Personnel group, the lab
manager can assign doors to individuals.
The building manager will configure the lab manager’s host
password for read-only access to this group. This allows the
manager to see the group’s doors and to assign these doors to
individuals, but prevents the lab manager from modifying the
group.
✦ Lab 3 Doors – This group will have door assignments appro-
priate for lab 3. The purpose of this group is to allow the lab
manager (Mgr3) to see this lab’s doors. Using doors from this
group and individuals from the Lab Personnel group, the lab
manager can assign doors to individuals.
The building manager will configure the lab manager’s host
password for read-only access to this group. This allows the
manager to see the group’s doors and to assign these doors to
individuals, but prevents the lab manager from modifying the
group.
To assign doors to the groups described above, the building
manager will change the schedule for appropriate doors from “--
Unselect” to any other setting. Doors left in the “--Unselect” setting
will not be visible to a lab manager.
Typically, the building manager will choose a schedule setting of
“No Access” for each appropriate door. This allows the lab manager
to see the doors but does not initially allow access at the doors in
the event that this group gets assigned directly to an individual.

Note: The read-only group that defines a lab’s doors is not intended to be
assigned directly to an individual. Instead, the lab manager is
expected to assign doors to an individual. If necessary, the lab
manager is free to create a new group that provides access to the lab’s
doors. The lab manager can then assign this new group directly to an
individual if so desired.

9-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

Implementing and Using this Example

This section describes the steps that must be performed in order to
implement and use the example of a medical center with three
access-controlled labs.
Prerequisites – Before continuing, ensure that the following
prerequisites have been met:
✦ All necessary doors and personnel schedules have been
defined in TAC I/NET Seven.
✦ The building manager has a TAC I/NET Seven host password
acccount that provides full access to the tenant.
✦ The building manager has the necessary privileges for creating
groups, individuals, and host passwords.
To create the groups:
The building manager creates the necessary groups (refer to
“Groups” on page 17-55 for instructions on how to create groups).
1. To begin adding groups to the tenant:
a. The building manager selects Access  Groups from
TAC I/NET Seven’s main menu.
b. If there is more than one tenant, the building manager
selects the Medical Center tenant from the Tenant Selec-
tion – Group editor.
2. To create the “Lab Personnel” group:
a. In the Groups editor, the building manager selects Add.
b. In the resulting editor, the building manager types in a
Group Name of Lab Personnel and selects OK.
c. In the resulting editor, the building manager selects OK.
3. To create the “Lab 1 Doors” group:
a. In the Groups editor, the building manager selects Add.
b. In the resulting editor, the building manager types in a
Group Name of Lab 1 Doors and selects OK.
c. In the resulting editor, the building manager selects the
Doors button.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-21

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

d. In the resulting editor, the building manager selects a

door appropriate for lab 1 and selects Schedules.
e. In the resulting editor, the building manager highlights
the “No access” schedule and selects OK.

Figure 9-9. Assigning a Door to the Group

f. The building manager continues to add appropriate

doors to the group by repeating the previous two steps as
necessary.
g. Doors that building manager leaves with a schedule
setting of “--Unselect” will be hidden from the the lab
manager.
4. To create the “Lab 2 Doors” and “Lab 3 Doors” groups, the
building manager respeats the steps used to create the “Lab 1
Doors” group. The building manager will select doors appro-
priate for the group being created. Refer to Step 3 above.

9-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

To create the host passwords for limited-access operators:

The building manager creates a host password account for each lab
manager. Refer to “Adding a Host Password” on page 9-2 for
instructions on how to create host passwords.
1. The building manager creates a host password account for
Mgr1 and gives this operator limited access to the tenant as
follows:
a. From the host password editor, the building manager
selects the Tenant button.
b. From the resulting Host Passwords – Tenant editor, the
building manager deactivates () the Full checkbox for
all unecessary tenants and activates () the Limited
checkbox for the Medical Center tenant.

Figure 9-10. Giving an Operator Limited-access to a Tenant

c. From the resulting Host Passwords – Groups editor, the

building manager deactivates () Select checkboxes to
hide disallowed groups and activates () Read-only
access for the “Lab 1 Doors” and “Lab Personnel” groups.

Figure 9-11. Giving an Operator Read-only Access to a Group

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-23

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

2. The building manager creates a host password account for

Mgr2 and gives this operator limited access to the tenant as
follows:
a. From the host password editor, the building manager
selects Tenant and gives the operator limited access to
the Medical Center tenant as described in Step 1b.
b. From the Host Passwords – Groups editor, the building
manager deactivates () Select checkboxes to hide disal-
lowed groups and activates () Read-only access for the
“Lab 2 Doors” and “Lab Personnel” groups.

Figure 9-12. Giving an Operator Read-only Access to a Group

3. The building manager creates a host password account for

Mgr3 and gives this operator limited access to the tenant as
follows:
a. From the host password editor, the building manager
selects Tenant and gives the operator limited access to
the Medical Center tenant as described in Step 1b.
b. From the Host Passwords – Groups editor, the building
manager deactivates () Select checkboxes to hide disal-
lowed groups and activates () Read-only access for the
“Lab 3 Doors” and “Lab Personnel” groups.

Figure 9-13. Giving an Operator Read-only Access to a Group

9-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

To assign the Lab Personnel group to an individual:

The building manager assigns the Lab Personnel group to all indi-
viduals that will require access to a lab. Refer to “Adding an Indi-
vidual” starting on page 17-65 for instructions on how to add an
individual to the access control system and how to assign groups to
the individual.
1. The building manager adds or modifies an individual and
selects the Doors button.
2. From the resulting Individuals – Door Selection editor, the
building manager selects the Groups button.
3. From the resulting Individuals – Group Selection editor, the
building manager adds the Lab Personnel group to the indi-
vidual.

Figure 9-14. Giving an Individual the Lab Personnel Group

Once this individual’s record is saved, the individual will become

visible to all lab managers.
To assign lab doors to an individual:
Each lab manager can assign his own lab doors to any individual
that has been assigned the Lab Personnel group. Refer to “Adding
an Individual” starting on page 17-65 for instructions on how to
add an individual to the access control system and how to assign
doors to the individual.
1. The lab manager (Mgr1, Mgr2, or Mgr3) modifies an indi-
vidual and selects the Doors button.
2. In the resulting Individuals – Door Selection editor, the lab
manager highlights a door and selects the Schedules button.
3. In the resulting Individuals – Door Schedules editor, the lab
manager highlights the desired schedule and selects OK.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-25

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

4. The lab manager can continue adding other lab doors to the
individuals as necessary.
Once this individual’s record is saved, the individual will have
access to the corresponding lab.

Printing a Host Password Report

The Print function in the Host Password editor allows you to print
a report listing the password authorizations assigned to selected
operators. In order to print the password report, you must sign on
with a password that has host password privileges enabled.
Use the following steps to generate a password report.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Passwords, or click the Pass-
words tool on the Host toolbar. The system displays the Host
Password editor (see Figure 9-1 on page 9-2).
2. Select the operator(s) to include on the report by enabling 
the Print checkbox. You must select at least one operator to
enable the print function.
3. Click the Print button to display the Windows print dialog for
your printer.
4. Complete the print dialog box as you normally would and
select the Print button. The report will list the password
authorizations for the selected operator(s).

Searching for a Host Operator Password

Searching for an operator allows you to find an operator and delete,
modify, or copy the operator and password. Use the following
steps.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Passwords, or click the Pass-
words tool on the Host toolbar. The system displays the Host
Password editor (see Figure 9-1).
2. Type the name you want to search for, or a portion of the
name, in the Search name field.

9-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Host Passwords

Note: The search is conducted on the first string in the name. For example,
typing “con” will find Control Systems International, but “int” will
not.

3. Select Find. The system scrolls to the first match and high-
lights it.

Note: Selecting Find a second time will not find another match. You must
reenter a search string and select Find again.

4. You may now delete, modify, or copy using this operator.

Deleting a Host Password

Deleting a password deletes an existing operator from the password
list. Use the following steps.

Caution: Be careful not to delete all passwords that have access to the host’s
password editor.

1. Choose an individual from the list of current operators.

2. Select Delete. The system prompts you for confirmation.
3. Select Yes to delete the operator or No to cancel the Delete
operation.

Modifying a Host Password

Modifying a password allows you to change an operator's password
level, access authorizations, preassignment password levels, and
passwords. Use the following steps.
1. From the Host Password editor, select the operator name
whose password authorization you wish to modify.
2. Select Modify. The system displays the Password Assignment
screen (see Figure 9-2).
3. At this point, procedures for modifying the host password are
the same as those described for adding a new host password.
Refer to “Adding a Host Password” on page 9-2 for these
procedures.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-27

TCON299–05/10
Host Passwords Passwords

4. When you have finished modifying the host password, select

OK to save the changes.

Copying a Host Password

Copying a password allows you to create a new operator password
using the password level and authorization of an existing operator
record.
1. From the operators/passwords listed, select the operator name
whose password authorization you wish to copy.
2. Select Copy. The system displays the Password Assignment
screen (see Figure 9-2).
3. At this point, procedures for modifying the copied host pass-
word are the same as those described for adding a new host
password. Refer to “Adding a Host Password” on page 9-2 for
these procedures.
4. Select OK to save the changes.

Printing a Host Passwords Report

The host passwords report lists the privileges assigned to each oper-
ator. In order to print the password report, you must sign on with
a password that has host password privileges enabled.
Use the following steps to generate a password report.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Passwords, or click the Pass-
words tool on the Host toolbar. The system displays the Host
Password editor (see Figure 9-1).
2. Select the operator(s) to include on the report by enabling 
the Print checkbox. You must select at least one operator to
enable the print function.
3. Click the Print button. The windows standard print dialog
box appears.
4. Complete the print dialog box as you normally would and
select the Print button. The report will list the password
authorizations for the selected operator(s).

9-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Passwords Assigning Controller Passwords

Assigning Controller Passwords

Do not confuse the controller password editor with the host pass-
word editor. The controller password editor is distinct and repre-
sents an additional level of security for the indicated controller. A
controller password may not be necessary in systems run by only
one principle operator.

Note: If you are assigning passwords to a 7728 or 7798 controller, the pass-
words must be numeric only (no alpha characters) and must be 4
digits long. Failure to observe these rules will not allow sign-on from
the controller’s remote LCD panel.

DCU Password Editor

1. Select Edit  Controller  Passwords, or click the Passwords
tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays the DCU
Password dialog box (see Figure 9-15).

Figure 9-15. DCU Passwords dialog box

2. Type a password for each level that you wish to have pass-
word-protected. Each password must be unique.

Caution: Only Level 4 lets you add or modify passwords. At least one user must
have a level 4 password.

3. Select OK to save the changes.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 9-29

TCON299–05/10
Assigning Controller Passwords Passwords

DCU Password Recover

Caution: If you forget the DCU password you must have a DCU save file for
the affected DCU. If you do, use the following procedure.

1. Erase the existing database in the DCU by changing its

address with an HC7410, or ViewCon, and then reentering
the original address.
2. Reconnect to the DCU using TAC I/NET Seven.

Note: Since there is no database, the DCU will allow a non-password

protected connection.

3. Perform a Station Restore to the DCU using its save file.

4. Inspect the DCU Password editor to find the DCU’s pass-
word.

9-30 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

10
38
Dynamic Control

TAC I/NET Seven provides three types of dynamic control:

✦ Time Scheduling (TS) – The TS extension is used to define
and assign one or more time schedules to specific DO and DC
output point(s).
✦ Temperature Control (TC) – The TC extension is used to
define and assign temperature control programs to specific
DO and DC output point(s).
✦ Demand Control (DC) – The DC extension is used to define
and assign demand control programs to specific PI points
which control specific DO and DC output point(s) according
to demand levels.

Time Scheduling (TS)

Use this editor to create a schedule for any of the DC and DO points
currently residing in a controller for any day of the week. Only DO
and DC points are listed since they are the only point types to
which you can add a Time Scheduling extension. You may assign
more than one daily schedule to the same output point. For
example, you might have one schedule running Monday through
Friday and a different schedule in place for the weekends. You may
also create up to seven Special Day schedules (a holiday is the most
obvious example of a Special Day) and two Temporary schedules.
Refer to the section on Time Scheduling in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.w

Adding a Point Time Schedule

Note: You must be connected to the controller containing the points you
want to control.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-1

TCON299–05/10
Time Scheduling (TS) Dynamic Control

1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Time Sched-

uling, or click the Time Scheduling tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the Time
Scheduling (TS) option selected (see Figure 10-1).

Figure 10-1. Resident I/O Points - Time Scheduling Editor

This editor lists all of the DC and DO points currently

residing in this controller. If there are more points than the
screen can hold, you can scroll through the list using the scroll
bar that appears to the right of the list.

Note: In the following step, if you choose a point that already has a time
schedule, then the Add button is not enabled and a time schedule
cannot be added. In this case you may either modify, copy, or delete
the time schedule.

2. Highlight a point and select the Add button to append the

Time Scheduling extension to the point. The system displays
the Time Schedule - Add dialog box (see Figure 10-2).

10-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Time Scheduling (TS)

Figure 10-2. Time Schedule - Add

3. You must now choose the type of schedule to add. Use the
appropriate procedures below to add Independent, Master, or
Slave schedules.
Adding an Independent or a Master Schedule
1. From the Time Schedule - Add dialog box, select Indepen-
dent or Master.

2. Select the OK button. The system displays an empty Time

Schedule editor (see Figure 10-3).

Figure 10-3. Time Schedule Editor

3. Select the Add button. The system displays the Time Schedule
Action editor (see Figure 10-4).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-3

TCON299–05/10
Time Scheduling (TS) Dynamic Control

Figure 10-4. Time Schedule Action Editor

4. Choose an Action from the drop-down list. The drop-down

list displays six actions for Independent points (Start, Stop,
Cycle, Opt. Start, Opt. Stop and Opt. Cycle) and three
actions for Master points (Start, Stop and Cycle). (None is
not a valid option.)
5. Choose a Type from the drop-down list. The drop-down list
displays Time, Sunrise, and Sunset.

Note: Sunrise and sunset are calculated by the system, so it is not necessary
to enter a time when you select either of these types.

6. Enter a time using 24 hour format in the Time field.

Note: In the following step, Cycle On and Cycle Off fields are only active if
you selected Cycle or Opt. Cycle in the Action Field.

7. Enter a number in the Cycle On and Cycle Off fields. These

fields represent the minutes (0–127) the device controlled by
this point is on and off per cycle period. The OFF command is
always issued at the beginning of a cycle.

10-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Time Scheduling (TS)

8. Select the days you want this action to run. A check mark next
to the day indicates that the action is activated for that day.
Each day can be toggled between activated () and deacti-
vated ().
9. Select the OK button. The system displays the Time Schedule
editor (see Figure 10-3) showing any schedules you have
entered for this point.
10. Repeat Steps 2 through 9 as required for additional indepen-
dent and master time schedule actions.
11. From the Time Schedule editor, select OK to save the settings
and exit this procedure.
Adding a Slave Schedule

Note: To select Slave, you must have previously defined at least one Master
schedule. The Slave and Master schedules must reside in the same
controller.

1. From the Time Schedule - Add dialog box (see Figure 10-2),
select Slave.
2. In the Master Point field, choose a master point from the
drop-down list.
3. Click OK. The system displays the Time Schedule - Slave
editor (see Figure 10-5).
This editor lists all actions defined in the Master schedule. By
default, the Reaction defined in the Slave schedule is initially
set to Mirror.
4. Choose an action from the list and select Modify. The Time
Schedule Action editor displays. (see Figure 10-6).
5. Choose a Reaction from the drop-down list.
6. Set an Adjustment for the reaction.
7. Select the OK button. The system displays the Time Schedule
- Slave editor again (see Figure 10-5).
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 as necessary to configure each
action.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-5

TCON299–05/10
Time Scheduling (TS) Dynamic Control

Figure 10-5. Time Schedule - Slave Editor

Figure 10-6. Slave Schedule Action Editor

9. Repeat Steps 1 through 8 as required to add additional slave

time schedules.

10-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Time Scheduling (TS)

Note: If you have established any temporary actions, you can select the days
you want them to run. Do not designate a day as temporary or
special , if the special or temporary action is not already established.
If you do, no actions will occur on that day.

10. From the Time Schedule editor, select OK to save the settings
and exit this procedure.

Modifying a Point Time Schedule

Modifying a time schedule point extension is similar to adding a
time schedule point extension. Use the same procedure as
described in “Adding a Point Time Schedule” on page 10-1 except
you choose a point that already has a time schedule point extension
and select Modify (rather than Add) from the Resident I/O Points
editor.

Copying a Point Time Schedule

Once you have added a time schedule, you can copy the time
schedule to other points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Time Sched-
uling, or click the Time Scheduling tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the Time
Schedule (TS) option selected (see Figure 10-1).
2. Select the point whose time schedule you want to copy. This
point is now designated as the Source.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Copy (Time Scheduling)
dialog box (see Figure 10-7).

Figure 10-7. Copy (Time Scheduling) Dialog Box

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-7

TCON299–05/10
Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule) Dynamic Control

4. In the Target field, choose a point from the drop-down list.

The list includes all eligible DO and DC points on the
controller that do not have time schedules.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Time Schedule editor (see
Figure 10-3) for the selected point.
6. Change the time schedule as required.
7. Select OK.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required for any additional time
schedules that you want to copy.
9. Click Close to save the settings and exit this procedure.

Deleting a Point Time Schedule

Once you have added a time schedule, you can delete it.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Time Sched-
uling, or click the Time Scheduling tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the time
schedule (TS) option selected (see Figure 10-1).
2. Choose the point whose time schedule you want to delete.
3. Click Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
4. Click Yes. The system deletes the time schedule and returns
the Resident I/O Points editor (see Figure 10-1 on page 10-2).
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 as required for any additional time
schedules that you want to delete.
6. Click Close to exit this procedure.

Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule)

The Host ATS function allows you to define schedules at the host
level and distribute this information to controllers containing
master time schedule points. This way you don’t need to access
each controller separately. Instead, you can create a master
schedule that is edited from the workstation and affects points with

10-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule)

master schedules (along with their associated slave schedules) in

multiple controllers. You cannot download a host time schedule to
an independent time schedule.

Adding a Host Time Schedule

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Host ATS, or click the Host
ATS tool on the Host toolbar. The system displays the Host
ATS Schedules editor with a list of all host schedules, as shown
in Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8. Host ATS Summary

2. Select Add. The system displays the Host ATS summary (see
Figure 10-9).

Figure 10-9. Host ATS Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-9

TCON299–05/10
Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule) Dynamic Control

3. Enter the schedule Name (up to 16 characters).

4. Click the Active checkbox to activate () or deactivate ()
the schedule.
5. Change the Date and Time as required. Enter the time in 24-
hour (military) format.
6. Select OK. The Time Schedule editor displays (see Figure 10-3
on page 10-3).
7. Select Add. The system displays the Time Schedule Action
editor (see Figure 10-4 on page 10-4).

Note: Keep in mind that you are defining a Master time schedule and the
only actions available are Start, Stop and Cycle. No optimization is
possible.

8. Choose an Action from the drop-down list. The drop-down

list displays three actions (Start, Stop and Cycle). (None is
not a valid option.)
9. Choose a Type from the drop-down list. The drop-down list
displays Time, Sunrise, and Sunset.

Note: Sunrise and sunset are calculated by the system, so it is not necessary
to enter a time when you select either of these types.

10. Enter a time using 24-hour format in the Time field.

Note: The Cycle On and Cycle Off fields are only active if you selected
Cycle in the Action Field.

11. Enter a number in the Cycle On and Cycle Off fields. These
fields represent the minutes (0–127) the device controlled by
this point is ON and Off per cycle period. The OFF command
is always issued at the beginning of a cycle.
12. Activate () or deactivate () the days you want this action
to run. You can choose as many of the days as needed.
13. Select OK. The system displays the Time Schedule editor (see
Figure 10-3) showing all schedule actions for this host.

10-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule)

14. Select OK. The system displays the Point List (see
Figure 10-10). This editor displays the master time schedule

Figure 10-10. Point List Editor

points that are controlled by the Host ATS schedule.

15. Select Add. The system displays the Host ATS Editor - New
Point dialog box (see Figure 10-11). The list box displays the

Figure 10-11. Host ATS - New Point Dialog Box

address, station name and point name of all points assigned.

16. Enter the point address for a DO or DC point in the New
point field and click OK.

The address must include the 8-digit address and the 2-char-
acter point type and must have a Master ATS schedule
defined.
17. Click OK to add the point to the Point List.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-11

TCON299–05/10
Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule) Dynamic Control

18. To add more points, repeat Steps 15 through 17 as required.

19. Click Close to save the settings and return to the Host ATS
Schedules editor (see Figure 10-9 on page 10-9).
20. Repeat Steps 2 through 19 as required for additional host time
schedules.
21. Click Close to save the settings and exit this procedure.

Modifying a Host Time Schedule

Modifying a host time schedule is similar to adding a host time
schedule. Use the same procedure as “Adding a Host Time
Schedule” on page 10-9 except that you choose a time schedule that
already exists from the Host ATS Schedules editor (see Figure 10-9)
and select Modify rather than Add.

Note: When modifying an existing Host ATS Schedule, pay special atten-
tion to the date and time values. If you modify an existing schedule,
the default values for the date and time fields are the current date
and time, even if you previously defined a different date and time.

Copying a Host Time Schedule

Once you have added a host time schedule, you can copy the host
time schedule to other Host ATS schedules.
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Host ATS, or click the Host
ATS tool on the Host toolbar. The Host ATS editor (see
Figure 10-9) displays.
2. Choose the time schedule you want to copy and click Copy.
The Host ATS - Copy dialog box (see Figure 10-12) displays.

Figure 10-12. Host ATS - Copy Dialog Box

10-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Host ATS (Automatic Time Schedule)

3. Enter a New schedule name (up to 16 characters) and click

OK. The Host ATS editor (see Figure 10-9) displays.
4. Select OK. The system saves the settings and displays the Time
Schedule editor (see Figure 10-3) with the added schedule.

Note: If you want to change the schedule, perform Steps 5 and 6.

5. Select Modify. The system displays the Time Schedule Action

editor (see Figure 10-4).
6. Change the time schedule as required. Click OK to save the
settings and return to the Time Schedule editor.
7. When you are finished, click OK to return to the Point List
editor (see Figure 10-10).

Note: If you want to add points to the copied time schedule, perform Steps 8
through 10.

8. Select Add.
9. Enter the new point.
10. Click OK to add the point and return to the Point List editor
(see Figure 10-10).
11. Repeat Steps 8 through 10 as required to add more points.
12. Click Close to return to the Host ATS Schedules editor.
13. Repeat Steps 2 through 12 as required for any additional host
time schedules that you want to copy.
14. Click Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Host Time Schedule

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Host ATS, or click the Host
ATS tool on the Host toolbar. The Host ATS Schedules editor
displays.
2. Choose the time schedule you want to delete and select
Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation dialog
box.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-13

TCON299–05/10
Special Days Dynamic Control

3. Click Yes to delete the host time schedule and return to the
Host ATS Schedules editor (see Figure 10-9 on page 10-9).
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as required for any additional host time
schedules that you want to delete. Select Close when you are
finished.

Special Days
This editor is used to define the time period(s) during which the
special day schedule (entered in the time schedule editor) will
replace the normal schedule. This editor is not point-specific (it is
not a point extension) and affects all time scheduled control points
in the same DCU.
Refer to the section on Special Days in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Adding Special Days

Note: If you have a special day defined, there must be a special day schedule
defined for all points in the DCU or the points will remain at their
last commanded states until the special day period is over.

1. Select Edit  Controller  Special Days, or click the Special

Days tool on the Controller toolbar. The Special Day Assign-
ments editor displays (see Figure 10-13).
You can also access the Special Day Assignments editor by
selecting the Spec Days button in the Personnel Schedules
Summary. Refer to “Adding a Personnel Schedule” on page
17-32 for more information.
2. Select Add. The Special Day dialog box displays (see
Figure 10-14).
3. In the Date field, enter the month and day of the start date.
4. Using the spindial in the Duration field, select the number of
days (0–127) that you want this special day to be in effect.
Special days with a duration of 0, are discarded by the system
when you exit the editor.

10-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Special Days

Figure 10-13. Special Day Assignments Editor

Figure 10-14. Special Day Dialog Box

Caution: When the date assigned to the special day occurs, the special day
schedule (S1–S7) replaces all regular schedules in the DCU. In an
ATS schedule, if the S1–S7 column is left with all “–”, no commands
occur on that day.

5. For S1 through S7, use the spindial to choose “–” (not used),
“T” (temporary) or “P” (permanent).

Note: If you select OK in the following step, all special days with a value of 0
in the Days column will be deleted.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-15

TCON299–05/10
Temperature Control (TC) Dynamic Control

6. Click OK to return to the Special Day Assignments editor (see

Figure 10-13).

Note: When you select OK in the next step, all special days with a value of 0
in the Days column will be deleted.

7. Select OK to save the settings and exit this procedure.

Modifying Special Days

Modifying a special day schedule is similar to the “Adding Special
Days” procedure on page 10-14 except that you choose a special day
that already exists from the Special Day Assignments editor (see
Figure 10-13) and select Modify rather than Add.

Deleting Special Days

Once you have added a special day, you can delete it. Choose a
special day that already exists from the Special Day Assignments
editor (see Figure 10-13)and select Delete.

Temperature Control (TC)

This point extension is available only for DO and DC points. It is
available on all controllers. Temperature Control allows you to:
✦ Mimic the traditional “red wire control” of packaged rooftop
HVAC units
✦ Provide optimized start, optimized stop, night setback/setup
control, and demand temperature override control informa-
tion for output points controlling HVAC units.
Refer to the section on Temperature Control in TCON300, TAC
I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information
about temperature control and a description of the Temperature
Control parameters.

Adding a Temperature Control Point Extension

1. Connect to the controller containing the points you want to
control.

10-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Temperature Control (TC)

2. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Temperature

Control, or click the Temperature Control tool on the Exten-
sions toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the
temperature control (TC) option selected (see Figure 10-15).

Figure 10-15. Resident I/O Points - Temperature Control

This editor lists all the points currently residing in this

controller that will accept temperature control (DO and DC
points). Each point is listed by address, class, and name. A Y
in the TC column indicates that temperature control has been
added to the point.

Note: If you choose a point that already has a temperature control exten-
sion, then the Add button is not enabled and temperature control
cannot be added. In this case you may either modify, copy, or delete
the temperature control.

3. Choose a point that does not have a Y in the TC column and

select Add. The system displays the Temperature Control
editor (see Figure 10-16).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-17

TCON299–05/10
Temperature Control (TC) Dynamic Control

Figure 10-16. Temperature Control Editor

Select a point name or address for the outside air sensor from the
drop-down list in the Outside air temperature field. The Outside
Air Temperature entry is mandatory if optimized start/stop is used,
otherwise its use is optional.
1. Select a point name or address for the space sensor from the
drop-down list in the Space temperature field. This entry is
mandatory.

Note: The two lookahead entry fields are used for adaptive optimized
start/stop (OSTART and OSTOP), a function that monitors HVAC
system performance, to determine when to begin optimized start or
stop actions. These functions require an ATS extension on the output
point.

2. In the Optimized start lookahead field, enter a number from

0 to 480. This is the maximum number of minutes that
OSTART can optimize. A zero entry means that Ostart does
not take place.
3. In the Optimized Stop lookahead field, enter a number from
0 to 480. This is the maximum number of minutes that
OSTOP can optimize. A zero entry means that Ostop does not
take place.

10-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Temperature Control (TC)

4. Activate () or deactivate () Demand Temperature Over-

ride. This function gives you the opportunity to allow
Temperature Control to override demand control you have in
effect for this point when the space temperature is outside its
control band.
5. Use the Target (deg) fields to define the target temperatures
for the HVAC unit controlled by this point. Each field is
described below:

Caution: The heating setpoint may never be greater than the cooling setpoint.
There must be a deadband area of no control between the heating
and cooling zone ranges, so that the controller is aware of the transi-
tion from heating to cooling or vice versa. The zone ranges are
defined as the target, plus or minus one-half of the differential. This
applies to both heating and cooling zone ranges. This deadband
between the zone ranges must be at least 0.5 degrees.

✧ Cooling - This is the cooling temperature the unit

attempts to reach and maintain when the Time Sched-
uling program issues a START command to the output
point. This is also the target temperature at occupancy
time used by the Optimized Start command (in the ATS
editor).
✧ Setup - This is the high limit setpoint for this system
when the space is unoccupied. This Setup cooling
temperature setpoint is only relevant when the output
point has been issued a STOP command by the Time
Scheduling program.
✧ Heating - This is the heating temperature the unit
attempts to reach and maintain when the Time Sched-
uling program issues a START command to the output
point. This is also the target temperature at occupancy
time used by the Optimized Start command (in the ATS
editor).
✧ Setback - This is the low limit setpoint for this system
when the space is unoccupied. This Setback heating
temperature setpoint is only relevant when the output
point has been issued a STOP command by the Time
Scheduling program.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-19

TCON299–05/10
Temperature Control (TC) Dynamic Control

6. Use the Differential (deg) fields to define the degree of preci-

sion you feel is necessary for temperature control. The target
temperature plus one-half of the differential is the maximum
temperature and the target temperature minus one-half of the
differential is the minimum temperature.
✧ Cooling - This is the temperature range over which
normal cooling will be controlled.
✧ Setup -This is the temperature range over which Setup
cooling will be controlled.
✧ Heating - This is the temperature range over which
normal heating will be controlled.
✧ Setback - This is the temperature range over which
Setback heating will be controlled.
7. Use the Cycle Adjustment (min/deg) fields to define the
minutes per degree adjustment to be made to the Optimum
Duty Cycle period (Ocycle) for the HVAC unit controlled by
this point.
✧ Cooling - This is the number of additional minutes per
degree the space temperature is above the cooling
setpoint that the unit will be turned on during each
Ocycle period (defined in the ATS editor).
✧ Heating - This is the number of additional minutes per
degree the space temperature is below the heating
setpoint that the unit will be turned on during each
Ocycle period (defined in the ATS editor).
8. Select OK. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
with the temperature control (TC) option selected (see
Figure 10-15). A Y now appears in the TC column of the
chosen point.

Modifying a Temperature Control Point Extension

Modifying a temperature control point extension is similar to
adding a temperature control point extension. Use the same proce-
dure as described in “Adding a Temperature Control Point Exten-
sion” on page 10-16 except that you choose a point that has a Y in

10-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Temperature Control (TC)

the TC column and select Modify (rather than Add) from the Resi-
dent I/O Points editor with the temperature control (TC) option
selected.

Copying a Temperature Control Point Extension

Once you have added a temperature control point extension, you
can copy the extension to other points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Temperature
Control, or click the Temperature Control tool on the Exten-
sions toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the
temperature control (TC) option selected (see Figure 10-15).
2. Choose a point that has a Y in the TC column. This is now the
source point.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Copy - Temperature
Control dialog box (see Figure 10-17).

Figure 10-17. Copy - Temperature Control Dialog box

4. Choose a Target point from the drop-down list of all active

DO and DC points on the controller that do not have temper-
ature control.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Temperature Control
editor (see Figure 10-16).
6. Modify the temperature control parameters as required.
(Refer to “Adding a Temperature Control Point Extension” on
page 10-16)
7. Select OK to return to the Temperature Control point exten-
sion editor (see Figure 10-15).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-21

TCON299–05/10
Demand Control (DC) Dynamic Control

8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required to copy temperature

control to other points.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Temperature Control Point Extension

Use the following procedure to delete a temperature control point
extension.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Temperature
Control, or click the Temperature Control tool on the Exten-
sions toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the
temperature control (TC) option selected (see Figure 10-15).
2. Select the point whose temperature control you want to
delete.
3. Click Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
4. Click Yes. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
with the Y removed from the TC column for this point.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional temperature
control extensions that you want to delete.
6. Select Close to exit.

Demand Control (DC)

This extension is used only with PI points. It is available on all
controllers except the 7750, 7770, 7780, and 7791. Add this exten-
sion to a PI point to monitor electrical power demand and
consumption, and maintain daily and/or monthly power
consumption totals. When combined with the load shedding capa-
bility (ability to control points off), you have an extremely
powerful and flexible electrical demand control program.
The load shedding feature of Demand Control lets you establish
target demand shed level setpoint(s). The controllers on the LAN
shed (turn off) and restore (turn on) loads (DO and DC points) as
needed to operate your facility within the targeted demand level.

10-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Demand Control (DC)

This limits the demand segment of the electric utility charges.

Loads are shed and restored according to a priority you assign, with
lower level loads shed before loads assigned a higher priority. Loads
are restored in reverse order; those with the highest priority are
restored first.
Refer to the section on Demand Control in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide for more information.

Adding a Demand Control Point Extension

Use the following procedure to add demand control to a point:
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Demand
Control, or click the Demand Control tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the
demand control (DC) option selected (see Figure 10-18).

Figure 10-18. Resident I/O Points Editor (DC selected)

This editor lists all the PI points currently residing in this

controller. Each point is listed by address, class, and name. A
Y in the DC column indicates that demand control has been
added to the point.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-23

TCON299–05/10
Demand Control (DC) Dynamic Control

Note: If you choose a point that already has demand control, then the Add
button is not enabled and demand control cannot be added. In this
case you may either modify, copy, or delete the demand control.

2. Choose a point that does not have a Y in the DC column and

select Add. The system displays the Demand Control editor
(see Figure 10-19).

Figure 10-19. Demand Control Editor

3. Modify the parameters under Demand Details:

✧ Demand interval (minutes) - This is the time period
over which the calculation of demand is based. You may
enter any value between 5 and 90 minutes in 5-minute
increments.
✧ Current demand point - If you wish to use an internal
analog point to display current demand, choose the point
from the pull-down list here. This entry is optional.

10-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Demand Control (DC)

✧ Monthly consumption point - If you wish to use an

internal PI point to store month-to-date consumption,
choose the point from the pull-down list here. This entry
is optional.
4. Modify the parameters under SevenTrends:
a. Choose a Distribution group (1–4). The cell mask will be
applied to this group.
b. Define the Distribution mask. Set each of eight masking
positions to the desired state, either activated () or
deactivated ().
c. Choose a Priority from the drop-down list.
d. Enter a Cell number (1–1023). You must assign a value
other than zero (0) in order for SevenTrends to store the
trend information. Otherwise, this field is not used in
TAC I/NET Seven and can be any value.
5. Modify the parameters under Normal Shed Level. The
normal shed level is the maximum demand target value in
kilowatts for the meter in the normal (non-override) state.
You may select Point or Scheduled. At this value, priority
loads 0–6 will be shed.
✧ Point - If you select Point, you must choose a point from
the drop-down list. The value of the point is the normal
shed level.
✧ Scheduled - If you selected scheduled, use the Sched-
ules (Date and Level) fields to enter the shed levels (see
Step 6).
✧ Differential - Enter the number of kilowatts (0–32,767)
to subtract from the normal shed level before restoration
begins.
6. If you selected Scheduled in Step 5, you may enter up to 12
schedule dates in the Schedules section. This field affects two
different processes: the schedule option for normal shed levels
and the zero out process for the monthly KWH accumulator
point (if applicable).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-25

TCON299–05/10
Demand Control (DC) Dynamic Control

✧ Date - Enter the ending date for each schedule period.

The default is the end of the month.
If the scheduled option was selected for the normal shed
level, this date specifies the ending date for each schedule
period.
If a monthly consumption point was specified in Step 3,
this field specifies the last day of the month. The monthly
accumulator will be zeroed out on midnight of the day
entered.
✧ Level - If the scheduled option was selected for the
normal shed level, enter the shed level (0–32,767 kilo-
watts) for each time period.
7. Modify the parameters under Emergency Shed Level. The
emergency shed level is the maximum demand target value in
kilowatts that determines when emergency loads (priority 7)
will be shed. You may select Point or Constant.
✧ Point - If you select Point, you must choose a point from
the drop-down list. The value of the point is the emer-
gency shed level.
✧ Constant - If you select Constant, enter the emergency
shed level in kilowatts (0–32,767 kilowatts).
✧ Differential - Enter the number of kilowatts (0–32,767)
to subtract from the emergency shed level to determine
the kilowatt value at which emergency loads will be
restored. This prevents emergency loads from turning off
and on in rapid succession when the demand level is near
the shed level.
8. Modify the parameters under Override Shed Level. The
override shed level is the maximum demand target value in
kilowatts for the meter in the override state.
✧ Control Point - Specifies if Normal shed level (Control
point = 0) or Override shed level (Control point = 1) is in
effect.
✧ Point - If you select Point, you must choose a point from
the drop-down list. The value of the point is the override
shed level.

10-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Demand Control (DC)

✧ Constant - If you select Constant, enter the override

shed level in kilowatts (0–32,767 kilowatts).
✧ Differential - Enter the number of kilowatts (0–32,767)
to subtract from the override shed level.This determines
the kilowatt value at which override shed loads will be
restored.
9. When you finish entering or modifying the Demand Control
meter parameters, select Loads. The system displays the
Demand Loads Summary editor (see Figure 10-20).

Figure 10-20. Demand Load Summary Editor

10. Select Add. The system displays the Demand Load Selection
dialog box (see Figure 10-21).

Figure 10-21. Demand Load Selection Dialog Box

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-27

TCON299–05/10
Demand Control (DC) Dynamic Control

11. Choose a point from the drop-down list. Click OK to display

the Demand Load Edit dialog box. (see Figure 10-22).
Use the Demand Load Edit dialog box (see Figure 10-22) to
specify when the load is to be shed, whether the load is NO
(on state = 1) or NC (on state = 0), the loads’s maximum off-
time, and the size of the load. Load size lets TAC I/NET Seven
determine the fewest number of loads that can be shed to
bring demand under the acceptable limit.
You may assign up to 127 demand loads to each demand
program, and up to 255 demand loads to each controller.

Figure 10-22. Demand Load Edit Dialog Box

12. In the Priority field enter a priority level (0–7).

13. Select an On State (0 or 1).
14. In the Load Size field enter the DO or DC load size in kilo-
watts (0–32,767) for this load.
15. In the Max Off (Min) field enter the maximum off time (0–
127) in minutes for this DO or DC load.
16. Select OK. The system displays the Demand Load Summary
editor (see Figure 10-20) with a list of the demand loads that
you have entered.
17. Repeat Steps 10 through 16 as required to enter additional
demand loads.
18. Click Close to return to the Demand Control editor (see
Figure 10-19).
19. Select OK. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
(see Figure 10-18).

10-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Demand Control (DC)

20. Repeat Steps 2 through 19 as required to add the demand

control extension to additional accumulator points.
21. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Modifying a Demand Control Point Extension

Modifying a demand control point extension is similar to adding a
demand control point extension. Use the same procedure as
described in “Adding a Demand Control Point Extension” on page
10-23 except that you choose a point that has a Y in the DC column
and select the Modify button from the Resident I/O Points editor,
rather than the Add button.

Copying a Demand Control Point Extension

Once you have added a demand control point extension, you can
copy the extension to other accumulator points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Demand
Control, or click the Demand Control tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The Demand Control point extension editor displays
(see Figure 10-18).
2. Choose a point that has a Y in the DC column. This is now the
source point.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Copy - Demand Control
dialog box (see Figure 10-23).

Figure 10-23. Copy - Demand Control Dialog Box

4. Choose a Target point from the drop-down list of all active PI

points on the controller that do not have demand control.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-29

TCON299–05/10
Demand Control (DC) Dynamic Control

5. Select OK to display the Demand Control editor (see

Figure 10-19).
6. Modify the demand control parameters as required. (Refer to
“Adding a Demand Control Point Extension” on page 10-23)
7. Modify the demand control load parameters. (Refer to
Figure 10-20, Figure 10-21, and Figure 10-22 as required.)
8. Select OK to return to the Resident I/O Points editor (see
Figure 10-18).
9. Repeat Steps 2 through 8 as required to copy demand control
to other points.
10. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Demand Control Point Extension

Use the following procedure to delete a demand control point
extension.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Demand
Control, or click the Demand Control tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the
demand control (DC) option selected (see Figure 10-18).
2. Select the point whose demand control you want to delete.
3. Click Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
4. Click Yes. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
(see Figure 10-18) with the Y removed from the DC column
for this point.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional demand control
point extensions that you want to delete.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

10-30 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Auto Report Generation

Auto Report Generation

The auto report generation function allows you to configure TAC
I/NET Seven to generate unattended reports at scheduled times.
You can choose to have a report generated only once, or at multiple
dates and times. Generated reports can be created in any of several
formats.
Before you create an Auto Report Generation schedule, confirm
that the system date and time on your computer are accurate. The
Windows Scheduled Tasks function relies on this information to
run scheduled tasks. To verify or change this information, double-
click the time indicator on the Windows taskbar.

Note: You must supply the password for the Windows account on which you
want the scheduled task to run. The password cannot be blank.

Adding an Auto Report Generation Schedule

Use the following procedure to add an auto report generation
schedule:
1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Auto Report Generation
from the main menu. The system displays the Auto Report
Name editor (see Figure 10-24).

Figure 10-24. Auto Report Generation Selection

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-31

TCON299–05/10
Auto Report Generation Dynamic Control

2. Select Add to create a new automatic report generation

schedule. The system displays the Auto Report Name editor
(see Figure 10-25), allowing you to define a name for the new
schedule.

Figure 10-25. Auto Report Name

3. Enter a Report schedule name. This name can be up to 40

characters long.
4. Choose the necessary type of report output. The following
options are available:
• Print – Select this option to have the report sent to a
printer.
• Export – Select this option to have the report exported
into a file that you can open in another application.
5. Select OK to continue. One of the following events will occur:
• If you selected “Export” as the output type, the Auto
Report Generation editor opens (see Figure 10-26).
• If you selected “Print” as the output type, the standard
Windows print dialog opens, allowing you to choose and
configure a printer. When you close the print dialog (by
pressing the Print or Cancel button), the Auto Report
Generation editor opens (see Figure 10-26).

10-32 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Auto Report Generation

Figure 10-26. Auto Report Generation

6. Choose the necessary type of report output. The following

options are available:
• Print – Select this option to have the report sent to a
printer.
• Export – Select this option to have the report exported
into a file that you can open in another application.
By default, the option that you selected from the Auto Report
Name editor will be active.
7. Define the complete path and file name of the Reports
source file (up to 516 characters). If necessary, use the “...”
button to browse through your file system.
8. If the report is for export, define the complete path and file
name of the Reports output file (up to 516 characters) and
specify the desired format for the report output by selecting
the “...” button. The system displays a file selection dialog box
(see Figure 10-27).
a. Navigate through your file system as necessary to choose
an output file location.
b. Define the output File name.
c. Use the Files of type drop-down list to choose an output
format.
d. Select Open to accept these settings. The file selection
dialog box closes.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-33

TCON299–05/10
Auto Report Generation Dynamic Control

Figure 10-27. Select Report File

9. Click the Options button to define parameter settings for

controlling how the resulting report gets formatted. The
system displays the Auto Report Generation Format editor
(the example shown in Figure 10-28 is for an Excel file).

Figure 10-28. Excel File Options

The options available will depend on the type of report

format you selected in Step 8, substep c. For information
about the options available for each output type, refer to the
electronic version of the Crystal Reports User Guide (requires
Adobe Acrobat reader) located in the TAC I/NET Seven root
directory.

10-34 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Auto Report Generation

Note: Some report formats such as Text (*.TXT) have no available options.
In this case, clicking the Options button will have no affect.

10. Click the Duration button to open an editor that allows you to
define what period of information to include in the report
(see Figure 10-29).

Figure 10-29. Report Duration Editor

By default, the duration settings are configured to allow

generation of a “full report” (that is, a report that includes all
historical data).
Perform the following steps to modify the duration settings.
a. Choose a Time duration type. Changing this parameter
from its default setting of “Full Report” to any other
setting allows you to focus the report on a specific period
of time.
Select whether the period of time should be a matter of
years, months, weeks, days, or hours.
b. Choose a Time duration. This parameter’s setting will
determine the number of years-, months-, weeks-, days-,
or hours-worth of data to include in the report.
c. Activate () or deactivate () the Use Start Date
option.
Activate this option if you would like to specify the start
date of the data to include in the report.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-35

TCON299–05/10
Auto Report Generation Dynamic Control

If you leave this option deactivated, the start date will be

calculated each time the report runs. For example, if the
report runs on 1/7/2006 and the duration is 3 days, then
the start date will be 1/4/2006. In this case, data collected
from 1/4/2006 to 1/7/2006 will be included in the report.
d. If you activated the Use Start Date option, use the Start
date field to specify the starting date of data to include in
the report.
For example, if you set the start date to 1/4/2006 and the
duration is 3 days, then data from 1/4/2006 to 1/7/2006
will be included in the report.
e. Click OK to save these settings and close the duration
editor.
11. Click the Recurrence button to define a schedule for the
report. This causes TAC I/NET Seven to launch the Windows
Scheduled Task editor (see Figure 10-30).

Figure 10-30. Windows Scheduled Task Editor

10-36 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Dynamic Control Auto Report Generation

Most of the required parameters are already set when the task
editor opens.

Note: While using the Scheduled Task editor, you can view help for any field
by clicking the “?” button in the title bar and then clicking on the
field.

12. Use the following steps to configure the report generation

schedule:
a. The Run as parameter shows the Windows account of
the currently logged in operator. You can leave this
parameter at its current setting, or you can change it to
define which Windows account to use when generating
this report.
b. Click Set password... to enter the password assigned to
the user account. You cannot leave the password blank.
c. Display schedule settings by clicking the Schedule tab.
d. If you have already defined the schedule needed for this
report, you can select it from the drop-down list near the
top of the dialog box. Otherwise, click New to define a
new schedule.
e. Choose an appropriate setting from the Schedule Task
drop-down list. This parameter allows you to choose
from several recurring and non-recurring settings.
f. If you chose any setting except for “At Logon” or “At
System Startup” in the previous step, one or more task-
specific parameters become available. Set the param-
eter(s) as necessary.
g. If you chose a setting of “Daily,” “Weekly,” or “Monthly”
in Step e, you can use the Advanced... button to specify a
Start Date and End Date, and to set Repeat task param-
eters.
h. Display additional settings by clicking the Settings tab.
Set the parameters as necessary. You can view help for
any field by clicking the “?” button in the title bar and
then clicking on the field.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 10-37

TCON299–05/10
Auto Report Generation Dynamic Control

i. Select OK to save your settings and close the editor.

10-38 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

11
6
Calculations

Calculations (C)
This point extension is used with all point types and is available in
all controllers. Add this extension to a point if you need to create
one or more internal or external points containing calculations that
expand the capability of the controller in some way or provide
information that cannot be obtained from a sensor. Refer to the
section on Calculations in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical
Reference Guide, for more information.

Adding a Calculated Point

Note: You must be connected to the controller containing the points you
want to add a calculation to.

Use the Calculated Point worksheet located in TCON157, TAC

I/NET Seven Forms and Worksheets to help you define your calcu-
lated point.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Calculation,
or click the Calculation tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Resident I/O Points editor with the calcu-
lation (C) option selected (see Figure 11-1).
This screen lists all points currently residing in this controller.
Each point is listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the C
column indicates that a calculation has been added to the
point.
2. Select a point name from the list. This point is now desig-
nated as the target of the calculation you plan to enter.
3. Click Add. The system displays the Calculations editor (see
Figure 11-2).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 11-1

TCON299–05/10
Calculations (C) Calculations

Figure 11-1. Calculation Editor

Figure 11-2. Calculations Editor

11-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Calculations Calculations (C)

Caution: The system cannot detect errors in calculations (e.g., dividing by

zero). Be sure that your calculation is correct to avoid unwanted
results.

4. Enter your calculation either by typing or by selecting param-

eters and operators from the Calculations Text pad.
Calculations consist of parameters (points or constants) and
operators. There are 10 possible point parameters labeled P0
through P9, and 10 possible constant parameters labeled C0
through C9. You may have all 10 point and/or constant
parameters in one calculation if you like, but this is usually
not necessary. Also, you can use a parameter more than once.
Refer to the Calculated Point worksheet you filled out. Enter
the appropriate point and constant parameters and the neces-
sary operators. Remember that all constants must be desig-
nated with C0 through C9. You do not type an actual number
into the calculation. Points are designated P0 through P9. You
do not actually enter the point address into the calculation.
Your calculation can contain a maximum of 80 characters.
For example, the calculation for determining the average of
two temperatures could be: (P0 + P1)/C0. The parentheses ()
ensure that the various operations are carried out in the order
you intend. In this case the values of the two points are added
before their sum is divided by the constant.
5. When you have finished entering the calculation, define your
points and constants.
Only the parameters included in the calculation have active
fields. In the example above you listed two point parameters,
P0 and P1. These would be AI points (temperature sensors).
Define a point as follows:
a. Select a Points field. The system displays a list of all
active points in the controller.
b. Select the point for this parameter.
c. Repeat Steps a and b for each point in your calculation.
Define a constant as follows:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 11-3

TCON299–05/10
Calculations (C) Calculations

d. Select a Constant field.

e. Enter a number.
In the previous example, the constant is two; so you enter
a 2 in the C0 field. Make sure the zero that was in the field
is not included with your number. You can use any
constant up to six significant digits. Numbers more than
six digits long are rounded.
f. Repeat Steps d and e for each constant in your calcula-
tion.
6. Verify that your calculation, points, and constants are correct.
Change as required.
7. Select OK.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required for additional calculated
points.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Modifying a Calculated Point

Modifying a calculated point is similar to adding a calculated point.
Use the same procedure described in “Adding a Calculated Point”
on page 11-1 except that you choose a point that already has a Y in
the C column and select Modify from the Resident I/O Points
editor rather than Add.

Copying a Calculated Point

Once you have added a calculated point, you can copy the calcula-
tion to other points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Calculation,
or click the Calculation tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Resident I/O Points editor with the calcu-
lation (C) option selected (see Figure 11-1).
2. Select a point name that has a Y in the C column. This point is
now designated as the source of the calculation you plan to
copy.

11-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Calculations Calculations (C)

3. Select Copy. The system displays the Extension Copy - Calcu-

lation dialog box. (see Figure 11-3).

Figure 11-3. Calculation Extension Copy Window

4. Select an active point in the Target field.

5. The Calculations Editor displays (see Figure 11-2) for the
target point.
6. Modify the calculation or parameters as required.
7. Select OK.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required for any additional calcu-
lations that you want to copy.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Calculated Point

Once you have added a calculated point, you can delete it.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Calculation
from the main menu. The system displays the Resident I/O
Points editor with the calculation (C) option selected.
2. Select a point name that has a Y in the C column.
3. Click Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
4. Click Yes. The system deletes the calculation and displays
Resident I/O Points editor with the calculation (C) option
selected (see Figure 11-1). The Y has been removed from the
C column for the selected point.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 11-5

TCON299–05/10
Calculations (C) Calculations

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 as required for any additional calcu-

lations that you want to delete.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

11-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

12
20
Trending

Trend Sampling (TR)

This extension is available for all points on all controllers. Assign
this extension to a point if you want to collect data to be used in a
graph or printed in a SevenTrends report. This editor lets you
determine how often and when to sample the point. You may also
specify the length of time between samples. This may be useful if
you wish to stagger multiple point sampling; point A at 8:00, point
B at 8:05, point C at 8:10, and so on.
Refer to the section on Trend Sampling in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Adding Trend Sampling

Note: If both Trend Sampling and Trend Log are to be added on the same
point, use the host Trend Log editor to define trending parameters —
do not add a Trend Sampling extension or make edits through the
DCU-resident Trend Sampling editor. Refer to “Trend Log” on page
12-18.

1. Ensure you are connected to the controller containing the

points you want to sample.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Trend
Sampling, or click the Trend Sampling tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
with the trend sampling (TR) option selected (see
Figure 12-1).
This screen lists all points currently residing in this controller.
Each point is listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the TR
column indicates that trend sampling has been added to the
point.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-1

TCON299–05/10
Trend Sampling (TR) Trending

Figure 12-1. Resident I/O Points Editor (TR selected)

Note: In the following step, if you choose a point that already has trend
sampling, the Add button is not enabled and trend sampling cannot
be added. In this case you may either modify, copy, or delete the trend
sampling.

3. Choose a point that does not have a Y in the TR column and

select the Add button. The system displays the Trend
Sampling editor (see Figure 12-2).

Note: Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide for
a description of the Trend Sampling screen parameters.

4. Set the parameters under SevenTrends:

a. Choose a Distribution group (1–4). The trending mask
will be applied to this group.
b. Define the Distribution mask. Set each of eight masking
positions to the desired state, either active () or inactive
().
c. Choose a Priority from the drop-down list.

12-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Trend Sampling (TR)

Figure 12-2. Trend Sampling Edit Window

d. Select a Cell number (1–1023). You must assign a value

other than zero (0) in order for SevenTrends to store the
trend information. Otherwise, this field is not used in
TAC I/NET Seven and can be any value.
e. Enter a Sample count (0–30).
5. Set the parameters under Sample Control:
a. Enter the Base time in 24-hour format.
b. Enter the Interval (minutes) from 1–1440.
c. Enter the Number of samples (1–1440).
d. Select a Sample control mode. None is the default and
requires no further action. If you select Time, perform
Step e. If you select Point, perform Step f.
e. Enter the Start and Stop times in 24-hour format.
f. Choose a Point from the drop-down list.
6. If you would like to display a trend plot, select Graph. The
system will plot the selected point. You can also display a
trend plot without accessing the Trend Sampling editor (refer
to “Trend Plot” on page 12-6.)

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-3

TCON299–05/10
Trend Sampling (TR) Trending

7. When you are finished with the Trend Sampling editor, select
OK. The system saves the settings and displays the Resident
I/O Points editor with the trend sampling (TR) option
selected (see Figure 12-1). The point you selected has a Y in
the TR column.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for additional points.
9. Select Close to save the settings and exit this procedure.

Modifying Trend Sampling

Modifying trend sampling is similar to adding trend sampling. Use
the same procedure as described in “Adding Trend Sampling” on
page 12-1 except that you choose a point that has a Y in the TR
column and select Modify (rather than Add) from the Resident I/O
Points editor.

Copying Trend Sampling

Once you have added trend sampling, you can copy the trend
sampling extension to other points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Trend
Sampling, or click the Trend Sampling tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
with the trend sampling (TR) option selected (see
Figure 12-1).
2. Select a point that has a Y in the TR column. This is now the
source point.
3. Click Copy. The system displays the Extension Copy dialog
box (see Figure 12-3).

Figure 12-3. Trend Sampling Extension Copy Window

12-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Trend Sampling (TR)

4. Choose a Target point from the drop-down list of all eligible

points.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Trend Sampling Window
(see Figure 12-2).
6. Set the trend sampling parameters as required. (Refer to
“Adding Trend Sampling” on page 12-1)
7. Click OK. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
with the trend sampling (TR) option selected (see
Figure 12-1).
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required to copy trend sampling
to other points.
9. Select Close to save the settings and exit this procedure.

Deleting Trend Sampling

Delete Trend Sampling by removing the trend sampling (TR)
extension from the controller point. Use the following procedure to
delete trend sampling.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Trend
Sampling, or click the Trend Sampling tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The Resident I/O Points editor displays with the
trend sampling (TR) option selected (see Figure 12-1).
2. Choose the point whose trend sampling you want to delete.
3. Select Delete. The system displays the Trend Sampling Delete
prompt.
4. Click Yes. The system displays the Resident I/O Points editor
with the trend sampling (TR) option selected (see
Figure 12-1). The Y has been removed from the TR column
for this point.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional trend sampling
that you want to delete.
6. Click Close to save the settings and exit this procedure.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-5

TCON299–05/10
Trend Sampling (TR) Trending

Trend Plot
This editor automatically plots the data collected according to the
parameters defined in the Trend Sample extension editor. Data is
plotted on an x-y axis. The x-axis represents time and the y-axis
scales the point value range.
Use the following procedure to generate a trend plot:
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Trend Plot, or
click the Trend Plot tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays a blank graph.
2. Select a point from the Point selection drop-down box.
3. Now select I/O Plot to update the graph. The system displays a
graph similar to the one shown in Figure 12-4.

Figure 12-4. Sample Trend Plot

12-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Multi-Point Trend Plot

4. To print this graph, select Print.

Note: When you print a Trend Plot, the scaling of the plot in the printed
output may not match that of the plot displayed on your monitor.
This in normal operation and is the result of the resolution differ-
ences between the printer and the monitor.

5. To plot another point from the current graph, repeat Steps 2

and 3.
6. Select Close to exit the graph.

Multi-Point Trend Plot

This function allows you to plot up to six different points on the
same trend plot. The points do not have to be on the same
controller, nor do you have to be connected to the controller(s)
where the points reside. Any direct connect point on the system
may be used; dial points are not available.
In order to use this function, the points to be plotted must have
trend data available. Refer to “Adding Trend Sampling” on page
12-1, for instructions on adding the trend sampling (TR) extension
to a point.
This plot uses the trend information stored in the controller. This
limits the maximum number of samples to 1440 for each point.
Trend sampling parameters should be set so as to provide data over
the desired period of time within that sample number.

Note: This plot does not use data stored in SevenTrends tables, only what is
currently stored in the controller. Once a trend sample is overwritten
with new data in the controller, the old sample data is unavailable for
this trend plot.

Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide,

for a description of the multi-point trend plot screen parameters.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-7

TCON299–05/10
Multi-Point Trend Plot Trending

Defining a Multi-Point Trend Plot

Select Trends  Multi-Point Trend, or click the Multi-Point Trend
tool on the Reports toolbar. The Multi-Point Trend Graphing
menu will appear (see Figure 12-5). This screen provides a list of
multi-point trend plots that have already been assigned. If you have
not used this function previously, the list is empty.

Figure 12-5. Multi-Point Trend Graphing Menu

Note: Points with Trend Sampling and Trend Log extensions may be added
to Multi-Point Trend Plots.

Adding a Plot Definition

1. Choose a blank line from the list and select Add to add a plot
definition. The system displays the Multi-Point Trend Graph
editor (see Figure 12-6 on page 12-9).
2. Define a plot Name (up to 8 characters).
3. Enter the plot Title (up to 48 characters).
4. Enter the Interval spacing for the Y1 axis. The Y1 axis is the
left axis.
5. Enter the Low value for the Y1 axis.

12-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Multi-Point Trend Plot

Figure 12-6. Multi-Point Trend Graph Editor

6. Enter the Interval spacing for the Y2 axis. The Y2 axis is the
right axis.
7. Enter the Low value for the Y2 axis.
8. Enter the Live Scan Rate (0–32,767 seconds).
9. Select up to six points for this plot using the procedure
outlined in “Trend Points” on page 12-10.
10. When you are finished with the plot definition, select OK to
save your parameters. The Multi-Point Trend Graphing selec-
tion dialog box will reappear (Figure 12-5), with the new defi-
nition in the list box.
Modifying a Plot Definition
1. Choose the plot definition you wish to change and select
Modify. The system displays the Multi-Point Trend Graph
editor for that plot definition (see Figure 12-6).
2. Select the field you wish to change, and enter the new value.
See “Trend Points” on page 12-10 for instructions on adding
and changing the points for the plot.
3. When you are finished, select OK to save your parameters.
You will return to the Multi-Point Trend Graphing screen
(Figure 12-5).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-9

TCON299–05/10
Multi-Point Trend Plot Trending

Copying a Plot Definition

1. Choose the plot definition that you wish to copy from, and
select Copy. The Copy Multi-Point Trend screen will appear
(see Figure 12-7).

Figure 12-7. Copy Multi-Point Trend Screen

2. Enter the name of the plot definition you wish to copy to. This
may be either a new or existing definition.
3. Select OK. The Multi-Point Trend Graph editor will appear
(Figure 12-6).
4. If you wish to make adjustments, select the field you wish to
change and enter the new value. See “Trend Points” on page
12-10 for instructions on adding and changing the points for
the plot.
5. When you are finished, select OK to save the parameters. You
will return to the Multi-Point Trend Graphing screen
(Figure 12-5).
Deleting a Plot Definition
1. Select the plot definition you wish to remove, and select
Delete. The Delete confirmation dialog box displays.
2. Select Yes to delete the plot definition. If you do not wish to
delete the plot definition, select No.
Trend Points
The Multi-Point Graph editor includes an editor that displays the
points selected for this plot definition. If you have not previously
defined any points for this plot definition, the editor is empty.

12-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Multi-Point Trend Plot

✦ To add a new point to the plot, select a blank line and select
Add.
✦ To change a point on the plot, select the desired point and
select Modify.
✦ To delete a point from the plot, select the desired point and
select Delete.
If you are adding or modifying a point, the Point Definition dialog
appears (see Figure 12-8). Within this dialog box you can select a
point and establish the point details.

Figure 12-8. Point Definition Screen

Point Details
1. Select the Pen color for this point on the plot display. The
box to the right displays the selected color.
2. Select which Axis scale this point will use, either Y1 (left) or
Y2 (right).
3. Check the Print box if you wish this point to be included on a
printed plot. If you do not want the point included, or if you
will not be printing plots, leave the checkbox blank.
Point Selection
It is not necessary to be connected to the controller(s) containing
your points. However, you must manually enter the point
address(es) for any point that resides on a controller you are not
connected to.
1. Choose Select to pick a point. The system displays the Point
Selection screen similar to the example in Figure 12-9.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-11

TCON299–05/10
Multi-Point Trend Plot Trending

Figure 12-9. Point Selection

The first window, labeled List 0, displays the eligible points in

the last controller you connected to. Only the points with
trend sampling extensions are listed.
2. If desired, connect to up to three additional controllers:
a. Activate one of the radio buttons for the List 1, List 2, or
List 3 windows.
b. Select the Station button to display the Controller
Summary dialog box (see Figure 12-10).
c. Select a controller from the list, and select OK to connect
to the controller. You will return to the Point Selection
screen (Figure 12-9) and the eligible points from the
selected controller will appear in the list window. Only
the points with trend sampling extensions are listed.
d. Repeat Steps b and c as required to connect to additional
controllers.

12-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Multi-Point Trend Plot

Figure 12-10. Controller Summary Dialog Box

3. Select a point to include in the plot.

✧ Position the cursor and click the left mouse button to
select a point from one of the list windows. The point
address, point type, and controller type will automati-
cally be entered in the Current Point boxes below.
— OR —
✧ Enter the full point address in the Current Point boxes at
the bottom of the screen: Link (LL), Station (SS), Point
(PP), Bit Offset (BB), and point Type (PT). The
Controller type is optional.
4. Select OK to include the Current Point in the plot definition.
You will return to the Point Definition screen (Figure 12-8).
Once you have selected the point to display and the point details,
select OK. You will return to the Multi-Point Trend Graph editor
(see Figure 12-6 on page 12-9). The point information will appear
in the point display window.

Displaying a Multi-Point Trend Plot

Select Trends  Multi-Point Trend, or click the Multi-Point Trend
tool on the Reports toolbar. The Multi-Point Trend Graphing
menu will appear (see Figure 12-5 on page 12-8). This screen
provides a list of multi-point trend plots that have already been
assigned. If you have not used this function previously, the list is
empty. See “Defining a Multi-Point Trend Plot” on page 12-8 for
instructions on adding a plot definition.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-13

TCON299–05/10
Multi-Point Trend Plot Trending

Select the desired plot definition and select Graph. Allow time for
the system to receive the trend data from the controllers for plot-
ting. The trend plot will appear similar to the one shown in
Figure 12-11.

Figure 12-11. Multi-Point Trend Plot Screen

Note: Multi-point trend plot is a global function and will not work if
someone else is currently using the defined points for a trend plot.

Display Functions
Several functions allow you to change the display.
Live / Historical
The plot display originally displays historical data. This is the trend
sampling data currently stored in the controller. Select Live to
change to a live data display. The plot will then update the point at
the interval specified in the Live Scan Rate.

12-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Multi-Point Trend Plot

When live data is displayed, the button changes to read “Historical”.

Select Historical to change back to a historical data display.
Grid
Select Grid to enable a grid on the plot display. The grid lines are
placed at the major tick marks on each axis. Select Grid again to
disable the grid display.
Print
Select Print to print the sample data from the current plot. Only
points with the Print check box selected will be printed (see “Point
Details” on page 12-11).
✦ If the display is in historical data mode, all data for the points
will be printed.
✦ If the display is in live data mode, only the data from the
current screen will be printed.

Note: The Print option is not available (i.e., it appears gray) if no points
have the Print check box selected.
When you print a Trend Plot, the scaling of the plot in the printed
output may not match that of the plot displayed on your monitor.
This in normal operation and is the result of the resolution differ-
ences between the printer and the monitor.

Auto Scale / Manual Scale

The plot display originally displays the manual scale for the Y1
(left) and Y2 (right) axes. This is the scale you defined with the
Interval and Low value entries for each axis (see “Adding a Plot
Definition” on page 12-8). If the sample data is outside this range,
the point will not appear on the plot (off-scale data).
Select Auto Scale to enable automatic axis scaling. The interval
and low value for each axis will be adjusted to accommodate all
data values.
When the automatic scale is enabled, the button changes to read
“Manual Scale”. Select Manual Scale to change back to the original
axis scales.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-15

TCON299–05/10
Multi-Point Trend Plot Trending

Options
This button allows you to change the display scales. Select Options
to display the Trend Graph Options editor. This screen appears in
front of the plot (see Figure 12-12).

Figure 12-12. Trend Graph Options Editor

As you change the values on this screen, you will be able to see the
effect of the new value(s) on the plot behind the window. This
allows you to achieve the desired configuration without multiple
visits to this screen.

Note: This function changes only the existing plot display. It does not
modify the plot definition.

The field entries are described below. When you are finished
making changes, select Close to return to the plot display.
✦ Change the Y1 axis interval and Y1 axis low values to
change the manual scale of the Y1 axis (on the left edge of the
plot). If the current plot uses automatic scaling, you will not
see any change.
✦ Change the Y2 axis interval and Y2 axis low values to
change the manual scale of the Y2 axis (on the right edge of
the plot). If the current plot uses automatic scaling, you will
not see any change.
✦ Change the Live scan rate to increase or decrease the time
interval between scans during a live data display (0–32,767
seconds). This option is not available if the current plot uses
historical data.

12-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Multi-Point Trend Plot

✦ Change the X (time) scale to compress the time duration

shown on the screen.
✧ The default value is a factor of x1, which is the regular
time scale. Each tick mark is one minute (historical) or
one second (live).
✧ x2 — Each tick mark is two minutes (historical) or two
seconds (live).
✧ x5 — Each tick mark is five minutes (historical) or five
seconds (live).
✧ x10 — Each tick mark is ten minutes (historical) or ten
seconds (live).
✧ x15 — Each tick mark is fifteen minutes (historical) or
fifteen seconds (live).
✧ x30 — Each tick mark is thirty minutes (historical) or
thirty seconds (live).
✧ x60 — Each tick mark is sixty minutes (historical) or
sixty seconds (live).
Clipboard
Select Clipboard to copy the data from the plot (not the graph
itself) to the Windows clipboard. This data may then be pasted into
a third-party program. Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Tech-
nical Reference Guide, for information on the data format.
Zooming to Multi-Point Plot Values
You can view the values for a specific time on the plot by double-
clicking the left mouse button on the background at the desired
point of the x-axis. A pop-up screen displays at the bottom of the
plot window as shown in Figure 12-13.
A dotted line displays on the plot showing the selected x-axis point.
The sample time is displayed in the pop-up window. Each point is
displayed with the point address, point type, point name, color of
the point’s plot line, the y-axis used, and the value of the plot on the
y-axis.
DO and GO points will plot on the major divisions starting with
the first major division. These plots may not reflect all of the state
changes depending upon the trend sample interval. DO and GO

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-17

TCON299–05/10
Trend Log Trending

Figure 12-13. Values Zoom

points with two states will increment to the first minor division. GO
points can increment up to the eighth minor division, for an eight-
state point.

Trend Log
The trend log function within TAC I/NET Seven lets you generate
your own customized trend log reports. A trend log can contain up
to 12 unique discrete/analog point addresses.

Note: If both Trend Log and Trend Sampling are to be added on the same
point, use the host Trend Log editor (described here) to define
trending parameters — do not add a Trend Sampling extension or
make edits through the DCU-resident Trend Sampling editor.

12-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Trending Trend Log

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Host Trend Log, or click the

Host Trend Log tool on the Host toolbar. The system displays
the Trend Log editor (see Figure 12-14).

Figure 12-14. Host Trend Log Editor

2. Select Add. The system displays the Trend Log Address dialog
box (see Figure 12-15).

Figure 12-15. Host Trend Log Address

3. Enter a point Address. You must include the 8-digit address

and the 2-digit point class designation. Do not use a point
that already has a Trend Sampling extension (refer to the note
at the beginning of these procedures).
4. Select OK. The system returns to the Host Trend Log editor
(see Figure 12-14) with the address and name of the point
selected.
5. Set the Trend parameters as required. Refer to the section on
Trend Log in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference
Guide, for more information.
a. Enter a Sample interval (min) from 1 to 1440.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 12-19

TCON299–05/10
Trend Log Trending

b. Enter a Print interval (min) from 1 to 1440.

c. Enter a Print begin (hh:mm) time in 24-hour format.
d. Enter a Print end (hh:mm) time in 24-hour format.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for additional points.
7. Select OK to save the settings and exit this procedure.

Deleting a Trend Log

1. Select Edit  Host Computer  Host Trend Log from the
main menu. The system displays the Host Trend Log screen
(see Figure 12-14) with a list of points having a trend log.
2. Choose a point.
3. Click Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
4. Select Yes. The system displays the Trend Log screen (see
Figure 12-14).
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 as required for any additional trend
logs that you want to delete.
6. Select OK to exit this procedure.

12-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

13
26
Distributed Control

Consumption (CN)
This point extension is used only with PI (accumulator) points
such as flow meters. It is available on all controllers. Refer to the
section on Consumption in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical
Reference Guide, for more information.

Adding a Consumption Point Extension

Add the Consumption point extension to a PI point if you want to
direct the accumulated value of a PI point to a particular consump-
tion cell for storage, and/or zero the value stored in the DCU for the
PI point at midnight.

Note: You must be connected to the controller containing the points to

which you want to add this extension.

1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Consumption,

or click the Consumption tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Consumption Point Extension screen (see
Figure 13-1), which lists the PI points currently residing in
this controller.
2. Choose a point that does not have a Y in the CN column. This
point is now designated as the target of the consumption
point extension you plan to enter.
3. Select Add. The system displays the Consumption Editor
window (see Figure 13-2).
4. Modify the SevenTrends parameters as required:
a. Choose a Distribution group (1–4). The distribution
mask will be applied to this group.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-1

TCON299–05/10
Consumption (CN) Distributed Control

Figure 13-1. Consumption Point Extension Screen

Figure 13-2. Consumption Data Details

b. Define the Distribution mask. Set each of eight masking

positions to the desired state, either activated () or
deactivated ().
c. Choose a Priority from the drop-down list.
d. Select a Cell number (1–1023). You must assign a value
other than zero (0) in order for SevenTrends to store the
trend information. Otherwise, this field is not used in
TAC I/NET Seven and can be any value.

13-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Consumption (CN)

5. Select OK. The system displays the Consumption Point Exten-

sion screen with a Y in the CN column.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 as required to add this point exten-
sion to additional points.
7. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Modifying a Consumption Point Extension

Modifying a consumption point extension is similar to adding a
consumption extension. Use the same procedure as described in
“Adding a Consumption Point Extension” on page 13-1 except that
you choose a point that has a Consumption extension and select
the Modify button instead of the Add button.

Copying a Consumption Point Extension

Once you have added a consumption point extension to a point,
you can copy the extension to other points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Consumption,
or click the Consumption tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Consumption Point Extension screen (see
Figure 13-1).
2. Select a point that has a Y in the CN column. This is now the
source point.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Extension Copy window
(see Figure 13-3).

Figure 13-3. Consumption Extension Copy Window

4. Choose a Target point from the drop-down list of all eligible

points.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-3

TCON299–05/10
Runtime (RT) Distributed Control

5. Select OK. The system displays the Consumption Data Details

dialog box. (see Figure 13-2).
6. Modify the consumption parameters as required. (Refer to
“Adding a Consumption Extension” on page 13-1)
7. Select OK. The system displays the Consumption Point Exten-
sion editor (see Figure 13-1).
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required to copy the consumption
point extension to other points.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Consumption Point Extension

Delete a Consumption point extension by removing the consump-
tion (CN) extension from the controller point. Use the following
procedure to delete a consumption point extension.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Consumption,
or click the Consumption tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Consumption Point Extension editor.
2. Select the point whose consumption point extension you
want to delete.
3. Select Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
4. Select Yes. The system displays the Consumption Point
Extension editor (see Figure 13-1) with the Y removed from
the CN column for this point.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional consumption
point extensions that you want to delete.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Runtime (RT)
This point extension is used with DO, DC, or DI points. It is avail-
able on all controllers. Use this extension editor to define runtime
parameters for a discrete input or output point so that runtime

13-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Runtime (RT)

information can be collected. This information can then be printed

in SevenTrends reports. See the section on Runtime in TCON300,
TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide for more information.

Adding a Runtime Point Extension

1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Runtime, or
click the Runtime tool on the Extensions toolbar. The system
displays the Runtime Point Extension editor (see
Figure 13-4), which lists the DI, DO, and DC points currently
residing in this controller.

Figure 13-4. Runtime Point Extensions Summary

2. Choose a point that does not have a Y in the RT column. This

point is now designated as the target of the runtime extension
you plan to enter.
3. Select Add. The system displays the Runtime Editor (see
Figure 13-5).
4. Change the parameters as required:
a. Select one of two On states (0 = open, 1 = closed).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-5

TCON299–05/10
Runtime (RT) Distributed Control

Figure 13-5. Runtime Editor

b. Choose a Distribution group (1–4). The distribution

mask will be applied to this group.
c. Define the Cell mask. Set each of eight masking posi-
tions to the desired state, either active () or inactive
().
d. Choose a Cell priority from the drop-down list.

Note: A cell number of zero indicates that no cell number is assigned.

e. Define the Cell number (0–1023) used to store the daily

runtime data.
f. Define a Runtime accumulator point. This is the address
of an internal pulsed input (PI) point.

Note: In the following step, the Reset Mode refers to the internal runtime
accumulator (PI) you just defined, not the discrete point to which
this runtime extension is attached.

5. Select one of three Reset Modes:

✧ None - Internal runtime accumulator will accumulate
forever or until you manually reset the point.

13-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Runtime (RT)

✧ Constant - Enter a number of hours from 0 to 65,535

that the internal runtime accumulator will collect data
before being reset.
✧ Point (reset point) - Define a reset point address. This
point resets the internal runtime accumulator when it
transitions from the 0 state to the 1 state.
6. Select OK. The system displays the Runtime Point Extension
screen with a Y in the RT column.
7. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 as required to add this extension to
additional points.
8. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Modifying a Runtime Point Extension

Modifying a runtime point extension is similar to adding a runtime
point extension. Use the same procedure as described in “Adding a
Runtime Point Extension” on page 13-5 except that you choose a
point with a Runtime extension and select Modify rather than Add
from the Runtime screen.

Copying a Runtime Point Extension

Once you have added a runtime extension to a point, you can copy
the extension to other points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Runtime, or
click the Runtime tool on the Extensions toolbar. The system
displays the Runtime Point Extension editor (see
Figure 13-4).
2. Select a point that has a Y in the RT column. This is now the
source point.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Runtime Extension
Copy window (see Figure 13-6).
4. Choose a Target point from the drop-down list of all active
points on the controller that do not have a runtime extension.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Runtime Editor window
(see Figure 13-5).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-7

TCON299–05/10
Runtime (RT) Distributed Control

Figure 13-6. Runtime Extension Copy Window

6. Modify the runtime parameters as required. (Refer to “Adding

a Runtime Point Extension” on page 13-5)
7. Select OK. The system displays the Runtime Point Extension
screen (see Figure 13-4).
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 as required to copy additional
runtime extensions.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Runtime Point Extension

Delete a Runtime point extension by removing the runtime (RT)
extension from the controller point. Use the following procedure to
delete a runtime point extension.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Runtime, or
click the Runtime tool on the Extensions toolbar. The system
displays the Runtime Point Extension editor.
2. Choose the point whose runtime extension you want to
delete. This point must have a Y in the RT column.
3. Select Delete. The system displays the Delete prompt.
4. Select Yes. The system displays the Runtime Point Extension
editor (see Figure 13-4) with the Y removed from the RT
column for this point.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional Runtime point
extensions that you want to delete.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

13-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Alarm Inhibit (AI)

Alarm Inhibit (AI)

This point extension is used with AI, GI, DA, and DM points. It is
available on all controllers. Add this extension to a point to prevent
nuisance alarms that may occur when a piece of equipment is off.
You may also use this extension to determine which state (0 or 1) of
the controlled device inhibits and/or enables the alarm. See the
section on Alarm Inhibit in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical
Reference Guide, for more information.

Adding an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension

Use the following procedure to add an alarm inhibit point exten-
sion:
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Alarm Inhibit,
or click the Alarm Inhibit tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Alarm Inhibit Point Extension editor (see
Figure 13-7), which lists the AI, GI, DA, and DM points
currently residing in this controller.

Figure 13-7. Alarm Inhibit Point Extension Summary

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-9

TCON299–05/10
Alarm Inhibit (AI) Distributed Control

2. Choose a point that does not have a Y in the AI column. This

point is now designated as the target of the alarm inhibit
extension you plan to enter.
3. Select Add. The system displays the Alarm Inhibit editor (see
Figure 13-8).

Figure 13-8. Alarm Inhibit Editor

4. Select a Status input from the drop-down list. The system

displays a list of points (DA, DI, DO, DC, and DM) that can
be used to determine the inhibiting or enabling of an alarm
point.
5. Select an Enable state (0 = open, 1 = closed).
6. Set the Delay before enable (min) duration. Enter the
number of minutes that the alarm is to remain inhibited after
the status input point transitions to the enable state.
7. Set the Delay Before inhibit (min) duration. Enter the
number of minutes that the alarm is to remain enabled after
the status input point transitions to the inhibit state.
8. Select OK. The system displays the Alarm Inhibit Point Exten-
sion screen with a Y in the AI column.
9. Repeat Steps 2 through 8 as required to add this extension to
additional points.
10. Select Close to exit this procedure.

13-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Alarm Inhibit (AI)

Modifying an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension

Modifying an alarm inhibit point extension is similar to adding an
alarm inhibit point extension. Use the same procedure as described
in “Adding an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension” on page 13-9 except
that you choose a point with an Alarm Inhibit extension and select
Modify rather than Add from the Alarm Inhibit point extension
screen.

Copying an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension

Once you have added an alarm inhibit extension to a point, you can
use the following procedure to copy the extension to other points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Alarm Inhibit,
or click the Alarm Inhibit tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Alarm Inhibit Point Extension editor (see
Figure 13-7).
2. Choose a point that has a Y in the AI column. This is now the
source point.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Alarm Inhibit Extension
Copy window.
4. Choose a Target point from the drop-down list of all eligible
points.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Alarm Inhibit editor (see
Figure 13-8).
6. Modify the alarm inhibit parameters as required. (Refer to
“Adding an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension” on page 13-9)
7. Select OK. The system displays the Alarm Inhibit Point Exten-
sion screen (see Figure 13-7).
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required to copy a runtime exten-
sion to other points.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-11

TCON299–05/10
Event Definition (EV) Distributed Control

Deleting an Alarm Inhibit Point Extension

Delete an Alarm Inhibit point extension by removing the alarm
inhibit (AI) extension from the controller point. Use the following
procedure to delete an alarm inhibit point extension.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Alarm Inhibit,
or click the Alarm Inhibit tool on the Extensions toolbar. The
system displays the Alarm Inhibit Point Extension editor (see
Figure 13-7).
2. Choose the point whose alarm inhibit extension you want to
delete.
3. Select Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
4. Select Yes. The system displays the Alarm Inhibit Point
Extension screen (see Figure 13-7) with the Y removed from
the AI column for this point.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional alarm inhibit
point extensions that you want to delete.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Event Definition (EV)

This point extension editor is used with all point types and is avail-
able on all controllers. Use this point extension to specify a certain
condition and the response that condition initiates. The event you
define causes an Event Sequence or an Event Action to be initiated.
Once you define the event in this editor, you must access the Event
Sequence or Event Actions editors to define the event sequence or
event action. See the section on Event Definition in TCON300,
TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Adding an Event Definition Point Extension

Use the following procedure to add an event definition point exten-
sion:

13-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Event Definition (EV)

1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Event Defini-

tion, or click the Event Definition tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The system displays the Event Definition Point Exten-
sion screen (see Figure 13-9), which lists all points currently
residing in this controller.

Figure 13-9. Event Definition Point Extension Screen

2. Choose a point that does not have a Y in the EV column. This

point is now designated as the target of the event definition
extension you plan to enter.
3. Select Add. The system displays the Event Definition editor
(see Figure 13-10).
4. Change the Event Definition parameters as required. When
this editor first appears, only the Event type field is active.
After you select an event type, the other fields become active.
a. Choose an Event type from the drop-down list. The
options available will depend on the type of point (i.e.,
discrete point, discrete door point, or analog point)
currently selected.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-13

TCON299–05/10
Event Definition (EV) Distributed Control

Figure 13-10. Event Definition Editor

b. Choose Sequence or Action from the drop-down list.

c. Using the Num spindial, select a Sequence/Action
Number from 1 through 64.
d. The State/Value field is only active when the “Specified
State” event type is chosen for a discrete point, or when
the “High Crossing” or “Low Crossing” event type is
chosen for an analog point. Factors such as the point
type, the system’s current operating mode, and the
connected SLI’s firmware revision level will determine
which settings are available for this parameter. Refer to
“Event Definition (EV)” in Chapter 7 of TCON300, TAC
I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a complete
description of this parameter.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Event Definition Point
Extension screen with a Y in the EV column.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 as required to add this extension to
additional points.
7. Select Close to exit this procedure.

13-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Event Definition (EV)

Modifying an Event Definition Point Extension

Modifying an event definition extension is similar to adding an
event definition extension. Use the same procedure as described in
“Adding an Event Definition Point Extension” on page 13-12 except
that you choose a point that has a Event Definition extension and
select Modify rather than Add from the Event Definition point
extension screen (see Figure 13-9).

Copying an Event Definition Point Extension

Once you have added an event definition extension to a point, you
can use the following procedure to copy the extension to other
points.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Event Defini-
tion, or click the Event Definition tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The system displays the Event Definition Point Exten-
sion screen (see Figure 13-9).
2. Choose a point that has a Y in the EV column. This is now the
source point.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Event Definition Exten-
sion Copy window.
4. Choose a Target point from the drop-down list. Only active
points on the controller that do not have an event definition
extension are listed.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Event Definition editor
(see Figure 13-10).
6. Modify the event definition parameters as required. (Refer to
“Adding an Event Definition Point Extension” on page 13-12)
7. Select OK. The system displays the Event Definition Point
Extension screen (see Figure 13-9).
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required to copy a Runtime
extension to other points.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-15

TCON299–05/10
Event Sequences Distributed Control

Deleting an Event Definition Point Extension

Delete an Event Definition point extension by removing the event
definition (EV) extension from the controller point. Use the
following procedure to delete an event definition point extension.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Point Extensions  Event Defini-
tion, or click the Event Definition tool on the Extensions
toolbar. The system displays the Event Definition Point Exten-
sion screen (see Figure 13-9).
2. Choose the point whose event definition extension you want
to delete.
3. Select Delete. The system displays the Delete prompt.
4. Select Yes. The system displays the Event Definition Point
Extension screen (see Figure 13-9) with the Y removed from
the EV column for this point.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional event definition
point extensions that you want to delete.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Event Sequences
Use this editor to define a specific set of actions that occurs when
an event defined in the Event Definitions extension editor takes
place. For example, this function lets you plan what steps occur in
an emergency situation before the emergency occurs.
In addition to emergency planning, event sequences let you
program normal sequential operations such as the start up of a
conveyor line, a chilled water plant, or any other sequential process
you may require at your facility.
Use the Event Sequence form located in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, to organize and design the event
sequences you need at your facility. Event sequences may be quite
complicated and it may be difficult to enter the information into
the computer unless you have put the information on paper.

13-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Event Sequences

Refer to the section on Event Sequences in TCON300, TAC I/NET

Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Note: Event sequences run in a linear manner. They will run from the first
item in the sequence through to the last item in the sequence in order
to finish. Once they are started they will finish the sequence before
that sequence may be called again.

Adding an Event Sequence

Use the following procedure to add an event sequence:
1. Select Edit  Controller  Event Sequences, or click the
Event Sequences tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays the Event Sequences Summary (see Figure 13-11).

Figure 13-11. Event Sequences Summary

Note: You may define up to 64 event sequences for each controller. You may
also specify an event sequence number 0 that runs at power up, after
a reset of controller power, or a database restore of the DCU. The
restart control action for a DO/DC point (entered in the Resident I/O
Points editor) that is controlled by event sequence number 0 should
be “none”. No other event sequences run at power up.

2. Select a Sequence number and click Add. The system

displays the Event Sequence editor (see Figure 13-12).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-17

TCON299–05/10
Event Sequences Distributed Control

Figure 13-12. Event Sequence Editor

3. Enter a unique sequence Name (up to 8 characters) and click

Add. The system displays the Event Sequence Details editor
(see Figure 13-13).

Figure 13-13. Event Sequence Details Editor

Note: When the Event Sequence Details editor first appears, only the Action
field is shown.

4. Edit the parameters as follows:

a. Select an Action from the drop-down list.

13-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Event Sequences

b. Enter a Delay time in seconds (0 to 3600). You can use

the spindial or type the number.
c. Choose a Point from the drop-down list. This is the point
that receives the specified action.

Note: The Skip fields only appear if you choose “Skip if Zero”, “Skip if non–
zero”, or “Unconditional Skip” as an action.

d. Under Skip, choose Sequence or Action from the drop-

down list.
e. Under Skip, enter a numeric value (1 to 64). If you chose
Sequence, the numeric value is the sequence number
you want to skip to. If you chose Action, the numeric
value is the number of actions to skip.

Note: The Value field only appears if you chose “Output” or “Output with
Lock” from the action list.

f. Enter an analog Value that will be output to an AO point

as part of this sequence.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Event Sequence editor
listing the details of all events that you have entered.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as required to enter up to 18 events
for this sequence.
7. Select OK. The system displays the Event Sequence Summary
listing all sequences for this controller.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 to enter up to 65 event sequences.
9. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Modifying an Event Sequence

Modifying an event sequence is similar to adding an event
sequence. Use the same procedure as described in “Adding an Event
Sequence” on page 13-17 except that you choose a sequence that
has already been defined and select Modify rather than Add from
the Event Sequences Summary window (see Figure 13-11) and
Sequence Details window (see Figure 13-12).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-19

TCON299–05/10
Event Sequences Distributed Control

Copying an Event Sequence

Use the following procedure to copy an event sequence:
1. Select Edit  Controller  Event Sequences, or click the
Event Sequences tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays the Event Sequences Summary (see Figure 13-11).
2. Choose a Sequence # and select Copy. This event sequence is
the source sequence. The system displays the Event Sequence -
Copy dialog box (see Figure 13-14).

Figure 13-14. Event Sequence - Copy Dialog Box

3. Enter a number in the Event sequence target field.

4. Select OK. The system displays the Event Sequence Details
editor (see Figure 13-12).
5. Change the details as required, using the procedures outlined
in “Adding an Event Sequence”.
6. Edit the Event Dialog parameters as described in the “Adding
an Event Sequence” procedure on page 13-17 as required.
7. Select OK. The system displays the Sequence Details window
showing the details of all events that have been entered.
8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 as required to change additional
event parameters.
9. Select OK. The system displays the Event Sequence Summary
window listing all sequences that have been entered for this
controller.
10. Repeat Steps 2 through 9 to copy additional event sequences.
11. Select Close to exit this procedure.

13-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Event Actions

Deleting an Event Sequence

Use the following procedure to delete an event sequence.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Event Sequences, or click the
Event Sequences tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays the Event Sequences Summary (see Figure 13-11).
2. Choose an event sequence to delete from the list and select
Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation dialog
box.
3. Select Yes to delete the event sequence. The system displays
the Event Sequences Summary window with the sequence
deleted.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to delete additional event sequences.
5. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Event Actions
Use this editor to create action messages or initiate SevenTrends
reports.
You may define up to 64 event actions for each controller. Each
action type contains unique parameters required to perform the
function including message distribution parameters.
Refer to the section on Event Actions in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Adding an Event Action

Use the following procedure to add an event action.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Event Actions, or click the Event
Actions tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays
the Event Actions summary (see Figure 13-15).
2. Choose an event action number and click Add. The system
displays the New Event Action Type dialog box (see
Figure 13-16).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-21

TCON299–05/10
Event Actions Distributed Control

Figure 13-15. Event Actions Summary

Figure 13-16. New Event Action Type Dialog Box

3. Select an Action Type (Message, Report, or Conversion)

and click OK.

Note: The Report and Conversion options are reserved for future use, and
are disabled in TAC I/NET Seven.

4. In the Action Message editor (see Figure 13-17) modify the

parameters as required:
a. Enter the message that you want displayed or printed in
response to the event defined. The message may be one
line, up to 64 characters long.
b. Choose a Distribution group (1–4). The distribution
mask will be applied to this group.

13-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Event Actions

Figure 13-17. Action Message Editor

c. Define the Message mask. Set each of the eight masking

positions to the desired state, either activated () or
deactivated ().
d. Choose a Message priority from the drop-down list.
e. Select OK. The system displays the Event Actions
window.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 as required for additional event
actions.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Modifying an Event Action

Modifying an event action is similar to adding an event action. Use
the same procedure as described in “Adding an Event Action” on
page 13-21 except that you choose an action that has already been
defined and select Modify rather than Add from the Event Actions
window (see Figure 13-15).

Copying an Event Action

Use the following procedure to copy an event action.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Event Actions, or click the Event
Actions tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays
the Event Actions window (see Figure 13-15).
2. Choose the event action you want to copy. This event action is
now the source of the action you plan to copy.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-23

TCON299–05/10
Event Actions Distributed Control

3. Select Copy. The system displays the Copy Event Action

window (see Figure 13-18).

Figure 13-18. Event Action - Copy Dialog Box

4. In the Event Action Target field, select the number of the

action where you want to copy this event action from the
drop-down list. The system displays a drop-down list of all
event action numbers that do not have event actions assigned.
5. Select OK. The system displays the edit window for the type of
action being copied.
6. Modify the parameters required. (Refer to “Adding an Event
Action” on page 13-21.)
7. Select OK. The system displays the Event Actions summary
(see Figure 13-15).
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required to copy additional event
actions.

Deleting an Event Action

Use the following procedure to delete an event action.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Event Actions, or click the Event
Actions tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays
the Event Actions summary (see Figure 13-15).
2. Choose the event action that you want to delete.
3. Select Delete. The system displays the Delete prompt.
4. Select Yes to delete the event action.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to delete additional event sequences.
6. Select Close to exit this procedure.

13-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Distributed Control Event Actions

Configuring Event Printing on a Host Workstation

In order to print event action messages, you must connect a printer
to an available port on a host workstation. The printer used as the
event printer must be capable of supporting single line feeds. This
will allow multiple messages to be printed on each page, even
though the messages are processed and printed individually as they
occur. Dot-matrix printers typically support single line feeds and
are recommended for use as an event printer.
Perform the following steps to configure a host workstation for
event printing:
1. Connect a printer (typically a dot matrix printer) to an avail-
able port on the host workstation.
2. Within the “Peripherals” section of the I/NET Configuration
Editor, perform the following steps:
a. Define the Printer Port to which the event printer is
connected. TAC I/NET Seven will print event action
messages directly to this port, without the use of a
Windows printer driver.
b. Choose a Printer line spacing setting for the event
printer. The options are “Single” and “Double.”
c. If necessary, define an Initialization string for the event
printer. Refer to the documentation included with your
printer to obtain this information.
d. Select OK to save these settings.
e. Shutdown and restart the I/O Server.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 13-25

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

14
24
Direct Digital Control

TAC I/NET Seven offers a microprocessor-based direct digital

control (DDC) program. DDC consists of modules which perform
the following processes:
✦ Measure a variable.
✦ Compare the measured variable against a known value to
determine the error.
✦ Process the error according to a specific software algorithm.
✦ Produce an output that modifies the controlled variable.
Each module has its own algorithm. With a basic understanding of
control theory and application, these algorithms are easy to under-
stand and apply.
Each of the six module types has its own data entry screen where
you define parameters such as inputs, algorithm modifiers, and
output destinations.
Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide,
for a description of the DDC screen parameters.

Accessing the DDC Module Editors

By now you are probably familiar with the worksheets located in
TCON157, TAC I/NET Seven Forms and Worksheets. There is a
separate worksheet for each module type. We recommend you fill
these out before entering the data into the system.
1. Connect to the controller where you want to introduce direct
digital control.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Direct Digital Control, or click the
Direct Digital Control tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the DDC modules summary (see
Figure 14-1).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-1

TCON299–05/10
Accessing the DDC Module Editors Direct Digital Control

Figure 14-1. DDC Modules Summary

This screen provides a list of DDC modules that have already

been assigned. If you have not used DDC previously, the list is
empty.
3. Choose a blank line from the list and select Add to add a DDC
module to the controller. The system displays the DDC
Module—Add dialog box (see Figure 14-2).

Figure 14-2. DDC Module—Add Dialog Box

4. Define a Module name (up to 8 characters).

14-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Two Position Module (2-Pos)

5. Choose a Module type from the drop-down list. You have the
following options:
✧ 2-Pos ✧ Reset
✧ PID ✧ HiLo
✧ Floating ✧ Relay
The following pages contain descriptions of each module, the
module parameters, and a sample data entry screen for each
module.

Two Position Module (2-Pos)

The Two Position module is similar to an electric thermostat, but it
responds much more precisely and predictably. Figure 14-3 is a
sample data entry screen.

Figure 14-3. Two Position Module Editor

Use the following procedure to configure the Two Position

Module:

1. Set the Module parameters.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-3

TCON299–05/10
Two Position Module (2-Pos) Direct Digital Control

Note: The Number field refers to the Mod # that you selected on the DDC
Modules screen (see Figure 14-1) and cannot be changed.

a. Enter a Name (up to eight characters) to describe the

module.
b. Enter the Sample interval (1 to 255). This is the number
of seconds between module outputs.
2. Set the Setpoint parameters.
a. Select a Setpoint. This is the type of input value. All
DDC inputs must be defined as lines, points, or
constants. An input field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.
✢ Constant—Enter a value in engineering units.
c. If you chose Line or Point in Step a above, enter a
setpoint Offset (–100 to +100). The default is zero.
If you have several modules that share a common
setpoint, you can use setpoint offsets to stagger the oper-
ating range of each module.
d. Enter a Differential range. This is the degree of precision
for the module.
e. Enter the Low limit value. The default is zero.
This parameter defines the lower limit of the setpoint. If
the value goes below this parameter, the module output
goes to the failsafe command.
f. Enter the High limit value. The default is 100.
This parameter defines the upper limit of the setpoint. If
the value goes above this parameter, the module output
goes to the failsafe command.
3. Set the Process Variable parameters.

14-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Two Position Module (2-Pos)

a. Select a Process Variable. All DDC process variables

must be defined as lines, points, or constants. An input
field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.
✢ Constant—Enter a value in engineering units.
c. The Filter parameter allows you to reduce the impact of
rapidly changing inputs and is controller dependent. For
7700 or 7740 controllers, you may enter a value from one
to five. This parameter represents the number of previous
inputs to be averaged with the current input value. All
other controllers allow you to select Yes or No to apply a
filter that will automatically average the last five inputs
with the current input.
4. Set the Output parameters.
a. Select an Output. DDC outputs must be lines or points.
An input field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—choose a point from the drop-down list.
c. Set the Failsafe command. This action is executed when
the setpoint is no longer valid or the process variable
point goes to old data status. The default is Off.

Note: The same input conditions, which cause the PID module to output its
control point value, cause the Two Position module to go to its failsafe
condition. Refer to the chapter dealing with Direct Digital Control in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a
description of the parameters.
d. Select a Mode. This is the action when the input is higher
or lower than the setpoint (plus or minus one-half the
differential).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-5

TCON299–05/10
Proportional, Integral, Derivative Module (PID) Direct Digital Control

Proportional, Integral, Derivative Module (PID)

The terms proportional, integral, and derivative describe the output
response of the module based on a varying set of conditions occur-
ring by the process variable. The PID module editor shown in
Figure 14-4, allows you to define the PID module.

Figure 14-4. PID Module Editor

Use the following procedure to configure the PID Module:

1. Set the Module parameters.

Note: The Number field refers to the Mod # that you selected on the DDC
Modules screen (Figure 14-1) and cannot be changed.

a. Enter a Name (up to eight characters) to describe the

module.

14-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Proportional, Integral, Derivative Module (PID)

b. Enter the Sample interval (1 to 255). This is the number

of seconds between module outputs.
2. Set the Setpoint parameters.
a. Select a Setpoint. This is the type of input value. All PID
inputs must be defined as lines, points, or constants. An
input field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.
✢ Constant—Enter a value in engineering units.
c. If you chose Line or Point in Step a above, enter a
setpoint Offset (–100 to +100). The default is zero. If you
have several modules that share a common setpoint, you
can use setpoint offsets to stagger the operating range of
each module.
d. Enter the Low limit value. The default is zero.
This parameter defines the lower limit of the setpoint. If
the setpoint goes below this value, the module output
goes to the failsafe parameter.
e. Enter the High limit value. The default is 100.
This parameter defines the upper limit of the setpoint. If
the setpoint goes above this value, the module output
goes to the failsafe parameter.
3. Set the Process Variable parameters.
a. Select a Process Variable. All PID process variables
must be defined as lines, points, or constants. An input
field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.
✢ Constant—Enter a value in engineering units.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-7

TCON299–05/10
Proportional, Integral, Derivative Module (PID) Direct Digital Control

c. The Filter parameter allows you to reduce the impact of

rapidly changing inputs and is controller dependent. For
7700 or 7740 controllers, you may enter a value from one
to five. This parameter represents the number of previous
inputs to be averaged with the current input value. All
other controllers allow you to select Yes or No to apply a
filter that will automatically average the last five inputs
with the current input.
4. Set the Output parameters. Refer toTCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a complete description of
these parameters.
a. Select an Output. PID outputs must be lines or points.
An input field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.
c. Enter the output Ramp limit value (0 to 100 percent).
This is the largest change in output you want the system
to issue between samples. If you set this value to zero, the
output will never change.
d. Enter the output Low limit value. The default is zero.
This parameter defines the lower limit of the output
value. The default is zero because the output of the
module is typically in percent.
e. Enter the output High limit value. The default is 100.
This parameter defines the upper limit of the output. The
default is 100 because the output of the module is typi-
cally in percent.
f. Enter a value (0 to 100 percent) in the Control point
(failsafe) field. The default is 50 percent of the output
high limit minus output low limit.
g. Enter the Proportional band value (1 to 1,000 percent).
The default is 100.

14-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Proportional, Integral, Derivative Module (PID)

h. Enter the Reset interval value (0 to 3,600 seconds). The

default is 0.
i. Enter the Rate interval value (0 to 3,600 seconds). The
default is zero.
j. Select a Mode. This is the action when the input is higher
or lower than the setpoint.

Note: The following tuning parameters are available in the PCU/DCU PID
modules but not in the MR or UC PID modules.

k. Choose an Adaptive control from the drop-down list.

This parameter defines the point address or name of the
discrete point that will be used to enable/disable adaptive
control.
l. Enter the Maximum bump (%) value (0 to 100). The
default is five.
This parameter determines the size of the PID output
step change for automatic tuning in reference to the
module control point (PID).
m. Enter the Settling time (sec) (10 to 1,800). The default is
120.
This is an estimate of the time it takes for the input
(process variable) to settle down after a setpoint change.
n. Enter the Maximum overshoot (%) value (0 to 100). The
default is 10.
This parameter, along with target damping, controls the
shape of the initial output response to a process distur-
bance.
o. Enter the Target damping (%) value (1 to 75). The
default is 25.
This is the desired reduction in the process variable over-
shoot from the first overshoot (maximum overshoot) to
the second, and so on.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-9

TCON299–05/10
Floating Module (Float) Direct Digital Control

p. Enter the Noise band (%) value (0 to 100). The default is

two. This parameter, specified as a percentage of the
input range, is the minimum process variable change that
initiates an adaptive calculation of the module parame-
ters (provided the adaptive control discrete point is equal
to one).

P-only Mode of Operation

This operational mode is available in all DCU types except the
EPROM versions of the 7700 and 7740 DCUs. If you did not enter
a reset or rate interval in the PID module, the module functions in
P-only mode (no integral or derivative corrective actions).

Floating Module (Float)

The Floating module operates much like the PID module,
described above. The operation of the algorithm is the same and
the entries which modify the proportional band, reset interval, and
rate interval are identical. The difference between the two modules
lies in the outputs to the final control element.
The output of the Float module is directed to two separate DO
points as an increase command and a decrease command. The
module does not know the exact position of the controlled valve or
damper and assumes it was driven to the correct position. You need
this module and its outputs when the final control element is
controlled by a bidirectional motor. The Floating Module editor
shown in Figure 14-5, allows you to define the Floating module.

Note: The same input conditions, which cause the PID module to output its
control point value, cause the Floating module to stop producing any
output. Refer to the chapter dealing with Direct Digital Control in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a
description of the parameters.
Use the following procedure to configure the Floating Module:
1. Set the Module parameters.

14-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Floating Module (Float)

Figure 14-5. Floating Module Editor

Note: The Number field refers to the Mod # that you selected on the DDC
Modules screen (Figure 14-1) and cannot be changed.

a. Enter a Name (up to eight characters) to describe the

module.
b. Enter the Sample interval (1 to 255). This is the number
of seconds between module outputs.
2. Set the Setpoint parameters.
a. Select a Setpoint. This is the type of input value. All
Floating Module inputs must be defined as lines, points,
or constants. An input field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.
✢ Constant—Enter a value in engineering units.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-11

TCON299–05/10
Floating Module (Float) Direct Digital Control

c. If you chose Line or Point in Step a above, enter a

setpoint Offset (–100 to +100). The default is zero.
If you have several modules that share a common
setpoint, you can use setpoint offsets to stagger the oper-
ating range of each module.
d. Enter the Low limit value. The default is zero.
This parameter defines the lower limit of the setpoint. If
the setpoint goes below this value, the module stops
producing any outputs.
e. Enter the High limit value. The default is 100.
This parameter defines the upper limit of the setpoint. If
the setpoint goes above this value, the module stops
producing any outputs.
3. Set the Process Variable parameters.
a. Select a Process Variable. All Floating module process
variables must be defined as lines, points, or constants.
An input field appears under the choices.
b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the
following:
✢ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.
✢ Constant—Enter a value in engineering units.
c. The Filter parameter allows you to reduce the impact of
rapidly changing inputs and is controller dependent. For
7700 or 7740 controllers, you may enter a value from one
to five. This parameter represents the number of previous
inputs to be averaged with the current input value. All
other controllers allow you to select Yes or No to apply a
filter that will automatically average the last five inputs
with the current input.
d. If you want to reduce the impact of rapidly changing
inputs, enter a value (1 to 5) in the Filter field.

14-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Floating Module (Float)

This option lets you average up to five previous input

values with the current input to reduce the impact of
rapidly changing inputs.
4. Set the Output parameters. Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a complete description of
these parameters.
a. Select an Increase.
✢ For a DCU or PCU you may select Line or Point.
✢ For an MR you may only select Point.
✢ For a UC enter the hardware bit (0 to 7).
b. Select a Decrease.
✢ For a DCU or PCU you may select Line or Point.
✢ For an MR you may only select Point.
✢ For a UC enter the hardware bit (0 to 7).
c. Enter the Throttling range (sec) value (0 to 255). The
default is zero.
This is the number of seconds it takes for the actuator to
move from being fully open to fully closed and vice versa.
d. Enter the Turn-around time (sec) value (0 to 255). The
default is zero.
This is the time it takes to complete a reversal in the bidi-
rectional motor rotation.
e. Enter the Proportional band value (1 to 1,000 percent).
The default is 100.
f. Enter the Reset interval value (0 to 3,600 seconds). The
default is 0.
g. Enter the Rate interval value (0 to 3,600 seconds). The
default is zero.
h. Select a Mode. This is the action when the input is higher
or lower than the setpoint.

Note: The following tuning parameters are available in the PCU/DCU

Floating modules but not in the MR or UC Floating modules.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-13

TCON299–05/10
Floating Module (Float) Direct Digital Control

i. Choose an Adaptive control from the drop-down list.

This parameter defines the point address or name of the
discrete point that will be used to enable/disable adaptive
control.
j. Enter the Maximum Bump (%) value (0 to 100). The
default is five.
This parameter determines the size of the output step
change for automatic tuning in reference to the midscale
position.
k. Enter the Settling time (sec) (10 to 1,800). The default is
120.
This is an estimate of the time it takes for the input
(process variable) to settle down after a setpoint change.
l. Enter the Maximum overshoot (%) value (0 to 100). The
default is 10.
This parameter, along with target damping, controls the
shape of the initial output response to a process distur-
bance.
m. Enter the Target damping (%) value (1 to 75). The
default is 25.
This is the desired reduction in the process variable over-
shoot from the first overshoot (maximum overshoot) to
the second, and so on.
n. Enter the Noise band (%) value (0 to 100). The default is
two.
This parameter, specified as a percentage of the input
range, is the minimum process variable change that
initiates an adaptive calculation of the module parame-
ters (provided the adaptive control discrete point is equal
to one).

14-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Reset Module (Reset)

Reset Module (Reset)

The Reset module produces a primary reset schedule and modifies
the results of that schedule based upon a secondary input (see
Figure 14-6). The output of this module is typically used to provide
a setpoint to another module and does not directly control a
process. The reset schedule can reset the setpoint of a controlling
module based on one or two measured inputs.

Figure 14-6. Reset Module Editor

An example of this function is the process used to reset the temper-

ature of a water heater according to the outside air temperature. As
the outside temperature drops, the temperature of the heater must
increase to maintain the water at the same temperature (the heating
load increases). The two temperatures are inversely proportional to
each other.
Reset control is also used to reset the discharge temperature of an
HVAC unit based on the space temperature. This increases the rate
of space temperature modification but does not improve control
capability.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-15

TCON299–05/10
Reset Module (Reset) Direct Digital Control

Use the following procedure to configure the Reset Module:

1. Set the Module parameters.

Note: The Number field refers to the Mod # that you selected on the DDC
Modules screen (Figure 14-1) and cannot be changed.

a. Enter a Name (up to eight characters) to describe the

module.
b. Enter the Sample interval (1 to 255). This is the number
of seconds between module outputs.
2. Set the Primary Input parameters.
a. Select a Primary Input type. This is the type of input
value. All Reset module inputs must be defined as lines,
points, or constants.
b. Enter the Input 1 and Input 2 values. These input values,
in engineering units of the primary sensed variable, are
the major determining factor in determining the primary
output.
c. Enter the Output 1 and Output 2 values. These values
define the module output in conjunction with the
primary inputs.
3. Set the Secondary Input parameters.
a. Select the Secondary Input type. This is the type of
input value. All Reset module inputs must be defined as
lines, points, or constants.
b. Enter the Input 1 and Input 2 values. These input values,
in engineering units of the secondary sensed variable,
provide a second modifier for the module output.
c. Enter the Output 1 and Output 2 values. These values, in
engineering units of the controlled value, offset the
setpoint derived by the primary input/output schedule.
4. Set the Output parameters.
a. Select an Output. DDC outputs must be lines or points.
An input field appears under the choices.

14-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control HiLo Module (HiLo)

b. Depending on your choice in Step a, do one of the

following:
✢ Line—enter a value (1 to 64).
✢ Point—choose a point from the drop-down list.
c. Enter the Low limit value. The default is zero.
This parameter defines the lower limit of the output
value. The default is zero because the output of the
module is typically in percent.
d. Enter the High limit value. The default is 100.
This parameter defines the upper limit of the output. The
default is 100 because the output of the module is typi-
cally in percent.

HiLo Module (HiLo)

The HiLo module provides a convenient means to extract the
highest and/or lowest values from among several values. If desired,
you can also accomplish this with the HIGH and LOW Boolean
operators. Refer to the chapter dealing with the Calculation point
extension in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference
Guide, for more information about these operators.
Inputs may be either analog values such as temperature or pressure,
or discrete states (i.e., true (1) or false (0)). If you need to compare
more than four values, you can have one module output to another
by using multiple HiLo modules. This is called cascading.
The HiLo Module editor shown in Figure 14-7, allows you to define
the HiLo Module.
Use the following procedure to configure the HiLo Module:
1. Set the Module parameters.

Note: The Number field refers to the Mod # that you selected on the DDC
Modules screen (see Figure 14-1) and cannot be changed.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-17

TCON299–05/10
HiLo Module (HiLo) Direct Digital Control

Figure 14-7. HiLo Module Editor

a. Enter a Name (up to eight characters) to describe the

module.
b. Enter the Sample interval (1 to 255). This is the number
of seconds between module outputs.
2. Select the High output and Low output types. DDC outputs
must be lines or points. An input field appears under the
choices.
Depending on your choices, do one of the following:
✧ Line—enter a value (1 to 64).
✧ Point—choose a point from the drop-down list.
3. Select Input 1, Input 2, Input 3, and Input 4 as required.
These are the types of input values. All HiLo Module inputs
must be defined as lines, points, or constants.

14-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Relay Module (Relay)

Relay Module (Relay)

The Relay module performs multiple functions as part of overall
TAC I/NET Seven DDC capabilities. As you become more familiar
with TAC I/NET Seven you will discover many uses for the relay
module.
In its simplest form, this module is similar to a single-pole double-
throw relay (SPDT). It has an input which acts as a coil (discrete
input select), a normally-closed port (DI = 0 input), a normally
open port (DI = 1 input), and a common output. When used as a
traditional relay the module passes the state/value from the DI = 0
port to the common output when the discrete select input value is
0. When the discrete select input is 1, the module passes the
state/value of the DI = 1 port.
This module can also function in the following ways:
✦ Act as an interval time delay relay (INT)
✦ Act as a delay-before-break relay (DBB)
✦ Act as a delay-before-make relay (DBM)
Each of these relay options is described below. The Relay module
editor is shown in Figure 14-8.

Figure 14-8. Relay Module Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-19

TCON299–05/10
Relay Module (Relay) Direct Digital Control

Use the following procedure to configure the Relay module:

1. Set the Module parameters.

Note: The Number field refers to the Mod # that you selected on the DDC
Modules screen (Figure 14-1) and cannot be changed.

a. Enter a Name (up to eight characters) to describe the

module.
b. Enter the Sample interval (1 to 255). This is the number
of seconds between module outputs.
2. Select the DI = 0 type. This is the state/value passed to the
output by the Relay module when the discrete input is zero.
3. Select the DI = 1 type. This is the state/value passed to the
output by the Relay module when the discrete input is one.
4. Set the Settings parameters.
a. Select a relay type. Choose from Standard, Interval
timer, Delay before make, or Delay before break.
b. Enter the Time delay (sec) value (0 to 86,400). The
default is zero.
This is the number of seconds for the Interval timer,
Delay before make, and Delay before break relays.
5. Select a DI Select type. This input can be a line, a point, or a
constant. If you select a point, you must use a DO, DI, DC, or
DA point type. If you select a line, it must carry a discrete state
(0 or 1) rather than an analog value.
6. Select an Output type. DDC outputs must be lines or points.
An input field appears under the choices.
Depending on your choices, do one of the following:
✧ Line—Enter a value (1 to 64).
✧ Point—Choose a point from the drop-down list.

14-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control History

History
TAC I/NET Seven provides an on-line tuning capability for PID
and Floating modules (up to four per controller). In order to acti-
vate the tuning function, you must first select the PID or Floating
module(s) and add them to the history record. The history func-
tion allows the DCU to begin to monitor the module input and
output values.
1. Choose a PID or Floating module from the DDC Modules
screen.
2. Select History. The system toggles the History function
between disabled and enabled each time you select the
History button. When history is enabled, a Y appears in the
History column of the list.
Due to the memory required for the tuning function, there is a
limit of four modules that can be contained in the history record of
each controller. If you need to add another module, delete an old
one first.

Tuning
Tuning is the on-line, automatic adjustment of PID or Floating
module parameters.
When you have added the modules you wish to tune to the History
portion of the DDC editor, use the following procedure to perform
the Tuning function:
1. Choose a PID or Floating module from the DDC Modules
screen. The module must have the History function enabled.
2. Select Tuning. The system displays the Input Output Plot
screen (see Figure 14-9).
This screen allows you to choose the following options:
✧ Manual (Man) Tune
✧ Automatic (Auto) Tune (PID only)

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-21

TCON299–05/10
Tuning Direct Digital Control

Figure 14-9. Input Output Plot

✧ Input/Output (I/O) Plot

Manual Tuning
The Manual Tuning editor (see Figure 14-10) displays permanent
and current module parameter values and allows you to adjust the
current values.

Figure 14-10. Manual Tuning Editor

14-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Direct Digital Control Tuning

Use the following procedure to adjust the Manual Tuning parame-

ters:
1. Enter a Setpoint value.
This is the value of the input point being controlled.
a. Enter the Proportional band value (1 to 1,000 percent).
b. Enter the Reset interval value (0 to 3,600 seconds).
c. Enter the Rate interval value (0 to 3,600 seconds). The
default is zero.

Input/Output Plot
If you select this option, the system displays a plot of the input and
output of the selected module. You can then observe the on-line
results of the changes you made previously. See Figure 14-9.

Automatic Tune
If you select this option, the system displays a plot similar to the
Input/Output plot.
This may be a lengthy process. In this editor, the controller auto-
matically drives the module output(s) to preset values or positions
and calculates the P, I, and D constants for the PID and Floating
modules. This is done by driving the output of the PID module to
the control point value, or to midscale in the case of a Floating
module, for the duration of the settling time.
The output is then alternately forced up and down numerous times
by the value of the maximum bump percentage. By monitoring the
resulting changes in the process variable input to the module, the
controller automatically calculates and enters the P, I, and D
constants into the module editor.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 14-23

TCON299–05/10
Helpful Hints for DDC Modules Direct Digital Control

Helpful Hints for DDC Modules

✦ Prepare your DDC module worksheets in TCON157, TAC
I/NET Seven Forms and Worksheets, before entering module
editors.
✦ Check that you have no more than one DDC module
directing its output to the same line number.
✦ Build a display page, with line values displayed, to check for
intermediate states or values.

14-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

15
12
Lighting Control

The 7780 Distributed Lighting Control Unit (DLCU) supports up

to 32 lighting zones, 64 local/external lighting circuits, and 32
remote/indirect lighting circuits. You can assign each circuit to one
or more zones. You must attach a Lighting Control (LC) extension
to a controller point and define the lighting circuit before you can
assign the circuit to a zone.
Refer to the Lighting Control extension in the chapter dealing with
point extensions in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Refer-
ence Guide, for more information about lighting circuits and zones.
To use the Lighting Control functions:
1. Define the lighting circuits (see below).
2. Define the lighting zones (see page 15-6).
3. For each zone:
a. Assign the desired circuit(s) to the zone (see page 15-8).
b. Assign a time schedule to the zone (see page 15-9).

Lighting Circuits
You can define up to 96 lighting circuits. The first 64 circuits can be
local/external points and the last 32 circuits can be remote/indirect
DO points. The 64 local/external points can be assigned to
addresses between LLSS0000 and LLSS0707. The 32 remote/indi-
rect points can be assigned to addresses between LLSS0800 and
LLSS1107.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 15-1

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Circuits Lighting Control

Adding a Lighting Circuit

You need to define lighting circuits before you can assign them to a
zone. Use the following steps to add a lighting circuit to a point.
1. Connect to a 7780 DLCU.
2. If the necessary DO point has not already been defined, use
the Resident I/O Points editor to define the point. Refer to
Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing.

Note: The DO point used for a lighting circuit must have a “0” command
as its first control descriptor.

3. Select Edit  Controller  Lighting Circuit, or click the

Lighting Circuit tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays Lighting Circuit Point Selection editor (see
Figure 15-1).

Figure 15-1. Lighting Point Selection Editor

The screen lists currently defined controller DO points. Each

point is listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the LC
column indicates that the point is defined as a lighting circuit.

15-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Control Lighting Circuits

4. To change the order in which the points are displayed, click

Sort. The Point Sort Dialog box displays. Select Point name
or Point number and click OK. The Point Selection editor
displays the points in the requested sort order.
5. Choose a DO point from the list. If you choose a point that is
already defined as a lighting circuit, then the Add button is
not enabled and a lighting circuit cannot be added. In this
case you may either modify, copy, or delete the lighting
circuit.
6. Select Add. The system displays the Lighting Control - Circuit
definition editor (see Figure 15-2).

Figure 15-2. Lighting Control - Circuit Definition Editor

7. You must now define the circuit parameters and wink source
parameters for the lighting circuit you are adding. Refer to
“Circuit Parameters” on page 15-4 and “Wink Source” on
page 15-4.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 15-3

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Circuits Lighting Control

Note: The Zone Map section of this screen is for informational purposes
only and shows the zones to which this lighting circuit is assigned.
Activating or deactivating zones from this screen has no affect. Refer
to “Circuit Assignments” on page 15-8 for procedures on how to add
a lighting circuit to a lighting zone.

8. Select OK to close the Lighting Control - Circuit definition

editor (Figure 15-2) and return to the Point Selection editor
(Figure 15-1).
9. Select Close to close the Point Selection editor.
Circuit Parameters
From the lighting circuit definition editor (Figure 15-2), define
circuit parameters for the lighting circuit as follows:
1. Set the Delay before off parameter (0–127). This is the
number of minutes that the point will remain On after the
wink cycle ends. When the wink cycle is over and the delay
duration expires, the point switches Off.
2. Set the On duration parameter (1–255). This is the number of
seconds used for the On portion of the wink cycle.
3. Set the Off duration parameter (0.5–2.0). This is the number
of seconds used for the Off portion of the wink cycle.
4. Set the Wink cycles parameter (0–16). This is the number of
times the point winks on and off.
Wink Source
From the lighting circuit definition editor (Figure 15-2) choose the
source(s) that will initiate the wink function. Your choices are:
✦ Manual host
✦ Manual - HHC
✦ Automatic time scheduling
✦ Demand limit/load shedding
✦ Event sequence
✦ Building manager
✦ Override input

15-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Control Lighting Circuits

Click in the check box to toggle between activated () and deacti-
vated () for each source.

Modifying a Lighting Circuit

Modifying a lighting circuit is similar to adding a circuit. Use the
same procedure as described in “Adding a Lighting Circuit” on
page 15-2 except select Modify rather than Add.

Deleting a Lighting Circuit

Lighting circuits are deleted by removing the Lighting Control
(LC) extension from the controller point. Use the following proce-
dure to delete a lighting circuit.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Lighting Circuit, or click the
Lighting Circuit tool on the Controller toolbar. The system
displays a Point Selection editor as shown in Figure 15-1.
The screen lists currently defined controller DO points. Each
point is listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the LC
column indicates that the point is defined as a lighting circuit.
2. Choose a point from the list. The point must have a Y in the
LC column.
3. Select Delete. The Delete confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Select Yes to delete the lighting circuit.

Copying a Lighting Circuit

1. Select Edit  Controller  Lighting Circuit, or click the
Lighting circuit tool on the Controller toolbar. The Point
Selection editor displays, as shown in Figure 15-1.
The screen lists currently defined controller DO points. Each
point is listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the LC
column indicates that the point is defined as a lighting circuit.
2. Choose a point from the list. The point must have a Y in the
LC column.
3. Select Copy. The Extension Copy dialog box displays, as
shown in Figure 15-3.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 15-5

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Zones Lighting Control

Figure 15-3. Extension Copy Editor

4. Choose a target point from the drop-down list. Only DO

points that are not defined as lighting circuits are listed.
5. Select OK to return to the point selection screen. You may
now modify the new lighting circuit as necessary. Refer to
“Modifying a Lighting Circuit” on page 15-5.

Lighting Zones
Once you have defined the lighting circuits, you may assign these
circuits to zones. Lighting zones can be assigned to DO point
addresses between LLSS1200 and LLSS1507.

Adding a Lighting Zone

Use the following steps to define lighting zones and assign lighting
circuits.
1. Connect to a 7780 DLCU.
2. If the necessary DO point has not already been defined, use
the Resident I/O Points editor to define the point. Refer to
Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing.

Note: The DO point used for a lighting zone must have a “1” command as
its first control descriptor.

3. Select Edit  Controller  Zone Definition, or click the Zone

Definition tool on the controller toolbar. The Point Selection
editor displays.

15-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Control Lighting Zones

The screen lists currently defined controller DO points with

addresses between LLSS1200 and LLSS1507. Each point is
listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the LZ column indi-
cates that the point is defined as a lighting zone.
4. Choose a DO point from the list. If you choose a point that
already has a lighting zone extension, then the Add button is
not enabled and a lighting zone cannot be added. In this case
you may either modify, copy, or delete the lighting zone.
5. Select Add. The Lighting Control - Zone editor displays, as
shown in Figure 15-4.

Figure 15-4. Lighting Zone Parameters Editor

6. Choose an Input point from the drop-down list. This is the

address of a pre-existing DI point that will be used to override
the zone time schedule and energize all circuits in the lighting
zone.
7. Choose an Input type from the drop-down list. The options
for this parameter are: Single-pushbutton, Dual-pushbutton,
or Latched.
8. Choose an Override type from the drop-down list. This
parameter is only used when the Input type parameter is set
to Single- or Dual-pushbutton. The options for this param-
eter are: Permanent or Timed.
9. Set the Override time. This parameter is only used when the
Override type parameter is set to Timed. Choose a setting
from 0 to 60 minutes.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 15-7

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Zones Lighting Control

10. Select Circuit to assign lighting circuits to this zone. Refer to

“Circuit Assignments” on page 15-8.
11. Select ATS to define time schedules for this zone. Refer to
“Automatic Time Schedule (ATS)” on page 15-9.
12. When you are finished, select OK.
Circuit Assignments
Use the following procedure to assign lighting circuits.
1. If you select Circuit from the Lighting Zone Parameters
editor, the Lighting Control - Circuit Assignments editor
displays (see Figure 15-5).

Figure 15-5. Circuit Assignment Editor

Use this screen to assign circuits to the currently selected

zone. This screen displays the currently defined circuits by
number (1–96), DO point address, and name. You defined
the points in the Resident I/O Points editor. You defined the
lighting circuit parameters for these points earlier in this
chapter.
2. Assign circuits by selecting circuit names with the mouse to
toggle between [X] (assigned) and [ ] (not assigned) in the
Select field. A sample circuit assignment screen is shown in
Figure 15-5.

15-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Control Lighting Zones

You may also use the All Yes and All No buttons to quickly
select which circuits are assigned to the zone.
3. Select Close to return to the lighting zone parameters
window.
Automatic Time Schedule (ATS)
If you select ATS, the system displays a time scheduling edit screen
similar to that shown in the Time Scheduling editor. However, the
only actions available in this screen are ON and OFF. As with the
TS editor, you can select actions to begin and end at a specific time,
at sunrise, or at sunset. You can define temporary schedules and
assign schedules to special days. Any changes you make here are
also reflected in the Time Scheduling editor. Any changes you make
in that editor are reflected here.
You can create the schedule here or use one you already created in
the Time Scheduling editor. If you create it here, it is automatically
defined as Independent. If you use a schedule you defined in the TS
editor, it must be defined as an Independent schedule. Master and
Slave time schedules are valid in the Lighting Control editor but
cannot be edited from the LC editor. A sample screen is shown in
Figure 15-6.

Figure 15-6. Time Schedule Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 15-9

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Zones Lighting Control

Modifying a Lighting Zone

Modifying a zone is similar to adding a zone. Use the same proce-
dure as described in “Adding a Lighting Zone” on page 15-6 except
select Modify rather than Add.

Deleting a Lighting Zone

Use the following procedure to delete a lighting zone.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Zone Definition, or click the Zone
Definition tool on the Controller toolbar. The Point Selec-
tions editor lists currently defined controller DO points. Each
point is listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the LZ
column indicates that a lighting zone has been added to the
point.
2. Choose a point from the list. The point must have a Y in the
LZ column.
3. Select Delete. The Delete confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes.

Copying Lighting Zones

1. Select Edit  Controller  Zone Definition, or click the Zone
Definition tool on the Controller toolbar. The Point Selection
editor lists currently defined controller DO points. Each point
is listed by address, class, and name. A Y in the LZ column
indicates that a lighting zone has been added to the point.
2. Choose a DO point from the list. The point must have a Y in
the LZ column.
3. Select Copy. The system displays the Extension Copy dialog
box, similar to that shown in Figure 15-3.
4. Choose a target point from the drop-down list. Only DO
points that are not already defined as lighting zones are listed.
5. Select OK. The system now displays the window similar to
that shown in Figure 15-7.

15-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Lighting Control Lighting Zones

Figure 15-7. Zone Parameters Editor

6. Choose the zone parameters to be included in the copy. If you

select No for all parameters, the lighting zone will not be
copied.
7. Select OK to return to the point selection screen. You may
now modify the new zone as necessary. Refer to “Modifying a
Lighting Zone” on page 15-10.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 15-11

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

16
22
Unitary Control

Unitary controllers (UC) and their associated interface let TAC

I/NET distribute intelligence to the level of the terminal unit. The
unitary controller interface (UCI) acts as an interface between the
TAC I/NET 7700 controller LAN and the TAC I/NET UC network.
The controller LAN operates as a token passing protocol at 9600
baud or 19,200 baud and the UC network operates as a scan-
ning/polling protocol operating at 9600 baud.
The UCI is an intermediate holding area for all database and appli-
cations parameters for up to 32 unitary controllers. The UCI also
lets you globalize data, collect data for SevenTrends and trending,
and perform save and restore tasks. The UCI lets you perform all
database development on-line without being physically connected
to the remote UCs.

Configuring the Unitary Controller Interface

1. Connect to the UCI exactly as you do any other controller by
connecting through the system and selecting the appropriate
options until you are connected to the desired 7760 controller
(UCI).
2. Select Edit  Controller  Configuration, or click the Config-
uration tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays
the DCU configuration screen. This screen is identical to the
configuration/status screen used by other controllers. Refer to
Chapter 4, Controller Configuration, for information on
configuring this controller.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-1

TCON299–05/10
Configuring the Unitary Controller Unitary Control

Configuring the Unitary Controller

1. Select Edit  Controller  UC Configuration, or click the UC
Configuration tool on the Controller toolbar. This option is
available only when you are connected to a 7760 controller
(UCI). The system displays the editor shown in Figure 16-1.

Figure 16-1. UC Configuration Editor

2. Choose a type for each UC address. The default type is

Internal.
3. Select OK to accept the changes and exit the editor.
You may want to use the Unitary Control editor (described below)
first and define the specific parameters and points for the UC while
the type is still defined as Internal (UCI not communicating with
the UCs). You can then return to this editor and change the type
from Internal to the appropriate type, and exit the editor to begin
control, once the UCI is communicating with the UCs.
The system displays the addresses of all the UCs currently assigned
to this UCI.

16-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Creating the UCI Database

Creating the UCI Database

Point database entries for each UC are made as follows:
1. Connect to a UCI
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points, or click the
Resident I/O Point tool on the Controller toolbar.
3. Refer to Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing, for the
mechanics of database entry.

The Parent Point

The 7760 is the only controller that uses the term “parent point”. A
parent point is nothing more than the AO or DO point to which
you add a UC extension: VAV, AHU, PID, FLT, or HPMP. The func-
tion of the extension is directly controlled by the parent point. (0 or
1 for a DO point and the setpoint for an AO point.) All parent
points must be internal or external, DO or AO points. If it is
helpful, you could think of the point to which you add any other
extension such as Runtime or Consumption as the parent point of
that extension. The parent point is usually assigned the first output
address in the UC (LLSSPP00), but this is not a requirement.

UC Copy
This function copies the data in one UC to another UC. The data
copied using this function consists of Resident I/O point data,
station parameters, and extensions.
This function is useful if your site is adding one or more UCs whose
databases are similar to that of an existing UC.
Perform a UC copy as follows:
1. Connect to a UCI.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points, or click the
Resident I/O Point tool on the Controller toolbar.
3. Choose a source UC point to be copied from the point list.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-3

TCON299–05/10
UC Copy Unitary Control

4. Select UC Copy. This option only appears when you are

connected to a 7760 controller (UCI). This function lets you
copy database and extension programs from one UC to
another UC.
The system displays the UC (MCU) Copy screen (see
Figure 16-2).

Figure 16-2. UC Copy Screen

5. Define a point address for the new UC point using the

Station and Point spindials.
6. Select OK to add the new UC point.
When the copy is complete, the editor displays a list of UC
points with the new UC added. The new points contain the
same extensions as the points in the source UC. The only
thing not duplicated is the point names. You may use the
Resident I/O Points editor to name the new points.

Activating the New UC

When you have completed a UC copy, you may activate the new UC
by accessing the UC Configuration editor and declaring the UC
type as VAV, AHU, HPMP, or General. This causes the UCI to
download the new database to the UC and initiate its operation.

16-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Unitary Control Parameters

Unitary Control Parameters

Once you have defined several UC resident points in the Resident
I/O Points editor, return to the main menu and select Edit 
Controller  Unitary Control, or click the Unitary Control tool on
the Controller toolbar.
This option only appears when you are connected to a 7760 (UCI).
The Unitary Control editor displays (see Figure 16-3).

Figure 16-3. Unitary Control Screen

This screen lists all possible parent points (AO and DO) that can
have a UC extension appended to them.
1. Choose a point from the list. The point should not have a Y in
the UC column.
2. Select Add. The system displays the UC Extension screen (see
Figure 16-4).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-5

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Parameters Unitary Control

Figure 16-4. UC Extension Screen

3. Choose a UC extension type from the drop-down list. If you

selected an AO point in the Unitary Control screen, your only
options are PID and FLT. If you selected a DO point, your
options are VAV, AHU, PID, FLT, and HPMP.
4. Select OK. The system displays the editor screen corre-
sponding to the UC extension type you selected.
Since the control algorithm has already been written, tested, and is
resident in the UC EPROM memory, all you need to do is define the
parameters and identify sources and destinations to begin control-
ling the unit.
From the UC Parameter Editor, you must now define the parame-
ters. The following pages provide sample editor screens and general
parameter descriptions for the VAV, AHU, and HPMP controller
types. Refer to “DDC Damper Control” on page 16-18 for a
description of the parameter entries for PID and FLT controller
types. Some of the parameters are common to all extension types
and some are specific to a particular UC extension.
For detailed descriptions of all UC parameters, refer to TCON300,
TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide.

VAV Parameters
A sample UC Parameter Editor screen for the Variable Air Volume
(VAV) controller type is shown in Figure 16-5.

16-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Unitary Control Parameters

Figure 16-5. VAV UC Parameter Editor Screen

The VAV UC Parameter Editor screen provides data entry fields for
four types of parameters:
✦ Setpoints
✦ Inputs and Outputs
✦ Overrides
✦ Delays and Offsets

Note: When making entries in the VAV UC Parameter Editor, refer to

TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for
descriptions of each parameter and instructions on determining the
correct entries for your specific application.

Setpoints
For each setpoint, enter a number between zero and 127.5 for the
setpoint target and a number between zero and 10 for the differen-
tial. You may use a 0.5 decimal entry for all setpoint targets and
differentials. If you enter a decimal value less than 0.5, the system

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-7

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Parameters Unitary Control

drops the decimal; e.g., 79.4 becomes 79. If you enter a decimal
value greater than 0.5, the system replaces the decimal with 0.5; e.g.,
79.9 becomes 79.5.
Complete the Setpoints section in the VAV UC Parameter Editor by
performing the following steps:
1. Enter a Target Setup/setback value for Cooling.
2. Enter a Differential Setup/setback value for Cooling.
3. Enter a Target Setup/setback value for Heating.
4. Enter a Differential Setup/setback value for Heating.
5. Enter a Target Economy value for Cooling.
6. Enter a Differential Economy value for Cooling.
7. Enter a Target Economy value for Heating.
8. Enter a Differential Economy value for Heating.
9. Enter a Target Normal value for Cooling.
10. Enter a Differential Normal value for Cooling.
11. Enter a Target Normal value for Heating.
12. Enter a Differential Normal value for Heating.
Inputs and Outputs
The input and output parameters instruct the UC where to find the
information it needs to function.
Complete the Inputs and Outputs section in the VAV UC Param-
eter Editor by performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Space tempera-
ture drop-down list.

2. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Temperature

setpoint drop-down list.

3. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Fan drop-down

list.
4. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Central plant heat
drop-down list.

16-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Unitary Control Parameters

5. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 1 heating

drop-down list.
6. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 2 heating
drop-down list.
7. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 3 heating
drop-down list.
Overrides
There are several separate override options available for the VAV
UC controller type.
Complete the Overrides section in the VAV UC Parameter Editor
by performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Setpoint adj. drop-
down list.
2. In the Range field, enter a value between 0 and 10 to limit the
range of a setpoint adjustment knob on a CSI sensor. This
limits the adjustment to plus and minus the value entered.
3. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Timed override
drop-down list.
4. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Indicator drop-
down list.
5. In the Duration (min) field, enter a value between 0 and 254
for the number of minutes that the UC will energize the
Timed override indicator.
6. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Economy override
drop-down list.
7. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Damper override
drop-down list.
Delays and Offsets
Complete the following Delays and Offsets parameters.
1. Activate the appropriate radio button (Off, On, or Auto) for
Cooling Control.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-9

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Parameters Unitary Control

2. Activate the appropriate radio button (Off, On, or Auto) for

Heating Control.
3. In the Heater 1 activation delay (sec) field, enter a value
between 0 and 254 seconds.
4. In the Heater 2 setpoint offset (deg) field, enter a value
between 1 and 10 degrees.
5. In the Heater 3 setpoint offset (deg) field, enter a value
between 1 and 10 degrees.
6. Select OK to accept all changes in the VAV UC Parameter
Editor screen.

AHU Parameters
A sample UC Parameter Editor screen for the Air Handling Unit
(AHU) controller type is shown in Figure 16-6.

Figure 16-6. AHU UC Parameter Editor

16-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Unitary Control Parameters

The AHU UC Parameter Editor screen provides data entry fields

for four types of parameters:
✦ Setpoints
✦ Inputs and Outputs
✦ Overrides
✦ Delays and Offsets

Note: When making entries in the AHU UC Parameter Editor, refer to

TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for
descriptions of each parameter and instructions on determining the
correct entries for your specific application.

Setpoints
For each setpoint, enter a number between zero and 127.5 for the
setpoint target and a number between zero and 10 for the differen-
tial. You may use a 0.5 decimal entry for all setpoint targets and
differentials. If you enter a decimal value less than 0.5, the system
drops the decimal; e.g., 79.4 becomes 79. If you enter a decimal
value greater than 0.5, the system replaces the decimal with 0.5; e.g.,
79.9 becomes 79.5.
Complete the Setpoints section in the AHU UC Parameter Editor
by performing the following steps:
1. Enter a Target Setup/setback value for Cooling.
2. Enter a Differential Setup/setback value for Cooling.
3. Enter a Target Setup/setback value for Heating.
4. Enter a Differential Setup/setback value for Heating.
5. Enter a Target Economy value for Cooling.
6. Enter a Differential Economy value for Cooling.
7. Enter a Target Economy value for Heating.
8. Enter a Differential Economy value for Heating.
9. Enter a Target Normal value for Cooling.
10. Enter a Differential Normal value for Cooling.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-11

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Parameters Unitary Control

11. Enter a Target Normal value for Heating.

12. Enter a Differential Normal value for Heating.
Inputs and Outputs
The input and output parameters instruct the UC where to find the
information it needs to function.
Complete the Inputs and Outputs section in the AHU UC Param-
eter Editor by performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Space tempera-
ture drop-down list.

2. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Fan drop-down

list. Activate the appropriate Fan radio button (On or Auto).
3. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 1 cooling
drop-down list.
4. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 2 cooling
drop-down list.
5. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 3 cooling
drop-down list.
6. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 1 heating
drop-down list.
7. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 2 heating
drop-down list.
8. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Stage 3 heating
drop-down list.
9. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Damper control
drop-down list.
Overrides
There are several separate override options available for the AHU
UC controller type.
Complete the Overrides section in the AHU UC Parameter Editor
by performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Setpoint adj. drop-
down list.

16-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Unitary Control Parameters

2. In the Range field, enter a value between 0 and 10 to limit the

range of a setpoint adjustment knob on a CSI sensor. This
limits the adjustment to plus and minus the value entered.
3. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Timed override
drop-down list.
4. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Indicator drop-
down list.
5. In the Duration (min) field, enter a value between 0 and 254
for the number of minutes that the UC will energize the
Timed override indicator.
6. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Economy override
drop-down list.
7. In the Warmup/cooldown (min) field, enter a value between
0 and 254 minutes.
Delays and Offsets
Complete the Delays and Offsets section in the AHU UC Param-
eter Editor by performing the following steps:
1. In the Cooling delay stage 1 field, enter a value between 0
and 254.
2. In the Cooling delay stage 2 field, enter a value between 0
and 254.
3. In the Cooling stage 2 setpoint offset field, enter a value
between 1 and 10.
4. In the Cooling stage 3 setpoint offset field, enter a value
between 1 and 10.
5. In the Heating stage 2 setpoint offset field, enter a value
between 1 and 10.
6. In the Heating stage 3 setpoint offset field, enter a value
between 1 and 10.
7. Click on the OK button to accept all changes in the AHU UC
Parameter Editor screen.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-13

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Parameters Unitary Control

HPMP Parameters
A sample UC Parameter Editor screen for the Heat Pump (HPMP)
controller type is shown in Figure 16-7.

Figure 16-7. HPMP UC Parameter Editor

The HPMP UC Parameter Editor provides data entry fields for four
types of parameters:
✦ Setpoints
✦ Inputs and Outputs
✦ Overrides
✦ Delays and Offsets

Note: When making entries in the HPMP UC Parameter Editor, refer to

TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for

16-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Unitary Control Parameters

descriptions of each parameter and instructions on determining the

correct entries for your specific application.

Setpoints
For each setpoint, enter a number between zero and 127.5 for the
setpoint target and a number between zero and 10 for the differen-
tial. You may use a 0.5 decimal entry for all setpoint targets and
differentials. If you enter a decimal value less than 0.5, the system
drops the decimal; e.g., 79.4 becomes 79. If you enter a decimal
value greater than 0.5, the system replaces the decimal with 0.5; e.g.,
79.9 becomes 79.5.
Complete the Setpoints section in the HPMP UC Parameter Editor
by performing the following steps:
1. Enter a Target Setup/setback value for Cooling.
2. Enter a differential Setup/setback value for Cooling.
3. Enter a Target Setup/setback value for Heating.
4. Enter a Differential Setup/setback value for Heating.
5. Enter a Target Economy value for Cooling.
6. Enter a Differential Economy value for Cooling.
7. Enter a Target Economy value for Heating.
8. Enter a Differential Economy value for Heating.
9. Enter a Target Normal value for Cooling.
10. Enter a Differential Normal value for Cooling.
11. Enter a Target Normal value for Heating.
12. Enter a Differential Normal value for Heating.
Inputs and Outputs
The input and output parameters instruct the UC where to find the
information it needs to function.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-15

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Parameters Unitary Control

Complete the Inputs and Outputs section in the AHU UC Param-

eter Editor by performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Space tempera-
ture drop-down list.

2. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Fan drop-down

list. Activate the appropriate Fan Control radio button (On
or Auto).
3. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Damper control
drop-down list.
4. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Reversing valve
drop-down list.
5. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Compressor 1
drop-down list.
6. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Compressor 2
drop-down list.
7. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Compressor 3
drop-down list.
8. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Heater strip 1
drop-down list.
9. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Heater strip 2
drop-down list.
10. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Heater strip 3
drop-down list.
Overrides
There are several separate override options available for the HPMP
UC controller type.
Complete the Overrides section in the HPMP UC Parameter Editor
by performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Setpoint adj. drop-
down list.
2. In the Range field, enter a value between 0 and 10 to limit the
range of a setpoint adjustment knob on a CSI sensor. This
limits the adjustment to plus and minus the value entered.

16-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control Unitary Control Parameters

3. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Timed override

drop-down list.
4. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Indicator drop-
down list.
5. In the Duration (min) field, enter a value between 0 and 254
for the number of minutes that the UC will energize the
Timed override indicator.
6. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Economy override
drop-down list.
7. In the Warmup/cooldown (min) field, enter a value between
0 and 254 minutes.
Delays and Offsets
Complete the Delays and Offsets section in the AHU UC Param-
eter Editor by performing the following steps:
1. In the Compressor 1 delay (sec) field, enter a value between
0 and 254 seconds.
2. In the Compressor 2 delay (sec) field, enter a value between
0 and 254 seconds.
3. In the Compressor 2 setpoint offset (deg) field, enter a
value between 1 and 10 degrees.
4. In the Compressor 3 setpoint offset (deg) field, enter a
value between 1 and 10 degrees.
5. In the Heater 1 setpoint offset (deg) field, enter a value
between 1 and 10 degrees.
6. In the Heater 2 setpoint offset (deg) field, enter a value
between 1 and 10 degrees.
7. In the Heater 3 setpoint offset (deg) field, enter a value
between 1 and 10 degrees.
8. Select OK to accept all changes in the HPMP UC Parameter
Editor screen.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-17

TCON299–05/10
DDC Damper Control Unitary Control

DDC Damper Control

The VAV, AHU, and HPMP UCs can provide direct digital control
for accurate control of roof top or small built-up AHU dampers.
You may use either a PID extension with a PWM control output or
a FLT (floating) extension with dual pulsed outputs for bi-direc-
tional electric damper operators.

PID Parameters
The PID UC Parameter Editor (see Figure 16-8) provides data
entry fields for three sets of parameters:
✦ Setpoint
✦ Input
✦ Output

Note: When making entries in the PID UC Parameter Editor, refer to

TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for
descriptions of each parameter and instructions on determining the
correct entries for your specific application.

Figure 16-8. DO-PID Editor

16-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control DDC Damper Control

Setpoint
Enter a setpoint Value for a DO point. This field is not displayed if
you are configuring an AO point. AO points use the setpoint of
their parent point.
Input
Complete the Input section in the PID UC Parameter Editor by
performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Process variable
drop-down list.
2. In the Filter samples field, enter a value between 0 and 5.
3. Enter a value in the Low limit field.
4. Enter a value in the High limit field.
Output
Complete the Output section in the PID UC Parameter Editor by
performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Variable drop-
down list.
2. In the Output ramp limit (%) field, enter a value between 0
and 100 percent.
3. Enter a value in the Output low limit field.
4. Enter a value in the Output high limit field.
5. In the Control point limit (%) field, enter a value between 0
and 100 percent.
6. In the Proportional band field, enter a value between 0 and
1000.
7. In the Reset interval (sec) field, enter a value between 0 and
3600 seconds.
8. In the Rate interval (sec) field, enter a value between 0 and
3600 seconds.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-19

TCON299–05/10
DDC Damper Control Unitary Control

9. Activate the appropriate Mode radio button (Direct or

Reverse).
10. Select OK to accept all changes in the PID UC Parameter
Editor screen.

Float (FLT) Parameters

The Floating Module (FLT) UC Parameter Editor screen (see
Figure 16-9) provides data entry fields for three sets of parameters:
✦ Setpoint
✦ Input
✦ Output

Note: When making entries in the FLT UC Parameter Editor, refer to

TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for
descriptions of each parameter and instructions on determining the
correct entries for your specific application:

Figure 16-9. DO Floating Editor

Setpoint
Enter a setpoint Value for a DO point. This field is not displayed if
you are configuring an AO point. AO points use the setpoint of
their parent point.

16-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Unitary Control DDC Damper Control

Input
Complete the Input section in the FLT UC Parameter Editor by
performing the following steps:
1. Select a point address, if applicable, in the Process variable
drop-down list.
2. In the Filter samples field, enter a value between 0 and 5.
3. Enter a value in the Low limit field.
4. Enter a value in the High limit field.
Output
Complete the Output section in the FLT UC Parameter Editor by
performing the following steps:
1. In the Increase field, enter a value between 0 and 7.
2. In the Decrease field, enter a value between 0 and 7.
3. In the Throttling range (sec) field, enter a value between 0
and 320 seconds.
4. Enter a value in the Turn-around time (sec) field.
5. In the Proportional band field, enter a value between 0 and
1000.
6. In the Reset interval (sec) field, enter a value between 0 and
3600 seconds.
7. In the Rate interval (sec) field, enter a value between 0 and
3600 seconds.
8. Activate the appropriate Mode radio button (Direct or
Reverse).
9. Select OK to accept all changes in the FLT UC Parameter
Editor screen.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 16-21

TCON299–05/10
UC Tips Unitary Control

UC Tips
1. Define and enter your database with the UC address defined
as Internal in the UC Configuration editor as described above.
2. Define each individual UC using the Unitary Control editor
as described above.
3. Create a graphic page to resemble the specific UC Editor
screen. Define the point addresses and types in the static
portion of the graphic page and place the point values appro-
priately.
4. When you finish defining the parameters, perform a Station
Save.
5. Return to the UC Configuration editor and change the UC
type from Internal to VAV, AHU, HPMP, or GENERAL.
6. Perform a Station Restore to download the database from the
TAC I/NET Seven host PC to the UCI and ultimately to the
UC.

Note: Failure to perform the last two items listed above causes your graphic
to display “????” in each live data position. The outputs on the UC
may also fail to work as programmed.

16-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

17
106
Access Control

Note: The editors used for access control will not be available unless you
enable access control in the TAC I/NET Seven active configuration.
Refer to the TAC I/NET Seven Configuration chapter in TCON298,
TAC I/NET Seven Getting Started, for more information.
The Access Control side of TAC I/NET Seven requires an interface
between itself and the energy management controllers. The SLI
(SubLAN Interface) provides this communication gateway
between the controller LAN on one side and the door processor
LAN on the other side. Common SLIs are the 7791 Door Processor
Interface (DPI), 7793 Micro Control Interface (MCI), or the 7798
I/SITE LAN. Access control devices in the TAC I/NET Seven system
consist of Door Processor Units (DPU7910, DPU7920, SCU1284,
and OP5 arming terminals), Discrete Input Units (DIU7930 and
SCU1200), and Discrete Input Monitoring and Output Control
Units (DIO7940 and SCU1280). The SLI passes information
between the controller LAN and the Door Processor LAN.
In the current version of the DPI, the DPUs operate on a SubLAN
connected to channel A of a DPI. The channel may contain up to
32 DPU controllers. The DPI appears on controller LANs as a
Distributed Control Unit (DCU). The DPI maintains the complete
database and control parameters for up to 32 DPU, DIO, or DIU
controllers connected to its SubLAN port. The DPI supports the
definition of internal points with all of the extension capabilities
typical of the PCU7716.
The MCI connects to two SubLANs, one on channel A and another
on channel B of the MCI. Each channel may contain up to 32 DPU,
MR, ASC, DIO, or DIU controllers. The MCI supports the defini-
tion of internal points with all of the extension capabilities typical
of the PCU7716.
The 7798 I/SITE LAN and 7798C can support up to 32 MRs, ASCs,
DPUs, SCUs, or any combination on a subLAN. With the 7798C,
up to four OP5 arming terminals can also connect to the subLAN.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-1

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Editors Access Control

The 7798 and 7798C also support internal points with all of the
extension capabilities typical of the 7793 MCI. The internal points
are defined only for point addresses not currently used by subcon-
trollers.
The SLI, DPUs, and SCUs comprise the Access Control element of
the TAC I/NET Seven integrated system. Through the SLI and
DPUs, SCUs, DIOs, or DIUs you may control, or restrict, access to
various areas of your facility. Using Access Initiated Control you
may tie access control events from DPU/SCU readers to the Facility
Management side of TAC I/NET Seven.
Refer to the section on Access Control in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Access Control Editors

The following Access Control editors are available within TAC
I/NET Seven:
✦ DPU Configuration (from controller)
✦ Doors (from host or controller)
✦ Elevator (from controller)
✦ Key/card Translation (from host)
✦ Personnel Schedules (from host or controller)
✦ Tenants (from host)
✦ Groups (from host)
✦ Individuals (from host)
✦ Options (from host)
✦ Access Initiated Control (from host or controller)
✦ Recycle Bin

Access Control Order of Operations

You must observe the following order of operations when
performing access control database entry:

17-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Recycle Bin

1. Configure the DPU/SCU.

2. Define the DPI/DPU/SCU Station parameters. (Refer to
Chapter 2, Setup and Network Configuration.)
3. Add Door Points in the Resident I/O Points editor. (Refer to
Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing.)
4. Save doors in the Network Configuration editor. (Refer to
Chapter 2, Setup and Network Configuration.)
5. Define the Doors in the Door Extensions editor.
6. Define Door Mode Schedules.
7. Define Personnel Schedules.
8. Define Tenants.
9. If desired, translate large key/card numbers. This allows you
to use smaller numbers in your access control database.
10. Define Groups.
11. Define Individuals.
12. Implement Elevator Control.

Recycle Bin
When enabled in the Options editor (see “Options” on page
17-87), the access control recycle bin provides a temporary storage
location for deleted individual, group, and tenant records. When
one of these records is moved to the recycle bin, it no longer
appears in any editors or summaries. Recycle bin records can later
be restored, or they can be permanently purged from the system.

Note: Access to the Recycle Bin editor is restricted to users with proper
permissions. This allows your system to be configured in such a way
that only select operators are allowed to delete, restore, or purge
records. Refer to Chapter 9, Passwords, for more information about
passwords and permissions.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-3

TCON299–05/10
Recycle Bin Access Control

Access the recycle bin by selecting Access  Recycle Bin from

TAC I/NET Seven’s main menu. The system displays the Recycle
Bin (see Figure 17-1).

Figure 17-1. Recycle Bin

Each record listed in the recycle bin contains the following infor-
mation:
✦ Deleted — The date and time this record was deleted.
✦ Tenant — The tenant number for this record.
✦ Type — The type (tenant, group, individual) of the deleted
record.
✧ Tenant and group records include the name of the tenant
or group.
✧ Individual records include the tenant number and indi-
vidual number.

Restoring Records from the Recycle Bin

Restore deleted records by highlighting the record in the recycle bin
and selecting Recover. The restore operation recreates an active
record from the information stored in the recycle bin. Only a single
record at a time can be restored. However, when you restore a

17-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Recycle Bin

deleted tenant, any groups and individuals that were defined for
that tenant are also restored. Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven
Technical Reference Guide, for more information about deleting
and restoring access control records.

Note: When you recover a deleted Group, non of its original links to indi-
viduals are restored. Therefore, individuals who were a member of
the group before it was deleted, will not automatically become a
member of the group again when it is recovered. Instead, you must
manually reassign the group to individuals as necessary.

Restoring a record from the recycle bin is much like adding a new
record. The system displays the Add dialog that corresponds with
the record type that is being restored. This dialog will already
contain the or individual number or the group name of the record
being restored. You have the option of accepting the default setting
or changing it. When you select OK to proceed, the system validates
the entry and then displays the appropriate editor with informa-
tion retrieved from the recycle bin record already filled in.

Purging Records
You can permanently delete access control records contained in the
recycle bin by purging them. Once purged, these records no longer
exist and therefore, they can not be restored.
TAC I/NET Seven offers you the following three methods for
purging records from the recycle bin:
✦ Open the recycle bin and purge selected records directly using
the Purge button.
✦ Use the Options editor (see “Options” on page 17-87) to
configure TAC I/NET Seven to automatically purge records
that have been in the recycle bin for a specified number of
days. This function runs every 60 seconds. It uses the deletion
time and date stamp contained in each recycle bin record to
determine whether or not the record should be purged.
✦ Use the Options editor (see “Options” on page 17-87) to
configure TAC I/NET Seven to automatically purge all recycle
bin records at log off. Records can be purged silently at log off,
or you can configure the system to first prompt the user.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-5

TCON299–05/10
DPU/MCU Configuration Access Control

When prompted, the user can choose whether or not to purge

the recycle bin. The prompt also allows the user to turn off
future prompting and allow the system to silently purge the
recycle bin at log off.

DPU/MCU Configuration
This editor lets you define which devices (DPU, DIO, DIU, MR,
ASC) are currently connected to the SLI ports.
1. There is a slightly different procedure if you are connecting
through a DPI or MCI. If you are connecting through a 7791
DPI, perform Step a. If you are connecting through a 7793
MCI or 7798 I/SITE LAN, perform Step b.
a. Select Edit  Controller  DPU Configuration, or click
the DPU Configuration tool from the Controller toolbar.
The system displays the DPU Configuration editor. This
screen is similar to the MCU Configuration editor,
shown in Figure 17-2.
This editor lists all 32 point addresses for the controller to
which you are currently connected. For example, if you
are connected to controller #22, the editor lists addresses
2200 through 2231.
b. Select Edit  Controller  MCU Configuration, or click
the MCU Configuration tool on the Controller toolbar.
The system displays the MCU Configuration editor (see
Figure 17-2).
An MCI is a two-station device that allows a maximum of
64 subLAN devices (32 per station). This editor lists all
64 point addresses for the stations to which you are
currently connected. For example, if you are connected to
stations #14 and #15, the editor lists addresses 1400
through 1431 and 1500 through 1531.
2. Using the spindials, choose the type of device that will be
located at each address.
✧ Internal – there is no controller at this address to poll.

17-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

Note: This dialog may also

include a button labeled
Station, Station 1, or
Station 2. Refer to
TCON302, TAC I/NET
Seven System
Troubleshooting Guide,
for more information.

Figure 17-2. MCU Configuration Editor

✧ DPU – poll the DPU7910A, DPU7920, SCU1284, or OP5

Arming Terminal at this address.
✧ DIO – poll the DIO7940 or SCU1280 at this address.
✧ DIU – poll the DIU7930 or SCU1200 at this address (and
second address for a two station configuration).
✧ MR – poll the Micro Regulator at this address. (MR is not
available on the DPI7791 controller.)
✧ ASC – poll the Applications Specific Controller (ASC) at
this address. (ASC is not available on a DPI7791.)
3. Select OK to exit this procedure.

Doors
The door selection editor lets you add, modify, copy, or delete door
access control extensions in your system. This is necessary for any
point that will be associated with a door or OP5 arming terminal.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-7

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

Note: Changes made through the door editor generate a “door edit” audit
trail message. Refer to the section on Audit Trail Messages in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more
information.

1. Select Access  Doors, or click the Doors tool on the Access

toolbar. The system displays the Door Selection Summary
(see Figure 17-3).

Figure 17-3. Door Selection Summary

Note: The Access  Doors command will cause this editor to display all of
the points in the TAC I/NET Seven system that are eligible to be door
points (see below for criteria). If you wish to see only the eligible
points on the connected controller, use the Edit  Controller 
Doors command to access this editor.

The Door Selection Summary lists currently defined

controller points that meet the following criteria:
✧ The bit offset defined in the point address must be either
08 or 09 (i.e., the first or second door point in the
DPU/SCU, respectively).
✧ The point type must be set to DO.
✧ The point class must be set to internal.

17-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

✧ The three-state output parameter must be enabled.

Note: In addition to meeting door point criteria, the points must also have
been saved in the Network Configuration Editor.

If the point meets all the criteria described above, you may
add an access control extension (i.e., door extension) to the
point from the Door Selection Summary.
Each point is listed by address and name. A Y in the A/C
column indicates that an access control extension has been
added to the point.
2. Select a door point from the summary list.
If you choose a point that already has an access control exten-
sion, then the Add button is not enabled. In this case you may
either modify, copy, or delete the door access control exten-
sion.

Adding a Door Extension

Add a door extension to a point to configure the point as a typical
door or to configure it as an OP5 arming terminal.
1. Click Add to define a new door access control extension. The
system displays the Door Extensions editor (see Figure 17-4).
The fields and options displayed within this editor will vary,
depending on the firmware version installed in the
DPU/SCU/OP5.
The parameters within this editor are described in the chapter
on Access Control in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical
Reference Guide.
2. Define the Reader Parameters for the door, as follows:
a. Choose a Reader type from the drop-down list. This
parameter specifies which reader type to associate with
the chosen door point.
For an OP5 Arming Terminal, set this parameter to
“Keypad only.”

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-9

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

Figure 17-4. Door Extensions Editor

Note: If you select a custom reader type, the selected reader type must
match the selection for AC Reader Port in the active configuration.
Refer to the section on TAC I/NET Seven Configuration in
TCON157, TAC I/NET Forms and Worksheets Getting Started.

b. For configuring a PIN pad, one of the following parame-

ters will appear in this editor depending on the version of
firmware loaded in the door controller:
✢ PIN Pad – This option appears when the door
controller uses firmware prior to version 3.18. By
default, the PIN Pad option is greyed out. It becomes
available when you set the Reader Type to “I/DISC”
or “Wiegand 66” in the step above (Wiegand 26 and

17-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

Wiegand 32 readers always have an implied PIN pad

if the door's “PIN Enable” or “Sec/PIN” mode
schedule is active).
Activate () the PIN Pad option if a PIN pad will be
used to control access at the chosen door point.
✢ PIN Type – This parameter appears when the door
controller uses firmware version 3.18 or later. By
default, the PIN Type parameter is greyed out. It
becomes available when you set the Reader Type to
I/DISC, Wiegand 26/32/66, Custom Wiegand, or
Keypad only.
Use the PIN Type drop-down list to specify whether
or not a PIN pad is to be used at the door. By default,
this parameter is set to None. To configure this door
to use a PIN pad, specify the type of PIN pad being
used; either 8-bit or 26-bit. Be aware that user-
defined PIN pad functions require an 8-bit PIN pad.
An OP5 arming terminal also requires that you set
this parameter to “8-bit.”
When you configure the door to use a PIN pad, a person
attempting to gain access through the door will be
required to enter a valid PIN whenever the door is oper-
ating in the “PIN enable” or “Sec/PIN” mode.
c. If the door controller is loaded with firmware version
2.20 or later, a PIN Message Enable option appears in
this editor. This option specifies whether entry and exit
transaction messages will indicate that a PIN was used.
By default, the PIN Message Enable option is greyed
out. It becomes available when you configure the door to
use a PIN pad, as described in Step b.

Note: The “PIN message enable” option is automatically deactivated if you

select a reader type that does not support PIN pads. If you then select
a reader type with PIN pad support, you must manually activate this
option again.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-11

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

d. If the door controller is loaded with firmware version

2.20 or later, a PIN retry count parameter appears in this
editor. By default, the PIN retry count parameter is
greyed out. It becomes available when you configure the
door to use a PIN pad, as described in Step b.
The PIN retry count indicates the number of times (0–3)
a user may attempt to enter a PIN before generating a
Denied - PIN message. This message will be either an
alarm or a transaction, depending on the setting for this
event in the Message Type section of this editor.
An entry of zero (0) indicates zero retries; a Denied - PIN
message will be generated whenever an incorrect PIN is
entered. An entry of 1 indicates one retry: the user may
attempt to enter a correct PIN a total of two times (the
original attempt plus one retry) before the message is
generated.

Caution: In the following step, a Doors mode schedule of “Lock” overrides the
entry of “Anytime” for the Exit Reader parameter.

e. Choose an Exit reader setting from the drop-down list.

This parameter determines whether or not an exit reader
will be used with the chosen door point and specifies the
type of exit reader.
Depending on whether or not the door is configured
with a PIN pad, the following Exit Reader options are
available.
Door without PIN pad:
✢ None — Do not use exit reader for egress.
✢ Anytime — Valid key/cards are granted exit at all
times, regardless of active personnel schedules (i.e.,
24 hours, 7 days-a-week).
✢ Scheduled — Tie the exit reader validation to active
personnel schedules.

17-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

Door with PIN pad:

✢ None — Do not use exit reader or PIN pad for egress.
✢ Anytime — Valid key/cards are granted exit at all
times, regardless of active personnel schedules (i.e.,
24 hours, 7 days-a-week). No PIN is required.
✢ Sched. w/PIN — Tie the exit reader validation to
active personnel schedules. Entry of a valid PIN is
required to exit the area when the door is operating
in the “PIN Enable” or “Sec/PIN” mode.
✢ Sched. w/o PIN — Tie the exit reader validation to
active personnel schedules. No PIN is required to exit
the area.

Note: If you have defined one door in a DPU7920, and the door’s Exit
Reader parameter is set to anything besides “None,” then the second
reader port automatically becomes the exit reader. If you have
defined two doors (08DO or 09DO) in a DPU7920, neither door can
have an exit reader defined.
Only the first two doors in the SCU1284 can have an exit reader. If
you assign an exit reader to the first door, the reader input for a third
door will instead be used for the first door's exit reader. If you assign
an exit reader to the second door, the reader input for a fourth door
will instead be used for the second door's exit reader.

f. If you selected either Custom Wiegand or Custom ABA

in Step a, select the User Defined Length for the custom
card number. This field is disabled if any other reader
type is selected.

Note: The User Defined Length is not updated if you select a different
reader. If you switch between reader formats, the default value in this
field may not be valid for the selected card type.

g. Set the Intercard interval (sec). This specifies the

minimum acceptable interval between key/card reads.
The interval can be from 0 to 255 seconds.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-13

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

h. Choose the LED polarity. This is the polarity (either

Cathode or Anode) of the corresponding LEDs on the
key/card reader.
A “Dorado” setting is also available. Use this setting to
support the use of a three-LED Dorado reader.
Refer to any of the following manuals for more informa-
tion about three LED control:
✢ TCON116, DPU7910A Installation Guide
✢ TCON117, DPU7920 Installation Guide
✢ TCON312, SCU12xx Installation Guide
i. Activate () or deactivate () the Elevator option. Acti-
vate this function if the reader associated with this point
controls an elevator cab. (This option is not available if
you activate the Anti-passback option described in Step k,
below.)
j. If the door controller is loaded with firmware version
3.20 or later, a Card Translation option is available. Acti-
vate () this option if you wish to translate high I/DISC
or Watermark key/card numbers to values that are within
a 1-to-32,000 key/card range.
If the door controller is loaded with firmware prior to
version 3.20, this option is greyed out. In this case card
translation is enable via DIP switch 7 on the door
controller.
k. Activate () or deactivate () the Anti-passback
option. Activate this function to prevent persons who
have successfully gained access into an access controlled
area from passing their key/card back to another person
desiring access. (This option is not available if you activate
the Elevator option described in Step i, above.)

Note: The actual system response for both anti-passback and anti-tailgate
(below) is controlled by the anti-passback scheme selected for the
individual (see “Adding an Individual” on page 17-65).

17-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

l. If desired, enable () the Anti-tailgate check box. This

option encourages users to use the entry and exit readers
for each zone they enter by allowing entry only into zones
adjacent to the last-entered zone. (This option is only
available on DPUs with a firmware revision 2.20 or later,
and only if the Anti-passback option is enabled.)
m. Enter an Entry zone number (0–63; or 0–31 for DPU
firmware revisions prior to 2.20). This is the number of
the zone where the entry reader is located. (This option is
available only if the Anti-passback option is enabled.)
n. Enter an Exit zone number (0–63; or 0–31 for DPU
firmware revisions prior to 2.20). This is the number of
the zone where the exit reader is located. Leave this field
blank if there is no exit reader. (This option is available
only if the Anti-passback option is enabled.)

Note: If the Anti-tailgate option is enabled, any door between the non-
secured area and the secured area must have the same zone number
for both entry and exit. The non-secured area is any region not under
access control, such as a lobby, public area, or the outdoors.

o. Set the Anti-passback reset time (0 to 60 minutes). Any

value higher than zero (default) will cause the Anti-pass-
back flag to be reset for an individual the specified
number of minutes after the user passes through the
door. Leave this parameter at zero to prevent an auto-
matic reset of the APB flag. (This option is only available
on DPUs with a firmware revision 2.20 or later, and only if
the Anti-passback option is enabled.)
If an “APB Reset” action has been defined in the mode
schedule of this door point, it will still be honored (i.e.,
the individual’s Anti-passback flag may be reset by the
APB Reset action before the time specified in the field has
expired).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-15

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

p. On a door controller with firmware version 3.22 or later,

you can define a six-digit Door Code for the door. If you
enter less than six digits, leading zeros will be appended
to the code automatically. You can leave this field blank;
however, a Door Code of 000000 is not allowed.
3. Define the Transaction Distribution parameters and Alarm
Distribution parameters.

Note: In the following step, only distribution group 1 messages will cause a
dial Tap to dial out.

a. Choose a distribution Group (1–4). The message mask

will be applied to this group.
b. Define the message Mask. Set each of eight masking posi-
tions to the desired state, either activated () or deacti-
vated ().
c. Select a Cell number (1–1,023). You must assign a value
other than zero (0) in order for SevenTrends to store the
trend information. Otherwise, this field is not used in
TAC I/NET Seven and can be any value.
d. Choose a message Priority from the drop-down list.
4. Set the Door Parameters as required.
a. Choose a Door strike setting from the drop-down list.
This determines when the door strike (magnetic lock) is
to be controlled.
b. Set the Strike duration (1 to 255 seconds). This controls
the time that the door will remain unlocked after
key/card is read or a release button is pressed.
c. Set the Door open too long duration (0 to 7200
seconds). This specifies the length of time that can pass
before a “door open too long” message is generated
following a valid key/card.
d. Choose a Door sense switch setting from the drop-
down list. This determines whether or not a sense switch
exists at this door, and if so, the normal state of the
switch.

17-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

e. Choose a Door release switch setting from the drop-

down list. This determines whether or not a release
switch exists at this door, and if so, the normal state of the
switch.
f. Enter the duration of the Re-lock timer, in seconds. The
timer may be set from 0 to 255 seconds, in 1-second
intervals. The default is 4 seconds. This option deter-
mines the amount of time that passes between the door
opening and re-energizing the lock. (This option is only
available on DPUs with a firmware revision 2.20 or later.)
g. Activate () or deactivate () the Shunt option. Acti-
vate this function if there is a shunt installed with this
door.
h. On a door controller with firmware version 3.21 or
earlier, activate () or deactivate () the First key auto-
unlock option. Activate this function to permit the door
to remain in the Secure or PIN Enable mode past the
scheduled unlock time, until the first valid entry
sequence is performed.
i. Enter the duration of the Door closed timer, in seconds.
The timer may be set from 0 to 25.5 seconds, in 0.1-
second intervals. The default is 2 seconds. This option is
used to minimize false “forced door” alarms by setting a
timer within which the door may bounce while closing
without generating the forced door message. (This option
is only available on DPUs with a firmware revision 2.20 or
later.)
5. Choose a Message Type from the drop-down list for each of
the messages listed in the Message Type section. The following
message types are available:

Note: The Door open too long, Door forced, Door normal, SLI not avail-
able, Door re-locked, Mode messages, and Request to exit messages
use the masks and distribution group that have been defined within
the DO point editor for the door point. All other messages listed in the
Message Type section use the masks and distribution group defined in
this editor.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-17

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

✧ None – Choose this setting to prevent the message from

being generated (i.e., the message will not be displayable
within an AMT window and will not be available for use
with Event Actions/Sequences).
✧ Transact – This option is available for all listed messages
except Door Forced, Door Open Too Long, Door
Normal, SLI Not Available, Door Relocked, Mode
Messages, and request to Exit. Choose this setting to treat
the message as a transaction. The masks and distribution
group that you defined within this editor for transactions
will be applied to all occurrences of this message from the
chosen door point.
✧ Message – This option is only available for Door Forced,
Door Open Too Long, Door Normal, and Mode
messages. Choose this setting to treat the message as a
normal message. These messages will use the masks and
distribution group defined for the DO point.
✧ Alarm – This option is available for all listed messages.
Choose this setting to treat the message as an alarm. If
you are currently defining the Door Forced, Door Open
Too Long, Door Normal, SLI Not Available, Door
Relocked, Mode Messages, or request to Exit message
type as “Alarm,” then the masks and distribution group
that you defined within the DO point editor will be
applied to all occurrences of this message from the
chosen door point. If you are defining any other message
type as “Alarm,” then the masks and distribution group
that you defined within this editor for alarms will be
applied to all occurrences of this message from the
chosen door point.
6. Use the ATS button to define the Mode Schedules as
described in “Mode Schedules” on page 17-19.
7. Use the Features button to define user-defined door
attributes and PIN pad functions. Refer to “User-defined
Door Features” on page 17-22 for instructions.
8. Use the Sounder button to configure sounder settings for a
reader or for an OP5 arming terminal. Refer to “Sounder” on
page 17-27 for instructions.

17-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

9. Select OK. The system displays the Door Selection summary

(see Figure 17-3). The door point has a Y in the A/C column.
10. Repeat Steps 1 through 9 as required for additional door
extensions.
11. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Mode Schedules
Each access control extension will include standard time sched-
uling parameters for scheduling non-access oriented operations.
The only difference between a door schedule and other TAC I/NET
Seven time schedules is the available schedule actions.
1. Select ATS from the Door Extensions editor (see Figure 17-4)
or highlight a door and select Door ATS from the Door Selec-
tion Summary (see Figure 17-3). The system displays the
Doors – Schedule editor (see Figure 17-5).

Figure 17-5. Doors – Schedule Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-19

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

2. Choose an action line that does not have a schedule and select
Add. The system displays the Door – Actions editor (see
Figure 17-6).

Figure 17-6. Door – Actions Editor

3. Choose an Action from the drop-down list. The following

actions are available:
✧ APB Reset
Define the schedule for resetting anti-passback. At the
specified time, all anti-passback flags associated with the
door will be reset (enabling all key/cards).

Note: This will only reset anti-passback for this door. If zoned anti-pass-
back is being used, an APB Reset command must be entered in each
of the associated doors’ mode schedules.

✧ Lock
Define the schedule for issuing a Lock command to the
door. The lock mode disables all reader transactions
including the exit push button.

17-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

✧ Unlock
Define the schedule for issuing an Unlock command to
the door. While in the unlocked state, the doors will not
require a key/card read to gain access.
✧ Secure
This is the normal state of door(s). While in the secured
state, the door must be opened using a valid key/card or
the exit release push button (if so equipped). All
key/cards will be validated based on personnel schedules,
tenant, key/card issue number, anti-passback, and access
level.
✧ PIN Enable (firmware version 3.20 or earlier)
—OR—
Sec/PIN (firmware version 3.21 or later)
When this mode is active, the PIN reader on the DPU will
be enabled. This mode is the same as the “Secure” mode
except that it also requires the individual to enter a valid
PIN after a valid key/card read. If an individual enters an
invalid PIN, the setting of the PIN Retry Count param-
eter in the Door Extension Editor will determine how
many retries (if any) the individual can use to enter a
valid PIN.
✧ Sec/Code (firmware version 3.22 or later)
This mode is similar to the “Secure” mode; however,
rather than using a key/card to gain access, the user
simply uses the PIN pad to enter the door's assigned
code. If the individual enters the correct door code, the
door will open.
When the door is operating in the Sec/Code mode, user-
definable door attributes or PIN pad functions are not
available.
4. For a door controller with firmware version 3.22 or later, a
“first key mode” is supported. The First key mode parameter
is only active when you set the Action (described in Step 3) to
Secure, Sec/PIN, or Sec/Code.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-21

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

Choose a setting for this parameter from the drop-down list.

The options available for this parameter will differ depending
on the setting of the Action parameter.
The door will switch to the mode you specify for this param-
eter at the first occurrence of an individual gaining authorized
access at the door. The door will remain in this mode until the
next scheduled action becomes active.
5. Enter a time using 24-hour format in the Time field.
6. Select the days when you want this action to occur. A check
mark next to the day indicates that the action will occur on
that day. Each day can be toggled between activated () and
deactivated ().
7. Select OK. The system displays the Doors – Schedule editor
(see Figure 17-5 on page 17-19) showing the action parame-
ters that you entered.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 as required for additional Schedules.
9. Select Close to save the settings and return to the Door
Extensions Editor (see Figure 17-4 on page 17-10) or to the
Door Selection Summary (see Figure 17-3 on page 17-8).

User-defined Door Features

Note: User-definable door attributes and PIN pad functions are only avail-
able if the selected door meets the following requirements:
✦ The door controller is loaded with firmware version 3.18 or later.
✦ For PIN pad functions, the keypad must provide an 8-bit burst
output.
The DPU7920 with firmware version 3.16 also provides user-defined
door features except for the attributes used for the two-man rule.
Only an OP5 arming terminal will provide the “Maintenance” door
attribute.

17-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

TAC I/NET Seven displays this editor when you select Features
from the Door Extension editor. The user-definable features avail-
able for a door can be categorized into the following two groups:
✦ Attributes – Door attributes are used to initiate specific
actions in the access control system when select users perform
a key/card read at the door.
Door attributes will also determine a user’s access level when
the user types a valid access code at an OP5 arming terminal.
✦ Functions – PIN pad functions allow users to operate and
monitor system functions directly from a PIN pad.
Refer to “User-definable Door Attributes and PIN Pad Functions”
in the TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide for an in depth
description of this feature.
Adding Features to a Door
Add features to the door as follows:
1. Select Features from the Door Extensions editor (see
Figure 17-4). The system displays the Door Features editor
(see Figure 17-7).

Figure 17-7. Door Features

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-23

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

2. If necessary, configure the PIN pad to control an intruder

alarm system as follows:
a. In the Intruder Alarm System section, activate () the
Enable option.
b. Set the Arm Ready Bit Offset. The state of the DI point
that receives the arm ready status signal from the alarm
system will be used in TAC I/NET Seven to determine
whether or not the alarm system can be armed.
You must use a DI point on the current door controller to
receive the Arm Status from your alarm system. For this
reason you need only specify the point’s bit offset. For
example, if this signal enters the door controller at DI
point 00 (TB1-1 on a DPU7920), then enter a bit offset of
00.
c. Choose the appropriate discrete setting for the Alarm
Ready State. For example, if your alarm system sends a
level 1 discrete signal when its ready to be armed, then
choose 1. Otherwise, choose 0.
d. Set the Arm Relay Bit Offset. The output from this DO
point will be used to control the relay that will arm or
disarm the alarm system.
You must use a DO point on the current door controller
to arm the alarm system. For this reason you need only
specify the point’s bit offset. For example, if you use the
relay at DO point 07 (TB9-10/11/12 on a DPU7920),
enter a bit offset of 07.
e. Choose the appropriate discrete setting for the Alarm
Relay State. For example, if you must energize the relay
in order to arm the alarm system, then choose 1. Other-
wise, choose 0.
3. If you did not activate the Enable option in the Intruder
Alarm System section, set the Green LED State to the appro-
priate setting (0 or 1) for your system.
When you view the status of a discrete point from the PIN
pad, the green LED will illuminate if the discrete point’s value
matches the setting of the Green LED State parameter.

17-24 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

4. Assign user-defined attributes and PIN pad functions to the

door as follows:
a. Use the Extended mode timeout parameter to specify
how many seconds the system will wait for a user to press
a valid function key. If you set this parameter to 0, you
effectively disable the extended mode and prohibit users
from accessing the PIN pad functions.
The timeout counter begins as soon as a user properly
initiates the function-entry mode (for example, by
pressing the # key and then swiping their card). If the
user does not enter a valid code or press the # key within
the specified timeout period, the system will automati-
cally exit the function-entry mode.
b. Assign an attribute or PIN pad function to the door by
highlighting the desired index number (key number for
PIN pad functions) and selecting Add. The system
displays the Feature Definition editor (see Figure 17-8).

Figure 17-8. Feature Definition Editor

c. Choose a feature from the Function/Attribute drop-

down list. The following door features are available:
✢ Arm/disarm – Use to arm or disarm the alarm
system, or to view the arm status.
✢ Door mode – Use to place the door into the Lock,
Unlock, or Secure mode. Can also be used to view the
door mode.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-25

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

✢ Discrete status – Use to view the current status of

specific DI points.
✢ Control relay – Use to manually control specific
relays.
✢ Auto Disarm – Use to automatically disarm the
alarm system when a user gains authorized access
through the door.
✢ Escort Required – Use to restrict selected individ-
uals from gaining access through this door without
an escort. Can also be used to assign level 3 access to
selected users of an Intrusion Alarm System.
✢ Escort – Use to allow selected individuals to escort
restricted individuals through this door. Can also be
used to assign level 2 access to selected users of an
Intrusion Alarm System.
✢ Maintenance – This feature is only available on an
OP5 arming terminal. Use this feature to assign a
combination of level 2 and level 3 access to selected
users of an Intrusion Alarm System.
d. Set the parameters for the selected feature. The following
table describes each feature’s parameters.

Table 17-1. Door Feature Parameters

Feature Parameters

Disarm – Activate () to allow a user to disarm the alarm system.

Arm – Activate () to allow a user to arm the alarm system.
Control door mode – Activate () to have TAC I/NET Seven automatically
change the door mode when a user arms or disarms the alarm system. If the user
Arm/disarm
arms the alarm, the door mode changes to Secure. If the user disarms the alarm,
the door mode changes to Unlock.
Note: If you deactivate () all of the above options, the Arm/disarm function will
allow a user to simply view the current arm status.
Secure – Activate () to allow a user to place the door into the Secure mode.
Unlock – Activate () to allow a user to place the door into the Unlock mode.
Door mode Lock – Activate () to allow a user to place the door into the Lock mode.
Note: If you deactivate () all of the above options, the Door mode function will
allow a user to simply view the current door mode.

17-26 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

Table 17-1. Door Feature Parameters (Continued)

Feature Parameters
First input – Define the bit offset of the first DI point that a user can monitor from
the PIN pad.
Discrete status
Last input – Define the bit offset of the last DI point that a user can monitor from
the PIN pad.
First Relay – Define the bit offset of the first relay (DO point) that a user can control
from the PIN pad.
Control relay
Last Relay – Define the bit offset of the last relay (DO point) that a user can control
from the PIN pad.
Auto Disarm None
Escort required None
Escort None
Maintenance None

e. Select OK to save your settings.

f. If necessary, continue adding features to the door by
repeating the above steps.
When you have finished adding features to the door, the features
become available for selection in the door’s personnel schedules.
This allows you to selectively choose which door features are active
or inactive for individuals or groups that use these schedules. Refer
to “Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations” on page 17-30 for
more information.

Sounder
Note: Sounder functions are only available with the SCU1284 door
controller and OP5 arming terminal.
For door readers that allow an external device to control the
reader’s internal sounder, the SCU1284 can be configured to
control the sounder. The OP5 arming terminal provides an internal
sounder that can also be configured.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-27

TCON299–05/10
Doors Access Control

1. Select Sounder from the Door Extension editor (see

Figure 17-4). This button is visible only when the door
controller is an SCU1284 or OP5 arming terminal. The
system displays the Sounder Selection editor (see
Figure 17-4).

Figure 17-9. Sounder Selection Editor

2. Set the Sounder Polarity to the signal level (high or low)

necessary to activate the sounder. If you choose the wrong
setting, the sounder will activate shortly after you close this
editor. In this case, the sounder will remain activated until
you correct the Sounder Polarity setting.
3. Choose a sound pattern for each of the states listed in this
editor. The states shown will differ depending on whether you
are configuring an SCU1284 or an OP5 arming terminal
SCU1284:

✦ Read ✦ Door re-locked

✦ Denied ✦ Door open too long
✦ Bad card read ✦ Door forced
✦ Door open ✦ Request to exit

17-28 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Doors

OP5 Arming Terminal:

✦ Read ✦ Trouble/Fault
✦ Denied ✦ Door open too long
✦ Bad card read ✦ Door forced
✦ Entry/Exit in ✦ Request to exit
progress
4. Select OK to save your settings and to close the editor.

Modifying a Door Extension

Modifying a door extension is similar to adding a door extension.
Use the same procedure as described in “Adding a Door Extension”
on page 17-9 except that you choose a point that has a Y in the A/C
column and select the Modify button from the Door Selection (see
Figure 17-3 on page 17-8) rather than the Add button.

Copying a Door Extension

Once you have added a door extension, you can copy it to other
points.
1. Choose the door point whose door extension you want to
copy from the Door Selection summary (see Figure 17-3 on
page 17-8). This point is now the source of the door exten-
sions you want to copy.
2. Select Copy. The system displays the Copy Target dialog box.
3. Choose the door point that you want to receive the schedule
and select OK. The system displays the Door Extensions
editor (see Figure 17-4 on page 17-10).
4. Modify the parameters as required. (Refer to “Adding a Door
Extension” on page 17-9.)
5. On the Door Extensions editor select OK. The system displays
the Door Selection summary (see Figure 17-3 on page 17-8).

Note: If a No Reply message is received, the door controller is not communi-

cating with the MCI.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-29

TCON299–05/10
Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations Access Control

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 as required to copy additional door

points.
7. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Door Extension

Use the following procedure to delete a door extension.
1. Choose the point whose door extension you want to delete
from the Door Selection summary (see Figure 17-3 on page
17-8) and select Delete. The system displays the Door Exten-
sion Delete confirmation dialog box.
2. Select Yes. The system deletes the door extension and
displays the Door Selection summary (see Figure 17-3 on
page 17-8).
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as required to delete additional door
points.
4. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations

Personnel schedules are similar to the schedules defined in the
Time Scheduling editor, but they do not have any actions. The
personnel schedules you define here become the door schedules
available in the Adding an Individual procedure (see page 17-65).
Once a door schedule is assigned to an individual or a group, that
particular schedule is used to grant or deny access when a key/card
is presented at the door.
In addition to personnel schedules, you can also define shift rota-
tions to control access. This feature is supported only door control-
lers loaded with firmware version 3.01 or later. Refer to “Shift
Rotations” on page 17-38 for more information.

17-30 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations

Personnel Schedules
Access personnel schedules as follows:
1. Select Access  Personnel Schedules, or click the
Personnel Schedules tool on the Access toolbar. The system
displays the Door Selection summary (see Figure 17-10).

Figure 17-10. Door Selection Summary

Note: The Access  Personnel Schedules command will cause this

editor to display all of the points in the TAC I/NET Seven system that
are eligible to be door points. If you wish to see only the eligible points
on the connected controller, use the Edit  Controller  Personnel
Schedules command to access this editor.

2. Choose a door and select Schedules. The system displays the

Personnel Schedules summary (see Figure 17-11). You can
assign up to 31 time schedules to each door.
3. You may now add, modify, copy, or delete personnel sched-
ules and shift rotations. Procedures for each of these options
are described below.
4. When you are finished, select Close to exit this editor.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-31

TCON299–05/10
Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations Access Control

Figure 17-11. Personnel Schedules Summary

Adding a Personnel Schedule

1. From the Personnel Schedules summary, shown in
Figure 17-11, choose a schedule without a name and select
Add. The system displays the New Schedule dialog box (see
Figure 17-12).

Figure 17-12. New Schedule Dialog Box

2. Enter the schedule Name (up to 16 characters).

3. You must now choose which type of schedule that you wish to
create. Choose the Personnel Schedule option.

17-32 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations

4. Select OK. The system displays the Personnel Schedules editor

(see Figure 17-13).
Each time schedule can contain up to seven access intervals.
An access interval is the time period during which a key/card
can access the door, defined with a start and stop time entered
in 24-hour format. You can then assign the schedule you
create as a temporary schedule, a special day schedule, or a
regular schedule for a weekday or several weekdays

Figure 17-13. Personnel Schedule Editor

5. Choose an access interval number and select Add. The system

displays the Schedule Details editor (see Figure 17-14).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-33

TCON299–05/10
Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations Access Control

Figure 17-14. Schedule Details Editor

The Schedule Details editor is divided into two sections:

Schedule and Features. The features that appear in the
Features section are unique for each door and reflect the
door’s current configuration. The actual parameters that
appear in the Features group on your system will depend on
which features have been defined for the door you have
selected.
6. Enter the Begin time and End time for this access interval in
24-hour format.
7. Select the days when you want the access interval to be
enabled.
A checkmark next to the day indicates that the access interval
is active for that day. Each day can be toggled between acti-
vated () and deactivated ().
8. If necessary, assign this access interval to special day schedules
and/or temporary schedules by activating () and deacti-
vating () the necessary checkboxes.

17-34 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations

Refer to “Special Days” and “Temporary Schedules” in the

TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide for more infor-
mation about these features.
9. If necessary, enable door features for this access interval by
activating () and deactivating () the necessary checkboxes
in the Features section of the editor. Refer to “User-defined
Door Features” on page 17-22 for more information.
If the door is an OP5 arming terminal, the Escort, Escort
required, and Maintenance features will determine a user’s
access level in the IAS. Refer to TCON314, “Intrusion Alarm
System Installation Guide,” for more information.
10. Select OK. The system displays the Time Schedule editor (see
Figure 17-13) showing any access intervals that have been
entered.

Note: If you have established any temporary schedules, you can select the
days when you want them to run. Do not designate a day as having a
temporary schedule if you have not established it. If you do, no
actions will occur that day.

11. Repeat Steps 5 through 10 as required to add more access

intervals (up to seven) for this schedule.
12. If you wish to use a Temporary schedule for this Personnel
schedule, use the spindials to choose Temporary schedule 1,
Temporary schedule 2, or Both.
13. If necessary, you can select the Spec Days button to define
special days. Refer to “Adding Special Days” on page 10-14 for
detailed instructions.
14. Select OK to save your settings and close the Personnel Sched-
ules editor. The system displays the Personnel Schedules
summary (see Figure 17-11 on page 17-32).
15. Repeat Steps 1 through 14 as required to add more door
schedules (up to 31).
16. When you are finished adding door schedules, select Close.
The system returns to the Door Selection summary (see
Figure 17-10 on page 17-31).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-35

TCON299–05/10
Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations Access Control

17. Repeat this procedure as required to add schedules to other

doors.
18. From the Door Selection summary, select Close to exit this
procedure.
Modifying a Personnel Schedule
Modifying a door schedule is similar to adding a door schedule. Use
the same procedure as described in “Adding a Door Schedule” on
page 17-32 except that you choose a schedule that already exists and
select Modify rather than Add from the Personnel Schedules editor
(see Figure 17-11 on page 17-32).
Copying a Personnel Schedule
1. From the Personnel Schedules editor (see Figure 17-11 on
page 17-32), choose the schedule you want to copy and select
Copy. The system displays the New Schedule dialog box (see
Figure 17-15).

Figure 17-15. New Schedule Dialog Box

2. Enter the new schedule Name (up to 16 characters).

3. Select the Schedule number that you want to receive the
schedule.
4. Select OK. The system displays the Personnel Schedule editor
(see Figure 17-13 on page 17-33).
5. Modify the access intervals as required (see “Adding a Door
Schedule” on page 17-32).
6. Select OK. The system displays the Personnel Schedules editor
(see Figure 17-11 on page 17-32) with the new schedule
added.

17-36 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required to copy more schedules.

8. Select Close to exit this procedure.
Copy All
The Copy All function allows you to copy all personnel schedules
from the currently selected (source) door to a target door. Use the
following steps to copy all personnel schedules:
1. From the Personnel Schedules editor (see Figure 17-11 on
page 17-32), select Copy All. The system displays the Copy All
dialog box (see Figure 17-16).

Figure 17-16. Personnel Schedules – Copy Dialog Box

2. Choose a target door point from the list and select OK. The
system copies the personnel schedules from the source door
to the target door.
Deleting a Personnel Schedule
From the Personnel Schedules editor (see Figure 17-11 on page
17-32) choose the schedule that you want to delete and select
Delete. The system deletes the schedule.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-37

TCON299–05/10
Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations Access Control

Shift Rotations
Note: This feature is supported on door controllers loaded with firmware
version 3.01 or later.

A shift rotation is a set of personnel schedules that are activated in

a specific order and remain activated for a specific duration. You
must have already created personnel schedules before you can
create a shift rotation.
Access shift rotations just as you would access personnel schedules.
If necessary, refer to “Personnel Schedules” on page 17-31 for
instructions.
Adding a Shift Rotation
1. From the Personnel Schedules editor (shown in Figure 17-11
on page 17-32) choose a schedule without a name and select
Add. The system displays the New Schedule dialog (see
Figure 17-12 on page 17-32).
2. Enter the shift rotation Name (up to 16 characters).
3. You must now choose which type of schedule that you wish to
create. Choose the Shift Rotation option.
4. Select OK. The system displays the Shift Rotation editor (see
Figure 17-17).
5. Add schedules to the shift rotation as follows:
a. Highlight a schedule from the list of Available Sched-
ules on the right side of the dialog. (If no schedules are
listed, you have not defined any personnel schedules for
the selected door. In this case you must exit this dialog
and add personnel schedules to the door. Refer to
“Adding a Personnel Schedule” on page 17-32 for
instructions.)
b. Select the <-Add button to add the highlighted schedule
on the right to the shift rotation on the left.
c. Repeat these steps as necessary to add up to 32 schedules
to the shift rotation.

17-38 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations

Figure 17-17. Shift Rotation Editor

d. Use the Move Up and Move Down commands to adjust

the order of each schedule in the Rotation List. Shift rota-
tion schedules are used in the order that you define here.
e. If necessary, use the Remove or Remove All buttons to
remove schedules from the Rotation List.
6. Define the Rotation Start as follows:
a. Define the start Date. Click the drop-down button next
to this field to display a calendar. Use the calendar to
choose the start date.
b. Define the start Time. You can type the time directly or
use the up and down arrows next to this field to adjust
the time.
7. Define the Rotation Properties as follows:
a. Choose the Days or Hours option, depending on how
often shift schedules will change.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-39

TCON299–05/10
Personnel Schedules and Shift Rotations Access Control

b. Set the Rotation Interval to a value from 1 to 365. This

parameter will determine the number of days or hours
that will elapse before the door switches from the current
schedule to the next schedule in the shift rotation.
8. Select OK to save the Shift Rotation.
Modifying a Shift Rotation
Modifying a shift rotation is similar to adding a shift rotation. Use
the same procedure as described in “Adding a Shift Rotation” on
page 17-38 except that you choose a shift rotation that already
exists and select Modify rather than Add from the Personnel Sched-
ules editor (see Figure 17-11 on page 17-32).
Copying a Shift Rotation
1. From the Personnel Schedules editor (see Figure 17-11 on
page 17-32), choose the shift rotation you want to copy and
select Copy. The system displays the New Schedule dialog box
(see Figure 17-15).

Figure 17-18. New Schedule Dialog Box

2. Enter the new shift rotation Name (up to 16 characters).

3. Select the Schedule number that you want to receive the shift
rotation.
4. Select OK. The system displays the Shift Rotation editor (see
Figure 17-17 on page 17-39).
5. Modify the shift rotation as required (refer to “Adding a Shift
Rotation” on page 17-38 for instructions).

17-40 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Elevators

6. Select OK. The system displays the Personnel Schedules editor

(see Figure 17-11 on page 17-32) with the new shift rotation
added.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required to copy more shift rota-
tions.
8. Select Close to exit this procedure.
Deleting a Shift Rotation
From the Personnel Schedules editor (see Figure 17-11 on page
17-32) choose the shift rotation that you want to delete and select
Delete. The system deletes the shift rotation.

Elevators
The Elevator control function will work in conjunction with the
access control parameters and personnel schedules to control
access to banks of elevators. Activating () the elevator option in
the Door Extension editor (see Figure 17-4) will cause the door
controller to process each reader transaction as though it were an
entry into an elevator cab.

Note: Changing a Door from elevator to non-elevator, or vice versa, will

cause the door controller to purge its database.

In addition to supplying the above parameters at the door

controller level, it will also be necessary to supply the DPI, MCI, or
I/SITE LAN with the information required to associate an elevator
cab with the discrete output points that enable the floor relays, and
the discrete input points that monitor the button selection.
There will be an elevator extension on each door point (BB 08 and
09) in the DPI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN that is assigned as an elevator.
After adding the extension to the point you must define the
Elevator parameters such as floor selection time, floor designation
description, button enable point, and button selection point.
Before defining an elevator, you must do the following:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-41

TCON299–05/10
Elevators Access Control

1. Define a door point as an elevator in the Door Extensions

editor (see Figure 17-4 on page 17-10).
2. Use the Resident I/O Points editor (see Chapter 5, Point Defi-
nition and Addressing) to define a floor enable point (DO) and
a floor selection point (DI) for each floor that will be assigned
to an elevator.
3. Use the Personnel Schedules editor (see page 17-30) to define
up to 31 schedules for the selected elevator door point.

Adding an Elevator Extension

Use the following procedure to add an elevator extension:
1. Select Edit  Controller  Elevators, or click the Elevators
tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays the Resi-
dent I/O Points summary with the elevators option selected
(see Figure 17-19). This summary lists the available door
(elevator) points.

Figure 17-19. Resident I/O Points Summary (EL selected)

17-42 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Elevators

2. Choose a point that represents a reader in an elevator cab and

that does not have a Y in the EL column. Highlight the point
and select the Add button. The system displays the Elevators
summary (see Figure 17-20).

Figure 17-20. Elevators Summary

Floors
For each elevator floor extension assigned to a point in the DPI,
MCI, or I/SITE LAN, there must be an associated DO and DI point
attached to the elevator extension. This association of DO and DI
point produces a closed-loop feedback allowing the controller to
identify an elevator floor selection with each successful key/card
reader access.
1. Enter a Floor selection time (sec) (1–255). This is the
amount of time in seconds that the key/card user has to make
a selection from the floor buttons in the elevator cab. The
default is 5.
2. Select Add. The system displays the Elevators – Floor Parame-
ters editor (see Figure 17-21). This allows you to define the
floor index attached to this elevator extension.
3. Enter the Floor index number (1–62). This is the line
number in the Elevator summary list.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-43

TCON299–05/10
Elevators Access Control

Figure 17-21. Elevators – Floor Parameters Editor

4. Enter the Floor designation (up to two characters).This

identifies the floor. For example, the first level of a basement
could be represented as B1.
5. In the Button enable field choose a point from the drop-
down list of all possible discrete output points in the
controller.
6. In the Button selection field choose a point from the list of
all possible discrete input points in the controller.
7. Select OK. The system displays the Elevators summary (see
Figure 17-20).
8. How you proceed from this point will depend upon the type
of elevator control you are implementing. Refer to the Access
Control chapter in the Technical Reference Guide for a
description of Elevator Control Schemes, then use the appro-
priate steps below:
Traditional Elevator Control
Tradition elevator control uses floor maps to allow each elevator to
support up to 62 floors. This type of control has been used for as
long as elevators have been supported within TAC I/NET Seven.
a. Select Floors. The system displays the Tenant Selection
summary (see Figure 17-22).
b. Choose a tenant from the list and click the Select button.
The system displays the Elevators – Floor Schedules
summary (see Figure 17-23).

17-44 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Elevators

Figure 17-22. Tenant Selection Summary

Figure 17-23. Elevators – Floor Schedules Summary

c. Choose a schedule from the list and select Select. The

system displays the Elevators – Access Intervals
Summary, shown in Figure 17-24.
d. Choose an access interval from the list and click Select.
The system displays the Elevators – Floor Map summary
(see Figure 17-25).
e. Choose the DO points which enable the floor selection
buttons for the appropriate floors. Points marked with
“[X]” will enable their respective floor selection button in
the elevator cab.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-45

TCON299–05/10
Elevators Access Control

Figure 17-24. Elevators – Access Intervals Summary

Figure 17-25. Elevators – Floor Map Summary

f. When you have finished choosing the appropriate DO

points, select OK. The system returns to the Elevators –
Access Intervals summary.
g. You may continue assigning floors to access intervals or
you may exit the elevator functions by selecting Close at
each editor.

17-46 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Key/Card Translations

Extended Elevator Control

Extended elevator control does away with floor mapping and
allows you to assign floors directly to tenants. Using this type of
elevator control, each elevator can support up to 79 floors.
a. From the Tenant Editor, assign floors (i.e., door enable
points) to the tenant. Refer to “Adding a New Tenant” on
page 17-51 for more information.
b. Assign floors to individuals and/or groups as necessary.
Refer to “Adding an Individual” on page 17-65 and
“Adding an Access Group” on page 17-57 for more infor-
mation.

Key/Card Translations
If desired, you may use the Key/card Translation editor to translate
large key/card numbers, such as those used by I/DISC and Water-
mark, into smaller numbers. This editor has a maximum of 128 sets
of translation parameters.

Note: Key/card translations are required for systems using door controller
firmware prior to version 2.20. For firmware version 2.20 or later,
key/card translations are optional.
TAC I/NET Seven allows you to use combinations of translated and
non-translated key/cards. Therefore, you must be careful not to
duplicate the key/card assignments. If both a non-translated and a
translated key/card are assigned to the same individual number, only
the first one defined will work. The duplicate key/card will be ignored
by the door controller.

1. Select Access  Key/Card Translations, or click the

Key/Card Translations tool on the Access toolbar. The system
displays the Key/Card Translation summary (see
Figure 17-26).
2. You may now add, modify, copy, or delete key/card transla-
tions. Procedures for each of these options are described
below.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-47

TCON299–05/10
Key/Card Translations Access Control

Figure 17-26. Key/card Translation Summary

3. When you are finished, select OK to accept your changes and

exit this editor.

Adding a Key/Card Translation

Use the following steps to add a key/card translation:
1. Select Add from the Key/Card Translation summary (see
Figure 17-26). The system displays the Key/Card Translation
editor (see Figure 17-27).

Figure 17-27. Key/Card Translation Editor

2. Enter a Source (starting) key/card number to be translated.

This number can be up to 16 digits long.

17-48 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Key/Card Translations

3. Enter a Target key/card number (1–32,000) to which the

source key/card number will be translated. The remaining
key/card numbers will be translated to consecutive key/card
numbers following the target number you define here.
4. Enter a Count value (1–32,000). This is the total number of
key/card numbers to be translated.
5. Enter a Tenant number (1–255). This is the tenant to which
this block of key/cards will be assigned.
6. Select OK. The system displays the Key/Card Translation
summary (see Figure 17-26).
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required for additional key/card
translations.
Using Figure 17-27 as an example, key/tag numbers 778240 to
802240 will be translated to key/tag numbers 1 to 24000, respec-
tively.

Modifying a Key/Card Translation

Modifying a key/card translation is similar to adding a key/card
translation. Use the same procedure as described in “Adding a
Key/Card Translation” on page 17-48 except that you choose an
existing entry and select Modify rather than Add from the
Key/Card Translation summary (see Figure 17-26).

Deleting a Key/Card Translation

1. Choose the key/card translation you want to delete and select
Delete from the Key/Card Translation summary (see
Figure 17-26). The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
2. Select Yes. The system deletes the key/card translation and
displays the Key/Card Translation summary (see
Figure 17-26).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-49

TCON299–05/10
Tenants Access Control

Tenants
The concept of tenants, as used in TAC I/NET Seven, lets you assign
access controlled doors to more than one tenant. Tenants are
usually different groups that inhabit the same facility but that are
billed separately. For example, a single large building may be inhab-
ited by several companies. Each company would be considered a
separate tenant.
When you add a tenant to the system, you must define the block of
key/cards that will be allocated to that tenant and you must define
through which doors that tenant will have access.
Each tenant is assigned a number (1–255). Tenant 0 (“All Tenants”)
is used to define doors, groups, and schedules that are common to
all tenants. Tenant 0 cannot be deleted. You cannot add individuals
to Tenant 0.
1. Select Access  Tenants, or click the Tenants tool on the
Access toolbar. The system displays the Tenants summary (see
Figure 17-28).

Figure 17-28. Tenants Summary

2. You may now add, modify, copy, or delete tenants. Procedures

for each of these options are described below.
3. When you are finished, select Close to leave this editor.

17-50 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Tenants

Adding a New Tenant

Note: The Add option in the Tenants Summary will be greyed out if the
user's host password prevents full access to all remaining undefined
tenants or if all 255 tenants have already been added.

1. From the Tenants summary (see Figure 17-28) select Add.

The system displays the Add – Tenants dialog box (see
Figure 17-29).

Figure 17-29. Add – Tenants Dialog Box

2. Enter the New tenant number (1 to 255) and select OK. The
system displays the Tenants editor (see Figure 17-30).
3. Enter the Tenant name (up to 16 characters).
4. Enter the Tenant code (up to 8 digits). This field is not avail-
able for Tenant 0.

Note: A system that uses I/DISCs requires tenant codes greater than 0.

5. Enter the First individual number (1 to 32,000). This field is

not available for Tenant 0.
6. Enter the Number of individuals (0 to 32,000) that the tenant
will receive. This field is not available for Tenant 0.
7. If desired, select a Duress Scheme from the drop-down box.
See your TAC I/NET Seven system administrator or contact
TAC Product Support Services for more information about
duress.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-51

TCON299–05/10
Tenants Access Control

Figure 17-30. Tenants Editor

8. Check () the Disabled check box if you wish to deny access
to all individuals assigned to this tenant. All key/cards for
individuals assigned to this tenant will be disabled. This field
is not available for Tenant 0.

Warning: This check box setting does not take effect until you select OK to exit
the Tenants editor.

9. Choose the doors (including elevator door points and/or

floor enable points) that this tenant will be able to access.
Activate [X] or deactivate [ ] individual doors. If the tenant is
to have access to all of the doors, select All Yes. If the tenant is
to have access to none of the doors, select All No.

Note: Only doors saved in the network configuration are listed.

10. Select OK. The system displays the Tenant summary (see
Figure 17-28 on page 17-50).

17-52 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Tenants

11. Repeat Steps 1 through 10 as required to add more tenants.

12. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Modifying Tenant Parameters

Note: The Modify option in the Tenants Summary will be greyed out if the
user's host password prevents full access to the currently selected
tenant.

Modifying tenant parameters is similar to adding tenant parame-

ters. Use the same procedure as described in “Adding a New
Tenant” on page 17-51 except that you choose a tenant that already
exists and select Modify rather than Add from the Tenants
summary (see Figure 17-28 on page 17-50).

Copying Tenant Parameters

Notes: If you create a new tenant by copying an existing tenant, all door
assignments associated with the existing tenant are copied to the new
tenant.
The Copy option in the Tenants Summary will be greyed out if the
user's host password prevents full access to the currently selected
tenant.

1. From the Tenants summary (see Figure 17-28 on page 17-50)

choose the tenant whose parameters you want to copy and
select Copy. The system displays the Copy – Tenants dialog
box (see Figure 17-31).

Figure 17-31. Copy – Tenants Dialog Box

2. Enter the New tenant number (1 to 255). This number

cannot belong to anyone else.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-53

TCON299–05/10
Tenants Access Control

3. Select OK. The system displays the Tenants editor (see

Figure 17-30).
4. Set the parameters and door selection as in “Adding a New
Tenant” on page 17-51.
5. Select OK. The system displays the Tenants summary (see
Figure 17-28 on page 17-50).
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 as required to copy additional tenant
parameters.
7. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting a Tenant
Note: The Delete option in the Tenants Summary will be greyed out if “All
Tenants” is selected or if the user’s host password prevents full access
to the currently selected tenant.

When you delete a tenant from TAC I/NET Seven, all groups and
individuals defined for the tenant will also be deleted. TAC I/NET
Seven can be configured to temporarily store deleted tenants in a
recycle bin (refer to the Recycle bin enable parameter in Step 12
on page 17-91). When using the recycle bin, all of the tenant’s
groups and individuals are retained within the deleted tenant
record. This allows you to restore the deleted tenant (along with its
groups and individuals) to an active status as long as the tenant
record resides in the recycle bin.

Note: If the recycle bin feature is not enabled when you delete a tenant, or if
the deleted tenant record is purged from the recycle bin, the tenant
(including all of its groups and individuals) is permanently purged
from the system.

1. From the Tenants summary (see Figure 17-28 on page 17-50)

choose a tenant to delete and select Delete. The system
displays the Delete confirmation dialog box.

Note: You cannot delete Tenant 0.

17-54 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Groups

2. Select Yes. The system deletes the tenant and displays the
Tenants summary (see Figure 17-28 on page 17-50).
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as required to delete more tenants.
4. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Groups
Individuals can be collected in groups to simplify access control
parameter definition and maintenance. A group is defined for a
particular tenant. You cannot copy a group from one tenant to
another, nor can you assign an individual to a group from a
different tenant. The exception is groups defined for Tenant 0,
which are global groups available to all tenants.
The information in this section describes how to define groups. For
instructions on how to assign one or more groups to an individual,
refer to Step 17 of the “Adding an Individual” precedure that starts
on page 17-65.

Note: Using this editor generates a “group edit” audit trail message to
provide a high-level audit trail for group updates. The message
contains the date and time the edit was performed, the name of the
edited group, and the initials of the person who performed the edit.

1. Select Access  Groups, or click the Groups tool on the

Access toolbar.
• If your system has more than one tenant, the Tenant selec-
tion – Group summary displays (see Figure 17-32). In this
case proceed with step 2.
• If only a single tenant has been defined, the Groups —
Summary List displays. In this case you can skip step 2 and
proceed with step 3.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-55

TCON299–05/10
Groups Access Control

Figure 17-32. Tenant Selection – Group Summary

2. Highlight a tenant and click Select to display the Groups

Summary List (see Figure 17-33).

Figure 17-33. Groups – Summary List

Note: If your host password prevents full access to the selected tenant, only
the groups that are allowed will be visible. Refer to “Limited-access
Users” on page 9-15 for more information

17-56 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Groups

3. You may now add, modify, copy, or delete access groups.

Procedures for each of these options are described below.

Note: Groups added to Tenant 0 will be available to all tenants.

4. When you are finished, select Close to leave this editor.

Adding an Access Group

Note: If your host password prevents full access to the selected tenant, the
Add option will be greyed out. Refer to “Limited-access Users” on
page 9-15 for more information

1. Select Add from the Groups – Summary List. The system

displays the Add – Groups dialog box (see Figure 17-34).

Figure 17-34. Add – Groups Dialog Box

2. In the Group name field enter the name of the group you
want to add and select OK. The name will start with a ~ if the
group is for Tenant 0 (All Tenants). The system displays the
Group editor (see Figure 17-35).

Figure 17-35. Group Editor

Note: When defining a group for Tenant 0 (all tenants), the group name
starts with the ~ symbol. This symbol is automatically placed as the
first character, and cannot be deleted.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-57

TCON299–05/10
Groups Access Control

3. Choose a Record type from the drop-down list. You have the
following options:
✧ Permanent – Choose this option for a group of perma-
nent employees with access privileges.
✧ Temporary – Choose this option for a group of visitors
with a temporary schedule that has a begin and end date.
✧ Disabled – Choose this option to enter all of the group
parameters into the personnel database, including door
and schedule assignments, but without allowing the
group access privileges.

Note: Each individual’s access rights will be determined by the combination

of their individual and group record types. Refer to the Access Control
chapter of TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide,
for more information.

4. If you set the Record Type to “Temporary,” enter the Begin

date, Begin time, End date, and End time during which
access will be allowed.

17-58 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Groups

5. Select Doors. The system displays the Groups – Door Selec-

tion summary (see Figure 17-36) showing a list of doors
assigned to the tenant this group belongs to. This list also
includes elevator door points, floor enable points, and OP5
arming terminals.

Figure 17-36. Groups – Door Selection Summary

Use this editor to define the schedules during which key/card

holders in this group have access through the tenant’s doors.
Only those doors assigned to the current tenant are displayed.

Note: If your host password is configured to limit your access to specific

groups, this editor will only show doors associated with allowed
groups.
Refer to “Limited-access Users” on page 9-15 for more information.

6. If you wish to use an existing group as the basis for the access
schedule, perform the following:
a. Select the Groups button. The system displays the
Groups – Group Selection summary (see Figure 17-37)
with a listing of all currently defined groups.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-59

TCON299–05/10
Groups Access Control

Note: If your host password is configured to limit your access to specific

groups, only the groups that your password allows will be visible.
Refer to “Limited-access Users” on page 9-15 for more information.

Figure 17-37. Groups – Group Selection Summary

b. Select the desired group and click the <- Add button. The
selected group will move from the Not Member of list to
the Member of list. Repeat as necessary to add multiple
groups.
c. If you selected more than one group in Step b, use the
Move Up and Move Down buttons to set the desired
priority order for the groups on the Member of list.

Note: If there is a schedule conflict between multiple groups selected for a

door, the schedule for the higher group in the list overrides the
schedule for any group lower in the list.

d. When finished, select the OK button to return to the

Groups – Door Selection summary, or select Cancel to
exit without saving your changes.

17-60 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Groups

7. If you wish to customize the schedule for this group, perform

the following:
a. Choose a door and select the Schedules button. The
system displays the Groups – Door Schedules summary
(see Figure 17-38) with a listing of all currently defined
schedules.

Figure 17-38. Groups – Door Schedules Editor

b. Choose a schedule and select the OK button. The system

applies the schedule to the door and displays the Groups
– Door Selection summary (see Figure 17-36 on page
17-59).

Note: In case of schedule conflict, this schedule overrides any group sched-
ules selected for this door.

c. Repeat as required to add more doors and schedules for

this group.
d. Select Close. The system displays the Groups editor (see
Figure 17-35 on page 17-57).
8. Select OK. The system saves the settings and displays the
Groups Summary List (see Figure 17-33 on page 17-56) with
the new group added to the list.
9. Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to add more groups to this tenant.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-61

TCON299–05/10
Groups Access Control

10. Select Close from the Groups – Summary List.

11. Repeat Step 1 through 10 as required to add groups to other
tenants.

Modifying an Access Group

Note: While modifying a group, you will only see doors associated with
allowed groups if your host password is configured to limit your
access. Refer to “Limited-access Users” on page 9-15 for more infor-
mation.
Modifying an access group is similar to adding an access group. Use
the same procedure as described in “Adding an Access Group” on
page 17-57 except that you choose a group that already exists and
select the Modify button from the Groups – Summary List (see
Figure 17-33 on page 17-56) rather than the Add button.
When you modify a group, all groups and individuals that are
members of this group (this group is listed in the Member of list of
the Group Assignment summary) will reflect the change.

Copying an Access Group

Note: The Copy option will be greyed out if your host password prevents
full access to the selected tenant. Refer to “Limited-access Users” on
page 9-15 for more information.

1. From the Groups – Summary List (see Figure 17-33 on page

17-56) choose the group whose parameters you want to copy
and select Copy. The system displays the Copy – Groups
dialog box.
2. In the Enter group name field enter the name of the new
group.
3. Select OK. The system displays the Groups – Summary List
(see Figure 17-33 on page 17-56) with the new group added
to the list.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 as required to copy other access
groups.
5. Select Close to exit this procedure.

17-62 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Deleting an Access Group

Caution: If you delete a group, all individuals assigned to that group remain in
the system but they cannot gain access through any door unless they
have individual access or access through another group.

Note: The Delete option will be greyed out if your host password prevents
full access to the selected tenant. Refer to “Limited-access Users” on
page 9-15 for more information

TAC I/NET Seven can be configured to temporarily store deleted

groups in a recycle bin (refer to the Recycle bin enable parameter
in Step 12 on page 17-91). This feature allows you to restore a
deleted group to an active status as long as the group record resides
in the recycle bin.

Note: If the recycle bin feature is not enabled when you delete a group, or if
the deleted group record is purged from the recycle bin, then the group
is permanently purged from the system.

1. From the Groups – Summary List (see Figure 17-33 on page

17-56) choose the group you want to delete and select Delete.
The system displays the Delete confirmation dialog box.
2. Select Yes. The system deletes the group and displays the
Groups - Summary List (see Figure 17-33 on page 17-56).
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as required to delete other groups.
4. Select Close from the Groups – Summary List to exit this
procedure.

Individuals
TAC I/NET Seven provides an Individuals Summary screen that
allows you to add individuals to your access control system. Here,
you assign key/cards to individuals, assign schedule access to doors,
configure individuals to be users of an intrusion alarm system, and
populate the personnel database. The type of information
displayed within the Individuals editors, as well as your ability to

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-63

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

add, delete, or modify individuals, is dependent upon the privileges

assigned to your host password (refer to Chapter 9, Passwords, for
information).
1. Select Access  Individual, or click the Individual tool on the
Access toolbar. If you have more than one tenant, the Tenant
selection – Individual summary displays (see Figure 17-39).

Figure 17-39. Tenant Selection – Individual

2. Choose the Tenant to which the individual belongs and select

the Select button. The system displays the Individual
Summary (see Figure 17-40) which shows all of the individ-
uals assigned to this tenant.
The information displayed within the Individuals Summary is
divided into columns. If necessary, you can use the mouse to
resize the column widths. Refer to “List Boxes” in Chapter 1,
TAC I/NET Seven Basics, for more information.
The Individuals Summary includes a “Sort” column. This
column displays the content of the field selected as the display
order field (refer to “Display Options” on page 17-78 for
more information about choosing the display order). For
instance, if you choose Field #1 as the display order field, the
content of Field #1 is displayed in the Sort column.
If you base the display order on the hexadecimal card number,
the summary displays multiple entries for any users with
more than one assigned key/card. This causes the Add,

17-64 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Figure 17-40. Individuals Summary

Delete, and Copy functions to become disabled. Choose

some other display order to re-enable the Add, Delete, and
Copy functions.

Adding an Individual
Note: Your ability to add an individual to the access control system will
depend upon the privileges assigned to your host password. Refer to
Chapter 9, Passwords, for more information.
If the Second password required for Individuals option is acti-
vated () in the Options editor, TAC I/NET Seven will require entry
of a second operator’s host password before allowing you to add an
individual. Refer to “Options” on page 17-87 for more information.
When you sort the summary by the hexadecimal card number (using
the Option button described on page 17-78), the Add, Delete, and
Copy functions become disabled. Choose some other display order to
re-enable the Add, Delete, and Copy functions.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-65

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

1. Select Add. The system displays the Individuals – Add dialog

box (see Figure 17-41).

Figure 17-41. Individuals – Add Dialog Box

2. Set the New individual number value. The default is the next
available number. The range of valid values for this field will
depend on the First individual number and the Number of
individuals defined for the tenant (refer to “Adding a New
Tenant” on page 17-51).

Note: The Card Number fields, described in the following step, are
displayed only if the privileges assigned to your host password allow
you to view and modify this information.

3. Enter the Card Number, if desired. This is the value encoded

on the individual’s key/card. You may enter the card number
as either a hexadecimal (base 16) or decimal (base 10) value;
the other scale will be calculated automatically.
If your host station includes an I/DISC key reader, you may
read the number directly instead of typing it in. Refer to
“Options” on page 17-87, and the section on Configuration in
TCON157, TAC I/NET Forms and Worksheets Getting Started.
If you make an individual a user of an Intrusion Alarm
System, the individual’s Card Number will be the User ID that
the user must type at on OP5 arming terminal in order to log
on.

Note: TAC I/NET Seven allows you to assign a large key/card number
directly to an individual, or translate the number using the Key/Card
Translation table. However, within a single tenant, TAC I/NET

17-66 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Seven will not honor both actions with the same key/card number or
with the same individual. If you directly assign a key/card to an indi-
vidual, and later translate the same key/card for another individual,
only the translated key/card will be operational within TAC I/NET
Seven. Refer to the Access Control chapter in TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

4. Select OK to accept your settings. The system displays the

Individual Parameters editor (see Figure 17-42). Use this
editor to define parameters for each individual in your access
control system.

Figure 17-42. Individual Parameters Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-67

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

The information displayed within the Individuals Parameters

editor is divided into columns. If necessary, you can resize the
column widths. Refer to “List Boxes” in Chapter 1, TAC
I/NET Seven Basics, for more information.

Note: The actual fields displayed within the Individuals Parameters editor
will be determined by the access rights associated with your host pass-
word. The steps below assume that all fields are displayed. Refer to
Chapter 9, Passwords, for more information.

5. The read-only Group field lists the primary group this indi-
vidual is assigned to. A * symbol in front of the group name
indicates that the individual is assigned to more than one
group. A ~ symbol in front of the group name indicates a
global group (available for all tenants). Groups are assigned
through the Group Selection Summary editor (see Step 17
below).
6. Enter the individual’s Last name and First name (up to 50
characters each).

Note: Every tenant has an Access Control database table where the unique
field names for fields 3 through 18 are stored. The fields are named in
the Field Names procedure on page 17-80.

7. Enter the appropriate information (up to 50 characters) in

fields 3 through 18 (User Field 1–16) as required.

Note: One of the user fields may be designated as a Unique Field in the
Access Control - Options editor (see “Options” on page 17-87). The
designated Unique Field may be left blank. If a value is entered, it
must be unique across all tenants and individuals.

8. The individual’s current card numbers are listed in both the

hexadecimal and decimal values.
a. Click Add New Card in either the Hex Number or
Decimal Number column to enter a new card number.
You may edit either field. The value for the other scale
will be calculated automatically.

17-68 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Each card number must be unique across all users and

tenants. You may have multiple individuals with no card
number (null), but if you assign a card number of zero
(0), only one individual can have that card number.
b. If you wish to store the card in the memory of the DPUs,
activate ([X]) the DPU Res. option. (You will not be able
to activate this field if the card number field is blank.)
This parameter will only be used in door controllers
capable of database caching (firmware revision 2.20 or
later). Refer to the section on DPU Database Caching in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide,
for more information.

Note: All individual key/card numbers that use a translation table will be
resident in the door controller, regardless of the setting of this param-
eter.

c. If you wish to disable the card, activate ([X]) the

Disabled option. A disabled card will be denied entry at
access controlled doors.
9. To add an individual Image, click the ... button or double-
click the default image to browse for the individual’s picture.
The image formats that are supported are: .JPG, .GIF, .BMP,
.TIF, and .PNG. If your image is in a different format, you
must first convert it to one of the supported formats, using a
third-party graphics program.
The best practice is to specify a fully qualified UNC path. This
will help ensure that the image can be located regardless of
which TAC I/NET Seven host workstation is being used to
display the image. Refer to the description of the “Image
Path” in the Access Control chapter of TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Caution: While performing the following step, be aware that it is the job of the
Automatic DPU Restore function to download “Temporary” indi-
vidual records to door controllers beneath specific links. Refer to

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-69

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

Chapter 5, Controller Functions in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven

Technical Reference Guide, for more information about the Auto-
matic DPU Restore function.

10. Choose a Record type from the drop-down list. The

following options are available:
✧ Permanent – Choose this option if the individual is a
permanent employee with access privileges.
✧ Temporary – Choose this option for visitors with a
temporary schedule that has a begin and end date.
✧ Disabled – Choose this option to enter all of the indi-
vidual parameters into the personnel database, including
door and schedule assignment, but without allowing the
individual access privileges.
If you assign a Record Type setting of Disabled in this editor,
the individual's access to group doors will be disabled (other
members of the group will still have access to group doors).
Door assignments that are duplicated at both the individual
and group level will use the individual's Record Type setting
rather than the group's Record Type setting.

Caution: It is the job of the Automatic DPU Restore function to download

“Temporary” individual records to DPUs beneath specific links. If
you have not enabled the Automatic DPU Restore function for a link,
no temporary individuals will be granted access through the link's
doors. refer to the description of the “Automatic DPU Restore”
feature in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide.

Note: If you change an existing individual's Record Type from Temporary

to Permanent, and then later change it back to Temporary, ensure
that you also edit at least one date or time field as described below in
Step 11. Simply changing the Record Type from Permanent back to
Temporary will not cause TAC I/NET Seven to once again use the
Temporary record type.

17-70 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

11. If the individual’s record type is “Temporary,” perform the

following steps:
a. Enter the Begin date and Begin time. Use the mm/dd/yy
format to define the begin date. Use the 24-hour format
to define the begin time. These parameters determine
when the key/card will become valid.
b. Enter the End date and End time. Use the mm/dd/yy
format to define the end date. Use the 24-hour format to
define the end time. These parameters determine when
the key/card will no longer be valid.
12. Select the APB (anti-passback) scheme for this individual.
This determines the system response when an individual
attempts to read into an area twice, through a door controlled
by anti-passback.
✧ Hard (default) — access is denied, generates an alarm.
✧ Soft — access is granted, generates an alarm.
✧ Graced — access is granted, no alarm is generated. This
effectively cancels anti-passback for the individual.

Note: The APB scheme is only active if anti-passback is activated for the
door (see “Adding a Door Extension” on page 17-9). The same
scheme is used for both anti-passback and anti-tailgate (if activated).

13. If desired, edit the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for

the selected individual. The PIN can be edited only if the User
defined PIN check box is activated () in the Access Control
- Options editor (see “Options” on page 17-87). User-defined
PINs will only be honored when the individual has been
assigned a large key/card number.

Note: The individual record must include a PIN. If the default PIN is
blank, you must enter a PIN before you can save the individual
parameters.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-71

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

The default PIN is generated automatically by the system and

is based on the card number and issue number defined for the
individual (i.e., changes to either of these numbers causes the
system to generate a new PIN). The PIN is only necessary at
doors configured to use a keypad to control access.

Note: TAC I/NET Seven’s PIN function also supports a duress code for use
in emergency situations. See your TAC I/NET Seven system adminis-
trator for more information about this feature.

TAC I/NET Seven includes a PIN generator which allows you

to generate a list of PINs for a range of key/card numbers.
Refer to “PIN Generation” on page 17-86 for more informa-
tion.

Note: If your access control system is configured to use Wiegand cards, the
Issue Number described in the following step will only affect the PIN
assigned to the card. The card will never generate a “Deny Issue”
message, regardless of the Issue Number setting.

14. Using the spindial, choose an Issue number. This must be the
most recent issue of the key/card. If a person attempts to gain
access using a card with an invalid Issue Number, the system
will deny access and generate a “Deny Issue” message.

Note: Issue number is not used on systems utilizing large key/card numbers.
Refer to “Key/Card Translations” on page 17-47 if you wish to use
issue number to control access.

15. Use the two Individual Activity Manager (IAM) parameters as

follows:
a. Activate () the Graced parameter if you wish to
exclude this individual from activity monitoring.
b. The Disabled parameter is only available after the indi-
vidual has become automatically disabled because of
inactivity. Use this parameter to de-activate () the
user's “disabled” status. This will cause activity moni-
toring for this individual to restart from this point.

17-72 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Refer to “Individual Activity Manager” on page 17-92 for

more information.
16. Select Doors. The system displays the Individuals – Door
Selection summary (see Figure 17-43).

Figure 17-43. Individuals – Door Selection Summary

Note: The access rights of an individual assigned to a group will be deter-

mined by the combination of their individual and group record types.
If the same door is selected for an individual, and for one or more
groups to which that individual is assigned, the individual assign-
ment always overrides the group assignment. This allows individuals
to be assigned to a group from which they receive the bulk of their
access privileges, but still be offered individual treatment for selected
doors. Refer to the Access Control chapter of TCON300, TAC I/NET
Seven Technical Reference Guide, for more information.

Use this editor to define those doors (including elevator door

points, floor enable points, and OP5 arming terminal points)
to which this individual is to have access. Only those doors
(up to 32,767) that have already been assigned to the
currently selected tenant will appear on this summary. Your
host password my further limit which doors appear in this
editor (refer to “Limited-access Users” on page 9-15 for more
information).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-73

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

17. To assign one or more group schedules to the individual, or to

assign a secondary group to the individual, perform the
following:
a. Select the Groups button. The system displays the Indi-
viduals – Group Selection summary (see Figure 17-44)
with a listing of the available groups.

Note: If your host password is configured to limit your access to specific

groups, the Group Selection Summary will be affected as follows:
✦ Only the groups that your host password allows, as well as any
other groups that are influencing the selected individual, will be
visible.
✦ For any group that is visible but is not allowed by your host pass-
word, you will not be allowed to add it, remove it, or set its
priority (move it up or down in the list).
✦ TAC I/NET Seven will not allow you to remove a group that
would cause you to lose access to the individual.
Refer to “Limited-access Users” on page 9-15 for more information.

Figure 17-44. Individuals – Group Selection Summary

17-74 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

A “~” in front of a group name indicates a global group

(available for all tenants).
b. To assign one or more group schedules to the individual,
Select the a desired group and click the <- Add button.
The selected group will move from the Not Member of
list to the Member of list. Repeat as necessary to add
multiple groups.
c. If you selected more than one group in Step b, use the
Move Up and Move Down buttons to set the desired
priority order for the groups on the Member of list.

Note: If there is a schedule conflict between multiple groups selected for a

door, the schedule for the higher group in the list overrides the
schedule for any group lower in the list.

d. If necessary, you can temporarily supplement the sched-

ules that you have assigned to the individual by also
assigning a secondary group. Use the following steps:

Note: Secondary group schedules are supported only in door controllers

loaded with firmware version 3.01 or later.

✢ Click the Secondary Group Add button. The system

displays the Secondary Group editor (see
Figure 17-45).

Figure 17-45. Secondary Group Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-75

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

✢ Use the Group drop-down list to select a group. All

groups defined for the current tenant and that are not
blocked by your host password are included in this
list. Global groups are not included.
Refer to “Limited-access Users” on page 9-15 for
information about how groups can be blocked.
✢ Enter the Begin date and Begin time. Use the
mm/dd/yy format to define the Begin date. Use the
24-hour (military format) to define the Begin time.
These parameters determine when the Secondary
Group assignment will become active.
✢ Enter the End date and End time. Use the mm/dd/yy
format to define the End date. Use the 24-hour (mili-
tary format) to define the End time. These parame-
ters determine when the Secondary Group
assignment will no longer be active.
✢ Select OK to accept the settings. The Secondary
Group Editor closes, returning you to the Individuals
– Group Selection summary. The Secondary Group is
automatically positioned at the top of the Member of
list and cannot be moved (“<-- Secondary” appears
to the right of this group).

Note: When you assign a Secondary Group to an individual, the Secondary

Group Add button changes to Modify. This button becomes unavail-
able (i.e., turns grey) until you save the individual record by selecting
OK from the Individual Parameters editor. After you save the indi-
vidual’s record, you can return to this editor and the Modify button
will be available, allowing you to view or modify the secondary group
schedule.

e. When finished, select the OK button to return to the

Individuals – Door Selection summary, or select Cancel
to exit without saving your changes.
18. If you wish to customize the schedule for this individual,
perform the following:

17-76 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

a. Choose a door from the available list and select Sched-

ules. The system displays the Individuals – Door Sched-
ules summary (see Figure 17-46). The schedules listed
here are defined in Personnel Schedules on page 17-30.

Figure 17-46. Individuals – Door Schedules Summary

Note: Each door in the system supports up to 31 unique schedules, a

schedule “--” which is “Unselect,” and a schedule “00” which is a “No
Access” schedule.

b. Choose a named schedule from the list to enable indi-

vidual access to the selected door and select the OK
button.

Note: In case of schedule conflict, this schedule overrides any group sched-
ules selected for this door.

The system displays the Individuals – Door Selection

summary (see Figure 17-43).
c. Repeat as required for additional doors.
d. Select Close. The system displays the Individual Parame-
ters editor (see Figure 17-42 on page 17-67).
19. Select OK to accept the settings for the new individual.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-77

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

20. If your system prompts you to enter a second host password,

the password must be entered before your settings will be
accepted (see Figure 17-47). Refer to the Second password
required for Individuals parameter on page 17-89 for more
information about this option.

Figure 17-47. Second Password Prompt

21. Upon accepting the new settings, the system displays the Indi-
vidual Summary. Repeat Steps 1 through 20 as required to
add more individuals.
22. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Display Options
Note: The actual fields displayed within the “Individuals – Display
Options” editor will be determined by the access rights associated
with your host password. The steps below assume that all fields are
displayed. Refer to Chapter 9, Passwords, for more information.

This function allows you to set the presentation order of personnel

records information and determine what records to display.
1. From the Individuals Summary (see Figure 17-40) select
Option. The system displays the Individuals – Display
Options editor (see Figure 17-48).
The information displayed within the Individuals – Display
Options editor is divided into columns. If necessary, you can
use the mouse to resize the column widths. Refer to “List
Boxes” in Chapter 1, TAC I/NET Seven Basics, for more infor-
mation.

17-78 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Figure 17-48. Individuals - Display Options Editor

2. Choose a Display order (field number) (1–21) from the

drop-down list. Presentation order on the Individuals
Summary List (see Figure 17-40) will be based on the chosen
setting. The Sort column in the Individuals Summary List will
display the content of the field used as the display order field.

Note: When you base the display order on the hexadecimal card number,
the Add, Delete, and Copy functions become disabled in the Individ-
uals Summary List. Choose some other display order to re-enable the
Add, Delete, and Copy functions.

3. In the Individual fields enter the Low and High individual

numbers.
4. Activate () or deactivate () Permanent record, Tempo-
rary record, and Disabled record.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-79

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

Enabling any of these options will cause personnel records of

that type to be displayed on the Individuals Summary List
(see Figure 17-40).
5. Enter search criteria (up to 50 characters) in the options
column of the field(s) you wish to use for the search.
These fields are alphanumeric fields that allow you to deter-
mine search criteria for data within each field. You may enter
up to 50 characters, including the wild card characters “?” and
“*”.
6. Select OK. The system displays the Individual Summary (see
Figure 17-40).

Field Names
Note: The actual fields displayed within the Field Names editor will be
determined by the access rights associated with your host password.
The steps below assume that all fields are displayed. Refer to
Chapter 9, Passwords, for more information.

Every tenant has an Access Control database table where the unique
field names for Fields 3 through 18 are stored. Initially, the names
for fields 3 through 18 are the default names (e.g., Field #3, Field #4,
etc.). Since each tenant has a separate ACN table, you may
customize the field names for each tenant using the field names
editor. For example, field #3 may be titled “Department”.
1. From the Individuals Summary (see Figure 17-40) select
Field Names. The system displays the Field Names editor (see
Figure 17-49).

Note: These field names will be applied to all individuals belonging to this
tenant.

The information displayed within the Field Names editor is

divided into columns. If necessary, you can use the mouse to
resize the column widths. Refer to “List Boxes” in Chapter 1,
TAC I/NET Seven Basics, for more information.
2. Enter the Field names as required.

17-80 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Figure 17-49. Individuals – Field Names Editor

3. Select OK. The system displays the Individuals Summary (see

Figure 17-40).

Allocate Ranges
This function allows you to add a number of unused individual
numbers without adding each individual separately. Once you allo-
cate a range you may enter the individual information using the
Modify function from the Individuals Summary List (see
Figure 17-40).

Note: Using this editor generates an “individual edit” audit trail message to
provide a high-level audit trail for individual updates. The message
contains the date and time the edit was performed, the site number,
the individual number, and the initials of the person who performed
the edit.

1. From the Individuals Summary (see Figure 17-40 on page

17-65) select Alloc Range. The system displays the Allocate
Range editor (see Figure 17-50).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-81

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

Figure 17-50. Allocate Range Editor

2. If your system prompts you to enter a second host password,

the password must be entered before your settings will be
accepted (see Figure 17-47 on page 17-78). Refer to the
Second password required for Individuals parameter on
page 17-89 for more information about this option.
3. In the First individual number field enter the starting indi-
vidual number. The default is the next available number.
4. In the Number of individuals field enter the number of indi-
viduals that you want to assign.
5. To assign one or more group schedules, perform the
following:
a. Select the Doors button. The system displays the Individ-
uals - Door Selection summary (see Figure 17-43 on page
17-73).
b. Select the Groups button. The system displays the Indi-
viduals – Group Selection summary (see Figure 17-44 on
page 17-74) with a listing of all currently defined groups.
c. Select the desired group and click the <- Add button. The
selected group will move from the Not Member of list to
the Member of list. Repeat as necessary to add multiple
groups.
d. If you selected more than one group in Step c, use the
Move Up and Move Down buttons to set the desired
priority order for the groups on the Member of list.

17-82 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Note: If there is a schedule conflict between multiple groups selected for a

door, the schedule for the higher group in the list overrides the
schedule for any group lower in the list.

e. When finished, select the OK button to return to the

Individuals – Door Selection summary, or select Cancel
to exit without saving your changes.
6. If you wish to customize the schedule for this range of indi-
viduals, perform the following:
a. Choose a door from the available list and select Sched-
ules. The system displays the Individuals – Door Sched-
ules summary (see Figure 17-46 on page 17-77). The
schedules listed here are defined in Personnel Schedules
on page 17-30.

Note: Each door in the system supports up to 31 unique schedules, a

schedule “--” which is “Unselect,” and a schedule “00” which is a “No
Access” schedule.

b. Choose a named schedule from the list to enable indi-

vidual access to the selected door and select the OK
button.

Note: In case of schedule conflict, this schedule overrides any group sched-
ules selected for this door.

The system displays the Individuals – Door Selection

summary (see Figure 17-43).
c. Repeat as required for additional doors.
d. Select Close. The system displays the Individuals
summary (see Figure 17-40 on page 17-65).
7. Select OK. The system displays the Individual Summary (see
Figure 17-40 on page 17-65).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-83

TCON299–05/10
Individuals Access Control

Copying an Individual
Note: Your ability to copy an individual will depend upon the privileges
assigned to your host password. Refer to Chapter 9, Passwords, for
more information.
If the Second password required for Individuals option is acti-
vated () in the Options editor, TAC I/NET Seven will require entry
of a second operator’s host password before allowing you to copy an
individual. Refer to “Options” on page 17-87 for more information.

1. From the Individual Summary choose the individual whose

parameters you want to copy.
2. Select Copy. The system displays the Individuals – Copy
dialog box.
3. Enter the target New individual number. The default is the
next available number. The range of valid numbers for this
field will depend on the First individual number and the
Number of individuals defined for the tenant (refer to
“Adding a New Tenant” on page 17-51).

Note: The Card Number fields, described in the following step, are
displayed only if the privileges assigned to your host password allow
you to view and modify this information.

4. Enter the target Card Number that is to receive these parame-

ters. This is the value encoded on the individual’s key/card.
You may enter the card number as either a hexadecimal (base
16) or decimal (base 10) value; the other scale will be calcu-
lated automatically.
5. Select OK to accept the settings for the new individual.
6. If your system prompts you to enter a second host password,
the password must be entered before your settings will be
accepted (see Figure 17-47 on page 17-78). Refer to the
Second password required for Individuals parameter on
page 17-89 for more information about this option.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required to copy additional indi-
viduals.

17-84 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individuals

Deleting an Individual
Note: When you delete an individual from your access control system, TAC
I/NET Seven sends a message to every door controller that controls a
door through which the individual has access.
Your ability to delete an individual will depend upon the privileges
assigned to your host password. Refer to Chapter 9, Passwords, for
more information.
If the Second password required for Individuals option is acti-
vated () in the Options editor, TAC I/NET Seven will require entry
of a second operator’s host password before allowing you to delete an
individual. Refer to “Options” on page 17-87 for more information.

TAC I/NET Seven can be configured to temporarily store deleted

individuals in a recycle bin (refer to the Recycle bin enable
parameter in Step 12 on page 17-91). This feature allows you to
restore a deleted individual to an active status as long as the indi-
vidual record resides in the recycle bin.

Note: If the recycle bin feature is not enabled when you delete an indi-
vidual, or if the deleted individual record is purged from the recycle
bin, then the individual is permanently purged from the system.

1. From the Individual Summary (see Figure 17-40) choose the

individual you want to delete.
2. Select Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
dialog box.
3. Select Yes. to delete the selected individual from the list.
4. If your system prompts you to enter a second host password,
the password must be entered before the individual will be
deleted (see Figure 17-47 on page 17-78). Refer to the Second
password required for Individuals parameter on page 17-89
for more information about this option.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 as required to delete additional indi-
viduals.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-85

TCON299–05/10
PIN Generation Access Control

PIN Generation

Note: TAC I/NET Seven’s PIN function also supports a duress code for use
in emergency situations. See your TAC I/NET Seven system adminis-
trator for more information about this feature.

The PIN Generation utility allows you to generate a list of personal

identification numbers (PINs) for specific individuals. The PINs
generated with this utility are the same as the PIN viewed from the
Individual Parameters editor. TAC I/NET Seven calculates the PIN
based upon the card number and issue number defined for an indi-
vidual. If you change an individual’s card number or issue number,
a new PIN will be generated. This utility enables you to view more
than one PIN at a time and to print a list of PINs.
Access the PIN Generation utility by selecting Access  Generate
PINs. The PIN Generation editor displays, as shown in
Figure 17-51.

Figure 17-51. PIN Generation Editor

17-86 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Options

1. Choose a Tenant from the drop-down list. Within this list,

the number that follows a tenant’s name is an indication of
the number of keys allocated to that tenant.
Upon selecting a tenant, the Starting key field will be set to
the lowest key value applicable to the tenant. The Ending key
field will be set to the highest key value applicable to the
tenant.
2. Enter the first key/card number in the Starting Key field.
3. Enter the last key/card number in the Ending Key field.
4. Select Calculate to generate the PINs. The key/card numbers
and their associated PINs will fill the table in the lower half of
the editor, as shown in Figure 17-52.

Figure 17-52. PIN Table

5. To preview the PIN report on the screen, activate () the

Print preview option, enter the number of pages to preview,
and select Print. The print preview displays. Click the
Windows Close button (X) in the top right corner to move
through the preview pages and close the preview on the last
page.
To send the report to the printer, deactivate () the Print
preview option and select Print.

Options
This editor allows you to enable an I/DISC reader and determine
where audit trail messages will be sent.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-87

TCON299–05/10
Options Access Control

1. Select Access  Options, or click the Options tool on the

Access toolbar. The system displays the Options Editor (see
Figure 17-53).

Figure 17-53. Options Editor

Note: The Supply card number from reader option described in the
following step is available only after you set the AC Reader Type to
“I/DISC” or “Wiegand” and the AC Reader Port to a COM port in
the Configure program. Refer to TCON298, TAC I/NET Seven
Getting Started, for more information about configuring TAC I/NET
Seven.

2. Activate () or deactivate () the Supply card number

from reader option.

Enable this option if you want to use an I/DISC wand or a

Wiegand reader to enter card numbers in the Individuals
editor.

17-88 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Options

3. Activate () or deactivate () the Second password

required for Individuals option.

With this option enabled, TAC I/NET Seven will require entry
of a second operator’s host password before allowing you to
add, delete, copy, or modify individual records. Refer to
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for
details about this feature.
4. Select an Audit trail - distribution group (1–4). The mask
that you define in the following step will be applied to this
group.
5. Define the Audit trail - distribution mask. Set each of eight
masking positions to the desired state, either activated () or
deactivated ().
6. Enter a number (1–1023) in the Audit trail - cell number
field. A cell number of zero (default) means that no data will
be stored.
7. Choose a DPU dial type from the drop-down list. The
following options are available:
✧ Immediately – This setting causes TAC I/NET Seven to
immediately dial affected remote sites following Access
Control. However, the DPU dial delay will be honored
before dialing begins.
✧ Scheduled – This setting allows you to choose a time
when TAC I/NET Seven will dial remote sites following
Access Control changes.
✧ Never – This setting suppresses automatic dialing to a
remote site following Access Control changes. The
changes will not be sent to the remote DPU until a
connection is made either manually, or through some
other automatic dialing function (such as message
uploads). In this case, you must manually dial the remote
site and perform a station restore to the affected DPU.

Note: Performing the following access control changes will cause the system
to immediately dial affected remote sites, regardless of the DPU Dial
Type setting:

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-89

TCON299–05/10
Options Access Control

✧ Changing an individual or group record type to

“Temporary.”
✧ Modifying an individual or group temporary schedule.

Refer to TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference

Guide, for more information about the access control “Dial
After Edit” function.
8. If you selected “Immediately” in Step 7, enter the DPU dial
delay (up to 60 minutes). This sets the amount of time the
system will wait after the Access Control edit, before dialing
the remote site.
9. If you selected “Scheduled” in Step 7, enter a time (24-hour
format) in the DPU dial schedule field. This is the time of
day when TAC I/NET Seven will dial remote sites affected by
changes to the Access Control system.
10. Activate () or deactivate () the User defined PIN check
box. When activated, the default PIN in the Individual
Parameters editor can be changed to a customized number
(refer to “Adding an Individual” on page 17-65).

Note: This feature requires door controller firmware version 2.30 or later.
You must use system-generated PINs for door controllers with a firm-
ware revision prior to 2.30.

11. Select the PIN algorithm used to calculate the default

personal identification numbers (PINs) for key/card holders.
If the User defined PIN parameter is activated, the default
PIN can be edited from the Individual Parameters editor. If
not, the PIN is read-only at the host workstation (i.e., within
the Individual Parameters editor and the PIN Generator
utility). The following options are available:
✧ None – Choose this setting if you do not want the system
to generate user PINs. When entering a new individual,
the operator must manually enter a PIN; you will not be
able to save the individual parameters until a PIN is
entered. This option is not available if the User defined
PIN check box is disabled ().

17-90 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Options

✧ Standard – Choose this setting if your access control

system is configured to use any reader type other than
Wiegand 66. If the User defined PIN check box is acti-
vated, this algorithm generates a default PIN for new
individuals, which the operator can edit. If the check box
is not activated, this algorithm generates a read-only PIN.
✧ Wiegand 66 – Choose this setting only when your access
control system is configured to use Wiegand 66 readers. If
the User defined PIN check box is activated, this algo-
rithm generates a default PIN for new individuals, which
the operator can edit. If the check box is not activated,
this algorithm generates a read-only PIN.
12. Activate () or deactivate () the Recycle bin enabled
option. The default for this field is activated.
Activate this option to have TAC I/NET Seven temporarily
store deleted access control records in a recycle bin. Using this
feature, you can restore deleted individual, group, and tenant
records at a later time. You can also purge the records from
the recycle bin in order to permanently delete them.
13. When you activate the recycle bin feature in Step 12, the
Recycle bin autopurge age parameter becomes available.
Use this parameter to have TAC I/NET Seven automatically
purge records that have been deleted for a specified number
of days (from 0 to 127). A setting of zero (0) prohibits TAC
I/NET Seven from purging deleted records because of their
age.
14. The Empty recycle bin at log off parameter becomes avail-
able when you active the recycle bin feature in Step 12. This
feature allows you to configure TAC I/NET Seven to automat-
ically purge deleted records from the recycle bin when the
user logs off.
Choose any of the following three options for this parameter:
✧ Never – This setting prevents TAC I/NET Seven from
purging deleted records from the recycle bin at system log
off.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-91

TCON299–05/10
Individual Activity Manager Access Control

✧ Prompt – This setting causes TAC I/NET Seven to display

a prompt at system log off if deleted records reside in the
recycle bin. The prompt allows the user to choose
whether or not the records will be purged.
✧ Always – This setting allows TAC I/NET Seven to silently
purge the recycle bin at system log off.
15. If desired, select the Unique user field. Any of the 16 user-
defined fields may be selected from the drop-down. The
designated field, if populated, must contain a unique entry for
all individuals, across all tenants.
If you edit this selection, a warning message will appear when
you exit the editor, warning you that existing entries are not
checked for uniqueness. Select OK to continue, or Cancel to
cancel your change (to this field only) and remain in the
editor.
16. If necessary, enable and configure the Individual Activity
Manager feature by selecting the Configure button. For more
information about this feature, refer to “Individual Activity
Manager” below.
17. Choose a Default anti-passback setting of Hard, Soft, or
Graced. The setting you choose here will be used as the initial
setting of the ABP parameter in the Individual Parameters
Editor (see Figure 17-42 on page 17-67) when you are adding
an individual to the access control system.
18. Select OK to save the settings and exit this procedure.

Individual Activity Manager

The Individual Activity Manager (see Figure 17-54) allows TAC
I/NET Seven to automatically disable the access privileges of indi-
viduals whom have not used their key/card within a specified
amount of time. TAC I/NET Seven displays this editor when you
select the Individual Activity Manager Configure button from the
Access Control Options editor.

17-92 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Individual Activity Manager

Figure 17-54. Individual Activity Manager

The tenant selections that you make in this editor are not global-
ized; therefore, you must visit this editor and select the appropriate
tenants on each host workstation that will monitor door controller
activity.

Caution: A TAC I/NET Seven host workstation can only monitor activity at a
door if the appropriate tenant is selected in the Individual Activity
Manager editor and at least one of the following criteria are met:

✦ The message masking you've defined for your system allows the
host workstation to receive transaction messages from the door
controller.
— OR —

✦ The host workstation shares the same filemaster as another host

workstation that receives transaction messages from the door
controller and has the appropriate tenant selections. In this case,
the door controller activity is globalized daily at 12:30 AM.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-93

TCON299–05/10
Access Initiated Control Access Control

An individual can become disabled because of inactivity at “moni-

tored” doors, even though the individual has had sufficient activity at
un-monitored doors. Ensure that your system's message masking or
file equalization allows for proper monitoring of door controller
activity.

Configure individual activity management as follows:

1. Within the list of tenants, select () each tenant that this host
workstation will monitor for activity. You can use the All Yes
and All No buttons as necessary to help speed the selection
process.
2. Specify the Duration of inactivity that will cause individuals
to become disabled.
a. Choose a duration setting of None, Daily, Weekly,
Monthly, or Yearly. If you choose None, no activity moni-
toring will be performed.
b. Choose a Duration Interval setting. The available range
for this value varies depending on the duration you spec-
ified in the previous step. Regardless of which duration
setting you chose, the maximum limit is equivalent to 4
years.
3. Select OK to accept these settings.

Note: If you would like to exclude specific individuals from activity moni-
toring, you can use the Individual Parameters Editor to set the indi-
vidual's IAM parameter to Graced.

Access Initiated Control

The Access Initiated Control (AIC) function lets you initiate a
control action in response to an access transaction for a selected
tenant number and one or more key/card numbers. Although the
control action is to a single point, it can always be extended through
the Event Sequences and Event Definitions editors.
Each DPI/MCI will support up to 64 AIC actions, regardless of how
many tenants are defined.

17-94 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Access Initiated Control

1. If you are not connected to the desired controller, perform the

following steps from the host. Otherwise, skip to step 2.
a. Select Access  Access Initiated Control, or click the
Access Initiated Control tool on the Access toolbar. The
system displays the Controller Selection Summary (see
Figure 17-55).

Figure 17-55. Controller Selection Summary

b. Choose a controller from the list and select the Select

button. The system displays the Access Initiated Control
summary (see Figure 17-56).
c. You may now add, modify, copy, or delete AIC actions.
Procedures for each of these options are described below.
d. Select Close to leave this editor.
2. If you are connected to the desired controller, perform the
following steps:
a. Select Edit  Controller  Access Initiated Control, or
click the Access Initiated Control tool on the Controller
toolbar. The system displays the Access Initiated Control
list (see Figure 17-56).
b. You may now add, modify, copy, or delete AIC actions.
Procedures for each of these options are described below.
c. Select Close to leave this editor.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-95

TCON299–05/10
Access Initiated Control Access Control

Figure 17-56. Access Initiated Control Summary

Add Access Initiated Control

1. Choose an entry from the Access Initiated Control list (see
Figure 17-56) and select Add. The system displays the Access
Initiated Control editor (see Figure 17-57).
2. Enter the AIC number (1–64). The system supplies the next
available number.
3. Enter the AIC name (up to 16 characters).
4. Choose the Tenant to which this AIC number applies from
the drop-down list.
5. Enter a valid discrete output point address in the Target
point field.

Whenever one of the selected Message transactions is

processed for a matching tenant code and individual number
(specific individual numbers are defined in the Individual
selection editor, below), a control action (start/stop) will be
issued to this point.

Note: These control actions are the equivalent of an “Event control”

command.

17-96 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Access Initiated Control

Figure 17-57. Access Initiated Control Editor

6. Activate () or deactivate () the Use all individuals in

range option. Enable this option if you want to use all indi-
viduals for the selected tenant.
7. Activate () the APB zone enable option if you wish to asso-
ciate this AIC entry with a specific zone. For example, you
may wish to initiate control when a “Reader entry” message
occurs for zone 1.
8. If you activated the APB zone enable option, specify an APB
zone.

9. Choose a control action (None, Start, or Stop) for any of the

Message/Action Detail parameters. The Stop action is not
available for any of the “Denied...” messages listed within this
section.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-97

TCON299–05/10
Access Initiated Control Access Control

Note: The following Message/Action Detail parameters are not used if the
DPU or SCU1284 is loaded with firmware revision 2.1x or earlier:
✧ Reader entry w/PIN
✧ Reader entry w/PIN – elevator
✧ Reader exit w/PIN
✧ Duress entry
✧ Duress elevator
✧ Duress exit
✧ Denied entry – PIN
✧ Denied exit – PIN

10. Select the Doors button. The system displays the Access Initi-
ated Control Doors (see Figure 17-58). This lists all doors
associated with the selected DPI/MCU. You must now decide
which doors will have the AIC action assigned to them.

Figure 17-58. Access Initiated Control Doors

11. Select All Yes, All No, or each door individually. Doors
marked with [X] will have the AIC action assigned to them.
12. Select Close to save the selections. The system displays the
Access Initiated Control editor (see Figure 17-57 on page
17-97).

17-98 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Access Initiated Control

Note: If Use All Individuals in Range was enabled in Step 6 above, go to

Step 17.

13. Select the Individuals button. The system displays the Access
Initiated Control Individuals editor (see Figure 17-59). This
summary lists each individual by Individual number, and
includes the last name, first name, group assignment, and
record type.

Figure 17-59. Access Initiated Control Individual Editor

14. Choose individuals from the list. An [X] in the Select column
means that this individual’s key/card will trigger the selected
control action.
The following editor functions describe the individual selec-
tion process:
✧ The lowest individual number selected is displayed in the
First selected field of the Individual Range information.
This becomes the base individual number. The system
limits each AIC definition to individual numbers within
a 500-individual range unless you use all individuals for

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-99

TCON299–05/10
Access Initiated Control Access Control

the selected tenant (refer back to Step 6 in this proce-

dure). Therefore, if the base individual number is 200,
the highest individual number you may select is 699 for a
range of 500 individuals. Even if only some of these 500
individual are selected, the highest individual number
selectable remains at 699. This individual number is
displayed in the Maximum allowed field of the Indi-
vidual Range information. In order to select a higher
individual number, you must create another AIC defini-
tion.
✧ Once you have selected at least one individual, the All No
button becomes enabled. You may use this button to
deselect all selected individuals.
✧ Once you have selected at least two individuals, the All
Yes button becomes enabled. You may use this button to
automatically select all individuals between the lowest
and highest individual numbers selected.
✧ Use the Group drop-down list to limit the All Yes and
All No buttons to individual numbers in the selected
group. This filtering applies only to the All Yes and All
No buttons — it does not change the displayed list of
individuals. Therefore, you may continue to manually
select or deselect individuals from any group.

Note: If the selected group includes other groups, listed individuals assigned
to the secondary group(s) will also be affected by the All Yes and All
No buttons.

15. Once you have selected the necessary individuals, select Close
to save the selections. The system displays the Access Initiated
Control editor (see Figure 17-57 on page 17-97).
16. Select OK to save the settings. The system displays the Access
Initiated Control list (see Figure 17-55 on page 17-95).
17. Repeat Steps 1 through 16 as required to add more AIC func-
tions.
18. Select Close to exit this procedure.

17-100 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control Access Initiated Control

Modifying Access Initiated Control

Modifying an AIC is similar to adding an AIC. Use the same proce-
dure as described in “Add Access Initiated Control” on page 17-96
except that you choose a schedule that already exists and select the
Modify button from the Access Initiated Control list (see
Figure 17-56) rather than the Add button.

Copying Access Initiated Control

1. From the Access Initiated Control Summary (see Figure 17-56
on page 17-96) choose the AIC function that you want to
copy and select Copy. The system displays the Access Initiated
Control editor (see Figure 17-57 on page 17-97).
2. Set the parameters (including Doors and Individuals) as
described in “Add Access Initiated Control” on page 17-96.
3. Select OK. The system copies the AIC function and displays
the Access Initiated Control Summary (see Figure 17-56 on
page 17-96).
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 as required to copy other AIC func-
tions.
5. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Deleting Access Initiated Control

1. From the Access Initiated Control list (see Figure 17-56 on
page 17-96) choose the AIC function that you want to delete
and select Delete. The system displays the Delete confirma-
tion dialog box.
2. Select Yes. The system deletes the AIC function and displays
the Access Initiated Control list (see Figure 17-56 on page
17-96).
3. Repeat as required to delete more AIC functions.
4. Select Close to exit this procedure.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-101

TCON299–05/10
User Search Access Control

User Search
TAC I/NET Seven displays the User Search dialog box (see
Figure 17-60) when you select Access  User Search from the
main menu. Use this dialog to quickly locate the access control
record stored for a particular individual.

Figure 17-60. User Search

1. Use any combination of the following fields to locate the

desired record:
• Last Name – Type the user's last name (up to 50 charac-
ters).
• First Name – Type the user's first name (up to 50 charac-
ters).
• Tenant – Use this drop-down list to narrow the search to
a particular tenant, or to search through all tenant
records.
• User ID – Type the User ID (1 to 32000) assigned to the
individual.
• Custom Field – Choose a custom field from the drop-
down list and then type the text that you wish to find (up
to 50 characters).
The search is updated with each character that you type and
the result is displayed in the list.

17-102 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control SCU Tamper

2. The result list shows all records returned by the search. Locate
and highlight the desired record in the list.
3. Once you have located and highlighted the desired record, the
following options become available:
• Picture – Select this option to display a User Search -
Picture dialog. This dialog shows an image of the user and
provides other information.
• Tree – Select this option to display the user in the System
View interface.
• Zoom – Select the Zoom button to open the Individuals
Parameter Editor. You can then view or change the indi-
vidual's record as necessary.
4. If necessary, use the Clear button to clear all fields. This can
be especially useful when you are preparing to perform a new
search.

SCU Tamper
TAC I/NET Seven displays the SCU Tamper summary when you
select Access  SCU Tamper, or when you connect to an SLI and
select Edit  Controller  SCU Tamper from the main menu. The
SCU Tamper summary lists all of the SCUs defined in TAC I/NET
Seven.

Figure 17-61. SCU Tamper Summary

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-103

TCON299–05/10
SCU Tamper Access Control

Use this summary to view and set the tamper settings in your
system’s SCUs.

SCU Tamper Summary

The columns in the SCU Tamper summary show the following
information:
✦ Address — This is the system address of the SCU.
✦ Front — A “Y” in this column indicates that the SCU is
configured to monitor the optical tamper sensor mounted on
the front of the controller.
✦ Rear — A “Y” in this column indicates that the SCU is
configured to monitor the optical tamper sensor mounted on
the rear of the controller.
✦ Switch —A “Y” in this column indicates that the SCU is
configured to monitor a mechanical tamper switch connected
to the controller.
✦ NC — A “Y” in this column indicates that the tamper switch
is defined as a normally-closed switch.

Editing Tamper Settings

Use the following steps to edit an SCU's tamper settings:
1. Highlight an SCU in the list.
2. Click Select. The system displays the SCU Tamper Settings
editor (Figure 17-62), allowing you to edit the selected SCU's
tamper settings.
3. Activate any of the following options as necessary:
✧ Front Optical Tamper — Activate () this option to
enable the SCU's front optical tamper sensor.
✧ Rear Optical Tamper — Activate () this option to
enable the SCU's front optical tamper sensor.
✧ Tamper Switch — Activate () this option to have the
SCU monitor a mechanical tamper switch wired to the
controller.

17-104 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Access Control SCU Tamper

Figure 17-62. SCU Tamper Settings

✧ Normally-open/Normally-closed — Select the option

appropriate for the installed tamper switch. For example,
if you wire a normally-open tamper switch to the SCU,
and the switch will be closed under tamper conditions,
then you would select the “normally-open” option.
4. Click OK to save the tamper settings, or select Cancel to close
this editor without saving. The system returns to the SCU
Tamper summary.
5. Click Close to close the SCU Tamper summary.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 17-105

TCON299–05/10
SCU Tamper Access Control

17-106 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

18
22
Intrusion Alarm System

Note: The editors used for configuring an intrusion alarm system will not
be available unless you connect to a 7798C with firmware revision
1.07 or later.
This chapter provides instructions on how to use the TAC I/NET
Seven editors that are associated with configuring an Intrusion
Alarm System (IAS). Refer to the following documents for more
information about the IAS.
✦ TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide
✦ TCON314, Intrusion Alarm System Installation Guide
✦ TCON315, Intrusion Alarm System Operator Guide
Before You Begin
Before you begin configuring the IAS, you must have already
defined all of the points that will be associated with OP5 arming
terminals, sensors, zones, warning devices, and monitoring points.
If necessary, refer to TCON314, “Intrusion Alarm System Installa-
tion Guide,” for instructions.

Note: If you delete an IAS point from TAC I/NET Seven without removing
it from the IAS, any new point you create at the same point address
could adversely affect the operation of the IAS. To correct this issue,
you can simply open the IAS editor and then close it again by clicking
the OK button. This will remove references to the deleted point from
the IAS.

Complying with EN50131

EN50131-1 is the pan-European standard for Intruder and Hold
Up Alarm Systems. The TAC I/NET Seven system provides intruder
detection capablilities only — no hold-up functions are provided.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-1

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Configuration Intrusion Alarm System

Depending on how it is configured, the IAS can meet Grade 2 or

Grade 3 of the EN50131-1 standard and Alarm Class 2 of SSF 1014.
The IAS also meets the environmental class II requirements of
EN50131-1.
It is the responsibility of the person(s) designing/installing the IAS
to configure the system to meet the requirements of EN50131-1. If
the system is configured in such a manner as to render it non-
compliant with EN50131-1, all compliance labeling must be
removed.

Intrusion Alarm System Configuration

TAC I/NET Seven displays the Intrusion Alarm System editor (see
Figure 18-1) when you select Edit  Controller  Intrusion Alarm
System from TAC I/NET Seven's main menu. Use this editor to
configure an Intrusion Alarm System.
1. Activate () or deactivate () the Allow CLAN control from
arming terminal option. While this option is activated (),
level 3 IAS operators will be permitted to use an OP5 arming
terminal to enable or disable the 7798Cs ability to communi-
cate on the CLAN.
When an IAS operator attempts to disable CLAN communi-
cation from an OP5 arming terminal, the request will be
ignored if the Allow CLAN control from arming terminal
option is deactivated (). If the option has been activated
(), the operator's request will be honored and CLAN
communications will stop immediately. This will cause TAC
I/NET Seven hosts to exhibit the following behavior:
• A "Station lost" message will appear in AMT.
• IAS points on graphic pages will show question marks
(????).
• If a TAC I/NET Seven operator attempts to connect to the
IAS's 7798C, a "No entries in database" message will be
displayed and no connection will be made.
• The IAS editor will be inaccessible for as long as CLAN
communications at the IAS's 7798C are disabled.

18-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Intrusion Alarm System Configuration

Figure 18-1. Intrusion Alarm System Editor

Note: Whenever power is cycled on the IAS's 7798C, the device will be
permitted to communicate on the CLAN for the first five minutes
after power up, regardless of whether or not CLAN communications
have been disabled from an OP5 arming terminal.

2. Activate () or deactivate () the Disable IAS host alarm

ack option. While this option is activated (), no TAC I/NET
Seven operator can acknowledge an IAS alarm from within
TAC I/NET Seven. In this case, the only way to acknowledge
an IAS alarm will be for an authorized IAS operator to
perform the acknowledgement from an OP5 arming terminal.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-3

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Configuration Intrusion Alarm System

3. Configure the IAS to use warning devices by performing the

following steps:
a. If the IAS will control an internal warning device, use the
Internal point drop-down list to select the appropriate
control point. The IAS will issue commands to the
selected point in order to activate or deactivate the
internal warning device.
b. Set the Duration parameter to the maximum number of
seconds (0 to 900 in 5-second increments) that the
internal warning device should remain on once activated.
c. If the IAS will control an external warning device, use the
External point drop-down list to select the appropriate
control point. The IAS will issue commands to this point
in order to activate or deactivate the external warning
device.
d. Set the Duration parameter to the maximum number of
seconds (0 to 900 in 5-second increments) that the
external warning device should remain on once activated.
4. If necessary, use the Ext warning device delay field to delay
the operation of the external warning device for up to 1200
seconds (0 to 1200 in 5-second increments).
5. Use the Off-route Alarm field to configure the IAS to recheck
off-route intrusion signals that may occur during an active
entry procedure.
When an off-route alarm occurs during an active entry proce-
dure, the IAS's internal warning device turns on. If the Off-
route Alarm field setting is 0, the internal warning device will
remain on until the zone is unset or until the warning device's
maximum duration has been reached. If you set the Off-route
Alarm field to a non-zero value (up to 255 seconds), the off-
route alarm will be rechecked after the specified number of
seconds.
After being rechecked, if the off-route sensor is no longer
detecting an intruder, the internal warning device will turn
off. However, if the intrusion signal is still active when the

18-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Intrusion Alarm System Configuration

sensor is rechecked, the internal warning device will remain

on until you unset the zone or until the warning device’s
maximum duration expires.
6. Set the Login attempt disable count parameter to a value
from 3 to 15. This determines the number of consecutive
times that a user can unsuccessfully attempt to log into the
IAS at an OP5 arming terminal before being temporarily
locked out.
7. Set the Count to inhibit parameter to a value from 3 to 10
events. This determines how many matching signals from a
single sensor will be recorded in the IAS's event log before it
stops storing events from the sensor. This prevents a single
sensor from filling the event log with an event that keeps
repeating. However, while a sensor is operating in the soak
mode, the event log will not limit the number of events it
records from the sensor.
8. Use the SubLAN fault drop-down list to select a point that
will be used to indicate whether or not a fault is being
detected on the SubLAN. The IAS must constantly monitor
the subLAN to ensure that devices are communicating prop-
erly. If communication fault is detected, the selected point will
be commanded to indicate a fault condition.
9. Use the Restart fault drop-down list to select a point that will
be used to indicate whether or not the 7798C in the IAS has
restarted. If the 7798C ever restarts (for example, following a
power outage that exceeds the system's backup battery dura-
tion), as the 7798C restarts the selected point will be
commanded to a fault condition and then back to normal.
The purpose of this is to cause the point that you set for this
parameter to appear in the Active Sensors summary on the
OP5 following a 7798C restart.
10. The read-only System sensors field indicates how many
points have been defined as system status points or as
common sensors.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-5

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Configuration Intrusion Alarm System

Use the Select button to add or remove system status points

and/or common sensors. When you select this button, the
System Sensor Selection editor opens. Refer to “System Sensor
Selection” on page 18-7 for more information.
11. Use the Arming Terminals buttons to add, delete, or modify
OP5 arming terminals.
• Add – Use this button to add an OP5 arming terminal to
the system. This causes TAC I/NET Seven to display the
Arming Terminal Configuration editor. Refer to “Arming
Terminal Configuration” on page 18-11 for more infor-
mation.
• Delete – Use this button to delete an OP5 arming terminal
from the system. When you highlight an arming terminal
and select Delete, the system prompts you to confirm the
deletion. Click Yes to delete the arming terminal or click
No to cancel the delete request.
• Modify – Use this option to edit the highlighted OP5
arming terminal's parameters. This causes TAC I/NET
Seven to display the Arming Terminal Configuration
editor. Refer to “Arming Terminal Configuration” on page
18-11 for more information.
12. The read-only Access Levels section shows the current
settings for user access levels. You can modify these settings by
clicking the Level Setup button at the bottom of the editor.
This will cause the Intrusion Alarm System Access Level Setup
editor to appear. Refer to “IAS Access Level Setup” on page
18-10 for more information.
13. Use the Instrusion System Zones buttons to add, delete, or
modify zones.
• Add – Use this button to add a zone to the system. This
causes TAC I/NET Seven to display the Intrusion Alarm
Zone Configuration editor. Refer to “Intrusion Alarm
Zone Configuration” on page 18-14 for more informa-
tion.
• Delete – Use this button to delete a zone from the system.
When you highlight a zone and select Delete, the system
prompts you to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to delete
the zone or click No to cancel the delete request.

18-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System System Sensor Selection

• Modify – Use this option to edit the highlighted zone's

parameters. This causes TAC I/NET Seven to display the
Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration editor. Refer to
“Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration” on page 18-14 for
more information
14. Select OK to accept your changes and close the editor. If you
click Cancel, no modifications to the IAS will be saved.

System Sensor Selection

TAC I/NET Seven displays the System Sensor Selection editor (see
Figure 18-2) when you click the Select button in the Intrusion
Alarm System editor in order to define system status points and/or
common sensors. Additionally, you can use this editor to define an
ARC notification delay for any EPS Fault points in your system.

Figure 18-2. System Sensor Selection Editor

This editor lists the DA and DI points defined in your TAC I/NET
Seven system. Any of these points that have not been assigned to a

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-7

TCON299–05/10
System Sensor Selection Intrusion Alarm System

zone are available for selection as either of the following types of

IAS points:
✦ System status point – System status points are not associated
with zones. Abnormal conditions reported from system status
points do not cause zones to go into alarm but do prevent you
from being able to set zones. These conditions may also cause
the IAS to produce audible notifications locally and/or
produce remote notifications to an alarm receiving center,
depending on your system’s configuration.
✦ Common sensor – Common sensors contribute to the opera-
tion of all zones in the IAS. If a common sensor detects an
abnormal condition, the status of all zones will change to a
state representative of the condition (for example, if a
common sensor detects a fault, the status for all zones may
change to Fault).

Adding a System Status Point

Activate () the selection box in the System column for each
point you wish to define as an IAS system status point. If you acti-
vate this box on a point that is already defined as a common sensor,
when your changes are saved the point will become a system status
point and will no longer affect zones.

Adding a Common Sensor

Activate () the selection box in the Common column for each
point you wish to define as an IAS common sensor. If you activate
this box on a point that is already defined as a system status point,
when your changes are saved the point will become a common
sensor and its status will affect all zones.

Delaying ARC Notification of EPS Fault Signals

For any system point the will be used as an EPS Fault point (i.e., a
point used to detect a loss of power from the transformer
connected at TB1of an SCU), you can define an ARC notifcation
delay from 0 to 3600 seconds (i.e., up to 1 hour). EN50131 allows
notification to an ARC to be delayed for up to one hour for EPS
faults. This makes it possible for the IAS to experience a short-term
AC power outage (i.e., an outage of less than 1 hour) without

18-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System System Sensor Selection

reporting it to the ARC. Because the EPS Fault point is a system

point, the occurance of an EPS Fault will immediately make all
unset zones become unsettable until power is restored and an
authorized user acknowledges the fault(s).
To delay ARC notification of EPS fault signals
1. Activate () the selection box in the EPS column for each
system status point that will be used as an EPS Fault point.
2. At the top of the editor, use the ARC dial delay parameter to
set a delay of up to 3600 seconds.
3. Select OK to accept your settings. The System Sensor Selec-
tion editor will close.
With the system configured to delay EPS fault notifications, the
occurrance of an EPS fault will be processed as follows:
✦ At the moment an AC power outage occurs, the EPS fault
point will go into its overriden not-ready condition (typically
Fault; refer to “Overriding a Point’s Not-ready Condition”
below) and all unset zones will become unsettable.
✦ If AC power returns before the ARC dial delay expires, no EPS
fault message will be sent to the ARC.
✦ If AC power is still off when the ARC dial delay expires, an
EPS Fault message will be sent to the ARC.
✦ When a user restores (i.e., acknowledges) an EPS fault point
that has returned to normal, an EPS Fault Restore message
will be sent to the ARC and all unset zones will again become
settable.

Overriding a Point’s Not-ready Condition

You can override the not-ready condition of a system status point
or common sensor. This allows the IAS to process the not-ready
condition as a fault or tamper condition. Refer to “Overriding a
Point's Not-ready Condition” on page 18-20 for more information.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-9

TCON299–05/10
IAS Access Level Setup Intrusion Alarm System

IAS Access Level Setup

TAC I/NET Seven displays the IAS Access Level Setup editor (see
Figure 18-3) when you select Level Setup from the Intrusion
Alarm System Configuration editor (see Figure 18-1). Use this
editor to define the permisions that will be granted to IAS users
based on a user's access level.

Figure 18-3. IAS Access Level Setup Editor

This editor has two groups of parameters. One group is for defining
Level 2 permissions and the other group is for defining Level 3
permissions. Buttons are also provided in the upper right corner of
editor that allow you to quickly set all parameters to default settings
appropriate for a particular security grade (either grade 2 or grade
3).
To quickly set all parameters to default settings
✦ For a grade 2 system, click the Grade 2 button
— OR —
✦ For a grade 3 system, click the Grade 3 button

18-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Arming Terminal Configuration

To customize access level permissions

1. In the Level 2 permissions section, define permissions for
access level 2 users by activating () or deactivating ()
permissions for each of the following conditions:
• Intrusion – Choose permission that will be granted to a
user at access level 2 when that user is dealing with an
Intrusion alarm.
• Tamper – Activate () each permission that will be
granted to a user at access level 2 when that user is dealing
with an Tamper alarm.
• Fault – Activate () each permission that will be granted
to a user at access level 2 when that user is dealing with an
Fault alarm.
2. Using the Level 3 permissions section, repeat step 1 to
define permissions for access level 3 users.
3. Select OK to accept these settings and close the editor.
For unsupervised discrete inputs, you can define overrides on a
per-sensor basis if you wish to create exceptions to these settings.

Arming Terminal Configuration

TAC I/NET Seven displays the Arming Terminal Configuration
editor (see Figure 18-4) when you add or modify an arming
terminal from the Intrusion Alarm System Configuration editor.
Use this editor to define up to four OP5 arming terminals for your
intrusion alarm system.
1. If you are adding a new arming terminal, use the Id field to
assign a number (from 1 to 4) to the terminal. If you are
modify an existing terminal, this field will be read-only.
2. Use the Point drop-down list to choose the DO point
assigned to the OP5 arming terminal. This point must have
already been configured as a door point and its address must
be LLSS2808, LLSS2908, LLSS3008, or LLSS3108 (where
LL = link number and SS = station number) in order for it to
appear in the drop-down list.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-11

TCON299–05/10
Arming Terminal Configuration Intrusion Alarm System

Figure 18-4. Arming Terminal Configuration Editor

3. Use the Location drop-down list to specify a location for the

OP5 arming terminal. This will affect what type of indications
are presented at the OP5 arming terminal when zones get set
or unset, or when an alarm, fault, tamper, or trouble condi-
tion occurs within a zone.
Only zones that have already been defined will be included in
the drop-down list. If you have not already added the neces-
sary zone to the system, you can temporarily set the arming
terminal's location to "No Zone." Remember to reset the
arming terminal's location later, after you have added the
necessary zone.
4. Enter a value (from 5 to 30 seconds) for the Communica-
tions loss detect parameter. The SLI constantly quick-polls
its subLAN devices. If the OP5 arming terminal does not
respond to the quick-polls within the number of seconds you
enter for this parameter, an "MCU lost" event will occur.

18-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Arming Terminal Configuration

5. Enter a value (from 15 to 180 seconds) for the Entry

complete parameter. This parameter is only used when the
zone is defined with an entry route. This parameter deter-
mines how long after entering a set zone the user will have to
reach the OP5 arming terminal, login, and unset the zone. If
the user does not unset the zone within the permitted time,
the zone will go into alarm.
6. Enter a value (from 15 to 180 seconds) for the Exit complete
parameter. This parameter is only used when the zone is
defined with an exit route. This parameter determines how
long after issuing a "Set" command to a zone that the user will
have to exit the zone. If the user does not exit the zone within
the permitted time, an intrusion alarm can occur that will
cause the zone to go into alarm.
7. Enter a value (from 30 to 180 seconds) for the Inactivity
timeout parameter. If no user activity is detected at the OP5
arming terminal for a period that exceeds this parameter's
setting, the currently logged on user will be logged off auto-
matically.
8. The Zones list shows all zones that have been added to the
system. Use selection boxes () in this portion of the editor
to define which zones will be controllable from this arming
terminal, and to setup automatic setting of the zone and auto-
matic loggoff of the user.
a. Make a zone controllable from this OP5 arming terminal
by activating () the selection box in the Select column.
This causes an addition selection box to appear in the
Unset and Set Logoff columns of this zone.
b. If necessary, activate () the selection box in the Unset
column to configure the zone to unset automatically
when a user logs on at this terminal.
c. If necessary, activate () the selection box in the Set
Logoff column to configure the OP5 arming terminal to
automatically logoff the user when the user sets the zone
from this terminal.
d. Repeat these steps for any other zones you wish to make
controllable from this OP5 arming terminal.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-13

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration Intrusion Alarm System

Note: When a user at the OP5 arming terminal issues a Set All or Unset
All command, only the zones that have been made controllable from
the terminal will be affected.

9. Select OK to save these settings and close the editor, or select

Cancel to exit without saving.

Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration

TAC I/NET Seven displays the Intrusion Alarm Zone Configura-
tion editor (see Figure 18-5) when you add or modify a zone from
the Intrusion Alarm System editor.

Figure 18-5. Intrusion Alarm System Zone Configuration Editor

18-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration

Use this editor to define up to 24 zones for your system.

1. If you are adding a new zone, use the Zone number field to
assign a number (from 1 to 24) to the zone. If you are modify
an existing zone, this field will be read-only.
2. Use the Zone status drop-down list to choose a point that
will be used to represent the zone's status. This point must be
available (i.e., it has not been assigned to another zone) and
must be configured as an internal DA in order for it to appear
in the drop-down list.
3. Use the Set/uset request drop-down list to choose a point
that will issue a set or unset request to the zone. This point
must be configured as an internal DO in order for it to appear
in the drop-down list.
The IAS application will automatically control this point
when a user at an OP5 arming terminal issues a set or unset
command to the zone. An authorized TAC I/NET Seven oper-
ator can also request to set or unset the zone by manually
controlling this point to a 1 or 0, respectively.
4. Use the Zone mode drop-down list to choose a point that will
be used to indicate the zone's mode. This point must be avail-
able (i.e., it has not been assigned to another zone) and must
be configured as an internal DI or DA in order for it to appear
in the drop-down list.
5. If necessary, use the Zone set indication drop-down list to
choose a point that will be used to indicate that the zone is set.
The drop-down list will include all of your system's DO
points. Choose the point that will be wired to PIRs in the
zone.
The purpose of this point is to disable the LED on all PIRs
within the zone whenever the zone is set. If your zone will not
contain PIRs, or if you do not need to control the LED on
PIRs, you can leave this parameter set to "None."
6. If necessary, use the Failed to set drop-down list to choose a
point that will be used to indicate that the zone has failed to
set. The drop-down list will include all of your system's DO
points. Choose the point that will be wired to an indicator.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-15

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration Intrusion Alarm System

If no failed-to-set indicator will be required for this zone, you

can leave this parameter set to "None.".
7. Use the Entry timer field to delay alarms that may occur along
the zone's entry route for a specific number of seconds (10 to
300 in 5-second increments). Refer to IAS Entry Procedure
for more information.
8. Use the Exit timer field to delay alarms that may occur along
the zone's exit route for a specific number of seconds (10 to
300 in 5-second increments). Refer to IAS Exit Procedure for
more information.
9. Use the Fail to set duration field to specify the maximum
number of seconds (0 to 100) that the failed-to-set indicator
should remain on once activated.
10. Use the Sensor list to assign sensors to the zone. This list
shows all of your system's discrete inputs. Using selection
boxes () in this portion of the editor you can:
• Define which sensors will be assigned to the zone
• Choose whether or not a sensor will be an entry or exit
route sensor.
• Choose whether or not a sensor can be used to start the
zone's entry procedure.
• If necessary, define an override for the sensor.
Add sensors to the zone as follows:
a. For any sensor you wish to add to the zone, activate ()
the selection box in the Select column.
If a sensor has already been assigned to another zone or
has been defined as a system sensor or common sensor,
no selection box will be available in this column.
b. If the selected sensor should be included in this zone's
entry route, activate () the selection box in the Entry
column.
c. If the selected sensor should be used as a valid entry point
into the zone (i.e., it is allowed to start the zone's entry
procedure), activate () the selection box in the Start
column.

18-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Intrusion Alarm System Dial Parameters

d. If the selected sensor should be included in this zone's

exit route, activate () the selection box in the Exit
column.
e. If you wish to define custom codes for this sensor or
override its not-ready condition, keeping the mouse
cursor within the highlighted area of the selected point,
double-click in the Rest NRdy Ovrd column. Use the
resulting Intrusion Alarm System Dial Code Select dialog
box to choose on override for the point's not-ready
condition.
f. Repeat these steps as necessary to add other sensors to the
zone.
11. Select OK to accept these settings or select Cancel to close this
editor without saving.

Intrusion Alarm System Dial Parameters

TAC I/NET Seven displays the Intrusion Alarm System Dial Param-
eters editor (see Figure 18-6) in the following instances:
✦ When you click the SIA Setup button in the Intrusion Alarm
System editor.
✦ When you double-click the Dial Codes field in the Intrusion
Alarm System Dial Code Select dialog box.
✦ When you double-click the Zone dial field in the Intrusion
Alarm Zone Configuration editor.
Use this editor to define what codes will be sent to an alarm
receiving center, how internal and external warning devices will
behave, and what overrides (if any) should be used when state
changes occur at IAS points.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-17

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Dial Parameters Intrusion Alarm System

Standard
Settings

Overrides

Figure 18-6. Intrusion Alarm System Dial Parameters Editor

Note: At any time while using this editor you can click the Defaults button
to reset all parameters back to default settings, or click Clear All to
clear all fields. No settings will be retained unless you click OK to save
all settings.

1. Use the Dialer fault drop-down list to choose a discrete point

that will be used to indicate the status of the dialer.
When the dialer is operating normally, this point will be
commanded to its 0 state (i.e., ready). If a fault is detected in
the dialer, the IAS will command this point to its 1 state (i.e.,
not-ready). Typically, you will also configure this point as a
System Status point or as a Common Sensor and define a
“Fault” override for its not-ready condition.

18-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Intrusion Alarm System Dial Parameters

2. Use the Phone # field to define the appropriate phone

number or IP address for the alarm receiving center (ARC)
that will accept incoming calls from your system's dialer.
Enter up to 30 characters that will be sent as a string from the
dialer when it attempts to establish a connection with the
ARC.
3. Define the Dialer Account (up to 6 characters) appropriate
for your system. This account string distinguishes your intru-
sion alarm system from other systems that may report back to
the same ARC.
4. Use the scrolling list in the upper portion of the editor to
define the “standard” dial codes and warning device settings
for the listed IAS conditions. The settings you define in this
list will be used whenever a listed condition occurs and no
override has been defined for the associated point.
a. Click in the Restore column of any set of standard
settings that you wish to modify.
b. Type the code that will be sent to an alarm receiving
center when a point without overrides gets restored. You
can leave this entry blank if no restore code should be
sent to the alarm receiving center.
c. Click in the Not Ready column of the selection and type
the code that will be sent to an alarm receiving center
when a point without overrides goes not-ready. You can
leave this entry blank if no not-ready code should be sent
to the alarm receiving center.
5. Use the scrolling list in the lower portion of the editor to
define up to 25 sets of “override” settings. You can assign any
set of overrides to specific points in the IAS on a per-point
basis.
a. Click in the Restore column of any set of overrides that
you wish to modify.
b. Type the code that will be sent to an alarm receiving
center when a point with this override gets restored. You
can leave this entry blank if no restore code should be
sent to the alarm receiving center.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-19

TCON299–05/10
Overriding a Point's Not-ready Condition Intrusion Alarm System

c. Click in the Not Ready column of the selection and type

the code that will be sent to an alarm receiving center
when a point with this override goes not-ready. You can
leave this entry blank if no not-ready code should be sent
to the alarm receiving center.
d. Choose a setting for the not-ready condition override by
double-clicking in the Override column of the selection.
Use the resulting Intrusion Alarm System Dial Code
Override Select dialog box to choose a setting .
6. Select OK to accept your settings or select Cancel to close this
editor without saving.

Overriding a Point's Not-ready Condition

It is common to have single-bit discrete points that can indicate
Normal/Not-ready (Normal/Alarm while the zone is set).
However, there may also be a necessity to have single-bit points in
the IAS that can indicate Normal/Fault or Normal/Tamper. You
can accomplish this by defining overrides for not-ready conditions.
1. Double-click on the Ndx Rest NRdy E I Ovrd Rest Inh Iso
column of a point in the System Sensor Selection editor (see
Figure 18-2 on page 18-7) or in the Intrusion Alarm Zone
Configuration editor (see Figure 18-5 on page 18-14).

Figure 18-7. Double-clicking on a Point to Override

2. Use the resulting Intrusion Alarm System Dial Code Select

dialog box to choose an override for the point's not-ready
condition.

18-20 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Intrusion Alarm System Overriding a Point's Not-ready Condition

Figure 18-8. Dial Code Select Dialog Box

3. The read-only Sensor point field shows the address and

point name of the point you are about to modify.
4. Use the Dial codes drop-down list to choose an override for
the selected point's not-ready condition.
5. If the desired override is not listed in the drop-down list, you
can add a new entry as follows:
a. Double-click on the Dial codes text field. This will cause
the Intrusion Alarm System Dial Parameters editor (see
Figure 18-6 on page 18-18) to open.
b. Use the editor to add the necessary entry. Refer to “Intru-
sion Alarm System Dial Parameters” on page 18-17 for
instructions.
c. Save your changes and close the editor. You will be
returned to this dialog box.
d. Use the Dial codes drop-down list to choose the override
that you just added.
6. Select OK to save your selection and close the dialog box.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 18-21

TCON299–05/10
Overriding a Point's Not-ready Condition Intrusion Alarm System

18-22 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

19
12
Override Billing

This is a special extension available only with DO points in the 7750

Building Manager. This extension lets you use the 7750 to control
points residing in other controllers. You can call the 7750 with a
touch-tone phone, enter the appropriate access code, and override
the previously defined time schedules for these points.
Using the extension editor, you can define zones. In this way you
can control multiple points within the same zone. A “wink” feature
lets you control the first point assigned to the zone prior to the end
of the override period. For example, you can use the wink feature
to blink the lights alerting the user that the override period is about
to expire.
In addition, this extension lets you track the number of overrides
requested, the amount of time a zone (point) is in override, and the
electricity consumed during the override time period. If an output
point is controlled by several zones (a chiller is one example), this
extension lets you identify the electricity use of individual zones.

Note: These features are invaluable in establishing billing information in a

building inhabited by multiple tenants. You can request tenants pay
electrical bills that reflect their actual consumption patterns. Tenants
who use a great deal of electricity will be faced with appropriately
large electrical bills. Tenants who use less electricity are not penalized
for inhabiting the same building as a heavy electrical user.

Before You Begin

The override portion of this extension lets you override normal
time schedules for points that reside in other DCUs.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 19-1

TCON299–05/10
Before You Begin Override Billing

Note: The minimum trip and minimum close times for discrete outputs in
other DCUs are not honored when the Building Manager initiates
control to these output points.

An override may be initiated by any of the following:

✦ Calling the 7750 with a touch-tone telephone and using its
built-in telephone interface to override existing zone time
schedules. This can be done up to 24 hours in advance.
✦ Closing a discrete switch wired to the optional 64 point inter-
face board that is connected to the 7750.

Notes: Equipment points in other DCUs that will be controlled by the

Building Manager must be defined as global (LAN, Link, or System).
Refer to Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing.
An indirect point must be created for each remote global equipment
point in the 7750 Building Manager database.

A 7750 that occupies one station on the LAN may contain up to 32

zones. A 7750 that occupies two stations on the LAN may contain
up to 64 zones.
A zone must be an internal DO point with a zero bit offset address;
e.g., 0100 DO. Each zone may have up to 12 points associated with
it. These 12 points must be DO or DC points with non-zero bit
offsets; e.g., 0101 DO, and should be indirect rather than resident
in the controller. The 7750 can override up to 128 unique points.
However, no more than 32 points should be controlled at any one
time.
Each DI point address is associated with a particular zone number.
If used, it must come from a particular terminal block pair on the
64 point DI module.

19-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Override Billing Override Billing Extension Editors

Override Billing Extension Editors

The Override Billing extension includes three sub-editors:
Override Parameters
Use this option to define which points are associated with each
zone. In addition, you may designate a point that is to wink at the
time specified and for a specified interval to indicate that the over-
ride time is about to expire.
Override Access Codes
Use this option to establish access codes for each zone. These are
used as passwords when telephoning the 7750 to initiate an over-
ride. Access codes are not required if dial-in access is not desired.
Equipment Mapping
Use this option to specify the kilowatt rating of the points you want
the 7750 to override. It also lets you specify how the points are
distributed among multiple zones. This makes it easy for you to bill
the appropriate users/tenants for energy use during the override
period.

Entering Override Parameters

This option adds the actual override billing extension to the
selected point. Use this option to specify distribution group, distri-
bution mask, cell priority, cell number, and to specify the indirect
points controlled by the zone point. The Override Parameters
screen lets you assign up to 12 points to one zone point for override
control. This lets you control up to 12 points when the zone point
is put into override.
The Override Parameters screen also lets you specify a wink
interval to notify the user or tenant that the override period is
about to expire.

Note: Only those points defined in the Resident I/O Points editor with zero
bit offset; i.e., bb of llssppbb = 0, can be zone points.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 19-3

TCON299–05/10
Entering Override Parameters Override Billing

1. Select Edit  Controller  Override Parameters, or click the

Override Parameters tool in the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the Resident I/O Points editor with the over-
ride billing (OB) option selected (see Figure 19-1).

Figure 19-1. Resident I/O Points Editor (OB selected)

This screen displays all the internal DO points (zones). These

are the only point types to which you can add override
parameters. A Y appears in the OB column of those points to
which override billing has already been added.
2. Choose a point from the list. This point should not already
have a Y in the OB column.
3. Select Add to add the override billing option to the point. The
system displays the Override Parameters editor for this point
(see Figure 19-2).
4. Set the following parameters:
✧ Distribution Group/Mask
✧ Cell Priority
✧ Cell Number

19-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Override Billing Entering Override Parameters

Figure 19-2. Override Parameters Editor

✧ Wink Off Interval

✧ Wink On Interval
✧ Equipment Points
These parameters are described below.
5. Select OK to accept your changes and exit the Override
Parameters editor.
Distribution Parameters
1. Select a Distribution group.
2. Define a Distribution mask that matches the distribution
group and mask(s) on the host PC(s) to which you want the
override data sent. The data is stored in a SevenTrends Over-
ride Billing table.
3. Select a Priority from the drop-down list for the override data
upload request. A priority of None means no data is uploaded.
Use Routine to steer override data to direct-connected host
PCs. Use Priority or Critical to steer override data to remote

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 19-5

TCON299–05/10
Entering Override Parameters Override Billing

(dial) host PCs. (Priority will not require a dial site to report
daily. Refer to Chapter 6, “System Messages” for additional
information.)
4. Enter a Cell number between 1 and 1,023. You must assign a
value other than zero (0) in order for SevenTrends to store the
trend information. Otherwise, this field is not used in TAC
I/NET Seven and can be any value.
End of Override Notice Parameters
1. Enter a number between zero and 255 in Wink off interval
(sec). This specifies how long the first equipment point in the
zone is turned off or winked before being turned back on to
indicate the override period is about to expire.
2. In the Wink on interval (min), enter a number between zero
and 255 to specify how long before the end of the override
period the system winks the first equipment point of the zone.
Equipment Points
Assign specific points to specific zones. You may assign up to 12
indirect points that a 7750 can override in this particular zone. The
first point is reserved as the winked point to be controlled by the
Wink Off and Wink On commands.

Adding Access Codes

This step is only required if overrides will be initiated remotely. Use
this option to designate access codes for each zone. These codes
must be used to access the zone you wish to put in override when
calling the 7750 Building Manager via a touch-tone phone.
1. Select Edit  Controller  Override Access Codes, or click
the Override Access Codes tool on the controller toolbar. The
system displays the Access Codes editor which contains the 64
points and their assigned access codes (see Figure 19-3).
2. Double-click on a point in the list, or select a point and click
Modify. The system displays the Zone Access Code editor (see
Figure 19-4)

19-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Override Billing Entering Override Parameters

Figure 19-3. Access Codes Editor

3. Enter a code containing up to six digits for each zone. This is

the number that must be entered via a touch-tone phone in
order to access a zone and override the normal time schedule
for a specific zone.

Figure 19-4. Zone Access Code Editor

4. Select OK to accept your changes and return to the Access

Codes editor.
5. Enter a code containing up to six digits for Non-billable
access.
A non-billable access code is typically used by night cleaning
or maintenance personnel when they dial up the 7750 to place
the zone requiring cleaning or maintenance into override.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 19-7

TCON299–05/10
Entering Override Parameters Override Billing

The amount of non-billable electrical consumption and over-

ride time is accumulated on a daily basis for each zone and is
updated at midnight.

Note: If a non-billable override and a billable override overlap each other,

the non-billable override always takes precedence.

6. Enter a code containing up to six digits for Interrogate access.

This code lets you call the 7750 and inquire about the state or
value of any point on the LAN. You must know the eight-digit
point address because you will need to enter it into the system
from a touch-tone phone when you want to interrogate the
point. You will also need to know whether the point is an
input point or an output point.
7. Enter a code containing up to six digits for Control access.
This code lets you call the 7750, inquire about the state or
value of any point on the LAN, and control any point on the
LAN to a certain state or value. You must know the eight-digit
point address because you will need to enter it into the system
from a touch-tone phone when you want to control the point.
You will also need to know whether the point is an input
point or an output point.
8. When you finish entering these access codes, click OK to
accept your changes and exit the Access Codes editor.

Adding Equipment Mapping

Equipment mapping allows you to bill tenants for override energy
usage. Use this option to specify the load size of the equipment
being controlled, the base load, and the percentage of the total load
that can be assessed to each zone.

Note: Only those points defined in the Resident I/O Points editor as indirect
and with a non-zero bit offset; i.e., bb of llssppbb = 1–9, can be
equipment points.

19-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Override Billing Entering Override Parameters

The following procedure is used for Equipment Mapping.

1. Select Edit  Controller  Equipment Mapping, or click the
Equipment Mapping tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the Resident I/O Points editor with the equip-
ment mapping (EM) option selected (see Figure 19-5).

Figure 19-5. Resident I/O Points Editor (EM selected)

This screen displays the non-zero bit offset point addresses to

which you may add equipment mapping. A Y appears in the
EM column of those points to which an equipment map has
already been added.
2. Choose a point from the list. This point should not already
have a Y in the EM column.
3. Select Add to add the equipment mapping option to the
point. The system displays the Equipment Mapping editor for
this point (see Figure 19-6).
4. Enter a number between zero and 32,767 to specify the kilo-
watt (KW) rating for this Load size so that kilowatt-hour
(KWH) calculations may be made.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 19-9

TCON299–05/10
Entering Override Parameters Override Billing

Figure 19-6. Equipment Mapping Editor

5. Enter a number between zero and 100 (percent) for the Base
load. This number is multiplied by the load size to determine
the minimum number of kilowatt hours a zone accumulates
when the load is overridden by only one zone.
6. Select a zone and select Modify, or double-click on the desired
zone. The Equipment Mapping - Modify dialog box will
appear (see Figure 19-7).

Figure 19-7. Equipment Mapping - Modify Dialog Box

7. Enter the percentage of the load assessed to this zone and

select OK.
8. Click OK to return to the Equipment Mapping editor. Repeat
as required to distribute this load over additional zones.

Note: The total distribution must equal 100 percent, even if a point is only
controlled by one zone.

19-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Override Billing Entering Override Parameters

9. When finished, select OK from the Equipment Mapping

editor to return to the Resident I/O Points editor.
10. Click OK to accept your changes and exit the Equipment
Mapping editor.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 19-11

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

20
4
7771 Industrial Controller

Interface

The 7771 I/NET Communications Interface or ICI acts as a bridge

between the controller LAN and another on-line data communica-
tion system/network that uses MODBUS protocol. The ICI lets you
transfer analog or discrete point data between the two systems. It
provides data buffering, storage, and translation between the two
systems.

Configuring the 7771

The ICI is configured for the MODBUS system using the ICI
Configuration editor. The ICI Configuration editor option only
appears when you are connected to a 7771. This lets you set the
communication parameters of the ICI on the MODBUS system.
The procedure is provided below.
1. Connect to a 7771 ICI.
2. Select Edit  Controller  ICI Configuration from the main
menu. The system displays the ICI Configuration editor (see
Figure 20-1).
3. Choose a setting for each parameter.
a. Choose an ICI port status from the drop-down list. The
default is Enable.
b. Choose an ICI interface type from the drop-down list.
The default is RS232.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 20-1

TCON299–05/10
Configuring the 7771 7771 Industrial Controller Interface

Figure 20-1. ICI Configuration Editor

c. Choose a Baud rate from the drop-down list. The default

is 9600.
d. Choose the appropriate number of Data bits from the
drop-down list. The default is 8.
e. Choose the appropriate number of Stop bits from the
drop-down list. The default is one.
f. Choose a Parity type from the drop-down list. The
default is even.
g. Choose an ICI protocol from the drop-down list. The
default is Binary.
h. Enter an ICI slave address (0 to 255). The default is one
i. Using the spindial, enter the Character completion
timeout (sec) time (0 to 2.55). This is the amount of
time the ICI waits for a response after sending a request.
j. Using the spindial, enter the Delay before response
(sec) time. The default is zero. This is the amount of time
the ICI waits to respond after receiving a request.
4. Select OK to accept your changes and exit the editor.

20-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
7771 Industrial Controller Interface Points and Addressing

Note: The parameters you define here must agree with the parameters
defined in the MODBUS host. The ICI emulates a PLC 584 so make
sure the MODBUS host is configured to recognize the ICI as such.

Points and Addressing

The TAC I/NET and MODBUS systems use different sets of point
types. The ICI converts MODBUS point types so that TAC I/NET
can recognize them and vice versa. All MODBUS points should
have a corresponding external point defined in I/NET. Points
defined as internal in the ICI exist only in the TAC I/NET Seven
software, they are not connected to the MODBUS. If you acciden-
tally assign an internal TAC I/NET point to a MODBUS point, the
ICI gives you an error message when you attempt to command or
receive data from the MODBUS host.
The ICI supports all standard TAC I/NET input and output points.
Refer to the chapter dealing with Input and Output Points in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide, for a
detailed description of each point type.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 20-3

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

21
14
Micro Regulator Control

Micro Regulators (MRs) operate on an MR LAN connected to a

7792 Micro Regulator Interface (MRI), 7793 Micro Control Inter-
face (MCI), or 7798 I/SITE LAN. The MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN
provides a communications gateway to the TAC I/NET controller
LAN. The 7792 and 7793 interface controllers support connection
of up to two MR LANs (one on each of two channels). The 7798
provides support for one MR LAN. Each MR LAN may contain up
to 32 Micro Regulators. The MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN appears on
host and controller LANs as a DCU, and uses one address for the
7798 and two addresses for the 7792 and 7793 (one for each
channel).
The MRI and MCI maintains the complete database and control
parameters for up to 64 MR controllers connected to its two MR
LAN ports. The I/SITE LAN maintains the complete database and
control parameters for up to 32 MR Controllers connected to its
single MR LAN port.
The MRI, MCI, and I/SITE LAN supports the definition of internal
points with all of the extension capabilities typical of the 7716 PCU.
The internal points in the MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN are defined
only for point addresses not currently used by its associated MR
controllers.
The Micro Regulator controllers provide stand-alone DDC control
of a collection of six hardware input and up to seven hardware
output points. The number of output points and their type vary by
model. Both discrete and PWM modulated control are supported
by the MR controllers. Depending upon the model, high or low
voltage outputs, or both are available.
Refer to TCON109, 7792 Micro Regulator Interface, TCON138,
Model 7798 I/SITE LAN, and TCON113 and TCON126, I/STAT
and Micro Regulator Controllers, for details.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 21-1

TCON299–05/10
Configuring the Interface Controller Micro Regulator Control

Configuring the Interface Controller

Use the following procedure to assign the addresses in the
controller.
1. If you are connected to a 7792 MRI, select Edit  Controller 
MR Configuration, or click the MR Configuration tool on the
Controller toolbar,
If you are connected to a 7793 MCI or 7798 I/SITE LAN,
select Edit  Controller  MCU Configuration, or click the
MCU Configuration tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the MR/MCU Configuration editor shown in
Figure 21-1.

Figure 21-1. MR Configuration Editor

21-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Micro Regulator Control Creating the MR Database

This editor displays the addresses of all the MRs connected to

this controller (32 addresses for a 7798 and 64 addresses for to
a 7792 or 7793 controller).

Note: An MCI and I/SITE LAN will offer four options: DPU, MR, DIO,
and DIU. DPU refers to the DPU7910, DPU7920, and SCU1284
controllers, DIO refers to the DIO7940 and SCU1280 controllers,
and DIU refers to the DIU7930 and SCU1200 controllers. Other-
wise, the MCI and I/SITE LAN will function identically to the MRI.

2. Using the spindials, choose the type of device that will be

located at each address. The default type is Internal (i.e., no
device connected at the address).

Note: Figure 21-1 shows an MRI defined as a dual station. A MRI or MCI,
defined with two stations shows MRs in four adjacent columns
numbered from XX00 to XX31 and YY00 to YY31. In this case, XX
refers to the first address and YY refers to the second address of the
MRI or MCI.

3. Select OK to accept the changes and exit the editor.

Creating the MR Database

1. Connect to an MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points, or click the
Resident I/O Point tool on the Controller toolbar.
3. See Chapter 5, Point Definition and Addressing, for a detailed
description of database parameters and the mechanics of
database entry.

MR Copy
This function copies the data in one MR to another MR. The data
copied using this function consists of Resident I/O point data and
MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN resident extension editors only. The MR
Copy function will not copy Standalone ATS or I/STAT Parameters.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 21-3

TCON299–05/10
MR Copy Micro Regulator Control

Use the following steps to perform the MR Copy function:

1. Connect to an MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Resident I/O Points, or click the
Resident I/O Point tool on the Controller toolbar.
3. Choose a source MR point to be copied from the point list.
4. Select MR Copy. The system displays the MCU Copy screen
(see Figure 21-2).
5. Define a point address for the new MR point using the
Station and Point spindials.

Figure 21-2. MCU Copy Screen

6. Select OK. The system performs the MR Copy function.

Configuring the Micro Regulators

Once you have defined several MR-resident points in the Resident
I/O Points editor, return to the main menu and select Edit 
Controller  MR Functions, or click the MR Functions tool on the
Controller toolbar.
This option only appears when you are connected to a 7792 (MRI),
7793 (MCI), or 7798 (I/SITE LAN). The system displays the MR
Functions summary (see Figure 21-3).

21-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Micro Regulator Control MR Copy

Figure 21-3. MR Functions Summary

The MR Functions screen is used to access the following MR

options:
✦ MR-resident Direct Digital Control (DDC)
✦ Standalone ATS (ATS)
✦ Hardware Coefficients (Hardware)
✦ MR Parameters (I/STAT)
The last three options on this screen let you define the hardware-
specific parameters for each MR.

MR-Resident DDC
By now you are probably familiar with the worksheets located in
TCON157, TAC I/NET Seven Forms and Worksheets. There is a
separate worksheet for each module type. We recommend you fill
these out before entering the data into the system.
Use the following steps to define MR-resident DDC modules:
1. Choose an MR point from the MR Summary list in the MR
Functions summary (see Figure 21-3).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 21-5

TCON299–05/10
MR Copy Micro Regulator Control

2. Select DDC. The system displays the MR DDC Modules editor

(see Figure 21-4). This screen displays all modules assigned to
this MR.

Figure 21-4. MR DDC Modules Editor

3. Use this editor to perform the following functions:

✧ Add, Delete, Modify, or Copy an MR-resident DDC
module.
✧ Mark a DDC module for use with the History function
(refer to the chapter dealing with Direct Digital Control
in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference
Guide, for a discussion of history).
✧ Perform Tuning on an MR-resident DDC module (refer
to the chapter dealing with Direct Digital Control in
TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide,
for a discussion of tuning).
Adding an MR-resident DDC Module
Use the following steps to add an MR-resident DDC module:
1. Choose a line (1 - 16) from the module summary. The line
must not already have a module assigned.

21-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Micro Regulator Control MR Copy

2. Select Add. The system displays the Add MR DDC Module

dialog box (see Figure 21-5).

Figure 21-5. Add MR DDC Dialog Box

3. Enter a Module name or accept the default name generated

by the system.
4. Choose a Module type from the drop-down list. Module
types and their associated parameters are discussed in the
chapter dealing with Direct Digital Control in TCON300,
TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide.
5. Select OK. The system displays the editor for the module type
that you selected.
6. Set the parameters in the chosen module editor and select OK
to save the settings. Refer to Chapter 14, Direct Digital
Control, in this manual for DDC module configuration proce-
dures.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required to add more modules.
8. Select Close to exit this procedure.
Deleting an MR-resident Module
Use the following procedure to delete an MR-resident DDC
module:
1. From the MR DDC Modules screen (see Figure 21-4) choose
the module and select Delete. The system displays the Delete
confirmation prompt.
2. Select Yes. The system deletes the module and displays the
DDC Modules screen.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 21-7

TCON299–05/10
MR Copy Micro Regulator Control

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as required to delete more DDC

modules.
4. Select Close to exit this procedure.
Modifying an MR-resident DDC Module
Modifying a DDC module is similar to adding a DDC module. Use
the same procedure described in “Adding an MR-resident DDC
Module” on page 21-6 with the following exceptions: choose a
DDC module that already exists; select Modify from the MR DDC
Modules screen rather than Add.
Copying an MR-resident DDC Module
Use the following procedure to copy a DDC module.
1. From the MR DDC Modules editor (see Figure 21-4) choose
the module and select Copy. The system displays the DDC
Copy dialog box (see Figure 21-6).

Figure 21-6. MR DDC Copy Dialog Box

2. Enter the Module number or accept the default module

number.
3. Enter the Module name. Use up to 8 characters.
4. Select an Module type.
5. Select OK. The system displays the editor for the type of
module that you selected.
6. Modify the parameters as required and select OK. The system
copies the parameters to the new module and displays the MR
DDC Modules editor. (see Figure 21-4).

21-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Micro Regulator Control MR Copy

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required to copy more modules.

8. Select Close to exit this procedure.

Standalone ATS
Selecting ATS from the MR Functions summary brings you to the
Standalone ATS editor (see Figure 21-7). Normal ATS functions are
supported through the MRI, MCI, and I/SITE LAN. Standalone
ATS is a backup for ATS scheduling, should there be a break in the
MR LAN communications.

Figure 21-7. Standalone ATS Editor

The Standalone ATS is an MR-resident ATS schedule programmed

into the MRs that allows a single start and stop time for each day of
the week for the point designated as the Master Device Control
point in the MR Parameters editor (see Figure 21-9). These
commands are only issued if the MR and DCU are not communi-
cating.

Hardware Coefficients
Hardware coefficients correspond to FM (factory slope) and FB
(factory offset) conversion coefficients. These parameters are
primarily used by CSI for factory-made adjustments to the MR

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 21-9

TCON299–05/10
MR Copy Micro Regulator Control

hardware inputs. The end-user should avoid altering these settings.

However, if necessary, use the following steps to define hardware
coefficients:
1. Choose an MR point from the MR Summary list in the MR
Function screen.
2. Select Hardware. The system displays the Hardware Coeffi-
cients editor (see Figure 21-8).

Figure 21-8. Hardware Coefficients Editor

3. Enter an M value between 0 and 1.9997. This conversion

parameter corresponds to the FM (factory slope) conversion
coefficient in the I/STAT.
4. Enter a B value between –128 and 127. This conversion
parameter corresponds to the FB (factory offset) conversion
coefficient in the I/STAT.
5. Choose a Span setting from the drop-down list. The Span
field offers a normal span and a narrow span. Normal span is
used to set AI points to a range of 0–10VDC or a range of 0–
5VDC. depending upon MR type. The narrow span is used to
set AI points to a range of 4–8VDC or 2–4VDC, depending
upon MR type.

21-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Micro Regulator Control MR Copy

6. As necessary, repeat steps 3 through 5 for each bit.

7. Select OK to return to the MR Functions summary.

MR (I/STAT) Parameters
The MR (I/STAT) Parameters editor defines the points that will be
controlled or displayed locally with an I/STAT. Using this editor to
establish the Master Device Control Point, the Call button point,
the inactivity timeout intervals used by the I/STAT, and the I/STAT
password.
Use the following steps to configure MR parameters:
1. Choose an MR point from the MR Summary list in the MR
Function screen.
2. Select I/STAT. The system displays the MR Parameters editor
(see Figure 21-9).

Figure 21-9. MR Parameters editor screen

Note: The parameters in this edit screen are used by the I/STAT, an intelli-
gent thermostat connected to the MR. It controls and monitors points
and devices connected to the MR.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 21-11

TCON299–05/10
MR Copy Micro Regulator Control

3. Set the following parameters:

✧ Button Parameters
✧ Inactivity Timeouts
✧ LED Functions
Procedures for configuring these parameters are described
below.
4. When you are finished, select OK to leave this editor.
Button Parameters
Use the following steps to configure Button parameters:
1. Enter the Master device address. The point address or name
of the point to be used as the Master Device Control Point is
entered here. This point is either a DO or DC point and repre-
sents the occupancy of the MR. It will be controlled from on
(occupied) to off (unoccupied) depending upon the time of
day.
2. Set an Interval. The Interval field allows you to specify the
time, from 0 to 255 minutes, that the interval timer will
countdown when the Master Device point is activated
through the On/Off button on the I/STAT. The Master Device
point will remain on until the interval timer has counted
down to zero.

Note: If the Interval is set to 0, the On/Off button becomes a toggle switch
(i.e., no countdown) for the Master Device point. In this case, the
Master Device point is turned on when the On/Off button is first
pressed and remains on until the On/Off button is pressed again.

3. Enter the Call button address. This address and point type
define the point that is controlled on or off when you press
the I/STAT’s Call button. This point may be a DO or DC
point.
4. Enter a numeric, three-digit password for the I/STAT in the
Password Digits field. The password restricts access to the
Service function on the I/STAT (the ability to make
point/parameter/calibration changes through the I/STAT).

21-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Micro Regulator Control MR Copy

Inactivity Timeouts
Use the following steps to configure Inactivity Timeouts:
1. Enter the Escape from service timeout (from 0 to 255
seconds). The I/STAT uses this timeout to return to Normal
mode from its Service function. This timeout starts its count-
down from the time the last button is pressed.
2. Enter the Return to home LED timeout (from 0 to 255
seconds). The I/STAT uses this timeout to return to the Home
LED display when in the normal mode. This timeout starts its
countdown from the time the last button is pressed.
LED Functions
There are four LEDs that are associated with points. Any of the four
LEDs may be designated as the Home LED. The Home LED lights
and the home LED point displays when the I/STAT is initialized,
and after the “Return to Home LED” timeout interval expires.
LED 1 allows you to enter a master setpoint address as the Base
address and a local setpoint address as the Adjust address. These
two addresses must be local to the same MR (they must have the
same PP in their address). This allows you to make changes to the
system setpoint from the I/STAT using the Change +/– keys and
display the new adjusted setpoint value at the I/STAT. The displayed
value is a summation of the Base address value and the Adjust
address value.
The Adjust address must be an AO point so that changes may be
made through the I/STAT. The base address may be an AI or AO
point. Both points may be external, internal, or indirect points.
If the Base address master setpoint is received from another address
external to the MR, then you must attach a Calculation extension
to the base address point (i.e., P0 = Master Setpoint).

Note: Without a Base address defined, only the value of the Adjust address
will display through the I/STAT. If the Adjust address is not defined
then no value will display through the I/STAT.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 21-13

TCON299–05/10
MR Copy Micro Regulator Control

If the total value of the Adjust address and Base address is needed
for other applications, you must create a separate calculation
module that sums the two point address values and outputs the
result of the calculation to another internal AO point.
Depending upon the point type, certain parameters can be defined
for each LED.
✦ AI - no parameters required. This point type is display only
on the I/STAT.
✦ AO - there are three parameters that this point type supports.
✧ Increment - the value by which an analog point is
changed each time a Change arrow button is pressed on
the I/STAT.
✧ Low - the lowest value to which the point may be
adjusted (i.e., the lowest space temperature setpoint
allowed).
✧ High - the highest value to which the point may be
adjusted (i.e., the highest space temperature setpoint
allowed).
✦ DO/DC/DI/DM/DA - these point types support 0, 1, or 2–3
character state descriptions states for states 0, 1, or 2 respec-
tively.

21-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

22
10
Application Specific Controllers

Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) are configured from the

ASC editor. This editor is available when you are connected to a
7792 (MRI), 7793 (MCI), or 7798 (I/SITE LAN).
Select Edit  Controller  ASC Parameters, or click the ASC
Parameters tool on the Controller toolbar. The system displays the
ASC editor (see Figure 22-1).

Figure 22-1. ASC Editor

The following functions are available within the ASC editor:

✦ Displaying ASC Data
✦ Modifying Parameters
✦ Modifying ASC Names
✦ Copying ASC Parameters

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 22-1

TCON299–05/10
Displaying ASC Data Application Specific Controllers

✦ Updating the Interface Controller

✦ Updating the ASC
Procedures for each of these options are described below.

Displaying ASC Data

TAC I/NET Seven provides a read-only screen of ASC dynamic
data. Use the following procedures to display ASC data:
1. Select an ASC from those listed in the ASC editor and click
Display Data. The system displays the ASC Dynamic Data
summary (see Figure 22-2).

Figure 22-2. ASC Dynamic Data Summary

The specific data on this summary varies depending on the

ASC. (The screen shown in Figure 22-2 is for an MR-AHU.)
2. Select Close to exit from the ASC Dynamic Data summary.

22-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Application Specific Controllers Modifying Parameters

Modifying Parameters
ASC parameters can be edited from the MR-ASC Parameters editor
within TAC I/NET Seven, or from the I/STAT or M/STAT
connected directly to the ASC. The parameters available, and their
limits and functions, depend on the type of ASC being configured.
Refer to the documentation supplied with your particular ASC for
parameter descriptions and configuration procedures. Use the
following basic procedures to modify ASC parameters from TAC
I/NET Seven:
1. Select an ASC from the ASC editor and click Modify. The
system displays the MR-ASC Parameters editor (see
Figure 22-3).

Figure 22-3. MR-ASC Parameters Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 22-3

TCON299–05/10
Modifying ASC Names Application Specific Controllers

The parameters available within this editor depend on the

type of ASC selected. (The editor shown in Figure 22-3 is for
an MR-AHU.)
2. Use the documentation included with your ASC to modify
the parameters as necessary.
3. When you have finished modifying parameters, select OK to
accept your changes and exit this procedure.

Modifying ASC Names

TAC I/NET Seven allows you to assign a name to each ASC
connected to your system. This name will be appended to the resi-
dent point names in the MCI and will then serve as a reference
while in ASC-specific editors. Use the following procedures to
modify ASC names:
1. Select an ASC from the ASC editor and click Rename. The
system displays the MR-ASC Name Assignment dialog box
(see Figure 22-4).

Figure 22-4. MR-ASC Name Assignment Dialog Box

2. Enter an ASC name (up to 8 characters) and select OK.

Duplicate names are not accepted. If you enter a duplicate
name ASC name will have an asterisk in the MR-ASC selec-
tion editor.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each ASC as necessary.

22-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Application Specific Controllers Copying ASC Parameters

4. Once the ASC names are assigned, you must disconnect

(select Disconnect from the main menu) from the DCU and
then re-connect to see the changes made (changes may be
viewed from the DCU Summary or Resident I/O Points
editor). Point names can be defined at any time.
5. An MCI update must be performed to get the complete point
record from the ASC and to define the station parameters
(refer to “Updating the Interface Controller” on page 22-7).
The MCI update needs to be executed one time.

Copying ASC Parameters

You may copy the configuration of one ASC to one or more other
ASCs. The copy will include ASC parameters, I/STAT parameters,
and stand-alone ATS. Use the following procedures to copy ASC
parameters:
1. Highlight a source ASC from the list and select Copy. The
system displays the MR-ASC Copy Target editor (see
Figure 22-5).

Figure 22-5. MR-ASC Copy Target Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 22-5

TCON299–05/10
Saving and Restoring ASC Parameters Application Specific Controllers

This editor lists only ASCs of the same type as the source ASC
(AHU, VAV, etc.).
2. Select each ASC that should receive the copied parameters.
You can use the All Yes and All No buttons to speed the selec-
tion process.
3. When you are finished, click OK to begin the copy process.

Saving and Restoring ASC Parameters

TAC I/NET Seven allows you to save the parameter settings
(including I/STAT parameters) of your ASCs. You can then restore
the saved settings later if you wish. This can be beneficial especially
following an ASC Update, since performing the update causes the
ASC to lose its settings.
1. Choose which ASCs you wish to save or restore. Mark the
necessary ASCs by clicking on their name in the list. Each
time you click the ASC name, the S/R column indication
toggles between selected ([X]) and unselected ([ ]).
You can use the All Yes and All No buttons to quickly select
or unselect all listed ASCs.

Note: In the following step, you must have already saved an ASC’s settings
before you can perform a restore on that ASC.

2. Select the Save or Restore function, as necessary. TAC I/NET

Seven immediately begins processing the marked ASCs. As an
ASC is processed, its S/R column indication changes to unse-
lected ([ ]).
During the Save process, TAC I/NET Seven creates a separate SAV
file for each marked ASC. TAC I/NET Seven automatically assigns
a filename that indicates the link (LL), station (SS), and point (PP)
of the ASC the file represents. For example, a file named
ASC970300.SAV contains the settings of an ASC on link 97, station
03, at point address 00. The saved ASC files are store on the current
host workstation, in the SAV directory defined for your system.

22-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Application Specific Controllers Updating the Interface Controller

Updating the Interface Controller

Once you have assigned an ASC, you must perform the update to
get the point information into the interface controller (MCI, MRI,
or I/SITE LAN). Use the following procedures to update the inter-
face controller:

Note: Names must be assigned to all ASCs being updated to the MCI. Refer
to “Modifying ASC Names” on page 22-4 for ASC naming proce-
dures.

1. Select Update MCI from the ASC editor. The system displays
the MCI Update editor (see Figure 22-6).

Figure 22-6. MCI Update Editor

This screen lists all ASCs communicating with the connected

interface controller (MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN).
2. Select each ASC for which the interface controller will be
updated. You can use the All Yes and All No buttons to speed
the selection process.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 22-7

TCON299–05/10
Updating the ASC Application Specific Controllers

3. When you are finished, click OK to begin the update process.

4. When the update is complete, you must disconnect (select
Disconnect from the main menu) from the DCU and then
re-connect to see the changes at the host workstation.

Updating the ASC

The binary instruction set for the ASC is maintained in NOVRAM
and may be updated using the factory default update file. Use the
following procedures to update the ASC:
1. Select ASC from the ASC editor. The system displays the ASC
Update editor (see Figure 22-7).

Figure 22-7. ASC Update Editor

This editor lists all ASCs communicating with the connected

interface controller (MRI, MCI, or I/SITE LAN).
2. Select each ASC to be updated. You can use the All Yes and
All No buttons to speed the selection process.

22-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Application Specific Controllers Updating the ASC

3. When you are finished, click OK to begin updating the

selected ASCs. You will be prompted for an update path. Click
on OK to accept the default path or enter the new path.
4. If updating an existing ASC and an MCI update has already
been executed, you must get the point record defined in the
MCI to the ASC. This is accomplished by exiting the ASC
parameters editor, penetrating the MCU configuration editor,
and toggling the ASC from “ASC” to “Internal” and back to
“ASC.”

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 22-9

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

23
6
I/SITE LCD Page

The View Con panel on the Model 7728 I/SITE I/O or Model 7798
I/SITE LAN allows you to view pages for review and control. The
I/SITE products support up to 64 pages, each page containing up
to 640 points. The points on each page may be from the local
7728/7798, or another DCU on the same controller LAN. In either
case, all points on a specific page must reside in the same DCU.

Defining the I/SITE LCD Page

To set up LCD pages on the I/SITE, you must connect to it through
TAC I/NET Seven and define the pages with the LCD Page Defini-
tion editor (see Figure 23-1). This editor is available if you are
connected to a 7728/7798.

Figure 23-1. LCD Page Definition Editor

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 23-1

TCON299–05/10
Defining the I/SITE LCD Page I/SITE LCD Page

Adding an LCD Page

1. Connect to a 7728 or 7798 controller.
2. Select Edit  Controller  LCD Page Definition, or click the
LCD Page Definition tool on the Controller toolbar. The LCD
Page Definition editor displays, as shown in Figure 23-1. The
editor lists the defined pages in the selected controller.
3. To add a new page, select Add. The Add dialog box displays
(see Figure 23-2).

Figure 23-2. Add Dialog Box

4. Enter a Page name. This name may be up to 16 characters

long.
5. Select a Page number from 1 to 64.
6. Click OK. The system displays the Select DCU summary (see
Figure 23-3).

Note: The “Select DCU” summary will display a separate entry for each
station of a multi-station controller. See the highlighted item in
Figure 23-3 for an example of this functionality.

7. Select a DCU from the list and click OK. The system displays
the Select Points summary (see Figure 23-4).
8. Select the points that you want to appear on the LCD page
display. Click on the point to select it ([X]) or to deselect it
([ ]). You can select the points individually or you can use the
All Yes and All No controls.
9. Click OK to accept the selections and complete the LCD page
definition.

23-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
I/SITE LCD Page Defining the I/SITE LCD Page

Figure 23-3. Select DCU Summary

Figure 23-4. Select Points Summary

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 23-3

TCON299–05/10
Defining the I/SITE LCD Page I/SITE LCD Page

Deleting an LCD Page

To delete an LCD page, connect to the 7728 or 7798 controller and
use the following procedure.
1. Select Edit  Controller  LCD Page Definition, or click the
LCD Page Definition tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the LCD Page Definition editor (see
Figure 23-1)
2. Select the page that you want to delete.
3. Click Delete. The system displays the Delete confirmation
prompt.
4. Click Yes to complete the delete operation or select No to
abort.

Modifying an LCD Page

To modify an existing LCD page, connect to the 7728 or 7798
controller, and use the following procedure.
1. Select Edit  Controller  LCD Page Definition, or click the
LCD Page Definition tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the LCD Page Definition editor (see
Figure 23-1).
2. Select the page that you want to modify.
3. Click Modify to display the Select Points summary as shown
in Figure 23-4.
4. Select or deselect points in the list, as desired. Click on the
point to select it ([X]) or deselect it ([ ]). You can use the All
Yes and All No options to speed the selection process.

5. When you have selected the point, click OK to complete the

procedure.

23-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
I/SITE LCD Page Defining the I/SITE LCD Page

Copying an LCD Page

To copy an existing LCD page to a new page name/number, connect
to the 7728 or 7798 controller and use the following procedure.
1. Select Edit  Controller  LCD Page Definition, or click the
LCD Page Definition tool on the Controller toolbar. The
system displays the LCD Page Definition editor (see
Figure 23-1).
2. Select the page to be copied.
3. Click Copy to display the Add dialog box, shown in
Figure 23-2.
4. Enter the Page name and Page number of the new LCD
page. This is the page name and number that the selected
LCD page will be copied to.
5. Click OK to display the Select DCU summary shown in
Figure 23-3.
6. Select the DCU and click OK. The Select Points summary
displays. (see Figure 23-4).
7. If desired, modify the LCD Page by selecting or deselecting
points in the list.
8. Click OK to complete the copy operation.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 23-5

TCON299–05/10
 CHAPTER

24
16
SevenTrends

SevenTrends is a program that collects data sent from the DCU

field devices for viewing and reporting. Refer to the SevenTrends
chapter in TCON300, TAC I/NET Seven Technical Reference Guide
for more in-depth SevenTrends information.

Caution: The database server should not be shut down while TAC I/NET
Seven is running. Shutting down the database server drops all
existing connections to the database, and can result in corrupted data
displays. (Only users with administrative privileges on the worksta-
tion can stop or start the database server.)

Sequence of Operations
The overall sequence for using the SevenTrends features of TAC
I/NET Seven is as follows:
1. Configure DCUs to collect data.
2. Define trends in host stations to receive data.
3. Configure host stations to receive collected data.
4. Archive SevenTrends data.
5. Create SevenTrends reports (may be done any time after Step
3 is complete). Refer to the SevenReports help file for more
information on creating reports.

Configuring the DCU

The first step in using SevenTrends is to collect data at the DCU
level of your TAC I/NET Seven system.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-1

TCON299–05/10
Configuring the DCU SevenTrends

The following editors contain SevenTrends-related fields:

✦ Doors ✦ Demand Control
✦ Resident I/O Points ✦ Trend Sampling
✦ Runtime ✦ Override Billing
✦ Consumption

Remember that the editors available for each DCU change

depending on the type of controller to which you are connected,
the type of points defined within the controller, and your password
level.
The following steps are used to configure the DCU to collect data
for use with SevenTrends. Not all fields described below are avail-
able within all editors. If a field does not exist within the editor,
simply skip that step.
1. Choose the Distribution Group that matches the distribution
group in the host station to which you want this point to send
information.
2. Activate () or deactivate () each of eight mask positions
that make up the Distribution Mask. At least one mask
should match a distribution mask in the host station to which
you want this point to send information.
3. Choose a Priority from the drop-down list. The priority
determines whether a DCU is supposed to send an upload
request to a host station. The priority must be set to at least
Routine for direct-connect systems, or Critical for dial
systems.
4. Select a Cell Number from 1 to 1023. You must assign a value
other than zero (0) in order for SevenTrends to store the trend
information. This field can be used to autogenerate trend
definitions (see “Defining Trends and Cells” on page 24-3).
Otherwise, this field is not used in TAC I/NET Seven and can
be any value.
5. Define a value for Sample Count. This specifies the number
of samples that have to be taken before data is sent to Seven-
Trends.

24-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
SevenTrends Defining Trends and Cells

Defining Trends and Cells

Before you can send data to the host workstations you must define
the trend or cell in the host workstation so that the data has some-
place to go.
✦ A trend is defined for a specific point and trend type.
✦ A cell is defined for a trend type, and multiple trends are
automatically defined for all points referencing that cell
number and trend type.
Use the following procedures to define trends and cells.
1. Select Trends  Definitions from the main menu. The system
displays the SevenTrends Definitions screen (see Figure 24-1).

Figure 24-1. SevenTrends Definitions Screen

2. Select either Add Trend or Add Cell. The system displays the
SevenTrends Parameters editor (see Figure 24-4 on page
24-6).
3. If you are adding a trend, the system automatically and
launches the Point Selection screen (see Figure 24-2) to select
the point for this trend. If you are adding a cell, skip to Step 5
on page 24-6.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-3

TCON299–05/10
Defining Trends and Cells SevenTrends

Note: Site Number indicates a

connection through a distributed
link.

Figure 24-2. Point Selection Screen

Note: Although the Point Selection dialog can be used to select multiple
points in other areas of TAC I/NET Seven (such as system pages),
only one point may be selected for a trend definition.

4. Connect to the desired controller to select a point:

Note: You may enter point information manually in the Current Point
section, bypassing the controller connection instructions below. When
entering a point manually, make sure that the address, point type,
and controller type are accurate.

a. If you are already connected to a controller, the top left

list box displays the points resident in that controller.
Skip to Step c if the desired point is in this controller.

24-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
SevenTrends Defining Trends and Cells

b. If you are not currently connected to a controller, or if

you wish to select a point from a different controller,
complete the following steps to display the points in the
desired controller:
✢ activate the radio button (located at the top right
corner of each pane) for one of the other window
panes.
✢ Select the Station button to display the Connect
dialog box (see Figure 24-3).

Figure 24-3. Connect Dialog Box

✢ Select the desired link and click OK.

✢ If necessary, select the desired site and click OK.
✢ Select the desired controller and click OK to connect
to the controller. The points associated with that
controller now appear in the selected pane.
c. Click on the desired point to select it. The point address
in the Current Point section is automatically populated
with the full point address and type of the selected point.
The Current Point section will automatically update this
information every time you click on a point.
d. Select the controller type in the Control drop-down. This
information is not automatically updated, and must be
set manually.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-5

TCON299–05/10
Defining Trends and Cells SevenTrends

e. Click OK to accept the selected point for this trend and

return to the SevenTrends Definition editor.

Note: You may click the ... button to return to the Point Selection dialog at
any time during the trend definition. However, once the trend defini-
tion is saved, you cannot change the selected point.

Figure 24-4. SevenTrend Parameters Editor

5. Enter a Name for this trend or cell definition, up to 30 charac-

ters. The default name for trends is in the format Point Name
-- Trend Type if you are connected to the controller, and
Point Address -- Trend Type if you are not connected. The
default name for cells is Cell Number -- Trend Type.
6. Choose a Type from the drop-down list. The type cannot be
changed once the definition is saved.
7. Define a Transient duration in days.

Note: Transient duration is used to delete records only when the system is
due to perform an automatic transfer. Therefore, it is possible that
individual samples will be kept beyond their transient duration
period. If you change the transient duration for a cell or trend, the
new value will not be used until the next-scheduled automatic
transfer.

8. Enter a Cell Number (0–1023). The cell number can be used

to group samples in reports.

24-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
SevenTrends Defining Trends and Cells

Note: The cell number for a trend definition can be modified. The cell
number for a cell definition cannot be changed once the definition is
saved.

9. Select OK to save your changes. The system returns you to the

SevenTrends Definitions screen.
10. Select Close to leave the SevenTrends Definitions screen.

Modifying Trends
Once a trend definition has been saved, only the name, transient
duration, and cell number may be changed.
Existing samples for the trend are not updated with the new tran-
sient duration and/or cell number; only new samples will reflect the
changed information.
To modify a trend:
1. Select Trends  Definitions from the main menu. The system
displays the SevenTrends Definitions screen (see Figure 24-1
on page 24-3).
2. Select the desired trend from the list and click Modify. The
system displays the SevenTrends Parameters editor.
3. Enter the new parameters, as desired. The point address and
trend type are displayed, but cannot be edited.
4. Select OK to accept the changes and return to the SevenTrends
Definitions screen, or Cancel to return to the SevenTrends
Definitions screen without saving the changes.
Trend definition changes take place immediately. If you change the
transient duration for a trend, the new value will not be used until
the next-scheduled automatic transfer.

Modifying Cells
Once a cell definition has been saved, only the name and transient
duration may be changed. If you change the transient duration of a
cell, all trend definitions with a matching trend type and cell
number will be updated, as though you had modified them manu-
ally (see “Modifying Trends” above).

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-7

TCON299–05/10
Defining Trends and Cells SevenTrends

Caution: Exercise care when modifying cells. The system does not differentiate
between trends generated automatically from the cell definition and
trends defined manually. All trends with a matching trend type and
cell number will be affected.

Existing samples for the affected trends are not updated with the
new transient duration; only new samples will reflect the changed
information.
To modify a cell:
1. Select Trends  Definitions from the main menu. The system
displays the SevenTrends Definitions screen (see Figure 24-1
on page 24-3).
2. Select the desired cell from the list and click Modify. The
system displays the SevenTrends Parameters editor.
3. Enter the new parameters, as desired. The trend type and cell
number are displayed, but cannot be edited.
4. Select OK to accept the changes and return to the SevenTrends
Definitions screen, or Cancel to return to the SevenTrends
Definitions screen without saving the changes.
The system will immediately begin to change all trend definitions
with a matching trend type and cell number. If you change the
transient duration, the new value will not be used until the next-
scheduled automatic transfer.

Deleting Trends and Cells

Note: Your ability to delete trend or cell definitions will depend upon the
privileges assigned to your host password. Refer to Chapter 9, Pass-
words, for more information.
When you delete a trend, all online samples associated with that
trend are also deleted. Samples previously archived cannot be
viewed or included on reports.

Caution: Exercise care when deleting cells. The system does not differentiate
between trends generated automatically from the cell definition and
trends defined manually. All trends with a matching trend type and
cell number will be affected.

24-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
SevenTrends Configuring the Host Station

To delete a trend or cell:

1. Select Trends  Definitions from the main menu. The system
displays the SevenTrends Definitions screen (see Figure 24-1
on page 24-3).
2. Select the desired trend or cell, and click Delete. The system
displays the confirmation screen.
3. Select Yes to delete the trend or cell, or No to cancel the
request. The system returns you to the SevenTrends Defini-
tions screen.

Configuring the Host Station

DCUs send information to a host station only if the distribution
group, distribution mask, and trend type of the DCU and the host
station match.

Note: The cell number does not have to match between the DCU editor and
the trend definition. The cell number in the trend definition is the
one that will appear on reports.

✦ Use the SevenTrends Definitions editor, described in

“Defining Trends and Cells” on page 24-3, to identify the
trend types used.
✦ Use the Host Configuration editor, described in Chapter 2,
Setup and Network Configuration, to define the SevenTrends
distribution group and mask for a host station.

Archiving SevenTrends Data

Note: Trend archiving is available only for SevenTrends definitions that

have a transient duration of zero (0), indicating no transient dura-
tion. If the definition includes a transient duration greater than zero,
those samples are discarded after the specified number of days. Use
the SevenTrends Parameters Editor to set the Transient Duration
parameter.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-9

TCON299–05/10
Archiving SevenTrends Data SevenTrends

TAC I/NET Seven displays the SevenTrends Archive Configuration

editor (see Figure 24-5) when you select the Trend Archive
Configuration option from the Event Archive Configuration
editor (see Figure 6-24 on page 6-48).

Figure 24-5. SevenTrends Archive Configuration Editor

Using the SevenTrends Archive Configuration editor, you can

configure TAC I/NET Seven to save on-line trend data to an archive
file. Archives can occur automatically based on triggers, or you can
manually initiate an archive.
When samples are archived, they are removed from the online
database and are no longer available for viewing, editing, or dele-
tion through the TAC I/NET Seven editors; however, archived data
may be used in reports.
TAC I/NET Seven does not connect to the archive database, and
thus it can be moved out of the TAC I/NET Seven directory and
into a different directory, to a network drive, or to portable media
such as a ZIP or tape drive for offsite storage. You may keep your
archive files on a floppy disk, or in a separate hard drive directory,
if you want them in a readily accessible format.

24-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 SevenTrends Archiving SevenTrends Data

The archive database is stored in the location specified as the Archive

Directory in the INET Configuration Editor. Each archive is stored in
a separate file. The file naming convention is as follows:
TARCH_YYYYMMDDMPMSS.mdf (I/NET Seven 2.12 or earlier)
—OR—
TARCH_YYYYMMDDMPMSS.ARC (I/NET Seven 2.13 or later)
where:
✦ TARCH_ = indicates a trend sample archive
✦ YYYY = four-digit year
✦ MM = two-digit month (01–12; 01 = January, 12 = December)
✦ DD = day of month (01–31)
✦ MPM = four-digit minutes past midnight (0000–1339)
✦ SS = two-digit seconds (00–59)
✦ .mdf (I/NET Seven 2.12 or earlier) = indicates a file in
Microsoft standard database format.
—OR—
✦ .ARC (I/NET Seven 2.13 or later) = indicates a file in SQL data-
base format.

Performing Trend Archiving

1. Activate () the Enable Seven Trends archiving checkbox.
2. If desired, activate () the Verify archive contents option to
have TAC I/NET Seven verify the integrity of the archived data
after it has been written.
3. Specify how much trend data should remain in Online Storage
after an archive has completed:
✧ Limit by date – Use this option to specify the minimum
number of days worth of data to retain online.
✧ Limit by record count – Use this option to specify the
minimum number of records to retain online.
✧ Limit by physical size – Use this option to specify the
minimum megabytes worth of data to retain online.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-11

TCON299–05/10
Archiving SevenTrends Data SevenTrends

4. Specify how messages generated by archive activity will be

distributed:
a. Choose a Distribution group (1–4). The mask will be
applied to this group.
b. Define the Distribution mask. Set each of eight masking
positions to the desired state, either activated () or
deactivated ().
c. Choose a Priority from the drop-down list.
5. Choose a setting for the Scheduled Trigger parameter. This
setting specifies what to do when the schedule time is reached.
The following options are available:
✧ Confirm – Ask the operator to confirm (allow) the
archive.
✧ Automatic – Start archive without confirmation.
6. Use the Time of day field to specify the time of day to begin a
scheduled archive.

Note: Due to system activity, the archive may not occur at the exact time
specified.

7. Use one of the following options to specify on what days the

archives will occur:
✧ Elapse time – Select this option to schedule archives
based on an elapsed time since the last archive. Use the
fields that accompany this option to specify an elapse
time.
✧ Day of week – Select this option to schedule archives for
a specific day of the week. Use the drop-down list to
choose a day
8. Click one of the following buttons to archive trend data:
✧ OK – Click this button to save the settings and exit the
editor. If you have activated () the Enable Seven
Trends archiving option, TAC I/NET Seven will use the
settings in this editor to automatically initiate trend
archives.

24-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
SevenTrends Managing SevenTrends Data

✧ Archive Now – This button is only available when the

Enable Seven Trends archiving option is selected.
Click this button to manually initiate a trend archive. If
you click this button before the number of unarchived
records has reached the Minimum Online settings (as
specified in the Online Storage section of this editor),
you will receive an error message informing you that no
archive can occur.

Note: There is no confirmation on this screen that the transfer has taken
place. All success or failure messages are routed to AMT only, using
the designated masking and priority.

Managing SevenTrends Data

You can view the data that is stored in the SevenTrends tables. You
can also add, edit, or delete data. This allows you to clean up
corrupted data or add missing data.

Note: Only online records can be viewed/edited; archived records are not
accessible through the TAC I/NET Seven editors. Refer to the Seven-
Reports help file for information on accessing archived SevenTrends
data.

1. Select Trends  Data Inquiry/Edit from the main menu. The

system displays the SevenTrends Inquiry dialog, with a listing
of the defined trends (see Figure 24-6).

Note: Cell definitions are not shown in this editor. Data can be viewed and
edited only by trend definition, not by cell.

2. Choose the desired trend from the list and click the Select
button, or double-click the trend to select it. The system
displays the Inquiry Date Range screen (see Figure 24-7).
3. Enter the Earliest date and Earliest time to define the
desired time period. Entries before this date/time will not be
displayed.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-13

TCON299–05/10
Managing SevenTrends Data SevenTrends

Figure 24-6. SevenTrends Inquiry Editor

Figure 24-7. Inquiry Date Range Selection

4. When you have entered the desired start date and time, select
the OK button.
The screen displays the SevenTrends Data screen, listing the
online sample data for the selected trend. The fields shown on
this screen will vary, depending on the trend type selected (see
Figure 24-8).
5. To add a sample:
a. Select the Add button. The screen displays an entry
screen, containing the appropriate entries for the selected
trend type (see Figure 24-9).
b. Enter the date and time for the sample.
c. Enter the information for the selected trend type.
d. Select the OK button to add the entry to the trend table.

24-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
SevenTrends Managing SevenTrends Data

Figure 24-8. Sample Consumption Cell Data

Figure 24-9. Adding Cell Data (Consumption Cell)

6. To modify a sample:
a. Select the desired entry from the list.
b. Select the Modify button. The screen displays an entry
screen containing the current data. The contents of this
screen will vary, depending on the type of trend selected.

Note: The date and time for the sample cannot be changed. If you need to
alter the date and time for the sample, create a new entry with the
desired date and time (see Step 5).

c. Enter the desired data in the appropriate field(s).

d. When all data is entered, select the OK button. The
change takes place immediately.
7. To delete a sample:
a. Select the desired entry from the list.

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 24-15

TCON299–05/10
Managing SevenTrends Data SevenTrends

b. Select the Delete button. The system displays a confirma-

tion screen.
c. Click Yes to verify that you want to delete the sample, or
No to cancel the request.
The entry will be removed immediately. Deleted records
cannot be restored, but the data may be re-entered
manually (see Step 5).

Dynamic Data Upload

This option lets you manually upload the latest midnight Seven-
Trends data for demand, override billing, consumption and
runtime statistics. This option is useful when this data was not
properly stored on the previous day because of communication
problems, PC problems, etc.
1. Connect to the desired controller.
2. Select Edit  Controller  Dynamic Data Upload from the
main menu. The system displays the following message:
Dynamic data upload request has been initiated.
3. Select OK. This dynamic data upload executes within sixty
seconds.

24-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Index

groups 17-55
adding 17-57
A assigning 17-82
copying 17-62
access control 17-1, 18-1 deleting 17-63
access initiated control modifying 17-62
adding 17-96 schedule conflict 17-60, 17-61
copying 17-101 individuals
deleting 17-101 adding key/card 17-65
description 17-94 allocate ranges 17-81
modifying 17-101 copying a key/card 17-84
door schedules deleting a key/card 17-85
adding 17-32 display options 17-78
copy all 17-37 field names 17-80
copying 17-36 schedule hierarchy 17-73, 17-77,
deleting 17-37 17-83
modifying 17-36 selection of 17-63
doors key/card translation
adding 17-7, 17-9 adding 17-48
copying extension 17-29 Card Translation option 17-14
deleting extension 17-30 deleting 17-49
mode schedules 17-19 description 17-47
modifying extension 17-29 modifying 17-49
DPU configuration 17-6 options 17-87
editors 17-2 order of operations 17-2
elevators 17-41 personnel schedules 17-30
adding extension 17-42 tenants 17-50
floors 17-43 adding 17-51
copying 17-53
deleting 17-54
modifying 17-53
access group 17-55
adding 17-57

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-1

TCON299–05/10
A

copying 17-62 copying a point extension 13-11

deleting 17-63 deleting a point extension 13-12
modifying 17-62 description
schedule conflict 17-60, 17-61 editor, graphics 8-61
access groups modifying a point extension 13-11
assigning 17-82 alarm priority
access initiated control 17-94–17-101 dial Tap 6-2
adding 17-96 direct connect Tap 6-2
copying 17-101 routine 6-2
deleting 17-101 see also message priority
modifying 17-101 alarms
action messages controlling 17-22
editor 13-22 totals 6-31
printing 13-25 all lights on/off 4-7
Activity Manager, Individual 17-72, 17-92 allocate ranges 17-81
adaptive control 14-9, 14-14 alternate graphics path 8-22
address AMT
building of 1-18 alarm colors 6-6
DCU 1-19 alarm totals 6-31
link 1-18 audible alarms 6-8
point 1-19 AMT Video 6-57
system 1-18
Tap analog points, defined 8-57
see address, link anti-passback
AHU parameters 16-10 activate 17-14
entry zone 17-15
AI exit zone 17-15
see alarm inhibit hard, soft, graced 17-71
AI (analog input) points manual reset 7-5–7-6, 7-14–7-15
extension editors 8-61 reset time 17-15
AIC reset, manual 7-5–7-6, 7-14–7-15
see access initiated control reset, scheduled 17-15, 17-20

alarm acknowledge 7-5 AO (analog output) points

display 7-3 extension editors 8-62

alarm distribution 17-16 APB

activate 17-14
alarm inhibit 7-2, 13-9 entry zone 17-15
adding a point extension 13-9 exit zone 17-15

Index-2 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 C

manual reset 7-5–7-6, 7-14–7-15 recommended files 1-23

parameter 17-71 binary file 4-15
reset time 17-15
reset, scheduled 17-15, 17-20 broadcast review 2-38

APB reset, manual 7-5–7-6, 7-14–7-15 broadcast time 2-36

application specific controllers button enable 17-44

data, displaying 22-2 button selection 17-44
description 22-1 button, extension (EXT)
interface controller, updating 22-7 door points dialog box 8-59
markers, system pages 8-70 point selection dialog box 8-60
names, modifying 22-4
parameters, copying 22-5 button, option (OPT)
parameters, modifying 22-3 point selection dialog box 8-53, 8-55,
updating 22-8 8-57

archive, Docutrend button, user-defined 1-25

description of 24-9 bytes remaining 4-8
arming terminal configuration 18-11
ASC
see application specific controllers
ATS C
see automatic time schedule
C
Auto Report Generation 10-31 see calculated point
automatic DCU save 2-33 Calc, DDC module 8-63
automatic page display 8-56 calculated point 11-1
automatic time schedule 10-8 adding 11-1
host 10-8 copying 11-4
lighting zones 15-9 deleting 11-5
standalone in micro regulators 21-9 editor 8-62
see also host time schedule editor, graphics 8-61, 8-62
memory requirements 11-1
automatic tune 14-23
modifying 11-4
parameters 11-3
calculations
see calculated point.
B Captured Video, CCTV 6-56
backup 1-21–1-22 Card Number 17-66

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-3

TCON299–05/10
D

Card Translation option 17-14 configuration/status 4-1

CCTV details 4-3
in AMT 6-55 memory 4-9
markers on system pages 8-73 status, viewing 4-8
summary 7-1
cell mask 2-3
controller summary
character completion timeout 20-2 alarm acknowledge 7-5
circuit assignments 15-8 manual mode 7-4
CN momentary release 7-5
see consumption test mode 7-4
zoom 7-6
coefficient index 4-24
conversion coefficients 4-23, 21-9
color palette 6-6
conversion equation 4-24
common sensor 18-8
CTS handshake 3-8
configuration
station conflict 2-24 current demand point 10-24
between sites 2-24 cycle adjustment 10-20
summaries 7-1, 7-9
DPU 7-13
host 7-9
link 7-10
MR 7-12 D
station 7-11
DA (discrete alarm) points
UC 7-12
extension editors 8-61
connecting to the system 1-15
data bits 3-8
consumption 13-1
data upload, dynamic 4-19, 24-16
editor, graphics 8-62
point extension database last changed 4-8
adding 13-1 database print 2-39
copying 13-3
daylight savings 4-6
deleting 13-4
modifying 13-3 DC (discrete control) points
pulse input 13-1 extension editors 8-62
control commands 4-20 DCU
automatic save 2-33
control descriptions 4-20
backup files 1-23
control point (failsafe) 14-8
controller

Index-4 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 D

configuration 4-1 DI (discrete input) points

database last changed 4-8 extension editors 8-61
daylight savings 2-32, 4-6 dial
firmware status 4-8 after edit 17-90
message mask 4-4 connections status, hang up 8-69
station parameters 4-19 integrated 3-4
temperature control 4-7 multiple site 3-9
time scheduling 4-7
time zone world map 4-6 dial parameters, IAS 18-17
copying points 5-3 dialog box
download 4-15 address conversion utility 8-18
editing points 5-4 ASC marker 8-70
modifying points 5-3 DDC line options 8-64
passwords 9-29 digital point drawing styles 8-57
editor 9-29 door parameters 2-28
preassignment 9-11 extensions 8-61
selection 9-5 load a small bitmap 8-17
synchronization 2-31 page marker 8-66
DDC point selection 8-54, 8-59
see direct digital control select a library symbol 8-15

DDC menu option, graphics editor digital CCTV 6-55, 8-73

selecting 8-62, 8-64 digital point drawing styles dialog box
default system page 2-4, 8-74 state 0 definition 8-55
state 1 definition 8-55
delay
before break 14-20 digital state 0, setting 8-57
before make 14-20 Direct digital control
before off 15-4 modules
before response 20-2 RESET 8-63
demand control direct digital control
graphics editor 8-62 damper control 16-18
point extension editors 14-1
adding 10-23 helpful hints 14-24
copying 10-29 history 14-21
deleting 10-30 line
modifying 10-29 adding 8-64
demand interval 10-24 options dialog box 8-64

demand temperature override 10-19

deselecting objects 8-8

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-5

TCON299–05/10
D

modules parameters 17-16

2-Pos 14-3 release switch 17-17
adding 8-62 schedule
Calc 8-63 adding 17-32, 17-36
FLOAT 8-63, 14-10 copying 17-36
HiLo 8-63, 14-17 deleting 17-37
PID 8-63, 14-6 modifying 17-36
RELAY 14-19 sense switch 17-16
RESET 8-63, 14-15 strike 17-16
tuning 14-21 door extension
automatic tune 14-23 adding 17-9
input/output plot 14-23 copying 17-29
manual tune 14-22 deleting 17-30
see also system pages modifying 17-29
disabled points 2-38 door features 17-22
disabled summary 7-8 door open too long 17-16
disconnecting 1-17 door summary 7-13
discrete points 8-55 doors
display options 17-78 access control 17-7–17-30
distribution group 2-3 menu option, graphics editor
selecting 8-70
distribution parameters 4-4
Dorado LED control 17-14
DM (discrete monitor) points
extension editors 8-62 download
controller/tap 4-15
DO (discrete output) points date 4-3
extension editors 8-62 MIP 4-14
Docutrend time 4-3
archiving data 24-9 DPU
configuring the DCU 24-1 configuration 17-6
configuring the host station 24-9 dial type 17-89
dynamic data upload 4-19, 24-16 summary 7-13
editors 24-2
midnight statistics 4-19, 24-16 driver, I/NET
sequence of operations 24-1 description 2-1
setup 2-1
door
code 17-16 dynamic data upload 4-19, 24-16
mode schedules 17-19
naming of 2-28

Index-6 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 E

copying 13-23
deleting 13-24
E message printing 13-25
modifying 13-23
editor
action message 13-22 event definition 13-12–13-16
alarm inhibit 8-61 action message 13-12
ASC marker 8-70 editor, graphics 8-61, 8-62
calculated point 8-61, 8-62 event sequence 13-12, 13-16
consumption 8-62 memory requirements 13-12
demand control 8-62 point extension
elevator control 8-62 adding 13-12
event definition 8-61, 8-62 copying 13-15
LCD, I/SITE Page 23-1 deleting 13-16
lighting control 8-62 modifying 13-15
override billing 8-62 event printing 13-25
runtime 8-62 event sequence 13-16–13-21
temperature control 8-62 adding 13-17
time scheduling 8-62 copying 13-20
trend sampling 8-61, 8-62 deleting 13-21
unitary controller 8-62 event definitions 13-16
elevator 17-14, 17-41 modifying 13-19
adding extension 17-42 exit reader 17-12
floor designation 17-43
floors 17-43 exit zone 17-15
elevator control editor 8-62 exit, graphics editor file menu option 8-4
emergency shed level 10-26 exiting I/NET 1-18
engineering units 4-25 extension (EXT) button
door points dialog box 8-59
entry zone 17-15 point selection dialog box 8-60
equipment extension editors
counts high 4-24 see editors
counts low 4-24 see also extension editors, graphics
mapping 19-3
extension editors, graphics
equipment mapping 19-8 AI (analog input) points 8-61
EV AO (analog output) points 8-62
see event definition DA (discrete alarm) points 8-61
event action 13-21–13-24 DC (discrete control) points 8-62
adding 13-21 DI (discrete input) points 8-61

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-7

TCON299–05/10
F

DM (discrete monitor) points 8-62

DO (discrete output) points 8-62
GI (analog input) points 8-61 G
GO (analog output) points 8-62
PI (pulse input) points 8-62 GI (analog input) points
extension editors 8-61
extensions dialog box 8-61
GO (analog output) points
extensions, point, adding 8-60 extension editors 8-62
graphic dial icon, adding 8-68
graphic page summary 7-16

F graphic pages
ASC markers 8-70
failsafe 14-8 backup files 1-23
graphic dial icon
failsafe command 14-5 adding 8-68
features, door 17-22 properties 8-20
field names 17-80 graphics editor
file menu, graphics editor 8-4 ASC marker editor 8-70
address conversion option 8-18 DDC menu option, selecting 8-62,
close option 8-4 8-64
exit option 8-4 doors menu option, selecting 8-70
load library symbol option 8-14 file menu options
open option 8-4, 8-5 address conversion 8-18
exit 8-4
files, bitmap
load library symbol 8-14
importing 8-3
save as library symbol 8-14
firmware status 4-8 mouse shortcuts 8-10
first key auto-unlock 17-17 shortcuts 8-10
starting 8-4
Float DDC module 8-63, 14-10
tool menu options
floors 17-43 circle 8-38
designation 17-44 curve 8-39
index number 17-43 ellipse 8-38
selection time 17-43 library symbol 8-36
FLT parameters 16-20 polygon 8-38
rectangle 8-38
function selection 9-5
round rectangle 8-38
Functions, User-defined PIN Pad 17-22 text 8-36
graphics properties 8-20

Index-8 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 I

groups 17-55 deleting 10-13

adding 17-57 modifying 10-12
assigning 17-82 HPMP parameters 16-14
copying 17-62
deleting 17-63
modifying 17-62
read only 9-9, 9-15
schedule conflict 17-60, 17-61 I
I/NET Communications Interface
see ICI

H I/STAT
inactivity timeouts 21-13
handles, object 8-10 LED functions 21-13
MR parameters 21-11
hardware coefficients 21-9
IAS 18-1
hardware points, defined 8-51
ICI
help screens 1-7 controller type selection 4-7
accessing 1-7 interface type 20-1
exiting from 1-7 MODBUS
moving around in 1-7 addresses 20-3
highlighting protocol 20-1
using a mouse 1-5 point addressing 20-3
using the keyboard point types 20-3
push-buttons 1-6 port status 20-1
text 1-6 program, logic controller 20-1
HiLo DDC module 8-63, 14-17 protocol 20-2
register types 20-3
history 14-21 slave address 20-2
host ATS icons
see host time schedule ASC markers 8-70
host configuration, backup files 1-23 host dial 8-69
host dial icon 8-69 page reference 8-3

host passwords 9-2 Image 17-69

host summary 7-9 importing bitmap files 8-3

host time schedule independent schedule 10-3

adding 10-9 Indirect User Settings 9-13
copying 10-12

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-9

TCON299–05/10
K–L

Individual Activity Manager 17-72, 17-92 adding 17-48

individual number 17-66 deleting 17-49
modifying 17-49
individuals 17-63
adding a key/card 17-65 keyboard
allocate ranges 17-81 selecting push-buttons with 1-6
copying a key/card 17-84 selecting text with 1-6
deleting a key/card 17-85 LAN
display options 17-78 address 3-2
field names 17-80 speed 3-2
schedule hierarchy 17-73, 17-77, latitude 4-5
17-83
LCD, I/SITE Page 23-1
industrial controller interface
see ICI LED polarity 17-14

input filter 14-12 library symbol. selecting 8-15

input high limit 14-4, 14-7, 14-12 library symbols

backup files 1-23
input low limit 14-7, 14-12 importing 8-3
input/output plot 14-23 lighting circuit 15-1
Integral digital CCTV 6-55, 8-73 adding 15-2
integrated dial 3-4 copying 15-5
deleting 15-5
inter-card interval 17-13 modifying 15-5
interface controller lighting zone 15-6–15-11
configuring 21-2 adding 15-6
interval timer 14-20 automatic time schedule (ATS) 15-8,
intruder alarm system 17-22 15-9
circuit assignments 15-8
Intrusion Alarm System 18-1 copying 15-10
Intrusion Alarm Zone Configuration deleting 15-10
18-14 modifying 15-10
IP dialer 18-17 Limited-access Users 9-15
link
adding 2-14
penetrating 2-12
summary 2-12, 7-10
K–L
live colors 8-22
key/card translation 17-47, 17-47–17-49
Live Video, CCTV 6-56

Index-10 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 M

load a small bitmap dialog box 8-17 module description 4-14

loading details 4-8 memory requirements
logging in 1-14 calculations 11-1
runtime 13-4
longitude 4-5
memory status 4-8
lookup tables 4-26
menu selection
format in manual 1-3
using a mouse 1-2
using the keyboard 1-3
M message mask 4-4
controller configuration 4-4
main window title 2-3
message priority
Manager, Individual Activity 17-72, 17-92
critical 4-4, 6-2
manual mode 7-2, 7-4 definition of 4-5
manual tuning 14-22 dial Tap 6-2
direct connect Tap 6-2
marker
none 4-4, 6-2
ASC 8-70
parameter 4-4
CCTV 8-73
priority 4-4, 6-2
dial 8-68
routine 4-4, 6-2
page 8-66
tool 8-71 message routing
mask 2-3
master point 10-5
received at host 6-9
master schedule 10-3 received at printer 6-9
maximum bump 14-9, 14-14 message type parameter 17-17
maximum overshoot 14-9, 14-14 micro regulator
MCI applications, typical 21-1
configuration editor 16-2 control description 21-1, 22-1
micro regulators, number of 21-1 copying data 21-3
MR LAN database, creating 21-3
channels 21-1 hardware coefficients 21-9
number of micro regulators 21-1 interface, configuring 21-2
MR copy 21-3
MCU
resident DDC 21-5
adding 2-25
standalone ATS 21-9
Summary 2-17
summary 7-12
memory interface processor
MIP
download 4-15

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-11

TCON299–05/10
N

see memory interface processor

MODBUS
see ICI
O
mode schedules 17-19 objects
momentary release 7-5 copying 8-9
deleting 8-8
monthly consumption point 10-25 deselecting 8-8
mouse shortcuts 8-10 handles 8-10
MR copy 21-3 importing 8-16
positioning 8-9
MR summary 7-12 resizing 8-10
MRI selecting 8-7
configuration editor 16-2 off duration 15-4
micro regulators, number of 21-1
MR LAN off normal points 2-38
channels 21-1 off normal summary 7-7
number of micro regulators 21-1 old value, point 7-3
MR-resident DDC modules 8-62, 21-5 on duration 15-4
multi point trend plot 12-7–12-17 OP5 arming terminal configuration 18-11
multiple site dial operator timeout 1-15, 2-4
host dial icon 8-69 action 1-15, 2-3
network configuration required 3-9
optimized start lookahead 10-18
optimized stop 10-18
option (OPT) button
point selection dialog box 8-53, 8-55,
N 8-57
name, last and first 17-68 options 17-87
network configuration 2-5 output high limit 14-8
network functions 2-30 output low limit 14-8
new host passwords 9-1 output ramp limit 14-8
noise band 14-10, 14-14 outside air temperature 10-18
normal shed level 10-25 override access codes 19-3
notation override billing 19-1
file names 1-1 access codes 19-3
menu selections 1-1 adding access codes 19-6

Index-12 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 P

adding equipment mapping 19-8 modifying 9-27

editor, graphics 8-62 tenant selection 9-7
entering override parameters 19-3 personal identification number 17-71
equipment mapping 19-3, 19-8
equipment points 19-6 personnel schedules
extension editor 19-3 access control 17-30
override parameters 19-3 copy all 17-37
wink off interval 19-6 description 17-30
wink on interval 19-6 door access 17-30

override parameters 19-3 phone numbers 3-4

override shed level 10-26 PI

see pulse input
PID DDC module 8-63, 14-6
PID parameters 16-18
P PIN 17-22, 17-71
PIN enable 17-21
page
acknowledge 7-7 PIN Pad Functions 17-22
properties 8-23 point extensions, adding 8-60
reference icons 8-3
point selection dialog box 8-54, 8-59
see also system page
summary 7-16 point time schedule
adding 10-1
parent point 16-3
copying 10-7
parity 3-8 deleting 10-8
passwords modifying 10-7
adding a host password 9-2 points
adding a new host 9-1 adding to controller 5-1
auto connect 9-6 adding to system pages 8-51
controller 9-29 addresses 5-5
copying 9-28 addressing 5-5
DCU passwords AI (analog input), extensions 8-61
preassignment 9-11 analog, defined 8-57
recovery of 9-30 AO (analog output), extensions 8-62
DCU selection 9-5 controlling 7-3
deleting 9-27 copying 5-3
editor 9-1 DA (discrete alarm), extensions 8-61
function selection 9-5 DC (discrete control), extensions 8-62
host 9-2 deleting 5-4

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-13

TCON299–05/10
R

DI (discrete input), extensions 8-61 Recycle bin 17-63

disabled 2-38 Refresh Interval 2-3
DM (discrete monitor), extensions
8-62 refresh interval 2-3
DO (discrete output), extensions 8-62 relay module 14-19
GI (analog input), extensions 8-61 report generation, automatic 10-31
GO (analog output), extensions 8-62
hardware, defined 8-51 reset interval 14-9, 14-13, 14-23
modifying 5-3 reset module 14-15
printing 2-39 resident in DPU 17-69
software, defined 8-51
value display 7-2 Restore from Local Host option 2-21
zoom 7-6 restore hosts 2-21
pop-up calculator 4-24 restore, software 4-15
preassigning DCU passwords 9-11 runtime 13-4
primary input 14-16 editor, graphics 8-61, 8-62
memory requirements 13-4
printer point extension
database printing 2-39 adding 13-5
event 13-25 copying 13-7
printer Tap 3-8 deleting 13-8
process variable 14-4 modifying 13-7
parameters 13-5
program extensions 4-6
proportional band 14-8, 14-13, 14-23
pulse input
consumption 13-1
extension editors, graphics 8-62
S
sample control mode 12-3
SAVE file 4-15
schedule, auto report 10-31
R SCU Sounder 17-27
rate interval 14-9, 14-13, 14-23 SCU Tamper 17-103
reader type 17-9 Searching Captured Video 6-57
Read-only groups 9-9, 9-15 Sec/Code 17-21
Record type 17-58, 17-70 Sec/PIN 17-21

Index-14 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 S

secondary group schedule 17-74, 17-75 see also station conflict

secondary input 14-16 see also station parameters

settling time 14-9, 14-14 station conflict 2-24

shift rotations 17-30 station parameters

control descriptions and commands
shortcuts 8-10 4-20
shunt 17-17 defining 4-19
SIA setup 18-17 entering 4-20
state descriptions 4-21, 4-22
site
adding 2-22 status, controller 4-8
summary 2-14 stop bits 3-8
slave schedule, adding 10-5 stretch to fit 8-24
software points, defined 8-51 strike duration 17-16
software restore 4-15 summary
Sounder 17-27 configuration 7-1, 7-9
DPU 7-13
space temperature 10-18 host 7-9
special days 10-14 link 7-10
adding 10-14 MR 7-12
broadcast 2-34 station 7-11
broadcast review 2-38 UC 7-12
deleting 10-16 controller 7-1
modifying 10-16 alarm acknowledge 7-5
starting I/NET 1-13 manual mode 7-4
momentary release 7-5
state 4-21 test mode 7-4
close 4-21 zoom 7-6
trip 4-21 disabled 7-8
state descriptions 4-21 door 7-13
state 0 selection, graphic page 8-55 DPU 7-13
state 1 selection, graphic page 8-55 host 7-9
station MR 7-12
adding 2-23 off normal 7-7
restore 4-12, 4-13 page 7-16
on a DPI 4-14 station 7-11
on a DPU 4-14 system page 7-16
save database 4-12, 4-13 UC 7-12
summary 2-16, 7-11 sunrise/sunset 4-5

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-15

TCON299–05/10
T

system driver 2-1 name 3-2

system pages target damping 14-9, 14-14
adding points 8-51 target event action 13-24
ASC markers 8-70
backup files 1-23 TC
controlling layout 1-23 see temperature control
DDC lines 8-64 telephone number 3-4
DDC modules 8-65, 8-71 temperature control 10-16
default page 2-4, 8-74 editor, graphics 8-62
discrete points 8-55 point extension 4-7
introduction 8-1 adding 10-16
modifying 8-4 copying 10-21
multiple site dial 8-68 deleting 10-22
point extensions 8-61 modifying 10-20
points 8-1
retrieving obstructed 1-24 tenant 17-50
summary 7-16 adding new 17-51
testing 8-67 copying parameters 17-53
using 8-73 deleting 17-54
viewing 8-67, 8-73 modifying parameters 17-53
see also graphics editor selection 9-7

System Sensor Selection 18-7 test mode 7-2, 7-4

System View 2-3 throttling range 14-13

configuring your network 2-6 time delay 14-20
interface description 1-31 time scheduling
editor, graphics 8-62
lighting zone definitions 15-9
point extension 4-7
T see also point time schedule
time zones 4-5, 4-6
Tamper, SCU 17-103
tool menu, graphics editor
Tap circle option 8-38
AD/AA 3-5 curve option 8-39
configuration editors 3-1 ellipse option 8-38
parameters 3-1 library symbol option 8-36
parameters updated 3-1 polygon option 8-38
download 4-15 text option 8-36
integrated dial 3-4
tools, user-defined 1-25

Index-16 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
 V–Z

total bytes available 4-8 unitary controller

TR activating 16-4
see trend sampling configuring 16-2
copy 16-3
transaction distribution 17-16 editor 8-62
translation table 17-47–17-49 editor, graphics 8-62
trend log 12-18 inputs and outputs 16-8, 16-12,
deleting 12-20 16-15, 16-19, 16-21
overrides 16-9, 16-12, 16-16
trend plot 12-6 parameters 16-5
multi point 12-7–12-17 AHU 16-10–16-13
trend sampling 12-1 FLT 16-20–16-21
adding 12-1 HPMP 16-14–16-17
copying 12-4 PID 16-18–16-20
deleting 12-5 VAV 16-6–16-10
editor 8-62 pointers 16-22
editor, graphics 8-61, 8-62 setpoints 16-7, 16-11, 16-15
modifying 12-4 summary 7-12
TS UC copy 16-3, 16-4
see point time schedule unitary controller interface
tuning 14-21 configuring 16-1
creating the database 16-3
turn around time 14-13 parent point 16-3
two-man rule 17-26 Use Object Pen 8-21
two-position module 8-63, 14-3 User, Limited-access 9-15
User-defined Door Features 17-22
user-defined PIN 17-71

U user-defined tools and buttons 1-25

UC
copy 16-3
pointers 16-22
summary 7-12
V–Z
see also unitary controller VAV parameters 16-6
UCI windows
see unitary controller interface controlling layout 1-23
unitary control parameters 16-5 retrieving 1-24

© 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Index-17

TCON299–05/10
V–Z

Windows user account 1-14, 9-3

wink cycles 15-4
wink source 15-4
zone definitions
circuit assignment 15-8
copying zones 15-10
time schedule 15-9
zoom 7-6

Index-18 © 2001–2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

TCON299–05/10
Schneider Electric
Buildings – Europe
Jägershillgatan 18
213 75 Malmö
Sweden
Phone: +46 40 38 68 50
Fax: +46 40 21 82 87

Schneider Electric
Buildings – Americas
1650 W. Crosby Rd.
Dallas, TX 75006 USA
Phone: +1 (972) 323 1111
Fax: +1 (972) 242 0026

Schneider Electric
Buildings – Asia-Pacific
Level 3/2A Lord Street
Botany NSW 2019
Australia
Phone: +61 (0) 2 8336 6100
Fax: +61 (0) 2 8336 6190

www.schneider-electric.com/buildings

You may obtain copies of this document by ordering

the following document number:.

TCON299 – 05/10